portrait photography Photography Articles

We Recommend

4 Simple Portrait Photography Tips for Beginners

Written by PT Editor on 28 December 2022.

4 Simple Portrait Photography Tips for Beginners

^{Photo by franckreporter via iStock}

Since the invention of the first camera over two hundred years ago, portrait photography has long been one of the most popular genres of photography. And while the majority of people enjoy taking photos of others, and it seems simple at first, it’s a lot harder than it looks.

When shot correctly, portraits freeze individual moments in time and tell their stories. Of course, portrait photography captures people, but there’s so much more to a great portrait than just a person. They transmit emotions, teleport us around the globe, and intimately connect us with the subject.

With that said, if you are a beginner photographer interested in portrait photography, you’ve come to the right place! In this article, we share a handful of simple yet effective tips that will increase the quality of your portraits. By implementing them into your photography routine today, you will see immediate results, and your friends and family will be blown away by your images.

So, what are we waiting for? Let’s dive in and discover four simple portrait photography tips for beginners guaranteed to improve your portraits overnight!

Check out the video above by Bach Photography to learn more portrait photography tips and how you can quickly and easily improve your portraits.

Portrait Photography Tips: Get to Know Your Subjects
Portrait Photography Tips: Use the Right Lens
Portrait Photography Tips: Be Creative
Portrait Photography Tips: Partner With a High-Quality Printing Company
Final Thoughts on Portrait Photography
Recommended Photography Gear

Portrait Photography Tips: Get to Know Your Subjects

Portrait Photography Tips Get to Know Your Subjects

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

One drastically underrated aspect of portrait photography is the relationship between the subject and the photographer. The better you know the person you are shooting, the more comfortable you both will be during a photo shoot, and the better the pictures will turn out. This is why it’s critical to take the time to get to know and connect with your models before working with them.

In some situations, such as street and travel photography, you rarely have time to get to know your subjects. And sometimes the two of you won’t even speak the same language. However, a smile and a quick hello go a long way in these cases. They will instantly lower your subject's guard, which will shine through in your photos.

Portrait Photography Tips: Use the Right Lens

Portrait Photography Tips Use the Right Lens

^{Photo by valentinrussanov via iStock}

Another top portrait photography tip for beginners is to make sure you are using the correct lenses. When selecting a portrait lens, the lens type (zoom vs prime), focal length, and maximum aperture are the primary things to consider. Price will also factor into your decision, so if you are on a budget, I recommend checking out the amazing selection of used lenses at MPB.

In other types of photography, zoom lenses are the most sought-after lenses, but most portrait photographers prefer working with prime lenses. This is because they often feature higher-quality glass and have large max apertures (low f-stop number). The best focal lengths for portrait photography are 85mm, 50mm, and 35mm.

Learn More:

Portrait Photography Tips: Be Creative

Portrait Photography Tips Be Creative

^{Photo by Diamond Dogs via iStock}

Due to the popularity of portrait photography, it can be challenging to make your photos stand out. That’s why our next portrait photography tip for beginners is to be creative and have fun with it! Different ways to be creative include playing with light, using props/outfits, and taking advantage of today's post-production tools.

There are tons of ways to get creative using light, whether you are using natural lighting, a lighting kit, or creative lens filters. One of my favorites is to create contrast using shadows. Next, props and clothing are a great way to add a fun and unique look to your images. Lastly, editing your portraits is a fantastic way to make your images pop!

Portrait Photography Tips: Partner With a High-Quality Printing Company

Portrait Photography Tips Partner With a High Quality Printing Company

Our final portrait photography tip is to ensure you always print your portraits from a high-quality, trustworthy source. There are endless places that claim to deliver excellent quality prints, but unfortunately, not all of them live up to their promise. And as a beginner photographer, the last thing you need is to have your portraits ruined by a shabby print job.

Our go-to printing company is CanvasPrints.com. They are a leader in the online printing industry and offer a wide range of products and services, including glass photo prints. Glass prints are a unique and beautiful way to show off and display the photos you worked so hard to create.

Their glass prints feature durable, high-quality ¼-inch glass, are weather-resistant, and include a free hanging kit. Also, their modern style looks perfect in homes and offices, and they make wonderful gifts for the upcoming holiday season. Furthermore, their combination of excellent quality, knowledgeable customer service staff, and low prices are totally unbeatable!

If you don’t want to use glass, other exquisite prints on their website include Canvas Prints, Metal Prints, Poster Prints, Triptych Prints, and more!

Final Thoughts on Portrait Photography

Thoughts on Portrait Photography

^{Photo by ViewApart via iStock}

As you can see, so much more goes into creating gorgeous portraits than just your camera and subject. Pre-production, production, and post-production all play huge roles in the process and affect your final results. So, remember what you learned above the next time you are taking photos of people.

If you want to learn more, here’s a list of a few more simple portrait photography tips for beginners, all of which you can peruse in our collection of portrait photography tutorials:

Learn the ins and outs of your camera!
Use different poses and backgrounds!
Scout locations in advance!
Invest in lighting equipment!
Practice, practice, practice!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

4 Simple Tips for Better Studio Portrait Photography

Written by PT Editor on 19 July 2023.

4 Simple Tips for Better Studio Portrait Photography

^{Photo by Carlos David via iStock}

I enjoy studio portrait photography quite a bit because of the control it gives me over almost everything in professional portrait photography. I will pass on a few studio portrait photography tips to help you have better results.

Read on!

Why I Like Studio Portrait Photography

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

Landscape photography was, is, and always will be my primary joy in photography, but professional portrait photography is right up there in enjoyment level. There’s on-location portrait photography, environmental portrait photography, and studio portrait photography.

Any of these genres of portraiture can involve multiple people or just one person. Studio portrait photography can encompass headshots, ¾ or full-length, couples, families, and glamor photography.

One of the aspects of studio portrait photography I enjoy is that I have most of the process under my control. I can have a lighting configuration, backdrop, and props set up and ready to go before the subject shows up.

I can even have many of the adjustments preset, simplifying the workflow. About all that’s left is wardrobe, makeup, and posing. Those things, too, can be simplified in a studio setting.

#1 Tip: Keep It Comfortable!

Keep It Comfortable

^{Photo by cynoclub via iStock}

My personal number one tip for studio portrait photography is to keep the subject comfortable. This involves the ambient temperature, hot or cold, and having someplace for the subjects to sit while waiting.

Some photographers like to have their music volume pumped way up, which is fine for their style of professional portrait photography. I prefer to have music at a lower level, if on at all. This lets me direct the subject, and they usually feel at ease with responding themselves.

Studio Portrait Photography Lighting

^{Photo by wavebreakmedia via iStock}

Also related to comfort, while I still have studio strobes, I gravitate to the cool operating LED panel lights more often. For children and pets, strobes can be startling, and using LED lights keeps the temperature from getting uncomfortable.

Being able to leave everything up in my own studio allows me to quickly change up portrait lighting configurations from one to another, such as from Rembrandt lighting to High Key lighting or soft romantic lighting.

Have a look at this informative YouTube video about studio lighting for portraits by Jiggie Alejandrino:

The same ideas relate to small product photography and videography, such as vlogs or training videos. There are many portrait lighting tips already published on PhotographyTalk that can give you detailed ideas.

Studio Portrait Photography Posing

^{Photo by Diamond Dogs via iStock}

After lighting, focus, and exposure, posing is the next important part of studio portrait photography. I have two rules about posing. Keep the subject comfortable about the process and use a posing guide.

Allowing the portrait subject to have a say in their own posing can result in very natural and relaxed portrait images. The posing guide helps me as a photographer because I can’t always remember everything. A posing guide does some of the heavy lifting for me and the subject.

Selling Professional Portrait Photography Products

The result of the above studio portrait photography tips is some images the client likes and will order prints.

Besides the wallet-sized photos to hand out and enlargements on canvas, acrylic, metal, or fine art paper to hang up as wall art, I found that many studio portrait photography clients like a hardcoveror softcover photo book.

Photo Book Press makes excellent photo books that can be ordered as a stand-alone product or as part of a photography package. I like having reasonably priced photo books for my portrait clients.

The professional online printing company Photo Book Press makes very high-quality photo books and makes acrylic photo prints, photo calendars, and all manner of greeting cards. Check them out for fulfilling orders from your next studio portrait photography sitting.

Try these studio portrait photography tips to improve your portraits and add extra profit to your sittings. I’m sure your professional portrait photography workflow will also improve, making it easier for everyone to be pleased with the process and the images.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

4 Simple Tips for Mastering Children’s Portrait Photography

Written by PT Editor on 25 May 2023.

4 Simple Tips for Mastering Childrens Portrait Photography

^{Photo by Raul Rodriguez via iStock}

Children’s portrait photography requires some special considerations beyond what we already know about portraiture.

For any style of portrait photography, corporate headshots, glamour portraits, family portraits, engagement photos, and other styles, we pull out of our bag of tricks for posing ideas, exposure guides, flash and lighting setups, and selective focus.

All of those portrait tips will be used in children’s portrait photography, plus we add a few extra tips, tricks, and ideas. Let’s get going!

Children’s Portrait Photography Tip #1 - Get Down On Their Level

Childrens Portrait Photography Tip 1 Get Down On Their Level

^{Photo by ti-ja via iStock}

The first for great children’s portrait photography might as well be stated as a rule. An open-ended rule, sure, but still. Whether the child is an infant or getting up to and beyond the tween years, we want to avoid that ‘adult looking down’ vantage point for our camera.

Getting on their level provides a naturalness and comfort for the subject and photographer alike. This results in images that are pleasurable to show and view. Shooting down generally gives children’s portrait photography little more than a snapshot feel, even if we use masterful lighting, posing, and composition techniques.

Childrens Portrait Photography Tip 1 Get Down On Their Level 2

^{Photo by eclipse_images via iStock}

Getting down on their level is also good for the kids. When mom or dad takes their kid to a photographer, and that tall stranger barks orders to them with their face partially hidden by the camera, that can be intimidating.

We know that the photographer in this situation is a nice person and is not barking orders, but it can seem that way to the small subject, ending up with the same boring, stiff portraits we’ve seen over and over.

Infant or newborn photography is a special subset of children’s portrait photography with even more techniques for successful portraiture. Posing tables accomplish the goal of getting down to their level by bringing the subject up to ours. We’ve had some articles covering this specialty niche of children’s photography. You might want to read them if newborn photography is your primary focus.

Children’s Portrait Photography Tip #2 - Forget the Posing Guide

Childrens Portrait Photography Tip 2 Forget the Posing Guide

Children's portrait photography tip number two goes hand in hand with getting down on their level. For most children’s portrait photography, naturalness is one of the foremost goals. Forgetting the posing guide doesn’t mean totally throwing out any posing ideas, just not making the mistake of attempting to place a square peg into a round hole.

Here’s how to avoid that trap: move with the flow. You can tell the child things like “Hey, let's stand over here” or “Look over here” to guide the natural flow of the session. If you’re taking the images outside, you may need to stay on top of unexpected quick movements, but even that can work out in your favor for capturing natural pics.

You can control the workflow in children’s portrait photography. It simply requires a little extra alertness from the photographer.

Your lens choice plays into this as well. Some pros suggest using a normal focal length or short telephoto prime lens while others extoll the virtues of a high quality, fast aperture normal range zoom lens. Whatever your gear choices, staying mobile, zooming with your feet, and being aware of what’s happening all around us will all contribute to better children’s portrait photography.

Learn More:

Children’s Portrait Photography Tip #3 - Use Continuous Lights

Childrens Portrait Photography Tip 3 Use Continuous Lights

^{Photo by weekend images via iStock}

Going back to that troublesome tall stranger barking orders, using hot photo floods or brightly flashing strobes can also contribute to the children’s portrait photography images being less than what we really wanted to accomplish.

Two better solutions for children's portrait photography are natural lighting and LED continuous photography and video lights. Natural lighting, like sunlight or window light, is a continuous light source that can be adjusted or controlled with our exposure controls and by using reflectors.

LED lights, such as those designed for videography, are fantastic light sources for children’s portrait photography. Not only are they comfortable for everyone since they do not heat up like incandescent photo floods, but they also are very versatile with their adjustable power level and color temperature controls.

Using continuous lighting - natural or LED - eliminates the issue of smaller kids getting nervous over a flash unit's bright pops of light. It also helps us concentrate on capturing those sometimes fleeting perfect expressions during a children’s portrait photography session.

Children’s Portrait Photography Tip #4 - Make Really Good Prints

4SimpleTipsforMasteringChildrensPortraitPhotography 1

We could easily string out a much longer list of tips, ideas, and suggestions for mastering children’s portrait photography. Still, we’ll finish this short grouping with a final tip relating to the desired final result of our photography, great images.

Great image files deserve to be made into the highest quality physical prints. Saal Digital is the best source for ultra-high-quality photo prints, photo wall art, and outstanding photo books. Everything we’ve ordered from Saal Digital has been amazing, simply blowing us away with their perfection.

In this video from the Saal Digital YouTube Channel, follow along with the artist as they create a children’s portrait photography book with special cover art:

Virtually anything offered by Saal Digital can enhance your children’s portrait photography. Taking their amazing paper prints as an example, Saal Digital uses only the highest quality materials, printing them with state-of-the-art printers and inks run by superbly trained artisan technicians who love photography.

4SimpleTipsforMasteringChildrensPortraitPhotography 2

If you want to print your children’s portrait photography on a high gloss photographic paper, choose Fujifilm Crystal Archive DPII Digital Professional Paper. This silver halide paper offers excellent color reproduction, deep, rich blacks, and pure, bright whites.

Many prints for children’s portrait photography would benefit from Fujifilm Silk Paper. This paper gives natural skin tones and soft details with its honeycomb surface structure. A popular paper and process for wedding photography, portraits of all types look great on this paper.

Hahnemühle FineArt Baryta is a heavy paper made from 100% α-Cellulose. Its glossy finish and extremely high color density make this an ideal paper for printing black and white images, including B&W children’s portrait photography.

For a softer effect, the 100% cotton of Hahnemühle FineArt PhotoRag® paper has a subtle matte finish and holds colors, blacks, and whites with exceptional detail and vibrancy. It's well-suited to printing out images of our children’s portrait photography.

Viewing the image files you capture as high-quality physical prints is an enjoyable final result of all the fine work that goes into mastering children’s portrait photography.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

4 Simple Ways to Create Emotion in Photos

Written by PT Editor on 03 December 2021.

4 Simple Ways to Create Emotion in Photos

^{photo byelectravk via iStock}

Creating emotion in photos, how to evoke emotion in a portrait, is a skill that can serve us well when photographing portraits for fun or profit. How does one actually do that?

There are many methods of how to create emotion in photos, we’re going to discuss portrait photography techniques. We’ll show you four methods that are simple and effective ways to capture emotional portraits.

Low-Key and High-Key

emotion in photos

^{photo by}^{AleksandarNakic via iStock}

Some of the most effective ways to create emotion in photos of people is to adjust for either a high or a low-key effect. While this is partly a lighting effect, it is also an effect of exposure values and lighting ratios.

Lighting ratios help us control and capture contrast. Think of a high-key photo and we might automatically assume bright lighting. While the light plays a huge part, it’s actually the low contrast that really makes the difference.

Conversely with low-key portraits. We may initially assume low-key means dark, but it’s more about the high contrast that gives a low-key portrait emotional content. A low-key portrait may have brighter parts in the image, highlights, but they are in stark contrast to the darker areas, the shadows.

A low-key portrait can convey several emotions, depending on other elements of our crafting of the image. It can show melancholy, sadness, strife, but it can also convey power, strength, or intensity.

A high-key portrait might portray emotions such as wistfulness, peace, or happiness. A high-key portrait can also have an air of romance to it. Interestingly, romance can also be suggested by low-key portraits.

Posing

how to create emotion in photos

^{photo byFG Trade via iStock}

Whether using high-key, low-key, or some other lighting and exposure techniques, the emotion in photos can be changed, altered, or adjusted by the posing of the portrait subject.

Leaning into a pose has a different feel than leaning back, looking off the one side or the other can add or subtract emotional content. Having the subject make direct eye contact can show different emotions, sometimes the difference will be in the lighting, such as highlighting the eyes or giving a catchlight.

A lot can go into a pose. It’s more than just the head position or facial expression, it also involves the position of the arms, shoulders, hips. A simple difference such as facing towards or away from the camera can radically alter the captured emotion in photos of people.

Learn More:

Get Close

emotional portraits

^{photo byMangoStar_Studio via iStock}

A great method for emphasizing the emotion in photos that you created with the previous tips is to zero in on the person, perhaps even filling the frame with just their face or their head and shoulders.

Interest can be created or heightened this way, it also works for adding tension or power. The emotions can be positive, negative, or ambivalent.

Depending on your lens choice, you can also use forced perspective to add in some apparent distortion which can alter the perceived state of the emotions.

Environmental Portraiture

how to evoke emotion in a portrait

^{photo byRepicturingHomeless via iStock}

Going the other way, including the surroundings can change the feelings involved. Environmental portraits can be emotional portraits in that they involve the person in relation to their surroundings.

Being intensely involved in their work or a hobby may be highlighted by choosing an environmental portrait setting. Caring for pets, their family, or even the environment can be shown as well.

Portrait Photography Gear

portrait photography gear

^{photo bypixelfusion3d via iStock}

Some of these methods of how to evoke emotion in a portrait can be enhanced or made easier by making good use of the portrait photography gear we already have in our equipment bags.

Portable lighting gear, such as battery powered LED lights can be used as the eye light in the low-key tip mentioned earlier. Some of these lights allow for changing colors which can control the perceptions of the emotions.

For shooting environmental portraits, these lights can be placed strategically by using our small OctoPad tripod and light stand alternatives. These low profile mounts can be used to put a small light exactly where we need it for emotional portraits. An OctoPad is so low profile, it can actually be within the scene, positioning the portable light exactly where we want.

Lens filters of various types can be used to add or enhance emotion in photos. We can use ND and GND filters in our setting up for high-key and low-key effects, color filters can radically change the emotion in photos.

Other filters such as soft focus filters or certain special effects are an excellent

Idea for how to create emotion in photos. Combine filters with well-placed lights, exposure techniques, lens choice, and subject posing for a full range of possibilities as emotional portraits.

Learn More:

We Recommend

4 Tips for Gorgeous Holiday Family Photos

Written by PT Editor on 18 November 2021.

4 Tips for Gorgeous Holiday Family Photos

^{photo bykate_sept2004 via iStock}

We’re getting so close to the holiday season!

Taking holiday family photos is an enjoyable part of this time for many photographers, but I know I always wonder how to take better family photos. Plus, seeing some other photographers’ Christmas photo shoot ideas is always welcome.

So, to get our creative juices flowing, let’s go over a few simple tips for taking gorgeous holiday family photos.

DIY Family Photos

holiday family photos

^{photo bykate_sept2004 via iStock}

For holiday family photos to use as greeting cards, show on social media, display in our home or office, or include in a family year-end newsletter (do people still do that?), we always have the option of having someone do them for us. A lot of fine portrait photographers offer these services this time of year.

But we can easily do our own holiday family photos, you might say DIY family photos, which obviously saves us money and we can have extra flexibility in when and where to take them. All we need are a few family photo tips to capture excellent holiday family photos.

Choose a Theme

family photo tips

^{photo bySabrina Bracher via iStock}

One very helpful tip for holiday family photos that look fun, relaxed, charming, and warm is to choose a theme for the photo shoot. DIY family photos don’t need to be scripted out and storyboarded - just keep it simple. But a theme helps us keep on track for capturing great holiday family photos.

A theme may be as simple as “Hey, let’s all wear Christmas sweaters!” or “Hey, let’s go to a pumpkin patch!” Being loose about it instead of rigidly adhering to an idea will generally tend to work out better for everyone involved.

Make It Fun

how to take better family photos

^{photo byNattakorn Maneerat via iStock}

Which brings us to the next of our holiday family photo tips: make it fun, keep it fun. This is especially important for any young ones involved, but I can say as an adult working photographer, it’s helpful to keep me in the mood, too.

We’re good enough photographers and have sophisticated equipment that is capable of virtually anything we want to do, so relax, go with the flow, and stay ready to capture the candid pics that often say who we are better than our carefully crafted family portrait.

As the photographer of many of my own holiday family photos, I find myself having more fun in creating these photos than when I try to stick to any preconceived notions I had. I still have a plan of what to do, but allow tons of flexibility, so no one feels controlled on what should be representing a joyous occasion, holiday with loved ones.

Learn More:

Remote Control and Drones

christmas photo shoot ideas

^{photo byWavebreakmedia via iStock}

Two wonderful Christmas photo shoot ideas I learned are to make use of my camera’s awesome capabilities for remote triggering and also to try out a drone for some shots.

I’ll be honest here and let you all know that I tend to heavily rely on my camera’s extremely accurate automation for a lot of the images. With evaluative metering, swift and accurate AF, and exposure modes for many situations, I find I get many excellent images to choose from while triggering the shutter remotely.

A drone with some form of “Follow Me” technology can add an extra layer of interest to our holiday family photos. Remember, as we learned when using drones for filming B-Roll in our videos, a drone doesn’t have to be overhead.

Running through a field with our spouse and kids and the drone following us is another way to keep the photo shoot fun, too.

Create Heirloom Prints

diy family photos

Many of these images we create will end up going out in snail mail greeting cards and digitally shared on social media, but holiday family portraits give us an opportunity to to turn our holiday family photos into an heirloom by printing high-quality enlargements that we can display in our home or office.

Or give them as gifts! Especially as grandparents seem to love receiving a special family picture they can display on their wall of fame. A beautiful specialty print such as a canvas wrap works wonderfully for creating a treasured heirloom from our holiday family photos.

canvashq

CanvasHQ is an online company that offers easy uploading, many size and display options, and quite reasonable pricing for their beautiful canvas wraps. Ordering online is as simple as uploading our full-resolution JPEG file and making a few mouse clicks or finger swipes. We can even have them send the wrap directly to our gift recipient.

Holiday family photos are fun to make, fun to share, and make great gifts to those that love our family. Enjoy your family photo day!

Learn More:

We Recommend

5 Portrait Photography Hacks

Written by PT Editor on 10 August 2021.

5 Portrait Photography Hacks

^{photo byFG Trade via iStock}

If you’re trying to learn how to take better portraits, then you’re going to be disappointed to learn that there really is no one-size-fits-all solution to this art. So long as you know the portrait photography basics, then a lot of portrait photography tips aren’t actually going to be very useful for you. You just need to get out and experiment for yourself.

However, there are a few portrait photography hacks that were shared with me when I was a beginner that are always in my head every time I am shooting a portrait.

Some of these portrait photography hacks are discussed in Miguel Quiles’ video above - the video is filled with basic portrait photography techniques.

Though none of these portrait photography hacks are going to be a cure all for whatever problem you’re facing with your portrait skills, they will help you to focus on your technique again.

Fill the Frame

portrait photography hacks

photo byAlexeyVladimir via iStock

I’ve actually discussed a lot of these portrait photography hacks in some other articles I’ve written before with beginner photography tips. This is one of them.

I’ve noticed a lot of beginner photographers tend to give their subjects way too much headroom. So, instead of their photos ending up looking like a really gorgeous painting of what this person is like, they end up looking like something out of a public television documentary.

In essence, the photo becomes a lot less about what this person looks like and what their personality may be, and it becomes a lot more about their surroundings. So, if the sky above their head isn’t particularly interesting, the photo isn’t going to be either.

In order to avoid this problem, get rid of any notion of head room that you’ve ever been taught. You can and should fill your entire frame with a person’s face.

portrait photography tips

^{photo byRichLegg via iStock}

Take the photo above as an example. The background that this healthcare worker is against is incredibly boring.

It looks like he may still be working a shift in a hospital and the photographer threw him up against a hospital wall in order to take the image. If the photographer had given this subject any more headroom than he has, the image would be incredibly boring because the subject is the only thing of interest in it.

Use Catch Lights

beginner photography tips

^{photo byIgor Alecsander via iStock}

Good portrait photography hacks help you to add interest to your subject’s face, since you can’t actually change the way your subject looks or it won’t be an accurate representation of them and who they are.

One way to make a subject far more interesting is to use catch lights. If you can get their eyes to shine a little brighter just by the way you adjust the lighting in your studio, or by moving the person if you’re shooting outside, why wouldn’t you?

It’s far easier to use catch lights if you’re working in a studio. If you are, you can just move your lights until you’re satisfied. However, even if you’re working outside, you can still use catch lights.

One way to do so is to bring a reflector with you. Of course, if you use the reflector route, then you’ll either need an assistant to hold the reflector for you, or you’ll need a remote shutter so that you can frame your subject, then run over and adjust the reflector.

Another way is to simply use the sunlight. You’ll just need to adjust the location of your subject (and it can sometimes be uncomfortable, depending upon the time of day).

Learn More:

Watch Out for the Whites of the Eye

how to take better portraits

^{photo byRawpixel via iStock}

Another one of my favorite portrait photography hacks is to watch out for the whites of your subject’s eyes.

In case you haven’t noticed, the whites of a person’s eyes are pretty boring, at least in comparison to their irises. But, a lot of subjects are too camera shy to look directly at the camera, which means that a lot of portraits end up with far too much whites of the eyes.

In order to combat this issue, you can simply direct your subject to look in the direction that their nose is pointing. This way, their irises will be positioned directly in the center of their face.

Another way to combat this issue is to simply make your subject look at the camera. Of course, if your subject is camera shy, then you probably shouldn’t bust out this instruction until you’ve built some rapport with them.

It’s All About Lighting

portrait photography basics

^{photo byDisobeyArt via iStock}

Your portraits aren’t going to be interesting to look at if your subject is strongly backlit so that you can’t actually see the expressions on their faces (unless a silhouette is what you’re going for). It also won’t be interesting to look at if the lighting is dull.

You should shoot portraits during golden hour as often as you can. This will give your portraits a soft glow that lends a beautiful quality to the image. Trust me. I’ve tried the trick myself.

If you are in a studio, make sure you invest in some quality lighting gear.

You don’t need to spend thousands of dollars here (though you certainly can). Instead, focus on purchasing lighting equipment that offers good, clean light and gives you the flexibility to make adjustments to the color temperature and brightness.

Encourage Expressions

portrait photography techniques

^{photo bylen4foto via iStock}

One thing that children are absolutely excellent at is expressing their emotions loudly, whether in public or private. It’s why children are such a pleasure to work with for many photographers. You don’t have to illicit anything from them because they are more than happy to be themselves in every scenario.

However, if you’re working with adults, you may need to get a little more creative. A blank face isn’t very much fun to look at and your clients aren’t going to like their portraits if this is what they’re giving you.

So, you may need to figure out ways to get your clients comfortable enough to laugh or genuinely smile. One hack I’ve seen a lot of photographers using lately is to have one individual in a couple loudly sniff their partner’s neck. It always gets a smile. You may need to come up with your own ways to solicit expressions from your clients.

Learn More:

We Recommend

5 Tips for Beautiful Holiday Photos

Written by PT Editor on 03 November 2023.

5 Tips for Beautiful Holiday Photos

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

The holiday season is a magical time, where festive decorations, twinkling lights, and the warmth of togetherness create perfect backdrops for taking pictures. However, we understand that capturing beautiful images can be challenging. Lucky for you, that’s exactly why we wrote this article. To help you shoot high-quality holiday photos you will cherish forever!

From getting into the holiday mood and shooting at night to taking different types of images, these five tips for holiday photos will instantly improve your results. Moreover, they are designed for all types of photographers (beginner vs professional) and devices (cameras vs smartphones), so regardless of your experience level and gear, there’s lots to take away.

We’ll also recommend our favorite way to share holiday photos with family and friends. With that said, continue reading if you are eager to transform this year's most beloved holiday moments into lifelong memories with the help of photography!

Check out the video above by Mango Street to learn 11 creative photography ideas for the upcoming holiday season.

Holiday Photos Tip #1: Embrace the Holiday Spirit
Holiday Photos Tip #2: Take Photos at Night
Holiday Photos Tip #3: Capture the Tiny Details
Holiday Photos Tip #4: Shoot Natural and Staged Photos
Holiday Photos Tip #5: Showcase Your Holiday Photos in a Beautiful Christmas Card
Final Thoughts on Holiday Photos
Recommended Photography Gear

Holiday Photos Tip #1: Embrace the Holiday Spirit

Holiday Photos Tip 1 Embrace the Holiday Spirit

^{Photo by AleksandarNakic via iStock}

Whether you celebrate Christmas, Hanukkah, Kwanzaa, or something else, December brings holidays for everyone. And there’s no better way to get in the mood and create a positive atmosphere for photos than by embracing the holiday spirit. That goes for everyone, regardless if you plan to spend the holidays with family, friends, or alone.

Ways to do this include putting up decorations/lights, listening to Christmas music, watching popular holiday movies, and shopping for presents. Doing these things creates stunning settings for holiday photos and brings joy to everyone (which will show up in your photos in terms of smiles and laughter).

Holiday Photos Tip #2: Take Photos at Night

Holiday Photos Tip 2 Take Photos at Night

^{Photo by dszc via iStock}

Piggybacking off the idea of lights and decorations, taking pictures when it’s dark out is an easy way to capture beautiful holiday photos. During the holidays, nighttime is when cities come alive with Christmas markets, the lights on your tree shine brightest, and fireplaces set an enchanting mood. Use those things to your advantage to improve the quality of your images.

When shooting at night, it’s important to have a few things in mind. First, cameras with larger sensors and built-in image stabilization will yield better results. Next, you have to take the direction of the artificial light into account to avoid shadows that can ruin an image. Also, if you use a smartphone to take photos, check and see if yours has a dedicated “night mode.”

Learn More:

Holiday Photos Tip #3: Capture the Tiny Details

Holiday Photos Tip 3 Capture the Tiny Details

^{Photo by Liudmila Chernetska via iStock}

While everyone typically focuses on people (and rightfully so) when shooting holiday photos, don’t overlook the small things that make the holidays special. Capturing these scenes is crucial to painting the whole picture of your holidays and making wonderful additions to holiday photo albums.

These small details will vary from person to person, so it’s up to you to decide what is important for you and your family. If you need inspiration, some of the most popular images include food, stockings, presents, Christmas trees, etc.

Holiday Photos Tip #4: Shoot Natural and Staged Photos

Holiday Photos Tip 4 Shoot Natural and Staged Photos

^{Photo by Drazen Zigic via iStock}

Another tip for holiday photos is to take both candid and staged photos. We prefer candid photos because they capture moments in their truest form and usually invoke the strongest emotions in us when looking back on them later. Since you never know when the perfect photo opportunity will pop up, always having a camera on you during the holidays is key.

On the other hand, having a few staged photos is a good idea. They are especially useful for family holiday photos to ensure everyone is in the picture. Make sure to include yourself in some photos, too. The best way to do this is by using a tripod, but if you don’t have one, at least take some selfies!

Holiday Photos Tip #5: Showcase Your Holiday Photos in a Beautiful Christmas Card

Holiday Photos Tip 5 Showcase Your Holiday Photos in a Beautiful Christmas Card

^{Photo by EKIN KIZILKAYA via iStock}

Finally, once you have your new and improved holiday photos, don’t forget to share them with others. While the most common way to share photos nowadays is digitally (social media, text, email, etc.), we prefer sending custom Christmas cards. They are more personal, and let’s be honest, everyone loves receiving Christmas cards.

One fantastic resource for customizing cards is Photo Book Press. They are a trustworthy and reliable online print shop that has made customers happy with their high-quality products for nearly forty years. On top of that, their low prices are unbeatable. Want to display your photos differently? They also have photobooks, wall art, calendars, and more!

Final Thoughts on Holiday Photos

^{Photo by helenaak via iStock}

Ok, what are you waiting for? Now that you’ve learned how to take better holiday photos, it’s time to put those tips and techniques into practice so you can be ready for the upcoming holiday season! And as a thank you for reading our entire article, here are a few bonus tips for beautiful holiday photography:

Learn the basics of lighting and the exposure triangle (shutter speed, aperture, ISO)
Sign up for a holiday photo challenge
Shoot RAW images (if you can) and edit them
Capture video along with photos
Have fun and enjoy this precious time of year with your loved ones!

Recommended Photography Gear

Disclaimer: Our articles might have affiliate links and the occasional sponsored content, but don't sweat it – if you buy something, we get a little kickback at no extra cost to you, and we only hype products we truly believe in!

Learn More:

We Recommend

5 Tips to Instantly Take Better Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 13 October 2021.

5 Tips to Instantly Take Better Portraits

^{photo byRyanJLane via iStock}

If you’re learning how to take better portraits, then you’re probably looking for some portrait photography hacks. Unfortunately, figuring out how to take better portraits is harder than it looks because the way your portraits turn out completely relies on where you’re shooting, who you’re shooting with, and how you’re shooting.

What I’m saying is that there are a lot of variables.

Miguel Quiles, one of the YouTube photographers that I really enjoy, has a great video filled with portrait photography tips to help you get started.

I obviously recommend that you watch the entire video, but if you don’t have time to, I’ll give you a short breakdown of all of his recommendations. If you implement some of these tips, you will take better portraits almost immediately.

Fill the Whole Frame

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo byDaniloAndjus via iStock}

I see a lot of photographers take documentary-style images where they leave a ton of headroom above their model’s face in their photos.

This does a few things, which can be negative when not taking a documentary portrait.

First, it makes the model look small. You obviously don’t want your model to look small, you want them to look bigger than life and powerful. Second, it indicates to the viewer that you, as the photographer, don’t really know where you want them to look. You are essentially taking your subject and obscuring it.

If you want to take better portraits, you should use your entire frame. Make sure that your subject is the only thing your viewer sees when they first look at your image.

Use Catch Lights

take better portraits

^{photo byRapidEye via iStock}

Another way to take better portraits is to use catch lights as often as possible.

Catch lights are when you use a light source to create a highlight in your model’s eye. This light source could be natural, like the sun, or it could be artificial, like from a studio light or a portable reflector.

Catch lights help to keep your viewer’s attention for just a little bit longer. With catch lights and a filled frame, your model will look powerful and interesting.

I love this tip especially because of how easy it is. If you forgot to bring a light source or a reflector, then you can simply move your model around until you find a light source to use. Plus, whenever you get to your location, it only takes a minute to check your model’s eyes to see if you have a catch light that will hold your viewer’s attention.

Learn More:

Pay Attention to the Model’s Eyes

how to take better portraits

^{photo byskynesher via iStock}

I know that I just talked about this with catch lights, but your model’s eyes are so important that I need to talk a little bit more about them quickly.

You not only need to ensure that your model’s eyes have some catch lights in them, but you also need to ensure that you aren’t seeing too much of the whites of their eyes.

If you are shooting with someone who is uncomfortable in front of the camera, then they may naturally want to look away from it. Since their eyes are the most interesting part of their face, this will mean their images will turn out disappointing.

In order to get around this problem to take better portraits, you can either have your model look directly at the camera, or you can have them keep their eyes straight above their nose.

Don’t Forget About Lighting

portrait photography hacks

^{photo byAnton Abramov via iStock}

One thing that I love about portrait photography is that you can cheat. If you genuinely don’t know what you’re doing in terms of lighting, then it’s always a safe bet to take your model out during golden hour in the morning or in the evening. This is because you’ll always have warm, beautiful lighting during this period.

Otherwise, you can learn a little bit more about lighting and start playing around with bringing your own light sources.

Find Emotions

portrait photography tips

^{photo byMStudioImages via iStock}

While you definitely need to be thinking about all of the technical aspects of your photo when you are taking portraits, you also need to be in the moment with your model. This is because when you get too caught up with your camera and your composition, you could be getting technically good images with ugly facial expressions.

You need to find the emotions in your model. It’s why you’ll hear about couples photographers who suggest that one individual whisper their dinner order in the other individual’s ear in their sexiest voice. It gets everyone laughing and ensures that they can calm down enough to genuinely be themselves.

You can also help your models to be more comfortable by reassuring them that you’re a professional and it’s your entire job to get a shot that they’re going to love.

Learn More:

We Recommend

8 Amazing Mirror Selfie Tips

Written by PT Editor on 22 February 2022.

8 Amazing Mirror Selfie Tips

^{photo bystandret via iStock}

Love them or hate them, selfies have become one of the most popular types of photography in the world. Mirror selfies, in particular, are seeing rapid growth in popularity and are all over social media these days.

If you want to find out how to take better pictures in mirrors, you have come to the right place. In this article, I’ll give you eight important tips that will not only quickly and easily improve your mirror selfies but also help you grow your social media accounts!

Lighting is Key
Buy a Full-Length Mirror
Make Sure Your Mirror is Sparkling Clean
Keep Your Background Neat and Tidy
Don’t Be Afraid to Use the Flash
Take Tons of Selfies
Have Fun and Be Creative
Never Over Edit Your Mirror Selfies
A Few Bonus Mirror Selfie Tips

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Lighting is Key

pictures in mirrors

^{photo byAleksandarNakic via iStock}

If I could only give you one tip, it would be to make sure you always have proper lighting. Just like any form of photography, when taking pictures in mirrors, you will only achieve the best results if you have the correct lighting.

Natural light is very flattering and will help make your selfies look more candid, so if you are shooting inside, try and set up your mirror next to a natural light source like a window. I know that’s not always possible, though, so it’s also a wonderful idea to invest in a high-quality lighting kit.

Another piece of gear that can increase the quality of your light is reflectors. I would recommend getting a 5-in-1 reflector kit that comes with white, black, translucent, gold, and silver reflectors. These kits are inexpensive and will without a doubt take your selfie game to the next level.

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Buy a Full-Length Mirror

mirror selfie tips

^{photo byg-stockstudio via iStock}

You can take pictures in mirrors of all shapes and sizes, but for the most aesthetic mirror selfies, you are going to want to get your hands on a top-notch full-length mirror.

They give you the most room to play with, let you show off your whole outfit, are pleasing to look at, and have the added bonus of making your room feel bigger than it really is. Here are a few fantastic full-length mirrors to check out:

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Make Sure Your Mirror is Sparkling Clean

pictures in mirrors

^{photo byMorsa Images via iStock}

Nothing is worse than taking a bunch of pictures in mirrors only to realize later on there’s a big spot right in front of your face! One of the most common mirror selfie mistakes, and one of the easiest to fix, is making sure your mirror is clean.

It’s as simple as having a nice mirror cleaning solution, a small microfiber towel, and giving your mirror a rub down every once in a while. I prefer using an all-natural cleaning spray like Better Life Natural Streak Free Glass Cleaner, or you can make your own by combining one cup of water, one cup of all-purpose white vinegar, and a teaspoon of dish soap in a spray bottle.

Learn More:

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Keep Your Background Neat and Tidy

mirror selfie

^{photo byAntonio_Diaz via iStock}

Another simple way to improve your mirror selfie game is to have an organized and tidy background. All a cluttered background does is draw the attention away from you and onto the mess. Also, let’s be honest, you don’t want everyone on social media thinking you are a slob, now do you?

Alternatively, you can go a step further and use backdrops or props when taking selfies. Sheets work great if you are on a budget, or you can find tons of cool and unique photography backdrops on Amazon. As for props, things like plants, musical instruments, string lights, balloons, and food all add an extra flair to pictures in mirrors.

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Don’t Be Afraid to Use the Flash

mirror selfies

^{photo byLightFieldStudios via iStock}

Whether you are shooting pictures in mirrors with your phone or with a camera, shadows are one of your biggest enemies. If you are at home and you have a lighting kit, it’s easy to eliminate shadows, but what do you do if you are out on the town?

The answer is to use your flash. Many people only use their flash when it’s too dark to see properly, but if you know how to use them effectively, they can also be a great tool for eliminating shadows. So, next time you find yourself wanting to take a mirror selfie somewhere with shadows, go ahead and give your flash a try.

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Take Tons of Selfies

mirror selfie tips

^{photo bymapodile via iStock}

Firing away one shot and expecting the perfect image is simply not how photography works. The same way studio photographers and landscape photographers often take hundreds of photos of the same scene, you should learn to do the same.

I’m by no means telling you to spend the whole day in front of your mirror, but by at least taking a few different photos, you can significantly increase the chances of shooting a winner. On top of that, the more photos you take, the more you will discover what works for you and what doesn’t.

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Have Fun and Be Creative

aesthetic mirror selfie

^{photo byYakobchukOlena via iStock}

This is an important one: whenever taking pictures in mirrors, you want to make sure you are having fun with it and not turning it into a chore or letting it stress you out. The more creative you are and the more fun you have, the happier you will be, and the better your photos will come out. Furthermore, people love silly and unique photos!

One way to do this is by experimenting with different poses, hairstyles, makeup, and filters. Also, don’t limit yourself to just mirrors. You can take selfies in windows, glass surfaces, shiny cars, bodies of water, ice, and even sunglasses! Lastly, another fun idea is to take photos with friends, families, or pets.

How to Take Better Pictures in Mirrors: Never Over Edit Your Mirror Selfies

How to take a Mirror Selfie

^{photo byjaniecbros via iStock}

Photo editing has become an integral part of the everyday photographer's process these days thanks to the rise in popularity of programs like Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Lightroom, but one thing you will definitely want to avoid is over editing your photos.

Sure, cropping your photos or lightening or darkening them a little isn’t going to hurt, but if you do too much, your photos may end up looking unnatural. Adding too much clarity or HDR effects is a big no-no when editing.

A Few Bonus Mirror Selfie Tips

best pictures in mirror

^{photo bywckiw via iStock}

I hope you have found these top tips helpful and that you put them to use the next time you plan on taking pictures in mirrors. If you have made it this far, good for you! Here are some bonus tips to up your selfie skills:

Put the phone/camera in different places and try looking at different places as well

Be confident! It shows in photos
Try lots of different angles
Clean your camera
Use a tripod

With that, you have some great tips for taking mirror selfies. Now all that’s left to do is to go get some great pictures in mirrors!

Learn More:

We Recommend

A Beginner's Guide to Studio Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 20 March 2020.

A Beginners Guide to Studio Portraits

^{Photo by Jimmy Fermin on Unsplash}

At some point in our photographic careers, we toyed with the idea of setting up for studio portraits. By careers, I’m not specifying making money, but how we approach photography. We have all gone from a person who takes pictures to a craftsperson creating art.

That’s us, that’s you, we are Photographers, capital P. This is true regardless of experience level, in my opinion. Beginner photographers are definitely a photographer, having grown from merely liking to take pictures to wanting to improve.

So, we thought about setting up our own studio, maybe for portraits, possibly for small product advertising. Well, let’s move beyond the thinking stage and actually start something. We’ll focus for now on getting geared up for studio portraits.

How to Take Studio Portraits: Setup and Gear

studio portraits 1

^{Photo by curtis powell on Unsplash}

First we start looking at the basics of getting a portrait studio going with what we may already have or with gear we can pick up for lower cost. Here are some beginner studio portrait tips.

Where To Set Up

beginner studio portrait tips 2

^{photo bysdominick via iStock}

The first thing to consider is a spot for our portrait studio.

Many have started in what we could call a home studio. Some ideas are a spare bedroom in our home or apartment, rearranging our living room or dining room to use a corner or wall, space in our garage, a porch, a backyard shed, a wall of our workplace office, or an unused room in that office.

Truly, you don’t need a huge space to set up a makeshift portrait studio - just room enough for the model, your gear, and you!

What Gear to Use

beginner studio portrait tips 3

^{photo by AleksandarNakic via iStock}

Many studio items can be found in the home or office already, other items are specific photographic and lighting gear that’s needed.

Some of the more basic items I use in my home studio include barstools and chairs, tables and nightstands, potted plants, and other things that can either be a prop or part of making the subject comfortable while posing.

Cameras and lenses are probably already covered by what we already have. An entry-level DSLR or mirrorless camera with the kit lens can take a fantastic portrait image when used properly. More on that in a bit.

Other gear that is really helpful include tripods or other mounts, and lighting equipment. Some of the most useful lighting equipment are the wonderful LED compact lights that can be mounted on camera or on stands or mounts.

A fantastic couple of items I’ve found extremely useful in a home or office studio are the Hakutatz portable LED light and the Octopad camera and accessory mount.

Using the Hakutatz LED light shown above, we can make use of various studio lighting techniques such as the Rembrandt lighting, low key portrait lighting, and other configurations.

What’s more, these lights offer a high-degree of customization, including an adjustable color temperature, brightness, and saturation.

Best of all, the light can be controlled via a smartphone app. In fact, you can operate multiple lights at the same time to create more complex lighting effects.

If using two or more lights for our studio lighting techniques, the Octopad mount comes in handy to place the light wherever we need it in our possibly tight home studio.

octca001er 5

What’s nice about the Octopad is that it’s so small and portable. Whether you’re in your home, your backyard, or the local park, it’s easy to bring with you to support a light.

Depending on the camera you use, you can utilize the Octopad to stabilize it. Compact cameras, smartphones, and some mirrorless systems are ideal for use with this mount.

octca001er 6

I also like that the Octopad has a non-slip surface on the bottom. I’ve put this thing on my dashboard and used it with my GoPro Hero 8 Black as a dashcam setup.

Even when I took my Volvo off-road, the Octopad held firmly in place. Just imagine how stable it’ll be for your studio lights!

Learn More:

Taking the Portrait: Camera Settings and Lighting

how to take studio portraits 4

^{photo by CoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

To actually make the images, Here are some beginner studio portrait tips and beginner portrait techniques.

Camera Settings

how to take studio portraits 5

^{Photo by ShareGrid on Unsplash}

One of the most important camera settings for portraits is to capture your images in RAW format instead of JPEG. The reasons for using RAW when you can is that RAW files contain a lot more exposure information than a partially compressed file such as a JPEG.

This extra information allows for a whole lot of leeway in post processing the portraits for the best look possible. I like to use a program such as Adobe Photoshop Lightroom to take care of all the adjustments necessary for a showable or saleable portrait image.

We talked earlier about using the kit lens on our entry-level DSLRs and mirrorless cameras for portraits. Yes, you can use a kit lens for portraits. You could even sell a portrait made with a kit lens and entry level camera.

ca85122afu

A different lens such as prime - like this Canon EF 85mm f/1.2L shown above - or a fast zoom - like the Canon EF 24-70mm f/2.8L - may give you more options for changing exposure settings to make use of selective focus techniques or bokeh. But if you haven’t picked up your next lens yet, your kit lens is likely to be very sharp and relatively distortion free.

The trick will be making use of the capabilities you actually have. A kit lens zoomed to short telephoto and with the aperture as wide as possible will still give you good options for selective focus and their bokeh is often quite nice. And if you record in RAW, you can really maximize your post processing program features.

Studio Lighting Techniques

studio lighting techniques

^{photo by alvarez via iStock}

Outside of all other options you have in front of you, your use of studio lighting techniques will be where you show the difference from merely snapping a pic to creating a portrait as a photographer.

Some lighting configurations can be made with one light, one light and a reflector, or two lights. Check the learn more links in this article for details on lighting setups.

In addition to the lighting, you can improve the portraits you’re creating by encouraging good, relaxed posing.

A big part of making the portrait subject comfortable enough to fall into natural looking poses is to have a good rapport with the subject. Especially when shooting in the smaller space of a home portrait studio do you need to be sure to have your portrait subject at ease with you and the photographic process.

As a beginner, you make the subject comfortable by being in charge of the session. Not over controlling, but giving the subject confidence in you and your art. You can do this! For practice, work on taking portraits of a friend or a family member.

Keep Taking Pics, But Make Them Better

We often speak about the difference between merely taking pictures and creating photographic images. Truth be told, there is nothing wrong with taking pictures, it’s fun! As photographers, we never really stop.

What happens is that we want to improve and then we make the improvements. Your studio portraits show off your growing talent and give your subjects images they can enjoy.

In the video above, get a thorough tour of studio portraiture by Academy of Photography.

Learn More:

We Recommend

A Few Things to Consider Before Doing Nude Photography

Written by PT Editor on 13 May 2020.

A Few Things to Consider Before Doing Nude Photography

^{Photo by DynamicWang on Unsplash}

Nude photography can be one of the most challenging - and rewarding - photography niches for photographers. But, there’s also a lot more preparation for nude photography.

For instance, finding nude photography models is more difficult than other photography niches because of its intimacy. For this reason, you’ll want to start planning months in advance for your first nude photoshoot.

Here’s a list of things you’ll need to keep in mind if you’re thinking about starting nude photography.

You Absolutely Need a Shot List

nude photography 1

^{photo byALEAIMAGE via iStock}

A lot of photographers imagine that nude photography is much more laid back than other types of photography because one of the people in the room is naked.

This is obviously not true, especially if you’re working with a model who hasn’t done any nude photography before. You’ll need to know what nude poses you want your model to try, and if available, it can be helpful to have a laptop or tablet to show them the positions as well.

Shoot for at least 30-40 poses on your first shot list. As you’re working your way through your first nude photoshoot, make sure to star the shots you like so you’ll be able to perfect those poses later on.

Thankfully, there are a ton of pre-made nude photography shot lists online if you’re uncomfortable creating your first one.

You Cannot Touch Your Model

nude photography guide 2

^{photo by Maksym Dovgodko via iStock}

This one goes without saying, but I’ve been guilty of touching my portraiture models when I want them precisely one inch over.

You can’t do this with nude photography if you want to work with that model again. Use your words to get your model to change positions slightly. This will ensure your model feels safe working with you and means you’ll probably get better nude photography in the future because good models understand how their bodies look best. Also, check post on nude photoshoots.

This is why having a laptop or tablet on hand is especially helpful for showing models the poses you’d like them to try. Conversely, they can show you poses they want to try too.

Now, I have worked with models in the past who were fine with me moving them, but this type of trust between a model and photographer needs to be built up over time. Even one misstep when working with a model for the first time means you may never get the opportunity to shoot with them again.

Until they give you the go ahead to move them, use your words.

Get the Model Release Form Out of the Way

Since nude photography automatically makes you more liable because of its delicate nature, you’ll want to get your model release form out of the way before you take a single shot.

If you can, email the model release form to your model so you have it signed before they even show up for the nude photo shoot.

If you can’t, then make sure you have it printed out when they get to your studio. If this is your first time working with that model, you can go over the model release form with them. You can use this opportunity as a good transition to talk about exactly what types of poses that model is and is not comfortable with and what you hope to get out of the shoot.

While you’re having your model sign their model release form, it can also be helpful to ask what they want to get out of the shoot. If your model works professionally often, they may have their own creative vision for the shoot that you can work off of from the very beginning.

Nude photography can be a ton of fun, as long as you come prepared.

We Recommend

Advantages of LED Lighting for Portrait Photography

Written by PT Editor on 13 September 2021.

Advantages of LED Lighting for Portrait Photography

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

Lighting for portrait photography can be simple, sophisticated, or anywhere in between. It’s really a wide open field of possibilities, equipment, techniques, and configurations. Recently I’ve been incorporating LED lights into my portrait photography lighting to take advantage of several benefits.

As I see it, there are several nice advantages of LED lighting for portraits. They are bright and clean, LED lights run cool, they are continuous lights, and LED lights are efficient enough to be powered by battery or wall current.

Bright and Clean Light Output

lighting for portrait photography

One of the top reasons I like LED lights for portraits as well as for my videography is because the high quality LED lights are very bright for their power consumption and the color emitted is clean.

When I say a light source is clean, I’m referring to what is measured by the CRI, color rendering index, of the light. CRI tells us how natural the light allows colors to appear. A higher CRI is better than lower, with 100 being the best score.

Lights used for photography and videography should have a CRI in the 90 and above range, with many fine studio and portable LED lights coming in at 96 and 97. TheStryder Fanless Bi-Color LED Fresnel Light from Ikan is an excellent example of a high quality studio with a CRI of 96 and 97 defending on the color temp used.

Cool Operation

led lights for portraits

With continuous lights, the longer they stay on, the hotter they get. If you’ve ever worked with incandescent floods or HMI lights, they can get so hot that you could injure yourself if you touched the bulb. Plus, the bulb life is often very short.

LED lights stay safe to the touch and they last a long, long time. Even the versions of lights such as the Fresnel light mentioned above, which use a lens system to concentrate the light beam, will stay comfortable to handle when they’re made with LED bulbs.

Learn More:

Continuous Lighting

advantages of led lighting for portraits

Continuous lighting for portrait photography has a great benefit for beginners to lighting, which I also enjoy a lot. One of the main advantages of LED lighting for portraits is that you can see the effect of your lighting choices as you set up.

Many studio strobes have modeling lights, but a lot of compact portable flash units don’t. Being able to see exactly where a shadow falls or how much brighter one light is than the other makes varying lighting configurations much easier and quicker to do.

Before LED lights became common in photography, using any continuous light source for portrait work was not often recommended, primarily due to the heat involved which would make portrait subjects uncomfortable. Especially would be problematic with kids or pets as the subjects.

But with the cool running LED lights, that issue is pretty much eliminated. This is really advantageous with multiple light configurations, such as when adding in a fresnel light like the DMX controllable Stryder Fanless Bi-Color LED Fresnel Light which opens up many possibilities of lighting variations in portrait photography.

DMX controlled continuous lighting is a standard for digital videography studios, as it allows precise control and timing of light levels and special effects.

Flexible Power Options

portrait photography lighting

Continuously on lighting with incandescent bulbs or HMI lights consumes a lot of power, so plugging in to the wall socket is often the only choice with many of these types of lights. Portable flash units are portable because of their being operated by batteries.

Going back to the Stryder Fanless Bi-Color LED Fresnel Light from Ikan, since it’s an LED light, the power consumption is efficient enough that it can be powered by either wall plug-ins or by batteries.

Price

portrait photography tips 1

I find that the professional portrait photography lighting options of LED lights are usually much more reasonably priced than some of the other gear cinematographers like to use.

Large HMI lights like what you see on TV and movie sound stages can easily soar into a high figure per light and even the smaller ones intended for more modest studios are still quite expensive. When you absolutely need what those lights offer, though, usability triumphs over pricing concerns.

Most of the LED lighting for portrait photography and videography are much more budget friendly. I have enjoyed using, reviewing, and even purchasing for my own use the top notch gear from Ikan. The company was set up by active videographers and photographers, so the gear is designed to meet the needs of these shooters.

Since they either make or design their own equipment, Ikan is able to bring to the market very high quality gear for lower prices than many of the other brands out there. Check out their full line of lights, filters, tripods, and specialty gear.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Advantages of Using a Softbox for Portrait Photography

Written by PT Editor on 26 February 2021.

Advantages of Using a Softbox for Portrait Photography

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

Using a softbox for portrait photography will result in pleasant lighting for most subjects, plus the gear and techniques used can also be applied to other types of photography such as small product photography for online listings.

In this tutorial, learn a few key benefits of investing in a softbox for your portrait photos.

Portrait Photography Tips

1 softbox for portrait photography

^{photo bybrightstars via iStock}

Making great portraits of any subject is within the grasp of any photographer with proper implementation of portrait photography techniques and using good portrait photography gear.

It is a definite rule in photography that it’s not the gear that makes a photo, it’s the photographer. But sometimes certain types of equipment make the job easier. Some portrait photography gear allows us to use certain techniques for creating better portraits.

The lighting equipment for portrait photography can be used in various different configurations for several styles of portrait lighting. A softbox is one of the best lighting tools for many portrait lighting uses.

What is a Softbox?

2 softbox for portrait photography

^{photo byRawpixel via iStock}

Light comes in many flavors, photographically, these differences can really affect our images. Besides the color temperature of a light source, being hard or soft sources will also alter the end results.

Hard light creates distinct or hard shadows, while soft light diminishes the harshness of the contrast between light and shadow. Instead of the word soft, you might think about it as being diffused. A broader light source is often more diffused than a pint light source.

One way to create softer light is to make a light both broader and more diffused, which a lightbox does by means of how it’s made. A softbox is a frame of diffusing material surrounding a light that makes the resulting light emitting unit bigger and softer.

Here is an example of a softbox from Ikan for a specific light used by many videographers and portrait photographers, the Rayden Half X1 LED light.

3 lighting equipment for portrait photography 1 4 lighting equipment for portrait photography 1

You can get a softbox for almost any size and style of lighting equipment you might already have. Here is another softbox, this one made for a compact iLED144 light from Ikan that fits directly on a camera or on a camera cage.

5 lighting equipment for portrait photography 1

What you see is a large front panel of diffusing material, some internal reflective material to maximize the output of the light, and a frame to hold it all together. That is the essence of how to make a softbox for portrait photography.

Learn More:

Why Use a Softbox?

6 portrait photography tips

^{photo byAzmanJaka via iStock}

Why would we use a softbox for portrait photography or for the other types of photography and videography we might do? A softbox makes light softer which means it can be very flattering for many subjects and can eliminate or lesson contrasty shadows which can either obscure or greatly exaggerate features.

When discussing lighting equipment for portrait photography and the term features comes up, we’re usually talking about the nose and chin. Eyebrow ridges, cheekbones, lips, ears, and hair also factor in, as well as the lines on faces that naturally occur with certain expressions or wrinkles and blemishes caused by damage or age.

Softening the light doesn’t blur the subject like a soft focus filter would, but it does mean that those harsh shadows that make a nose look larger than it really is or the shadows inside the skin wrinkles that accentuate them are lessened. Thus the resulting images will be more flattering for the portrait subject.

Of course, some portrait lighting configurations are designed around harsher, harder light, such as Rembrandt lighting, but for the general portrait portrait market, softer light set ups are often favored.

How to Use a Softbox

7 portrait photography gear

^{photo byalvarez via iStock}

Learning how to use a softbox for portrait photography is simple. Simply replace whatever you’re using as a key light, the main light, with a softbox. Using a softbox on both the key light and the fill light will result in a flatter light than other lighting configurations, so you might do some experimenting, see how soft you need to go.

A two light setup with softboxes is a good method for many types of small products, such as you might be shooting for listing on a shopping website. It’s useful for product photography since the softer light shows details of the items better than contrasty lighting.

A softbox can be used with any type of light, either a flash or continuous light, but you should monitor closely when using one with incandescent bulbs since they can increase heat build up. Using LED continuous lights or a flash greatly reduces that concern.

There are many advantages to using a softbox for portrait photography, try it out yourself to see how it can improve your portrait and small product images.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Backlit Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 09 May 2022.

backlit photography tips

^{photo byA-Tom via iStock}

Backlighting adds an extra technique to your ever-expanding skillset. It works for people as well as for a huge number of subjects you’re already photographing, such as nature scenes and architectural subjects.

What is backlighting, and what is involved in making a backlit portrait? Here are some backlit photography tips that can be applied to a backlit portrait, as well as other ideas about using backlight in general.

A Word About Printing Photos
Portrait Backlit Photography Tips- Silhouette
Portrait Backlit Photography Tips - Rim Light/Hair Light
Still Life Backlit Photography Tips
Architecture Backlit Photography Tips
Backlit Photography Tips for Food Photography
General Backlit Photography Tips
Recommended Photography Gear

A Word About Printing Photos

printing photos

^{Photo by sturti via iStock}

Before we get into the tips about backlit photos, I want to take a moment to discuss printing the images you create.

I'm not talking about sending the image file to your inkjet printer, either...

All photographers, even beginners, should have an image professionally printed now and again. It's a way to see your work, inspect it, and learn and grow from the process. It's nice to have a print of your work hanging in your home, too!

Where you have to be careful is in the process of selecting a printing company because they are definitely not all equal. We've seen that in our metal print shootouts in 2020 and again in 2021 - some companies rose to the top while others floundered.

The winner of both of our metal print shootouts is Artbeat Studios, and they did so by offering impeccable prints that exude quality from corner to corner. If you're getting into backlit photography (or any other kind of photography for that matter), they're an excellent option for having your images printed.

I'm speaking from experience, too...

I've ordered a bunch of prints from Artbeat Studios over the years, and even though I know what to expect when I unbox the print, I still find my jaw on the floor - the quality is that impressive.

I've mostly ordered metal prints, but Artbeat Studios also offers acrylic, canvas, and paper prints, all of which you can order in an array of sizes (even custom sizes!).

Artbeat Studios uses the finest materials, the best printing processes, and offers free shipping to boot. It's an ideal combination! Add in affordable prices, and you have the makings of the ideal printing partner for your images.

See for yourself by visiting Artbeat Studios today!

Portrait Backlit Photography Tips- Silhouette

backlit photography tips 2

^{photo byBERKO85 via iStock}

The silhouette is one of the oldest forms of portraiture. Examples can be found all the way back to early civilization art. The cameo is basically a silhouette, so you probably have a really good idea of the general thought behind the technique.

A true silhouette is created by placing the subject between the camera and a strong light source. That strong light source can be the Sun if outside, or a window, flash, or studio light if indoors. You would calculate the exposure for the light itself instead of the subject. Careful camera placement can avoid unwanted lens flare or creatively add it in if desired.

backlit photography tips 3

^{photo by}^{jeffbergen via iStock}

As an extra part of these backlit photography tips, making it a partial silhouette is a great method for adding drama and importance to a backlit portrait subject. This can be accomplished by adjusting the exposure so that the subject facing the camera position has more exposure or by using reflectors or extra lights to the side of the subject or closer to the camera.

Portrait Backlit Photography Tips - Rim Light/Hair Light

backlighting

^{photo by Ranta Images via iStock}

A variation of backlit photography tips for portraits involves rim light or a hai rlight. It can be extreme, subtle, or anywhere in between. The outdoor backlit portrait shown above uses a very subtle approach to the hair light or rim light idea, adding in just enough of it with careful subject and camera placement plus either a reflector or a fill flash.

A hair light is most often placed above the portrait subject and can be moved off-center so that it isn’t directly behind them. A variation of this idea for backlit photography tips is called rim lighting. Essentially the same thing but with the light source closely resembling what would be used for a silhouette. See the image below for that style of lighting used all by itself.

backlighting 2

^{photo byМихаил Руденко via iStock}

Rim lighting can be used for all kinds of subject matter, such as small product photography or close-up photography. It works exceptionally well as one part of a multi-light setup. As an extra to this part of these backlit photography tips, portable LED lights work wonderfully for ease of changing the configuration of your lights.

Still Life Backlit Photography Tips

backlighting 3

^{photo byKMQ via iStock}

Now that you have covered rim lighting and full or partial silhouettes as backlit photography tips, you can start applying the ideas to subjects other than portraits. Still life photography will allow you to hone your skills with backlighting and also is beneficial for small product photography.

what is backlighting

^{photo byBrianAJackson via iStock}

Using backlit photography tips such as rim lighting, you can separate the subject matter from the background, which can add an air of romance, such as in the violin shown above, or emphasize certain aspects of the small product or what it is used for.

This can work for a simple product illustration image when balanced with your standard lighting configurations but can especially add to the impact of a lifestyle image. Clients who need images of their stuff to post online often look for a lifestyle type of image to create a lasting impression of their merchandise, so it’s a good idea to show them you can provide that extra value.

Learn More:

Architecture Backlit Photography Tips

what is backlighting 2

^{photo by1111IESPDJ via iStock}

Some of the prettiest images of architecture are backlit or partially backlit. The reasons are similar to backlit portraits and the other backlit photography tips already listed, it separates the subject from the background, adds importance to the subject, or it can lend an air of romance or elegance to that subject.

With some subjects, such as a tall building, it’s a simple process to capture it as a backlit image. Just walk around to put the Sun behind your intended architectural subject. For other subject ideas, such as the windmills pictured above, you may need to plan out your photo trek around a time when the Sun is lower in the sky.

This method adds in the extra benefit of putting you in the Golden Hour for outdoor photography. Additionally, you can easily transfer these ideas to natural subjects such as trees, rock formations, flowers, and the like.

Backlit Photography Tips for Food Photography

what is backlighting 3

^{photo byKucherAV via iStock}

Applying backlit photography tips to food photography will put you in a great position to create beautiful images of food, wine, produce, and the like in a way that will make your images stand out from the standard “look at my lunch” social media post.

what is backlighting 4

^{photo byanna avdeeva via iStock}

One of the aspects of food photography that many beginners struggle with is that gorgeous steam rising from a hot beverage or plate of food. Using your backlit photography tips such as rim lighting will have you capturing these alluring views left and right.

If you’re thinking about jumping into paid food photography, having these types of images in your portfolio is an eye-catcher for potential clients. Try it out at home with various strengths of backlight, side light, and front light to see how each relates to making that food image look amazing.

General Backlit Photography Tips

backlit portrait

^{photo bykostolom via iStock}

Along with the backlit photography tips concerning camera, subject, and lighting placement, you also need to know how best to meter and focus for your desired images.

Generally speaking, you probably want to turn off some of the extra automation such as evaluative metering or dynamic area autofocus. If you’re using those camera functions at all, be in as much control as you can.

The spot metering function of your camera can often provide you with a good exposure for backlighting, and the focus lock button or back button AF can also be used effectively. A lot of times, though, you’ll want to adjust these settings manually.

Using these backlit photography tips will put you on the path for capturing great-looking images of people, places, and things.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Basic Portrait Lighting Principles

Written by PT Editor on 31 October 2019.

Basic Portrait Lighting Principles

^{photo bysilverkblack via iStock}

One of the most important skills to have as a photographer of any kind is the ability to understand the different attributes of light.

From the direction of light to the quality of its tone, the color of light to its luminosity, there are many factors to consider when framing up your shots.

These factors are especially important when creating portraits, as they can quite literally make or break the shot.

With that in mind, let's have a look at a few basic portrait lighting principles you need to understand in order to make better portraits.

Learn to Work With Harsh Lighting

portrait lighting 1

^{photo by skyNext via iStock}

One look at outdoor portraits on Instagram or Flickr will reveal millions of portraits taken at golden hour.

Golden hour is a great time for portraits because light is soft, warm, and falls evenly across the scene, which gives portraits an elegant look.

But it’s not always possible to shoot portraits during golden hour, so learning to work with harsh lighting that you find throughout the day is a must.

portrait lighting 2

^{photo by skyNext via iStock}

The difference between soft and harsh lighting is simple - soft light has soft shadows and a gentle transition from shadowed areas to highlighted areas, like in the first image above. Harsh lighting, however, has an abrupt transition with very hard lines of shadow, as shown in the image immediately above.

You don’t have to be outside to make use of harsh lighting, either.

portrait photography principles

^{Photo by ViewFramer via iStock}

In this example, a single, bright light is used to create extremes of brightness and shadow to create a more compelling black and white portrait.

Since black and white images rely on things like contrast for visual interest in the absence of color, using harsh light to create black and white images is a great option.

Learn More:

Learn How to Use Artificial Lighting

When some people read the term “artificial lighting,” they might shudder with thoughts of buying expensive lights, light stands, diffusers, softboxes, and other bulky photography lighting gear.

And while that’s certainly an option, if you aren’t a professional portrait photographer, you don’t need all that gear, nor do you need to spend that much money.

There are a ton of small, easy-to-use lights for photography that allow you to sculpt and shape light for portraits.

Take the Hakutatz RGB+AW LED Light shown above and below as a great example.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open and ready for orders in early December.

This light is small enough to fit in your pocket, yet allows you to get ultra creative with the way you light portraits.

For example, you can add colored light to the portrait using the light’s array of RGB LEDs.

If you want to warm up a portrait, you can use the amber LEDs to wash the subject is beautiful amber-toned light. There’s even white LEDs if you want that harder, edgier feel discussed earlier.

What’s more, lights like this can be used as a fill light (to soften shadows in the presence of harsh lighting), as a backlight to help separate the subject from the background, or even as a key light, which is the primary light used to illuminate the subject and highlight their form.

There are many ways you can use a single light to create a compelling portrait, too.

But the advantage of having a light like the Hakutatz RGB+AW LED is that you can use multiple lights at the same time to create more complex lighting scenarios.

With the accompanying smartphone app, you can control one or more lights and dial in the precise color temperature, RGB color, and even special effects you might like to use.

In other words, learning how to use smart lights like this enables you to craft the precise look you want in your portraits and unleash your full creativity at the same time.

What’s not to like about that?!

See the possibilities you can create for portrait lighting with the Hakutatz RGB+AW LED Light.

Learn Common Lighting Setups

portrait photography tips

^{photo by FilippoBacci via iStock}

If you really want to step up your portrait photography game, it’s important that you learn the basic lighting setups used in portrait photography.

These setups go beyond simply having a single key light or using an LED light like the Hakutatz discussed above to separate the subject from the background.

Instead, the lighting setups shown above (and outlined below) enable you to create different looks in your portraits by manipulating how the light interacts with the model’s face.

Short lighting involves casting a delicate shadow on the side of the model’s face nearest the camera by having the model look toward the light source.
Broad lighting involves casting a delicate shadow on the side of the model’s face away from the camera by having the model look away from the light source.
Butterfly lighting is created when the light source is in front of the model and above their eye level, which creates a butterfly-shaped shadow under their nose.
Split lighting divides the model’s face into two equal sides - one that’s illuminated and one that’s in shadow - by placing the light source 90-degrees to one side of the model.
Loop lighting creates gentle shadows while keeping most of their face in light by positioning the light source just above eye level at about a 45-degree angle from the camera.
Rembrandt lighting results in a similar pattern as split lighting, with one side of the model’s face in light and the other in shadow. However, this lighting pattern creates a triangle-shaped area of light on the shadowed side of the face by positioning the light above eye level and casting the nose’s shadow onto the far cheek.

You can learn more about common lighting setups in this detailed tutorial.

how to use artificial lighting

^{photo by utkamandarinka via iStock}

Whether you adapt your portraits to harsh lighting, learn to use artificial lighting, or incorporate classic lighting setups, you’ll find that your ability to create beautiful portraits will be much-improved.

Give each of these methods a try and see what works best for your workflow. Even better, practice each one and then incorporate them all into how you take portraits. I think you’ll be pleased with the results!

Learn More

We Recommend

Beginner Portrait Photography: 5 Essential Tips to Get You Started

Written by PT Editor on 09 August 2023.

Beginner Portrait Photography 5 Essential Tips to Get You Started

^{Photo by fotostorm via iStock}

If you've ever been captivated by the art of capturing human emotions, stories, and personalities through the lens, you're in for a treat. Portrait photography is an exciting journey that allows you to freeze moments in time and express the beauty of the human spirit in a single frame.

Whether you're just stepping into the world of photography or you've been dabbling with your camera for a while, mastering the art of portrait photography can be both exciting and challenging. But fear not, for we've curated a guide tailored just for you – the beginner with a passion for capturing compelling portraits.

In this post, I’ll walk you through five essential tips that will lay the foundation for your portrait photography endeavors. From understanding the role of lighting and backgrounds to perfecting posing and composition, I’m here to demystify the process and equip you with the tools you need to take your portrait game to the next level.

So grab your camera, and let's dive into the world of beginner portrait photography!

Beginner Portrait Photography: Understanding Lighting
Beginner Portrait Photography: Choosing the Right Background
Beginner Portrait Photography: Posing and Composition
Beginner Portrait Photography: Engaging with Your Subject
Beginner Portrait Photography: The Art of Post-Processing
Recommended Photography Gear

Beginner Portrait Photography: Understanding Lighting

Beginner Portrait Photography Understanding Lighting

^{Photo by Eva Blanco via iStock}

Think of lighting as the magic wand in your photography toolkit. It's the secret sauce that can make or break your portraits.

As a beginner, you might find the idea of working with different lighting sources a bit daunting, but fear not! Start by experimenting with natural light during the "golden hour" – the soft, warm light just after sunrise and before sunset. This gentle lighting creates a flattering, dreamy effect that can enhance your subject's features.

If you're indoors or working during less ideal lighting conditions, don't shy away from using artificial lighting setups. Softboxes and diffusers can help you achieve that soft, even light that works wonders for portraits. Get more details about beginner portrait photography lighting in the video above by Adorama.

Remember, it's not just about the quantity of light; it's about its quality and direction. Play around with angles and observe how the light falls on your subject's face – you'll be amazed by the results!

Beginner Portrait Photography: Choosing the Right Background

Beginner Portrait Photography Choosing the Right Background

^{Photo by m-imagephotography via iStock}

Picture this: you've got the perfect subject, they're striking a killer pose, but then you notice the distracting clutter behind them. It's like a deflated balloon in a room full of excitement. The background plays a significant role in your portrait's overall impact. Opt for clean, unobtrusive backgrounds that complement your subject rather than stealing the show.

To achieve this, try using a wide aperture (low f-number) to create a shallow depth of field. This technique will naturally blur the background, making your subject stand out. Remember, your background doesn't have to be elaborate; sometimes, a plain wall or a lush garden can do wonders for your composition.

Beginner Portrait Photography: Posing and Composition

Now that you've got your lighting and background sorted, it's time to tackle the art of posing and composition…

Posing can be a bit tricky, especially if your subject is camera-shy. But fear not; communication is key! Make your subject feel comfortable by providing clear and simple directions. Encourage them to relax and be themselves – genuine expressions often make for the most captivating portraits. See what I mean in the posing guide above by Julia Trotti.

Beginner Portrait Photography Posing and Composition

^{Photo byLiudmylaSupynska via iStock}

When it comes to composition, embrace the rule of thirds. Imagine your image divided into a tic-tac-toe grid – place your subject along these lines or at their intersections for a visually pleasing result.

Leading lines and framing techniques can also add depth and intrigue to your portraits. Experiment with angles, and don't be afraid to think outside the box, either! For example, drop your tripod down to frame up a low-angle portrait looking up at the subject. Doing so makes the subject seem bigger than life - powerful, even - and is a less-used perspective for portraits that can be really intriguing.

Of course, having a well-made, durable tripod helps you do so...

vanguard veo3 303cbs

There are many, many tripod brands out there. Some should be avoided at all costs. Others are perfectly fine. And others are known in the industry for the quality of their gear. Vanguard is one such company.

I've tested Vanguard gear for years, and I always come away pleased with my experience. The engineering and design of their tripods makes them easy to use and incredibly dependable - features you want in a tripod! I've been testing their new VEO 3+ 303CBS carbon fiber tripod for a couple of months now, and "impressed" is an understatement.

I don't do much portrait work, but when I do, having a tripod that extends from a low of about 8.5 inches up to 70 inches is nice for getting shots from differing angles of my son.

vanguard veo 3 303cbs head

What's more, I appreciate that this tripod has adjustable leg spread angles and removable spiked feet so I can fine-tune the tripod positioning, even on uneven terrain. So, I can hit the beach with my son and use the tripod's large feet to stabilize it in the sand to get fun sunset shots of him, then the next time we go out, we can hike in the mountains and I can use the spiked feet to increase stability on hard surfaces. Nice!

With a multi-angle center column that makes framing up the shot super easy, an Arca-compatible ball head, and easy twist lock legs, the VEO 3+ 303CBS has all the features I need to get set up quickly. And with superb stability, I know this tripod will help me get tack-sharp images each and every time. What's not to like?!

Learn More:

Beginner Portrait Photography: Engaging with Your Subject

Beginner Portrait Photography Engaging with Your Subject

^{Photo by igor_kell via iStock}

Ever wondered how professional photographers manage to capture those soulful, candid shots? The secret lies in the connection they establish with their subjects. It's not just about pointing your camera and clicking; it's about creating a comfortable and relaxed atmosphere. Chat with your subject, crack a joke, and make them feel at ease.

The more comfortable your subject is, the more authentic their expressions will be. Don't be afraid to capture the in-between moments – those genuine smiles and thoughtful gazes that truly define your subject's personality. Remember, your camera is a bridge between you and the person you're photographing. Build that bridge with genuine interactions!

Beginner Portrait Photography: The Art of Post-Processing

You've captured some fantastic shots, but the journey isn't over yet. Now comes the art of post-processing. While it's important not to overdo it, a little touch-up can elevate your portraits to the next level. Software like Adobe Lightroom or Photoshop can be your best friends here.

As you can see in the video above by B&H Photo Video, you can adjust exposure, color balance, contrast, and sharpness to enhance your photo without making it look overly edited. Keep in mind that the goal is to enhance the natural beauty of your subject, not to completely transform them. With a bit of practice, you'll find your sweet spot between a polished look and an authentic feel.

But simply processing your image isn’t the end of the journey for your portrait…

Beginner Portrait Photography The Art of Post Processing

The final component of the process is to have your portraits printed. Even if you’re just starting out and the images you create are of yourself or your loved ones, having your best images printed helps you learn about the process of printing, how your vision translates to a printed medium, and it gives you something tangible to hold in your hands, not unlike a prize at the end of a long journey.

There are many options for printing your images online, but one of my favorites is Artbeat Studios. I have dozens of prints - metal, canvas, paper, acrylic, you name it - from Artbeat Studios, and I am always impressed when I unbox them.

The Artbeat Studios team blends high-quality printing methods with superb materials and expert know-how to deliver you the best possible print. And while you might assume that getting a high-quality print takes a lot of time, you’d assume incorrectly! The Artbeat Studios team is that rare blend of quality and speed, so once you order your print, you’ll have it before you know it.

Beginner Portrait Photography The Art of Post Processing 2

The process is simple, too. Just start your order on the Artbeat Studios website, choose the type of print you want, and upload your image. The ordering software will guide you through sizing and cropping, adding images, and so forth, so it’s about as painless a process as you could hope for!

On top of all that, Artbeat Studios offers a 100 percent satisfaction guarantee. If your print isn’t what you hoped for, just send it back for a full refund in store credit.

In other words, you get a high-quality print made by expert craftspeople backed by a 100 percent guarantee. What more could you want?!

So there you have it, five essential tips to kickstart your journey into the world of portrait photography. Remember, every photographer starts somewhere, and practice makes perfect. Embrace these tips, experiment, and, most importantly, have fun capturing the stories that make each portrait unique. Happy shooting!

Learn More:

Recommended Photography Gear

We Recommend

Behind the Scenes: Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Session

Written by PT Editor on 06 December 2023.

Behind the Scenes Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Session

^{Photo by miljko via iStock}

While photographers have been shooting boudoir photography for decades, in the last few years, it has become more popular than ever. It’s a celebration of intimacy and a beautiful form of self-expression that empowers men and women alike to feel comfortable in their bodies.

However, just like every other type of photography, boudoir photography requires proper planning to capture high-quality images. That’s where we come in! We wrote this article with the intention of helping new and experienced photographers alike be better prepared for their upcoming boudoir photography photo shoots.

Below, we’ll share the three most important steps photographers should take before starting every new boudoir session. We’ve also included a handful of useful tips you can convey to your models so they can be more prepared. Now, join us as we explore the behind-the-scenes world of boudoir photography!

Check out the video above by Yuliya Panchenko Ads to learn five ways to improve your boudoir photography in under 60 seconds.

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: Gear & Equipment
Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: Release Forms
Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: Talk With the Model
Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: What the Model Needs to Do<
Final Thoughts on Boudoir Photography
Recommended Photography Gear

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: Gear & Equipment

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot Gear Equipment

^{Photo by miljko via iStock}

Having the right materials for a boudoir photography session is crucial. That starts with owning a good camera and lenses. It also means purchasing important equipment like a lighting kit, a sturdy tripod, a carrying solution, etc.

Other things to consider are backdrops, props, and wardrobe. We recommend investing in at least a few of each before your first shoot to start building a versatile boudoir photography kit. After that, use some of the profits from each new shoot to expand your kit further. Alternatively, if you need something specific for only one session, look for a place that rents gear.

We know it’s not a piece of gear, but don’t overlook the value of location. Common places to hold boudoir photography sessions include in-home studios, professional studios, or at client's homes. You might even have some clients request outdoor sessions! Depending on where you are shooting, you must adjust your materials and preparation method.

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: Release Forms

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot Release Forms

^{Photo by Husam Cakaloglu via iStock}

Whenever you are photographing people, you should always use release forms. This is especially true in boudoir photography when working with subjects wearing little or no clothing. The last thing you want is to publish sensitive images on your website or social media without proper consent from your models.

For one, due to international privacy regulations, it’s illegal. Second, they could sue you, and you could owe hundreds or thousands of dollars. Trust us, that’s not a good outcome for the reputation of your business or your wallet.

How do you avoid this? It’s a simple two-step process. First, either find a model release form online or create your own. Next, ensure every model signs one before you start taking pictures. And just like that, you have the model's permission and are protected going forward (as long as you keep the forms safe and secure).

Learn More:

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: Talk With the Model

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot Talk With the Model

^{Photo by Delmaine Donson via iStock}

Establishing a professional relationship with your models beforehand is also a great way to prepare for a boudoir photography session. It serves multiple purposes, all of which will help you (and your models) enjoy your time working together. We recommend meeting with every new model in person at least once before a shoot (the more times, the better!).

First, it allows you to learn the goals of your models and what kind of images they hope to capture. Also, it’s a good time to ask questions to help you understand what they are and aren’t comfortable doing in front of the camera. The more comfortable you and the models are with each other during a boudoir photography session, the more natural your images will look.

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot: What the Model Needs to Do

Preparing for a Boudoir Photography Photo Shoot What the Model Needs to Do

^{Photo by AleksandarNakic via iStock}

Some models may have lots of experience with boudoir photography, but many people are also doing it for the first time. If that’s the case, here are some tips for boudoir photography that you can pass on to your models before a session.

Do your hair and makeup (or have it professionally done for even better results!)
Get a pedicure and manicure.
Explore your portfolio and other boudoir photography images online to see what they like and what vibe they want during your session.

Final Thoughts on Boudoir Photography

^{Photo by Butsaya via iStock}

Now that you know how to prepare for a boudoir photography session, what are you waiting for?! Start planning today to take your boudoir photography skills to the next level! Finally, as a bonus, check out the list below to see other ways to enhance your boudoir photography besides planning and preparing for your session.

Experiment with different angles, lighting, and locations.
Use mirrors and props for added creativity.
Work with other photographers and a variety of models.
Need models? Try Googling “Boudoir photography near me.”
Practice, practice, practice!

Recommended Photography Gear

A quick heads-up: If you snag something through our affiliate links or check out our sponsored content, we might earn a commission at no extra cost to you. But fear not, we're all about recommending stuff we're truly stoked about!

Learn More:

What is a Flashgun? (And Other Important Questions)

Learn more about Best Ever Backdrops

We Recommend

Best Backdrops to Consider in 2021

Written by PT Editor on 22 January 2020.

Best Backdrops to Consider in 2020

^{Photo by Ross Sneddon on Unsplash}

Photo Backdrops

When taking a portrait, the focus of attention should be on the portrait subject. But the background is nevertheless an important component of the shot.

Backgrounds can add depth, color and texture. They can help the subject stand out in the frame. They can also set the mood for the shot.

The question is, what are the best backdrops for portraits?

We’ve put together a quick list of some of the best photography backdrops money can buy to assist you in finding the ideal setup for your needs.

Best Ever Backdrops

best ever backdrops affordable

I started using Best Ever Backdrops earlier this year, and I have to say, so far, I've been nothing but impressed.

What's unique about the backdrops I have is that they are double-sided - one design on one side and a different design on the other. This two-for-one design is complemented by the fact that they are perfectly flat and just 24 x 36". This means there's no concern about storage space or having backdrops rolled up and leaned in every corner of the room.

Instead, I can slide these backdrops in the corner of a closet or even under my bed and easily retrieve them when I need them. Since I mostly do food and product photography, these backdrops are the perfect size for those pursuits.

best ever backdrops best of 2021

As you would expect, Best Ever Backdrops makes backdrops that are waterproof and stain-resistant - features that are incredibly important when you're photographing food.

And since they have a matte finish, there's no glare from my studio lights, leaving me with clean, crisp images of whatever it is I'm photographing.

best ever backdrops

Don't think that because these are thin, lightweight backdrops that they're delicate, either...

Far from it, these backdrops are virtually indestructible. You can get them dirty, hose them down, dry them off, and they'll be ready to roll for your next shoot!

best ever backdrop two sided

I like the price of these backdrops, too. When you order two Mix and Match backdrops they're just $124.50 each (for a total of four backdrops). Since they're so budget-friendly, they are an ideal option for getting into product or food photography without spending a ton of money.

These backdrops are made in the USA, and Best Ever Backdrops throws in free shipping as well!

Fox Backdrop

fox backdrop 1

When you invest in a backdrop, you want it to have certain features that make your life easier. Fox Backdrop certainly delivers on that front with 100-percent wrinkle-free vinyl backdrops.

Not only are these backdrops wrinkle-free, but the thick vinyl is also incredibly durable. Just roll it up when not in use to keep it out of the way, and when you need it, unroll it and it’s ready to go!

fox backdrop 2

And since the thick vinyl is waterproof, you can quickly wipe it down with a cloth - no long, drawn-out cleaning sessions! Additionally, Fox Backdrops are glare-resistant, so you don’t have to worry about glare from your studio lights causing a distraction in the background of your shots.

These backdrops are so durable, in fact, that they can be used as floorgrounds for portraits as well. You can walk on them, place stools on them, get them wet...you name it!

fox backdrop 3

Fox Backdrop also has an enormous collection of backdrops that span from abstracts to flowers, wood to brick, seasons of the year to special occasions like Easter and weddings.

With a purchase of over $150, you get free shipping, too!

On top of all that, Fox Backdrop has frequent sales so you can save even more money on their already excellent prices.

If you’re ready to step it up and start creating better portraits, a backdrop from Fox Backdrop is a great place to start!

Learn More:

Kate Backdrops

kate backdrop

Although Kate Backdrop is a relative newcomer in the best photography backdrops scene, it is a noteworthy company because they feature hand-painted backdrops.

These hand-painted backdrops add a surrealism to your portraits, but they also provide your clients a once-in-a-lifetime photograph because they will literally never see that backdrop again.

kate backdrop 2

Kate Backdrop also creates backdrops that extend to the floor, which allows you to take large group photos, or photos of children without worrying about accidentally snapping a picture that includes your ugly studio flooring.

Nobody likes Photoshopping when it isn’t necessary!

kate backdrop 3

Another perk of using Kate Backdrop is that they create more grown-up backdrops (even some sexy, boudoir themed backdrops). If you’ve ever been on the search for a Valentine’s Day themed backdrop, this is the company you should be looking at.

kate backdrop 4

Kate Backdrop was founded by a man named David, and was named after David’s wife, Kate. Although David has been working on the company since 2007, he didn’t find the perfect fabric and printing techniques until 2017 when the brand exploded.

Kate Backdrop uses a microfiber fabric, and a heat transfer printing process, on all of their products.

Kate Backdrop offers a 30-day return period on all their products.

Thanks to international sourcing, Kate Backdrop also offers some of the cheapest backdrops of any companies on this list. They start at around $25.

Photo Pie Backdrops

photo pie backdrop

Photo Pie Backdrops gives you as many options as your heart could want.

You get to choose the size of your backdrop, the fabric of your backdrop, whether the backdrop is single or double sided, and how fast it arrives (they have multiple rush shipping options).

While Photo Pie doesn’t necessarily produce budget photography backdrops, their price is well worth it thanks to the huge selection.

photo pie backdrop 2

Each of these top photography backdrops can be purchased in prisma, jersey, or inspira. Prisma is an oxford lightweight fabric that needs to be steamed, while jersey is a flannel-like midweight fabric that is wrinkle free. Inspira is satiny and heavyweight and will need to be steamed occasionally.

photo pie backdrop 3

Each backdrop also comes in an incredibly wide array of sizes, ranging from 4 x 4 to 10 x 20 and almost everything in between.

If you live in the U.S. or Canada, then your shipping is free unless you need it expedited.

Learn More:

Best Photography Backdrops

best ever backdrops

Best Ever Backdrops is one of the best websites for budget photography backdrops because while they create photography backdrops that you can customize, they all come with free shipping in the U.S.

Each Best Ever backdrop comes with two different textures that you can choose, so you get the exact look you are hoping for.

best ever backdrops 2

Plus, Best Ever touts photography backdrops made in the USA.

Additionally, Best Ever only prints on both sides of their backdrops and every backdrop weighs under a pound.

best ever backdrops 3

They’re also all 100% waterproof, since many of their backdrops are marketed to food photographers, making them the best backdrops ever.

Best Ever Backdrops start at $100, unless you’re willing to splurge for a package of 4 pre-selected backdrops which start at $200.

Owen’s Originals

owens originals

Owen’s Originals doesn’t just sell photography backdrops, but their photography backdrops are so good we had to include them in our list.

Firstly, Owen’s sells photography backdrops that are hand-painted, paper, vinyl, canvas or muslin, so you can look for the exact backdrop material you want.

You can also search all of the photography backdrops on their website by price, and they have a wide array of options at under $50.

owens originals 2

Almost all of their photography backdrops also ship in 24 hours because they are a larger corporation, which helps for photographers on a strict timeline.

owens originals 3

Owen’s Originals photography backdrops start at $35. Owen’s also accepts returns for an 80% refund up to two weeks from the date of purchase.

So, there you have it! A selection of five different companies that create beautiful portrait backdrops.

There are options galore in terms of sizing and styles, as well as various price points, so you should be able to find exactly what you need at the price you want. All that’s left to do is peruse their selections, make your choices, and get your new backdrops!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Best Photography Poses for Men

Written by PT Editor on 24 July 2019.

^{Photo by Hirurg via iStock}

Male model poses - How to pose for pictures?

So, you've got a male model for a portrait and you're not sure how to pose them?

This is the guide for you...and anyone who is looking to do male photography.

There are all kinds of photo poses for men that you can use to create an eye-catching portrait of men of all ages, shapes, and sizes.

From sitting to standing, arms crossed to legs crossed, and many points in between, the following photo poses for men will make them look their best.

Photo Poses for Men: Watch the Hands!
Photo Poses for Men: Arms Crossed
Photo Poses for Men: Arms Crossed, Full-Body Portrait
Photo Poses for Men: The Side Lean
Photo Poses for Men: The Back Lean
Photo Poses for Men: Standing Tall
Photo Poses for Men: Stand & Shift Weight
Photo Poses for Men: Add a Prop
Photo Poses for Men: Seated
Photo Poses for Men: Lean In
Photo Poses for Men: Put Him in His Element
Photo Poses for Men: Action Shot

#1 Photo Poses For Men: Watch the Hands!

^{Photo by CarlosDavid.org via iStock}

Though the hands might seem like a minor detail, if a male model doesn't know where to put them, the portrait can quickly look awkward.

To avoid this, give the model specific direction regarding what to do with his hands.

For example, you might have him cross his arms or put his hands in his pocket. You might also incorporate some sort of prop for him to hold.

Get more insights into how to pose men for portraits in the video above by Sorelle Amore.

Below, I've listed some of the best photography poses for men. Let's get to it!

#2 Photo Poses for Men: Arms Crossed Photo Pose

^{Photo by FXQuadro via iStock}

Perhaps the simplest poses for photography males subjects is to have him cross his arms.

Not only is this a masculine look, but it also gives him something to do with his hands, which as we discussed above, is hugely important.

Note how in this pose, the shot is fairly tight and includes just the model's upper body. This isn't the only way to incorporate folded arms, though.

Quick Tip: Ensure the model's shoulders are back and their core muscles are engaged. This will help them stand up straight and avoid a slouched look.

#3 Photo Poses for Men: Arms Crossed, Full-Body Portrait Photo Pose

^{Photo by Morsa Images via iStock}

In this example, the arms crossed photo pose is implemented in a full-body portrait.

In addition to crossing the arms, ask the model to also cross his legs, ensuring that the bulk of his weight is on one leg.

Mirroring the crossed look in the legs gives the portrait cohesion while also helping relax his lower body. That is, if the model stands with legs straight, he might be inclined to lock his knees, which will result in a stiff-looking portrait.

#4 Photo Poses for Men: The Side Lean

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

If you ask me, this is one of the best photography poses for men because it forces the model to relax his body.

Just like I noted above, the legs can become quite stiff and wooden if there isn't some kind of shift of weight.

So, by asking the model to lean against or on something as shown above, it shifts his weight to one side to help create a relaxed look.

An alternative to the photo pose above would be to have the model lean his shoulder against something, like a wall. It has the same effect of creating something that looks nice and relaxed.

#5 Photo Poses for Men: The Back Lean

^{Photo by m-imagephotography via iStock}

This is one of the best photography poses for men because it's so easy to pull off.

Just have him lean back, rest against a wall, put his hands in his pockets (or cross his arms), and you've got a great pose for a male model!

Quick Tip: Having the model look off-camera is a trick to make him a little more relaxed. Additionally, looking off-camera is a great way to create a more informal portrait.

#6 Photo Poses for Men: Standing Tall

^{Photo by martin-dm via iStock}

Of course, poses for men don't require that they have their arms crossed or that they're leaning against something.

Instead, you can simply have the model stand tall!

When using this pose, have the model shift his weight to one leg. As you can see above, the man's weight is slightly on his left leg, and with his feet open, this pose looks masculine while still making the model seem approachable.

#7 PHOTO POSES FOR MEN: Stand & Shift Weight

^{Photo by g-stockstudio via iStock}

As an alternative to standing tall, you can have the model stand and shift his weight significantly to one side.

As you can see above, this gives the shot a casual appearance, with the model looking as though he's in movement to our right.

Again, you can see how having the model put his hands in his pockets has helped avoid awkward hands.

Quick Tip: Using sidelighting, as was done above, can add a dynamic look to male portraits. The long shadows created by sidelighting add visual interest and contrast beautifully with the brighter areas of the photo.

#8 PHOTO POSES FOR MEN: Add a Prop

^{Photo by JGalione via iStock}

As noted earlier, having the model hold something - even if it's just in one hand - can have a relaxing effect that helps the model have a more natural look.

When using props, be sure they make sense in the shot. You want the prop to be secondary to the model, not something that takes attention away from him.

Above, notice how the skateboard is integrated into the shot. It's not flashy or attention-grabbing, but it adds an element of authenticity to the portrait of this young man.

#9 PHOTO POSES FOR MEN: Seated

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

If it's something casual you're after, it's hard to beat the old standard seated pose.

Whether he's on a barstool, like above, a step, a couch, or something in between, a seated pose gives the model an opportunity to truly relax.

Just remember that when he's seated to drop the level of your camera - you want the barrel of the lens to be at or slightly above his eye level rather than shooting at a steep downward angle.

#10 PHOTO POSES FOR MEN: Lean In

^{Photo by Tinpixels via iStock}

One of the more powerful poses for men is to have him lean in toward the camera.

Typically done in a seated pose like above, this pose often looks best when the camera is slightly below the model's eye level.

By shooting slightly upward towards the model, it increases their powerful vibe in the shot.

Quick Tip: In seeking to achieve a powerful vibe, try using a dark background as was done above. Deep, saturated tones like blacks and blues provide a masculine look to the shot.

#11 Put Him in His Element

^{Photo by dusanpetkovic via iStock}

Not all portraits have to take place in a studio. In fact, putting the male model in his element can really help him relax so you can get a more natural-looking portrait.

Above, we see the leaning pose in action. It's a casual pose by itself, but paired with the context of being on this man's farm, you get a portrait that has that authentic vibe to it that's often so desirable.

You don't have to use the leaning pose, either. Instead, you can use any of the poses discussed thus far when putting the model in his element.

#12 Photo Poses for Men: Action Shot

^{Photo by mladenbalinovac via iStock}

I think one of the best photography poses for men is an action shot.

I'm not a huge fan of stuffy, heavily posed portraits, so male portraits like the one above, in which there's even the slightest notion of some movement are much more visually appealing.

So, you don't have to put your male model on a basketball court or photograph him lifting weights or something of the sort. Instead, find ways to give the viewer a sense that the model is being active in some way, and you'll find that the resulting image can be quite pleasing.

With that, you have 11 surefire poses for men you can utilize to create eye-catching portraits.

For some ideas for how to pose men that aren't models, check out the video above by Julia Trotti.

We Recommend

Beyond the Selfie: Creative Portrait Ideas to Elevate Your Travel Photography

Written by PT Editor on 06 March 2024.

Beyond the Selfie Creative Portrait Ideas to Elevate Your Travel Photography

^{Photo by FilippoBacci via iStock}

Everyone loves a good selfie, but let’s be honest…Do you really want your entire travel photo album full of selfies? We didn’t think so. There are so many fun and innovative ways to take portraits while traveling, and in this article, we hope to encourage you to experiment with a few of them next time you’re on vacation!

Below, we’ll explore four creative portrait ideas that will help elevate your travel photography. They include environmental, candid, cultural, and silhouette portraits. Moreover, we’ll recommend our favorite way to showcase your new and improved photos once you have returned home and share our top tips for travel photography.

Whether you are a hobbyist who wants to impress your friends back home, an influencer who wants better pictures for social media, or a professional who wants to capture stunning images for your clients, everyone needs inspiration occasionally. With that in mind, keep reading to discover which types of travel portrait photography inspire you the most!

Check out Chris Hau's video above to learn more about travel photography and how to improve your results.

Environmental Portraits for Travel Photography
Candid Portraiture for Travel Photography
Cultural Portraits for Travel Photography
Silhouette Portraits for Travel Photography
Showcase Your Travel Photography in a Photo Book
Recommended Photography Gea

Environmental Portraits for Travel Photography

^{Photo by recep-bg via iStock}

Environmental portraits are photos that utilize your natural surroundings to enhance the quality of the portrait. Iconic landmarks and beautiful natural features make excellent backdrops for portraits. So, next time you travel somewhere with a jaw-dropping landscape, snap a few photos with you and your loved ones in the frame instead of only scenic shots.

Two more advantages of environmental portraits are that they can make landscapes more interesting and are wonderful souvenirs. Shooting a subject in front of a landscape adds depth, context, and a sense of scale to the photo. At the same time, environmental portraits make great prints for hanging, photo albums for coffee tables, and cards for mailing out.

Candid Portraiture for Travel Photography

^{Photo by imgorthand via iStock}

Candid portraits are a fabulous way to capture authentic real-life moments when traveling. Staged photos are also great, but our favorite portraits are almost always the spontaneous ones. There’s just something special about seeing true emotion on someone's face that makes us light up when looking back on them later. Candid portraiture is a type of lifestyle photography.

Whether you are shooting candid portraits of people you know or random strangers, one key is to be discreet. When subjects know you are taking photos of them, their behavior changes (consciously or subconsciously). Therefore, one of our top travel photography tips is to use a telephoto lens for candid photography.

Learn More:

Cultural Portraits for Travel Photography

^{Photo by hadynyah via iStock}

One of the best parts about traveling is immersing yourself in the unique culture of different countries. So, why don’t you try to capture some of that culture on camera next time? Our favorite way to do this is by showcasing local attire, food, and traditions in our travel portraits. We like to shoot both images of ourselves blending in with the culture and some of the locals.

One super important thing to remember when traveling is to always respect the cultural sensitivities and follow the cultural rules of the country you are in. Read up on these topics before you travel so you can be prepared once you are there. Also, asking people for permission before taking their picture is a good idea, especially if it’s an intimate portrait.

Silhouette Portraits for Travel Photography

^{Photo by LeoPatrizi via iStock}

Last but not least, there are silhouette portraits. They are one of the most creative portrait ideas out there, and when shot correctly, the results are breathtaking. The key to this type of portrait is backlighting, which creates striking silhouettes in contrast to the background.

When shooting silhouette portraits, be aware that the light will constantly change. Due to this, you have to be willing to play around with different angles, poses, and camera settings to achieve the most dynamic results. Additionally, you can adjust your images in post-production to make them look just right.

The most impressive silhouette portraits are those shot with natural light, but you can also use an outdoor photography lighting kit to manipulate light and create silhouettes. For more information on this subject, check out our “Outdoor Photography Lighting Never Looked So Good” article.

Showcase Your Travel Photography in a Photo Book

Now that you have a big collection of gorgeous travel portraits, it’s time to build a photo book! Photo books are incredible memorabilia that preserve all your most treasured memories in one easy-to-view place.

While many types of photo books exist, softcover photo books pair particularly well with travel photography. That’s because they offer the perfect combination of quality, durability, and affordability. Other popular options include hardcover photo books, layflat photo books, and sewn photo books.

Photo Book Press is a terrific place to customize and order softcover photo books. It’s an easy-to-use online print shop selling high-quality products at competitive prices. In addition to softcover photo books, they also have hardcover photo books, layflat photo books, and sewn photo books. It’s a great selection for finding the perfect book to showcase your trips!

Recommended Photography Gear

Disclaimer: Just so you know, some of the cool stuff we mention comes with affiliate links, meaning we earn a commission if you buy (no extra charge to you!). Plus, we occasionally feature sponsored content, but rest assured, we only shout out products we genuinely stand behind.

Learn More:

^{"Public Domain: Tetons by Ansel Adams, 1942 (National Parks Service/NARA)" by pingnews.com}

We Recommend

Black and White Photography Terms

Written by PT Editor on 27 August 2021.

Black and White Photography Terms

^{photo byBenJacquot via iStock}

Black and white photography is a wonderful form of our chosen art medium, whether done in film or digitally. Most of us will likely be working in digital format, but most of the same black and white photography terms will apply equally to film and digital.

When browsing for black and white photography tips, you have likely come across other terms such as grayscale and monochrome and may be wondering what the differences are. It will also be beneficial to have definitions or explanations of some other terms associated with black and photography.

What Is Grayscale?

what is grayscale

^{photo bygoldhafen via iStock}

What is grayscale? Grayscale is actually a more precise definition or label for black and white photography. The images we make are rarely 100% white and 100% black, but rather are comprised of several different shades of gray in addition to pure white or pure black. So “grayscale” is simply another way to say “black and white” (or B&W) photography.

There is a nice tool called the grayscale, that photographers used to buy from Kodak that can now be found from dozens of makers, that has a complete scale of steps of gray (or grey in UK spelling) usually marked off in 5% steps.

what is grayscale 2

You can actually still get these from Tiffen on Amazon and other places.. It’s the same thing as the Kodak Q-13 Color Separation Guide and Gray Scale that has been an industry standard measuring tool for decades.

This Gray Scale is a good teaching and learning tool too, for learning about how light and shadow is seen photographically. In addition to the fun of learning, you can also use one as a control method for calibrating your editing monitor and checking how your exposure variations can change how the gray scale appears in grayscale photography.

What Is Monochrome?

what is monochrome

^{photo byayagiz via iStock}

What is monochrome? Is monochrome black and white or grayscale? In photography terms, monochrome refers to something that is all one color, though it can be different strengths of that single color.

So, a B&W image, a grayscale photo, can accurately be referred to as being monochrome since it is made of only one color, gray. Gray separates out to pure white and pure black at the extremes of intensity.

However, not all monochrome images are grayscale or black and white. An image made up solely of shades of red or green is also monochrome. Since lots of the technical side of photography deals with math, we’ll use a math logic method to explain it. All grayscale (black and white) images are monochrome. But not all monochrome images are grayscale.

So, grayscale = monochrome, but monochrome =/= grayscale.

Learn More:

Zone System

black and white photography tips

Anyone searching for digital black and white photography tips and wanting to fully understand black and white photography terms really to look at the Zone System, at least for an overall view of it. How in-depth you want to go will be up to each person, but you won’t be disappointed if you spend some serious time on it.

The Zone System was developed by Ansel Adams and Fred Archer in the late 1930s and early 1940s. The results of working within the Zone System for film and paper black and white photography can be seen and are discussed in-depth in several books:

Collectively, these are referred to as the Ansel Adams Photography series. If you’ve read my articles for a while, you know how big a fan I am of Ansel Adams. I think many landscape photographers would point to him and his work as major early influences.

How to Make Black and White Digital Photos

photography terms

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

There are two main methods that we can use to create our black and white or grayscale images digitally. One is in the camera and the other is in the post-processing program we use.

Capturing B&W in camera is fairly simple, you just switch to the black and white or grayscale mode in your camera menu. Funny thing is, in some cameras, this mode may be labeled monochrome. Don’t let that worry you, the monochrome will be grayscale.

This often creates a JPEG file of the image. Which is fine for casual shooting, but I like to capture in RAW and then use post processing to convert to grayscale. Lightroom has easy sliders that help you control how the image gets turned to B&W.

common black and white photography terms

^{photo byY.Gurevich via iStock}

What I like about this method is the control available for manipulating the contrast, the grayscale itself, and even the relationships in grayscale between different colors. This is also a fantastic learning tool for seeing how much difference attenuating the colors has on the final image.

For instance, by adjusting the sliders for blue down and red up, you can turn a blue sky virtually black, which makes puffy white clouds just seem to POP out of the image. Adjusting the green slider up and down has a great effect on foliage. You can even adjust so that it looks like an infrared image.

And since you captured in RAW, your original file still has all the color and exposure information available, allowing you to experiment again with different settings or to make a color final image. Which you can’t do if you capture a JPEG in the camera mode for grayscale with most brands.

You will see additional tools in the black and white convention menu of your post processing program. Some programs will adjust contrast separately, some have more fine tuning for the color sliders, some will allow adjusting exposure globally and others split it into shadow, midtones, and highlights, some have both styles of control.

The Art of Black and White

grayscale

^{photo byanatchant via iStock}

The earliest surviving photographic image is a monochrome image. Most of the history of photography is dominated by black and white, sometimes monochrome such as the sepia tone of daguerreotype metal plates and tintype.

A huge amount of pics in your family albums are likely black and white. Many of the images we love from the old masters are black and white. So much has been done with regard to the art of craft of black and white photography.

With such a rich history of the art of grayscale and monochrome photography, it makes a lot of sense to look into how B&W photography can be accomplished digitally. Besides that, it is incredibly fun and rewarding. Seriously, just try it out for yourself!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Buyer’s Guide: The Best Canon Camera Lens for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 05 October 2022.

Buyers Guide The Best Canon Camera Lens for Portraits

^{Photo by Mexico y mas via iStock}

Photographers searching for the best Canon camera lens for portraits have several good options. You can find lenses in a range of prices, focal lengths, lens apertures, and intended formats, too.

To help you narrow your search, I’ve compiled a list of Canon portrait lenses in the mirrorless Full-Frame Canon RF lens mount rated good, better, and best.

Canon lenses are extraordinarily sharp, and in many focal lengths, they have the fastest maximum apertures in their focal range. But that doesn't always make it the best portrait lens. So, let’s explore a few features that make a lens good for portraiture! Let’s also have a look at the advantages of buying pre-owned lenses from an online platform like MPB.

Features In Common of the Best Portrait Lenses

canon rf lenses

Photo by alvarez via iStock

Portrait lenses have a few features in common, each of which are met by the best Canon camera lens for portraits:

Excellent sharpness
Pleasing out-of-focus highlights (Bokeh)
Fast maximum aperture
Short telephoto capabilities

We’ll take that last item first, since any focal length lens can be used for a portrait, depending on what you’re planning for the final image. That being said, the short telephoto range of lenses (70mm to 135mm in Full-Frame format) have some advantages for being the best portrait lenses.

They are often somewhat fast, lending themselves to selective techniques. They give a pleasing apparent perspective to faces without undue distortion. Their focal length characteristics help diminish background subjects when used with other portrait photography techniques as well.

Check out the YouTube video above - “Best Lens for Portrait Photography” from photographer Pablo Strong - for some more reasons to look at certain types of lenses as the best portrait lens.

Canon RF Lenses

Canon RF lenses are all excellent lenses. The new lens mount is designed primarily for Full-Frame format mirrorless cameras (though Canon released RF-S lenses earlier this year). It’s a wider diameter lens mount, so ultra-fast lenses can be made for it. Plus, the short flange distance means we can easily adapt other lens mounts to fit the Canon R series of cameras.

Since mirrorless Full Frame cameras are the norm for many serious photographers, I’ll focus on Canon RF lenses as my picks for the best Canon camera lens for portraits.

Learn More:

Best Canon Camera Lens for Portraits - A Good Option

Canon RF 24 70mm f2.8 L

Modern zoom lenses give amazing performance, especially those made as pro series lenses. The Canon RF 24-70mm f/2.8 L is the Good option for my best Canon Canon camera lens for portraits. It’s a pro series lens with weather sealing, excellent sharpness, and a fast maximum aperture. The short telephoto focal length at the long end of the zoom range is ideal for portraits.

Since this zoom also covers normal and moderate wide angle, it can be used for environmental portraits, group portraits, and full-length portraits, as well as the portrait standard of head and shoulders composition.

It’s not cheap (none of my best lenses lists ever are), but it’s not outrageously high-priced either. In fact, you can find a pre-owned version of this lens in Like New condition from MPB for under $2,300.00. That includes a six-month warranty!

Best Canon Camera Lens for Portraits - A Better Option

Canon RF 85mm

Surprise! Looking at the catalog of Canon lenses, you probably already saw this fantastic lens and pegged it as a sure thing for this Canon camera lens for portraits list.

The Canon RF 85mm f/1.2 L is most definitely a fantastic lens for portraits and for other types of photography. Since Canon R series cameras have such good low light performance, the f/1.2 maximum aperture can really open up some creative possibilities for more advanced photographers.

One of the best things about this superbly sharp pro-style lens is the fabulous Bokeh you can achieve with the faster apertures. Anywhere from f/1.2 to around f/4.0 or f/5.6 gives outstanding selective focus opportunities.

Plus, the Sweet Spot of a fast lens is still very fast. For instance, two or three stops down from maximum with this Canon portrait lens is still pretty fast at f/2.8 or f/4.0.

Pricing of this lens in Like New condition on the pre-owned market at MPB ranges from just under to just over $2,400.00. Again, this lens comes with MPB’s six-month warranty and the peace of mind that comes with MPB’s thorough inspection from a qualified product specialist. The grading system MPB has devised means you know exactly what condition the lens is in before you buy.

Best Canon Camera Lens for Portraits - The Best Option

Canon RF 85mm Macro

I chose the Canon RF 85mm f/2 Macro IS STM as the Best option in my best Canon camera lens for portraits list over the f/1.2 L series lens for two big reasons. First, it’s amazingly affordable, and second, it’s a macro lens!

Affordability is important for many photographers, including well-established professionals. Why? It’s simple - you want the maximum bang for your buck dedicated to photography equipment. You don’t want to drop dollars on something pricey when you can get the same or better out of something else.

Unless, of course, you just really need or want the extra features, quality, or benefits of the higher-priced gear. In that case, go for it! Even with that decision, you can save money by capitalizing on the fantastic benefits of used or pre-owned cameras and lenses from a reputable online platform such as MPB.

Back to the best Canon camera lens for portraits list…

The Canon RF 85mm f/2.0 Macro lens has a very fast maximum aperture of f/2.0, which allows for all sorts of selective focus techniques. Plus, it’s only 1 1/3rds stops removed from f/1.2, a fact that may come as a surprise considering the significant price difference between this and the f/1.2L option discussed earlier..

The macro focusing ability gets you all the way to ½ lifesize, or a ratio of 1:2 macro. This makes it a great choice for all-around photography. On top of all of that, you can find this lens in Like New condition for under $450 at MPB. Now that’s a great deal!

Best Prices for Canon RF Lenses

new mpb homepage

As you probably already know, I am a huge fan of getting new-to-me gear. As long as you choose a well-respected dealer, such as MPB, you can avoid the anxiety of getting taken by the seller (which rarely happens anyway, but I like the guarantees of MPB nonetheless).

Besides the price benefits of MPB, they offer a seven-day return window and the six-month warranty I spoke of earlier. These features are available on most items in MPB’s inventory.

You also get detailed condition reports on every item in their stock. As I mentioned earlier, these condition reports are made by qualified product specialists after a thorough examination of the item.

Might I suggest that you think about using MPB to sell or trade your own used cameras and lenses, too. Not only does this allow you to get rid of gear you no longer need, but the value you get from the trade-in will help offset the cost of a new-to-you Canon RF portrait lens.

Canon Portrait Lens Other Choices

Canon EF 50mm

Here is a short list of some other options for the best Canon camera lens for portraits that includes lenses for EF and EF-S mounts. Enjoy!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Candid Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 26 August 2021.

Candid Photography Tips

^{photo byLiderina via iStock}

Candid portrait photography is one of the most common types of photography for photographers of all skill levels, along with vacation photography and small product photography for selling on websites like Etsy and eBay.

We have some useful candid photography tips to show how to take candid photos of friends, relatives, and others. Along the way, we’ll also give some basic portrait photography tips, since they overlap quite a bit with candid photography tips.

Most of these candid photography tips are given with beginner photographers in mind, but I find it is often beneficial for myself to go over things I already know very well as an exercise, since this often stimulates my photographic appetite.

Be Comfortable With Your Gear

portrait photography tips

^{photo byMStudioImages via iStock}

I talk about this a lot, but it’s a vital part of learning photography, understanding what our equipment is doing, what it’s capable of, and how we can control it.

The reason why you will want to be completely familiar with your gear is that the nature of candid photography means there is no setting things up, no adjusting lighting, and no do-overs. Actually, you can pose and compose somewhat when doing candid photography, but you still need to be ready as the photographic moment occurs.

When the kids and their pets are doing something cute, you won’t want to be fiddling around with modes or settings, you want to capture the real thing, a truly candid moment. So, presetting the camera controls or at least choosing the right auto or semi-auto mode becomes an important skill to know.

Put People At Ease

candid portrait photography

^{photo byLuckyBusiness via iStock}

I know I said that posing isn’t necessarily needed, but that really depends on just how candid you want the images to be. Some candid shots can be posed on the fly, such as telling a small group of people to get closer for your group portrait.

The way you put people at ease in these semi-candid situations is to be very clear and friendly with very minimal posing requests or instructions. Since you won’t be fiddling around with camera controls, you won’t allow time for the subjects to get nervous or self conscious about having their picture taken.

Putting the subject or subjects at ease also has a lot to do with how you compose yourself. Not how you do photographic composition, but your manner and your natural poise. If you’re not acting like a stalker or one of those annoying, pushy, in the way photogs, your subjects will act more naturally around you.

Learn More:

Dignify the Subjects

how to take candid photos

^{photo byandreswd via iStock}

Unless your candid photography is more like street photography (which I see as an artistic form of photojournalism), your friends will appreciate your being flattering to them. Friends tend to not like those “Gotcha!” moments of candid photography.

Now, suppose you actually are wanting to do more of a street photography form of candid photography. While you and your subjects don’t know each other, you can still treat strangers with dignity as you capture their image.

When engaging in street photography, there is a fine line between intrusion and capturing reality as it happens. Having a feel for your subject matter can oftentimes make the difference between successfully capturing candid photography and sticking our nose where it may not be welcome.

Watch Your Lighting

how to take candid photos of friends

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

Candid portrait photography tips from me will always include a word about lighting. Again, this often involves being completely familiar with your equipment.

If you are shooting outside in bright sunlight, it’s a good idea to keep the direct sunlight out of your subject’s eyes. So again, you want to be familiar with how to adjust your camera modes so that you can capture a good view of your subject without them squinting and without your exposure turning them into a silhouette, unless a silhouette is what you want to capture.

The Decisive Moment

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo bypowerofforever via iStock}

Here is where I turn to the Old Masters again. I find we can learn a lot from photographers working 40 to 80 years ago in the field of street photography.

One of the pioneers of street photography and candid photography was Henri Cartier-Bresson. What made his work so special, what defined him as a true pioneer of candid and street photography was his technique of capturing the decisive moment.

One of my favorite Henri Cartier-Bresson quotes is "I suddenly understood that a photograph could fix eternity in an instant.” In other words, with a camera, you can capture a slice of time, a piece of reality, and fix it permanently in a medium of art, namely photography.

The decisive moment isn’t always the peak of action, such as in action photography. It also isn’t necessarily the climax of any situation. It’s interesting that the decisive moment, much like love, can’t be adequately explained with mere words. You really have to immerse yourself in the scene, the situation, the feel of the moment.

If you really like the street photography style more so than capturing candids of friends and family, a study, at least a brief one, of photojournalism is going to open your thoughts to being able to see what might be the decisive moment for your image capture.

Pick up a book or two about or by some of the Old Masters. Besides Henri Cartier-Bresson, also look for Robert Frank, Dorothea Lange, Daido Moriyama, Diane Arbus, André Kertész, and Fan Ho.

What Is Candid?

improve the quality of portraits

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

As you looked at the title of this article, what came to your mind first? Was it candid photography tips covering how to take candid photos of friends and family? Or were you thinking of those amazing street scenes that occur right in front of you without warning?

Candid photography covers all of that and more. What it has in common is that you need to be familiar with your equipment, watch your lighting, treat your subjects with dignity, and capture a decisive moment, whatever it may be for that candid image.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Challenge Yourself by Taking Different Types of Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 25 February 2020.

Challenge Yourself by Taking Different Types of Portraits

^{Photo by NOTAVANDAL on Unsplash}

There are so many different types of portraits, but more often than not I find myself falling into a rut and only taking the same portraits over and over again.

Creatively, it’s boring. Plus, my clients don’t love these traditional portraits as much as some of the more candid shots I take.

I’m going to challenge you to take one of all of these types of portraits over the next week.

But before we get to that...

I just completed my review of several canvas printing companies to see who's the best in 2020. Check it out in the video below:

Self-Portraits

different kinds of portraits 2

^{Photo by Hannah Xu on Unsplash}

Self-portraits are one of my favorite different types of portraits because you get to present all sides of your artwork. You’re the photographer, but you’re also the model. You’re controlling the shot and controlling the mood.

People have also explored such a wide range of self-portraits. One of my favorite self-portrait pieces in recent years was the man who took a photo of himself every day for over a decade.

different kinds of portraits 1

^{Photo by cottonbro from Pexels}

I wrote an article on self-portrait tips a while back that you should check out before you embark on your self-portrait journey.

Pro Tip: Focus on your imperfections. They show you’re human.

Recommended Portrait Lighting Books:

Candid Portraits

types of portraits 3

^{photo by stockfour via iStock}

This is an easy to practice portrait because you can snap candid portraits in the middle of traditional portrait shoots.

The best candid portraits showcase the personalities of your subject.

types of portraits 4

^{Photo by Lukas Rodriguez from Pexels}

If your subject is serious, picture them staring off into the distance. If they’re full of joy, grab a pic of them laughing.

No matter how shy your model might be, they’ll be thrilled to have photos of them that show them what they look like to the outside world.

Pro Tip: Ask your subjects questions about something they love and their personality will naturally start to show.

Learn More:

Newborn Portraits

newborn portraits 5

^{photo by katrinaelena via iStock}

If I’m honest, this is one of my least favorite different types of portraits because babies are very difficult to pose, and parents of newborns can be a lot to handle depending upon their personalities.

But, newborn portraits allow photographers to practice a slew of techniques you never otherwise would, including immense patience, creating composite images, and working on a tiny scale.

newborn portraits 6

^{photo by Liudmila_Fadzeyeva via iStock}

Plus, it should be relatively easy for you to find a newborn to photograph, since many newborn photographers charge immense prices parents cannot afford to pay. If you price your work right, you could have a lot of business!

Pro Tip: Keep the baby safe by always having a spotter on hand for newborn portraits with props. It’s much easier to photoshop someone out than deal with a hurt infant.

Environmental Portraits

environmental portraits 7

^{Photo by Сергей Гладкий from Pexels}

I don’t love the term “environmental portraits,” but I do love the artform. Calling them “environmental portraits” makes me think that nature somehow needs to be involved in the photos, but that’s not what this means.

Environmental portraits just allow you to capture your subject in their environment… wherever they feel most comfortable. This can be a cityscape, like in the photograph above, or it can be the ocean, like in the photograph below.

environmental portraits 8

^{photo by Vladimir Vladimirov via iStock}

The environment that you choose (and really the environment your subject chooses) should highlight something about themselves, whether that’s a particular love they have or something larger about their personality.

Pro Tip: When shooting an environmental portrait, ask your subject questions about themselves before you scout locations. This will prevent any costly, last-minute changes.

No Matter What Portrait You’re Shooting, You Need a Gorgeous Print

One of the easiest upsells I have in my product list is a canvas print from CanvasHQ. Canvas prints are relatively inexpensive, but they last a lifetime.

And, when you purchase canvases from CanvasHQ, your frame is handcrafted, your portrait is hand-stretched and only the best inks are used to ensure the longevity of your portrait.

If you go through all the work of creating a unique portrait, why not immortalize it in a canvas print that will last generations?!

CanvasHQ will help you select the best sizing and print options to make your photos shine. That’s something that you and your clients will appreciate.

Portraits are a great way to challenge your creativity, but why not make some extra cash while you’re at it?

Learn More:

We Recommend

Christmas Family Photoshoots: A Lasting Legacy for Generations to Come

Written by PT Editor on 05 December 2023.

Christmas Family Photoshoots A Lasting Legacy for Generations to Come

^{Photo by gorodenkoff via iStock}

It’s time for your Christmas family photoshoot! Where are you going to go for yours? Or will you do your family’s Christmas photoshoot yourself?

Since we’re right at the traditional start of that season, I thought a fun look at the Christmas family photoshoot was in order.

Let’s quickly look at the history of Christmas photo shoots and explore a few tips for finding the ideal photographer for your holiday photos (or taking the photos yourself).

Let’s get to it!

History of the Christmas Family Photoshoot

^{Photo by FG Trade Latin via iStock}

I find the history behind photography trends so interesting. The history of the Christmas family photoshoot is tied up with the history of Christmas cards.

The first known Christmas card sent from one person to another dates back to the early 1600s. There may have been Christmas cards before then, but it’s hard to tell how widespread the practice was before the first commercially available versions came out in about 1840.

Those early cards were made in Great Britain; the earliest American-made cards were produced in about 1870. The British Royal Family started a tradition of using family images, either paintings or photographs, for Christmas cards.

With the advent of popularly available photography in the late 1800s (thanks, George Eastman!), regular people could include personal images in greeting cards and photo postcards.

At some point, it became a regular thing to schedule a Christmas photoshoot to include a photo of our family in a greeting card. I have photo albums with Christmas family pics dating back to the 1920s. I also remember families doing a Christmas photoshoot whenever they went on vacation, which is why I have old Christmas cards showing friends at the beach during summer vacation.

Why We Still Like the Christmas Family Photoshoot

^{Photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

We still like these types of pics because they hold good emotions and good feelings. Whatever time of year we do it, a Christmas photoshoot of ourselves, our friends, our families, or colleagues makes us feel good, and we want to share them.

We share a lot of images now using electronic communication. We send emails, create web pages, post on our personal blogs, or share on social media platforms.

Many of the images we share and see from others are not professionally produced but tend to be fun ideas or centered around important events.

A good family portrait, professionally done, either formal or informal, is a great way to get an image we would be proud to send out to others. By the way, family Christmas cards are still a big thing. We can take the images from our Christmas family photoshoot and input them into a kiosk at a local store or upload them to an online printing service and get our very own perfect family Christmas card.

What To Look for In a Family Portrait Photographer

^{Photo by Funkey Factory via iStock}

If you want to have your own personal images of your family for making a family Christmas photo greeting card, there are two main ways to get this done.

Both of them involve a Christmas family photoshoot in which you and the family go to a photographer (or they come to you), and you get a professionally produced family portrait. To use in your family cards, you either need the photographer to produce greeting cards for you or you need to be able to purchase rights to use the image yourself.

Now, what should you look for in a photographer for a Christmas photoshoot?

Creativity and Style

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

A skilled family portrait photographer should have a distinctive style that aligns with your preferences. Look for someone with a creative eye who can capture images in a way that resonates with you. Review their portfolio to get a sense of their artistic approach and see if it aligns with the aesthetic you're looking for.

Experience with Family Photography

While a photographer may excel in other genres, family photography often requires a unique set of skills…

A good family portrait photographer should have experience working with families, understanding how to capture genuine emotions, and managing group dynamics, especially when children are involved. Ask to see examples of their previous family portrait sessions.

Patience and Interpersonal Skills

^{Photo by Fly View Productions via iStock}

Photographing families, especially those with children, demands patience and excellent interpersonal skills. A good photographer should be able to make everyone feel comfortable in front of the camera, creating a relaxed atmosphere that allows for natural and authentic expressions. Patience is crucial for dealing with unexpected challenges that may arise during the shoot.

Attention to Detail

Pay attention to a photographer's attention to detail, both during the shoot and in the final edited images. Look for someone who ensures that every aspect of the photo, from composition to lighting, is carefully considered. Attention to detail extends to post-production as well, where editing should enhance the images without appearing overly manipulated.

Professionalism and Communication

A good family portrait photographer should exhibit professionalism in all aspects of their work. This includes clear communication about pricing, scheduling, and any other logistical details. They should be responsive to your questions or concerns and be punctual for the photo session. Professionalism also extends to delivering the final images within the agreed-upon timeframe.

But, there's another way to tackle your Christmas photoshoot…

How To Do a Christmas Family Photoshoot Yourself

^{Photo by andresr via iStock}

You can do a Christmas family photoshoot yourself if you have the appropriate gear and the skill to use that gear properly.

Part of the equipment list for making your own pics from a self-produced Christmas family photoshoot includes lighting gear. Just as your camera and lens need to be high quality to be used for professional photography, the lighting gear you use needs to be professionally capable.

Hobolite Mini Top

I found one of the best lighting kits ever from Hobolite - the Hobolite Mini. Here is my Photography Talk YouTube channel test report video of the Hobolite Mini showing their ease of use and high quality:

The Hobolite Mini is an LED light that can be powered by battery power or wall power. It’s extremely compact, bright enough at 20 watts for whatever you want to light up, and is super rugged. It is available as a stand-alone item or in one of two kits.

Hobolite Mini with filters

The standard kit includes the Hobolite Mini, a power adapter and cable, barn doors, honeycomb light modifier, a diffuser dome, 4 color filter gels, and a sturdy bag to hold it all. The Creator Kit (shown above) has all of that and adds a mount for attaching to your camera, a tripod mount adapter, and a very nice mini tripod for placing the light just where you need it.

Hobolite Mini

Don’t settle for poorly lit iPhone photos at Christmas this year. Instead, invest in tools like high-quality lighting that will help you create far better images without breaking the bank.

For ideas on lighting, posing, composition, post-processing, and other things, look on our YouTube channel and also right here on the PhotographyTalk main site for tons of instruction, tips, hints, and ideas.

It’s Christmas family photoshoot time! What are YOU going to do?

Other Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Circular Polarizers Aren't Just for Landscapes

Written by PT Editor on 24 February 2020.

Circular Polarizers Arent Just for Landscapes

^{Photo by Evan Dvorkin on Unsplash}

Circular Polarizers are one of the most common and most useful tools in our bag of photography gear. Almost any photographer, even absolute beginners, know that circular polarizers can transform your landscape images into better photos with just a little bit of effort.

What some photographers don’t know, or maybe forget in the heat of taking pictures, is that circular polarizers can be used in a wide range of photographic settings and situations.

Are Filters Still Relevant?
What Does A Circular Polarizer Do?
Styles of Photography that Benefit from Circular Polarizers
Helpful Circular Polarizer Reminders

Are Filters Still Relevant?

why do you need a polarizer 1

^{Photo by Christian Fregnan on Unsplash}

Some photographers have a mindset that on-lens filters aren’t necessary in our modern digital photography world. After all, can’t we adjust everything in Photoshop or another image manipulation or post processing program?

Actually, no we can’t. Besides, some of the things that can be adjusted in post-processing are better when done in-camera. These programs are best used to enhance our images. We should still strive to make the best RAW files and JPEGs we can before we get to the processing stage.

Filter types that I hardly ever even put in my anymore are color correction filters for color films and the classic contrast filters for B&W films such as the deep red, light green, or yellow filters. Since these were all designed around and used for film photography, there isn’t much use for them for digital imaging.

Two extremely useful types of lens filters for digital photography gear are graduated neutral density (GND) filters and circular polarizer (C-PL) filters.

Recommended Landscape Photography Books:

What Does A Circular Polarizer Do?

photography gear 6

^{Photo by Tony Reid on Unsplash}

How does a polarizer work? In simple terms, a polarizer filter controls polarized light. Polarized light is everywhere. Many times it’s a reflection. Light is either absorbed by or reflects off of things. From tiny dust and water molecules in the sky, to the surface of a lake or lagoon, to glass covered skyscrapers in the city, so many things reflect and polarize light.

Other objects you may recognize as reflective but that can be tamed with circular polarizers are the leaves of trees and other foliage, car and truck windshields, and facial skin.

When considering the question of why you need a polarizer, it pays to think outside the box. Almost anything reflective can be tamed by use of circular polarizers with one notable exception. Metallic reflections aren’t well controlled by a C-PL on the lens. For metal, you need to filter the light source. Easy to do in a studio, but not generally accessible outdoors in sunlight

why do you need a polarizer 2

An excellent example of a high-quality circular polarizer for many different lenses is the Kenko Puro Slim Circular Polarizer Filter.

Besides the superb optical characteristics common with all Kenko filters, I also appreciate the slim profile of the rings and mount. Thinner rings lessen the chances of vignetting with wide-angle lenses or the problems of adjusting when combined with rigid lens hoods.

Learn More:

Styles of Photography that Benefit from Circular Polarizers

photography gear 5

^{Photo by Ron McClenny on Unsplash}

By the way, I should point out that there are two types of polarizers. The circular polarizers (C-PL) we’re discussing, and linear polarizers (PL). If you have a modern DSLR or mirrorless, stick with circular polarizers, as linear polarizers could negatively affect the in camera metering system and autofocus sensors.

Landscape

photography gear 4

Pretty obvious why...

Large expanses of open sky. Lakes, oceans, rivers. Leaves of trees in forests and blades of grass in meadows, wet or dry. All of these have polarized light that can be tamed to produce dark blue skies with puffy clouds, deepen colors of plant life, remove glare from water and sand or rocks.

As you can see above, there is a significant difference in the results you get without a C-PL (left) and with a Kenko C-PL (right).

Cityscape and Architectural

what does a circular polarizer do 7

^{Photo by Maurício Mascaro from Pexels}

Most of the same reasons listed for landscapes apply here. Anything with lots of sky showing could benefit from circular polarizers. Cityscapes and architecture tend to have a lot of glass and stone, both of which can be very reflective. Concrete and asphalt reflect too, especially if wet.

Real Estate

what does a circular polarizer do 8

^{Photo by Francesca Tosolini on Unsplash}

Real estate is architecture. Part of what may need to be shown in real estate photography involves a lot of windows, but also tile flooring or counters, as well as polished furniture.

For real estate, you want the images to showcase the property in order to give someone a reason to make such a large purchase, so you want to realistically enhance the beauty of the home or business property.

Aerial and Drone

how does a polarizer work 9

^{Photo by Derek Thomson on Unsplash}

Believe it not, there are more than drone users engaging in aerial photography. Regardless of how the camera gets in the air, polarizers are a virtual necessity for aerial photography. From the air, most of the ground below reflects polarized light for one reason or another. To avoid muddled colors and lack of detail due to haze, use a polarizer.

Automotive

how does a polarizer work 10

^{photo byMikeVanSchoonderwalt via iStock}

Lots of glass, reflective roads, pretty colors, all of these are reasons to use circular polarizers for imaging cars, trucks, trains, and other vehicles. Just remember that bare metal and even metalized paint may not be affected much, but everything else will.

A great trick for photographing cars to make them look amazing is to wet down the pavement where they’re parked. The reflection on the ground adds to the visual appeal of the image.

People, Portraits, Weddings

how does a polarizer work 11

^{Photo by mohamed Abdelgaffar from Pexels}

In addition to the surroundings having polarized light, the skin of a portrait subject has a small amount of reflectivity. So does some makeup. Using a circular polarizer can enhance the natural beauty or interest of virtually any subject.

Another plus about using a polarizer for a portrait is that these filters have about 2 stops of density. Thus, you will have to either open the f-stop or change the shutter speed or ISO to compensate. If you open the f-stop, you give yourself some selective focus opportunities.

Helpful Circular Polarizer Reminders

why do you need a polarizer 12

^{Photo by Marc Kleen on Unsplash}

These filters will affect your exposure, since they add about 2 stops of density. Your camera meter reads through the filter, so compensation will be figured in, it’s just a good idea to be aware of the added density.

Polarization is not always uniform, so large expanses of polarized scene elements may not record evenly. It’s usually only evident in sky shots, though.

Keep it clean. It’s part of your lens’ optical path, so be aware of dirt or smudges on both sides of the filter before attaching it.

Don’t relegate that C-PL filter to the bottom of the bag when shooting subjects other than landscapes! As I’ve shown you here, it's useful in many applications.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas

Written by PT Editor on 07 March 2023.

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas

^{Photo by Ridofranze via iStock}

Maternity photography is a profitable and fun genre of family portraiture. Finding creative maternity photography ideas can be somewhat of a challenge, though.

However, with a little ingenuity, any photographer engaging in this type of photography can create beautiful and unique images.

Some creative maternity photography ideas include unique posing and wardrobe choices, exciting compositions, and products to offer as a maternity photographer. Let’s have a detailed look at each!

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Posing
Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Wardrobe Choices
Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Composition Tips
Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Exposure and Lighting
Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Photo Products
Final Thoughts on Creative Maternity Photography Ideas
Recommended Photography Gear

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Posing

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas Posing

^{Photo by Wirestock via iStock}

Maternity photography is a special event for expectant parents. So, we really want to make sure we put our clients at ease with the process. Make the photo shoot about them, and it will automatically be somewhat relaxed. Try to capture full-length, mid-length, and close-up views.

Many creative maternity photography ideas concerning posing happen during the final trimester of pregnancy, when the baby bump is pronounced. The shape of the expectant mother is decidedly different during the later stages of pregnancy, which is part of what makes maternity photography a thing in the first place.

One way or another, that baby bump takes center stage. Highlighting it will be easy with some creative maternity photography ideas about posing. This might include framing the baby bump naturally with the mother’s arms. Cradling the infant in the womb is the feel or effect most try to create or invoke.

Turning the mother 45 degrees and having them sit or recline is a way to vary the standard posing we usually see. Slightly bent legs, whether sitting or standing, appear more natural and comfortable. Including their partner in the image is another good posing technique that creates a sense of family. Keep the session open, light, and fun, and see what develops naturally.

Above is a YouTube video from Lola Melanie on the B&H channel with some wonderful tips for improving your maternity photography.

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Wardrobe Choices

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas Wardrobe Choices

^{Photo by Di_Media via iStock}

The wardrobe options for maternity photography are a grab bag as well. One of the major options is whether or not to have the baby bump covered with clothing. Both options also have numerous in-between stages, with some overlapping depending on styling and posing choices.

Showing skin can make some mothers a little self-conscious. Taking some test shots and letting her see them on a tethered device might help ease her tension. But if she doesn’t want to, don’t force the issue. We want the images to look relaxed and natural, after all.

Loose, flowing drapes are a nice way to bridge the gap between uncovered and covered. Lacy, airy fabrics also fit well in this in-between stage.

Maternity wear has so many styles from which to choose, romantic, business wear, active clothing, beachwear, earrings, bath robes, jeans and a crop top - the selection is virtually endless in scope. Let the mother choose and then design the shoot around it.

Learn More:

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Composition Tips

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas Composition Tips

^{Photo by StefaNikolic via iStock}

Composition tips and techniques accompany the posing tips for creative maternity photography ideas. As stated earlier, shoot from various distances, capturing full-length body views, ¾ or mid-length, and some close-ups.

Environmental portraits work fantastically as maternity photography compositions. You can also include people, especially the mother’s spouse or partner and other family members such as other kids. You can involve their favorite pets, too!

The Rule of Thirds works exceptionally well for maternity photos, but be sure to use your entire grab bag of composition tools, like negative space, asymmetry, S-curves, and leading lines (such as legs or arms).

Whether seated, reclining, standing in groups or singly, keep watch on those legs and arms. Avoid awkward looks by suggesting where and how to position the subject’s limbs. Fitting them into a composition tip, such as curves and lines, is a simple method to accomplish this.

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Exposure and Lighting

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas Exposure and Lighting

^{Photo by Space_Cat via iStock}

What mood is desired in your maternity photos? Low-key and high-key lighting effects can make two radically different moods with the same exact posing and composition. Using a modified Rembrandt lighting configuration in black and white or color is also one of the better creative maternity photography ideas.

The silhouette is a lighting and posing technique that also makes fantastic maternity images. You can keep it minimal with a featureless backlit subject or incorporate a semi-silhouette lighting setup, emphasizing the maternity aspect while providing a subtle level of romance.

Above is a nice tutorial on backlit maternity photography from Kelly Brownon YouTube.

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas - Photo Products

Creative Maternity Photography Ideas Photo Products

Once you have the images from your creative maternity photography ideas, the subject needs to receive them somehow. Digital delivery is a big thing in this modern era of photography, but a physical print or book is the cherry on top of a successful maternity photo session.

The occasion deserves a special level of excellence in any photographic product we offer to our client, friend, or family member. Saal Digital is one of the highest-quality photo printers for these items. Let’s see what they have that fits into our theme of creative maternity photography ideas.

BABY ANNOUNCEMENT CARDS

Baby Announcement Cards

Baby announcement cards are a wonderful way to introduce the newborn infant, but they also make nice maternity photo cards. After all, a maternity photo hints that something big is about to happen!

You can add several levels of personalization to the cards, and Saal Digital ups the ante by using FSC® certified papers. These papers are produced sustainably, using solar energy banks for their printeries and carbon-neutral production and shipping.

SOFTCOVER PHOTO BOOKS

Softcover Photo Books

Softcover photo books are an area in which Saal Digital excels. Their book designs can be customized for whatever style or occasion. They can also be personalized with text and different cover designs and also come with lay-flat pages and optional presentation boxes

PHOTO PLAQUES

Photo Plaques

Photo plaques are a display of your images that is unique in how and where to show them off. Instead of hanging on a wall, they stand on their own with either an acrylic block or metal feet. These plaques are available in several sizes and can be made as acrylic, metal, or gallery prints.

As far as finding creative maternity photography ideas, using Saal Digital as your professional printing solution is a fantastic idea. While you’re on their site, browse and explore everything else they offer.

Final Thoughts on Creative Maternity Photography Ideas

Thoughts on Creative Maternity Photography Ideas

^{Photo by SVPhilon via iStock}

Truth be told, there are more creative maternity photography ideas than you can shake a stick at. I’ve only just begun to show you what’s out there! You’d do well to explore the other maternity photography tips we have on this site.

As ever, trust your skills, use a high quality photo printer, and have fun while making the entire experience enjoyable for the mother-to-be. The more fun you have, the more fun she’ll have, and the better your images will be!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Depth of Field Explained

Written by PT Editor on 27 April 2020.

Depth of Field Explained

A well-known depth of field definition is the distance between the nearest and furthest parts of the scene that are sharp enough to be in acceptable focus.

Most photographers know that depth of field is affected by lens aperture. A small aperture deepens depth of field and a wide aperture makes it more shallow.

One of the more common depth of field mistakes is thinking that lens aperture is all that controls it. So, what else controls depth of field?

Depth of Field Explained

923px Circles of confusion lens diagram.svg

^{Original: GoliardicoVector: cmglee / CC BY-SA via WikiMedia Commons}

Bear with me, it’s going to get a little technical in here for a little bit.

The Circle of Confusion is the smallest point of light hitting the focal plane, whether a sensor or film, which describes the point of focus. Planes both in front of and behind the point of focus are other circles which are larger than the point called the circle of confusion.

The circle of confusion is the point of exact focus, the sharpest the lens is resolving at that point. The larger circles fore and aft of the focal plane are not exact focus, but they will be in enough focus or sharpness to still appear to the viewer to be in focus.

It may sound extremely technical, but this is the most accurate depth of field definition. The image above helps us visualize the concept.

If you’re still unclear about the concept of the Circle of Confusion, check out the video above from Adorama.

In this video, Mark Wallace takes a deep dive into precisely what the Circle of Confusion is.

It’s always important to get the most specific reasoning behind the Science part of Photography so we can start working on the Art part of our fine craft.

What Controls Depth of Field - Aperture

depth of field 1

^{Photo by Valiphotos from Pexels}

Lens aperture or f-stop is the first factor we usually consider for controlling depth of field. There is still only one point of sharpest focus, described by the science we just examined. But there is a range of what is acceptable focus, what is sharp enough.

The transition from sharp to unsharp is gradual. The smaller the lens aperture is, the more gradual the transition and and larger the range of acceptable sharpness or focus.

Depth of field range generally extends from about ⅓ the distance closer to the camera to ⅔ the distance further. So that would be ⅓ in front of the point of sharpest focus to ⅔ behind it. The wider the aperture (i.e., f/2), the shorter that overall range is. Conversely, a smaller aperture (i.e., f/16) gives a longer range.

This ⅓ to ⅔ consideration is not entirely consistent when calculating all the variables, but it’s a good enough approximation to use in our decisions concerning depth of field. Especially when focusing at medium distances with lenses close to our chosen format’s normal focal length.

As an example, if we focus on a portrait subject’s eyes and use a very wide aperture, we will end up with a very shallow depth of field. This is called selective focus and is a great portrait technique for isolating the subject from their surroundings.

depth of field 2

^{Photo byMarcus Aurelius}

To get the deep depth of field landscape photography often uses, we stop the lens down to a smaller aperture. Extreme depth of field tricks can be created with small apertures and setting the lens focus control to the hyperfocal distance, another fantastic tool or technique photographers can take advantage of.

What Controls Depth of Field - Focus Distance

depth of field examples 3

^{Photo by Taryn Elliott from Pexels}

Another depth of field variable we must take into account is how close or far the camera and subject are. The closer the subject is, the range of acceptable sharpness will be shallower. It gets deeper the further away from the camera the focused subject is.

This is another consequence of the circle of confusion. The circle of confusion, and thus the range of acceptable focus sharpness, changes much quicker the closer the lens is focused. This is why it’s difficult to get a close up subject in focus along with the background.

depth of field examples 4

^{Photo by Oleg Magni from Pexels}

Using extremely small apertures and focussing the lens to the hyperfocal distance will give you the greatest depth of field available for your combination of focal length, lens aperture, and focus distance.

What Controls Depth of Field - Lens Focal Length

depth of field aperture 5

^{Photo by Anthony Macajone from Pexels}

At the same subject distance and aperture, a shorter focal length lens will have more depth of field than longer focal lengths. However, the field of view is different if you keep at the same distance.

If you physically moved the camera closer while shooting the shorter focal length lens to make the subject the same size as what you saw with the longer lens, the depth of field at the same f-stop or aperture would actually be the same.

Generally speaking, though, we don’t usually do that. Our focal length choice tends to center on other considerations. Still, that’s a part of the equation and it again goes back to the pure science of the circle of confusion.

depth of field definition 6

^{Photo by @thiszun (follow me on IG, FB) from Pexels}

By the way, another definition of circle of confusion, a tongue-in-cheek version, is a group of photographers sitting around trying to explain depth of field. Cracks me up!

Learn More:

What Controls Depth of Field - Sensor Size

depth of field definition 7

The size of the film format or sensor format affects depth of field due to what is measured as the normal lens for different formats. Since focal length does factor in here, it belongs in our consideration.

A smaller format (i.e., MFT, or micro four thirds, like the Panasonic GH5) will have a shorter focal lens as the normal lens in terms of field of view and normal perspective. A full frame format camera (i.e., like the Nikon Z7) has a generally accepted normal focal length of 50mm, the Nifty Fifty.

depth of field landscape photography 8

It should be noted that this focal length does not meet the strictest definition of a normal focal length. That would actually be 43.6mm for the 24mm X 36mm sized format. But the Nifty Fifty was a simple design and it worked well for a 1:1 ratio of naked eye view to the apparent field of view in the camera viewfinder.

In crop sensor cameras (like the Canon EOS M6 Mark II), the crop factor helps us compare lens focal lengths and apparent field of view of lenses for the various formats. On APS-C format cameras, to get the same field of view and apparent perspective of the Nifty Fifty, we would look for a 35mm focal length. On MFT cameras, that would be 25mm more or less.

Since these are actually shorter focal lengths, all other things considered, the depth of field of a 50mm lens would be less at a given aperture and distance than a 35mm lens or 25mm lens.

depth of field landscape photography 9

^{Photo by Migs Reyes from Pexels}

While it doesn’t mean that crop formats have inherently greater depth of field, what it does sort of mean is the opposite. We can get shorter depth of field with the same aperture and distance using a larger format. The technical reasons can be found on our website in other articles, so we’ll leave the in-depth discussion alone here.

This is part of the reason why it’s somewhat difficult to get selective focus effects with smaller formats. In the super tiny sensor formats of smartphones, developers had to create apps to artificially create selective focus.

Depth of Field Mistakes

depth of field mistakes 10

^{Photo by Fuadi Afif from Pexels}

You may have noticed how many hedge words I’ve used in this discussion. Generally speaking, apparent, acceptable, and so on. That’s because there is not always a cut-and-dried answer or a decisive depth of field definition. So many variables play a part.

One major depth of field mistake I see regularly is thinking that more depth is always the answer. The technique of selective focus and making use of the lens quality known as bokeh actually rely on shallow depth of field.

depth of field mistakes 11

^{Photo by Joshua Abner from Pexels}

We have discussed selective focus a lot already. Bokeh is a term used to describe the shape and quality of out of focus lights in our image. If everything is in focus front to back, there is no discernable bokeh. A world with no bokeh is not my favorite choice.

Another depth of field mistake related to stopping down is the problem of diffraction from aperture blades. All lenses have a sweet spot, an aperture or aperture range that corrects optical issues such as distortion and aberrations but before introducing sharpness diminishing diffraction effects.

If we must maximize depth of field in order to satisfy our artistic previsualization for the image we desire, making use of the hyperfocal distance is a great option.

Hyperfocal Distance

depth of field mistakes 12

^{Photo by Viktor Vincej from Pexels}

Hyperfocal distance is the focusing distance that provides the greatest depth of field for any given f-stop or aperture. In order to find it on older lenses or current manual focus prime focal length lenses, we would use the depth of field scale on the lens barrel.

DOF scale detail

^{dicklyon / Public domain via WikiMedia Commons}

In the above example, using an aperture of f/8.0, which is probably close to this lens's sweet spot, if we focus at 30 feet, everything from 15 feet to infinity will be in acceptable focus. It’s a neat trick and it works with any lens, just figure out the variables.

Those variables will be the camera format, the lens focal length, the aperture, and the focusing distance, as described in this video by Pull My Focus:

Since many of our autofocus lenses, either prime focal lengths or zooms, do not have the depth of field scales like the one shown above, we can use a smartphone app or a hyperfocal calculator chart to employ this technique.

What Controls Depth of Field - Your Vision

depth of field explained 13

^{Photo by Yoss Cinematic from Pexels}

As with every deep subject we discuss about photography, we came up with a lot of examples, definitions, and techniques. Making use of this knowledge is up to us as a photographer.

Just as with rules of exposure such as the Exposure Triangle or rules of composition such as the Rule of Thirds, the rules surrounding depth of field are variable, though not arbitrary. We need to know what’s going on in order to control it all for our creative vision.

depth of field explained 14

^{Photo by Lisa Fotios from Pexels}

Take a look at some of your favorite photographs. Yours and from other photographers. Take note of what works or didn’t quite work in each image.

Was the intent of the photographer to isolate a subject from the foreground or background? Was it to have extremely deep depth of field? Was it to make use of the sweet spot of the lens while maximizing depth of focus?

All of these are excellent depth of field examples. Knowing what is happening and why it happens that way will give you more control over your images.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Do's and Don'ts of Low Angle Portrait Photography

Written by PT Editor on 22 March 2023.

Dos and Donts of Low Angle Portrait Photography

^{Photo by David-Prado via iStock}

Low angle portrait photography is a style that some photographers may have yet to try. For good reason, too! As a general rule, low angle portrait photography can be somewhat troublesome. Shadows, unflattering points of view, and perceived distortion can cause some issues.

Still, some excellent reasons exist to incorporate low angle photography into our portrait poses and compositions. With that in mind, we’ll examine some do’s and don’ts of low angle portrait photography and see where it takes us.

Pros and Cons of Low Angle Portrait Photography

^{photo bywoodstock via iStock}

One truism I’ve come to appreciate over the years about photography advice is that if someone tells me not to do something, that’s a pretty good reason to try my hand at that something.

With regards to low angle portrait photography, a con to consider is that it can be unflattering to people if not done correctly. Shadows can block up, everyone gets a double chin, and forced-looking posing are all legitimate reasons to be careful about low angle portrait photography.

On the other hand, when carefully executed, low angle portrait photography can add importance to the subject, create excitement, and open up all sorts of creative posing and composition ideas.

3 Don'ts of Low Angle Portrait Photography

Don’t Ignore the Background

Dont Ignore the Background

^{Photo by ilkermetinkursova via iStock}

Low angle portrait photography is somewhat out of the norm, so it shouldn’t surprise us that we might miss something as we’re taking these pictures that we would have otherwise been right on top of, such as a light pole or tree branch that looks like it’s growing out of the subject’s head.

During any portrait session, we have a lot of things to keep in check. Adding in the non-standard views of low angle photography and it’s not surprising that we could lose track of some of those details.

The fix for this is super simple. Just pay attention. We’re not using Kodak Brownie box cameras, our viewfinders and view screens show us what we’re framing. If that twig eight feet above our subject suddenly appears to sprout from the ear of our subject because we changed the perspective, move the camera a little bit until the problem disappears. It's quicker to do than I just took to type it out!

Don’t Add Distortion

Dont Add Distortion

^{Photo by RapidEye via iStock}

It’s easy to add unwanted distortion - real or perceived - when shooting a portrait from a low angle camera position. The problem can be doubled with group or environmental portraits if we use a wide-angle lens. Those exaggerated limbs or facial features may not win us any appreciation from the subject.

This fix is simple as well. In fact, it’s pretty much the same advice - watch what we’re doing. In this situation, it could be remedied by changing the camera position or the subject placement. How they turn their head or move their arms or legs also factors in. Offer some posing direction to alleviate this issue - the subject is probably expecting that anyways.

Don’t Be Too Heavy

Dont Be Too Heavy

^{Photo by Natsco via iStock}

The distortion issue detailed above can add some unflattering perspectives to a person’s face and physique. A person will naturally look down as we get low to shoot these angles, giving them a double chin effect that isn’t natural looking regardless of their body weight. Also, the shadows can bunch up under the eyes, under the arms, and so on, adding to the apparent unnatural proportions.

There are two fixes for this: watch those poses and positions. If the subject looks straight down at the camera, direct them to turn slightly to one side or adjust the tilt of their head. Light and shadow issues can be fixed by adding in light from a small portable LED light on a camera mount or a collapsible reflector.

Learn More:

3 Do’s of Low Angle Portrait Photography

Do Emphasize the Subject

^{Photo by Aksonov via iStock}

A great advantage of low angle portrait photography, in fact, one of the primary reasons many photographers try it out in the first place, is that the low angle emphasizes the subject, adding importance and interest.

It’s not just the low angle that does this. Creative posing and composition tricks add to the mix and create a mood in the photograph that centers on the subject and raises the implied value of the portrait subject concerning everything else in the image.

Do Add Implied Motion

^{Photo by sad444 via iStock}

The low angle can also exaggerate or emphasize the limbs and torso of the portrait subject, making it appear as though the subject is in motion. This can have the effect of adding even more importance to the portrait subject.

It’s also a great method of signaling to the photograph's viewer that the subject has something more going on beyond the image. Athletes, dancers, business people, artists, and performers of all types will appreciate the flow of power that low angle portrait photography can import.

Do Use Composition Tools

^{Photo by Koto via iStock}

All of those composition tools used in photography, such as the Rule of Thirds, Leading Lines, Negative Space, and so on, are also open to us when shooting low angle portrait photography. It’s only the camera and subject placement that changes what we do in portrait low angle photography. All the other rules and techniques of photography still matter.

Add in different lighting, exposure, and focus techniques, and we have a recipe for creating awesome images of our friends, family, or clients as we avoid the don’ts and employ the do’s of low angle portrait photography.

Helpful Gear for Low Angle Photography

Octopad

Earlier, we hinted at some photography gear we can use for our low angle photography. A collapsible reflector is worth its weight in gold for all sorts of professional photography. It doesn’t have to be fancy. As long as it is in our bag, we can use it for lighting and shadow control. Same for that portable compact LED light we may use for lighting control.

A low angle photography camera mount is invaluable for these styles of portraiture. If we’re hand-holding the camera, the mount can hold the LED light properly. Alternatively, we can mount the camera to it and free our hands to aim the reflector. Plus, it can save our knees from hard floors or rocky ground.

Octopad is my number one choice for a low angle photography camera mount, whether shooting portraits or anything else. A weighted disk with a non-slip pad, Octopad can be put on all sorts of surfaces, even if that surface is angled up to 45 degrees.

Low-priced and compact, I often bring 2 or 3 to a location for a photoshoot. They have a dozen or more uses, including holding things like mics for video recording.

Low angle portrait photography is an exciting technique to add to our repertoire of portrait skills. Following these do’s and don’ts will enable you to succeed with this fascinating style of portrait photography.

Other Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Easy Family Portrait Posing Ideas for Beautiful Results

Written by PT Editor on 18 October 2022.

Easy Family Portrait Posing Ideas for Beautiful Results

^{Photo by Wavebreakmedia via iStock}

The fall season is a prime time for family portrait photography, so I think a few tips for family portraiture are in order. One of the most difficult aspects of family portraits for newer or casual photographers is family portrait posing, so we’ll concentrate on that mostly, but I’ll include some other tips for good measure, too.

These family portrait posing tips and other ideas are usable for all seasons, by the way, and will work indoors or outdoors. As a bonus tip, we’ll examine the importance of using a high-quality printing company to create physical prints and enlargements that really highlight the family portraits you create.

Let’s get to it!

Family Portrait Posing Basics

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

We’ve all been in that situation…

You’re the photographer in the family, and everyone is together for some occasion, so “Hey! Can you take some pics?” is one of the first things you hear. Or perhaps you’re an established photographer of any genre, and a client asks you to take portraits of their family.

You already have photography skills and a nice camera setup. So, you likely know all of the basics of exposure, focus, a stable camera mount, and so on. It’s posing that seems to cause the most anxiety.

Family portrait posing - and any group portrait posing, actually - is much simpler than you may think. We just have to use the skills we’ve already developed for our other photography.

The one skill we may not think we have mastered yet is the ability to control multiple people with spoken words. Our family portrait posing ideas and direction need to be conveyed to our subjects.

Even that skill is probably already a part of your skill set. If you’ve dealt with any clients in person or over the phone for setting up appointments, determining payment, or adjusting contracts, then you have the necessary skills! Simply use that mindset of being calmly in charge and communicating accurately, and apply it to directing people for family portrait posing.

“Family Portrait Photography - Our Session and Posing Workflow” by E-Squared on YouTube has some nice ideas about family portrait posing, including how to pose the kids effectively. Check it out in the video above.

Composition for Family Portrait Posing

^{Photo by pixelfit via iStock}

One of those photography skills mentioned earlier is knowing how all of the rules of composition work. The Rule of Thirds, S curves, the Golden Spiral, symmetry and asymmetry, and more, can be used effectively for family portrait posing.

As you start arranging people, you’ll find that groups of people comfortable with each other will automatically arrange themselves into a balanced composition. All we do is fine-tune the arrangement.

Out of all of the rules of composition, I find the Golden Spiral, also called the Fibonacci Sequence, is the composition that most often occurs naturally in a relaxed family or group portrait session. Combine that composition tool with the Rule of Thirds or S Curves, and you will have the family portrait posing part of the shoot done before most people notice that you’re directing them.

A few spoken directions may be all that's necessary, such as “turn this way,” “square up your shoulders,” or “why don’t you two trade places?” Watch out for hidden faces from the camera position, too.

Framing and focusing occur first, then posing, and lastly capturing the images makes a good workflow. Using a tripod and a wireless remote is a good idea as well. After that, all that’s left is post-processing and printing your photos!

Learn More:

The Number of People Doesn’t Really Matter

family portrait posing

^{Photo by Vanessa Nunes via iStock}

Whether the family portrait posing consists of a small family of three or four people or a larger extended family group of 20 or more doesn’t really matter. In fact, sometimes, a larger group is easier to pose than a small one.

The basics as stated above stay the same. All that changes is we may have to speak a little louder and we really need to take extra care to check that no faces are hidden behind someone else as seen from our camera position. That’s the one problem that always seems to come up, but the fix is simple - just ask them to move over a little!

Varied Heights and Ages Blend Together - Or Not

family portrait photography

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

The old standard we all have seen is lining everybody up according to height, all in a line. This works, but that diagonal can be enhanced by changing the line into a slight curve or by breaking it into thirds.

Other ways are to have the taller people in the center and shorter folks on the ends. For some groups, though, that kind feels like creating a hierarchy of sorts. Sometimes varying them is a better idea. Even the “line up” posing isn’t an absolute. Having people stand in front of and around each other also works.

Portrait Posing Ideas

The quality of your family photos depends not only on your skill but also on the quality of the photo printing service you use.

How you arrange people might also relate to how you envision printing the image. For example, if you want the image in portrait orientation, you need to keep the group close together.

However, a family portrait of the 50th wedding anniversary of a couple with all of the kids and grandkids might lend itself more to a landscape orientation. This type of image can be posed with the primary couple as the focal point and all of the others posed around them. The Golden Spiral works great for this type of situation.

Also try out varied heights of where the individual people are posed - some sitting, some standing, perhaps reclining and even squatting. All of these are valid options for family portrait posing.

As you play around with the posing, make it enjoyable and relaxing. This will lend itself to better family portraits with much more natural posing and expressions.

Themed Family Portrait Posing

portrait photography ideas

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

Holidays and special events are great opportunities for themed family portrait posing. Of course, everyone is probably thinking of Christmas cards right now, but the same ideas work all year round.

For these types of images, some props may help with the family portrait posing. Possibly suggesting some themes can also work wonders. Does the family have a shared interest? Maybe fishing, soccer, race cars, or dogs are the interest of many in the family. Take advantage of this and use it as a family portraiture theme.

If you’re picturing an acrobatic circus family in your mind, you’re on the right track. Really, any centralized idea can work amazingly well as a themed family portrait!

Printing Your Family Portraits

portrait photography tips

^{Photo by Ondrooo via iStock}

Family portrait photography isn’t finished until there is something to share. After all of that fine work you’ve done regarding locations, themes, family portrait posing, exposure, and lighting, you want the resulting physical prints and enlargements to shine, too.

Printique, Adorama’s fine printing company, is an excellent source of family portraiture enlargements. In addition to their high-quality paper prints, Printique also offers unique and special printing options.

For example, you can order canvas wraps and metal prints as wonderful ways to share the family portraits. Wood prints, acrylic prints, and hardcover album photo books are also fantastic ideas from Printique.

Posing families

And no matter which vessel you choose to display your family portraits, relying on Printique to deliver an incredible product is simply a no-brainer. I’ve ordered many products from Printique over the years (including a gorgeous canvas print) and in each instance, I’ve been blown away by the quality.

Family portraits become valuable heirlooms as time goes by. Using your established skills, these family portrait posing ideas, and having the images printed by a high-quality printing company all but guarantees that the images you create will be treasured for years to come!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Easy Portrait Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 08 August 2019.

Easy Portrait Photography Tips

^{Photo by Dmitriy Ilkevich on Unsplash}

Portrait photography can feel overwhelming because it’s so personal. If you’re being hired to shoot someone’s portrait it’s probably because this person has a way they want to present themselves to the world, and it’s your job to do it for them.

However, portrait photography is also empowering. I hate it when photographers are so worried about entering portrait photography because they wrongly believe they don’t know enough about it.

So, here are a few easy portrait photography tips to get you started.

Use a Frame Within a Frame

portrait photography tips 1

^{photo byMilkos via iStock}

An easy way to begin portrait photography is to frame your subject’s face. You can use a window, a fence, or get the subject to frame their own face with their hands or even a literal frame!

Sometimes portrait photography ideas are as easy as remembering the basics of any kind of photography. Framing serves a few purposes in photography, like calling the viewer’s attention to specific traits you want them to see, but it also serves a few additional purposes in portrait photography.

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo byclaudio.arnese via iStock}

By giving your subject something to play with, like a picture frame, you’re probably going to get a more natural look from them. They will be able to relax during the shoot. This really helps if you’re photographing someone who isn’t used to being in front of a camera.

Shoot in Landscape Format

portrait photography ideas 1

^{photo by Liderina via iStock}

Many portrait photographers fall into a rut and forget to experiment with different portrait photography techniques. The one cliche I see most often is always shooting a vertical shot.

Just because your camera’s “portrait mode” is vertical, does not mean you can’t take portraits in landscape mode.

portrait photography ideas 2

^{photo byferlistockphoto via iStock}

Sometimes, depending on what you’re trying to convey, it works better. I use landscape format on my portraits when the background is almost as important as the subject, like with graduations. I also shoot in landscape when the portrait will be used on the subject’s website.

Those portraits of authors you see on the back of books, the ones that are always vertical and super close (too close) to the subjects face, don’t translate well into an online medium. Usually, your subject will want to convey something interesting about themselves (like where they’re from) in their portraits and this all but requires landscape mode.

Learn More:

Capture Subjects on the Move

portrait photography techniques 1

^{photo byStockPlanets via iStock}

Subjects don’t just need to stand perfectly still during your shoot. Allowing your subjects to move is the answer on how to take better portraits.

You can do this a few ways, by either allowing your subject the room to move naturally while snapping photos of them or by shooting your subject in front of movement.

portrait photography techniques 2

^{photo bylechatnoir via iStock}

One cliche version is the portrait of a person standing in front of a speeding train, but you don’t need to follow the status quo. Instead, hit the streets and photograph your subject as they walk. Take a portrait of a child while they’re picking up bugs. Head to the soccer field and take portraits of your soccer-loving subject as they dribble the ball.

There are so many ways to include diversity into your portrait photography, so get creative!

Blur on Purpose

portrait photography techniques 3

^{photo by Aaron Hawkins via iStock}

Use selective focus and depth of field to bring attention to key details about your subject and thier interests.

If your child found a particularly interesting (to them) caterpillar, make the caterpillar the star of the show. It brings your subject’s interests to the forefront of the portrait, which is sometimes even more important than how your subject looks.

Invest in a Quality Print

There’s no use going through all the trouble of making your subject look as good as they can look if the finished product doesn’t.

A good print allows your subject to see themselves as something concrete. Plus, it looks good on you as a professional photographer when you can show something physical to your client.

I use CanvasHQ for my prints because of their service model. I’ve had their photo experts catch issues with my photos more than once, very fortunately.

They will double and triple check your photos before printing them, and reach out to you immediately if they think some edit may have went wrong or if your photo is off center.

They then hand build your canvas frame. Their photo experts also ensure the stretching process goes smoothly. An issue I’ve had with other companies before is that they improperly stretch the canvas around the frame and it begins to warp over the years, leaving bubbles in the canvas.

Those companies then frequently tell me it’s been too long and the warranty has expired. CanvasHQ stands behind their product in a way those other companies don’t, so you know you’re getting a solid, well-built canvas on which your portraits will look good for years to come.

What’s not to like about that?

“Easy Portrait Photography Tips” Boil Down to This: Get Up Close

how to take better portraits

^{Photo by Nathan Dumlao on Unsplash}

It’s the one thing nobody wants to do at first and the one thing you need to throw yourself into wholeheartedly.

Getting close to your subject allows you to build a bond with them and to capture small details no other pictures of them do.

how to take better portraits 2

^{photo by alvarez via iStock}

There is a very real possibility that your subject will never have their photo taken in such a manner again, so do them justice.

Capture the golden speck in their left eye and their mole in their right eyebrow. It shows that they’re unique and it may just make them see themselves in a new light.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Easy Portrait Photography Tips for Beginners

Written by PT Editor on 04 September 2019.

Easy Portrait Photography Tips for Beginners

^{photo byalvarez via iStock}

The great thing about portrait photography tips for beginners is that there are SO many of them.

What’s more, many of them are just plain easy to implement - it just requires a bit of practice.

Best of all, these tips can be used on their own or together, so you can pick, choose, and combine your way to better portraits.

With all that said, let’s get started!

Get on Their Level
Use a Polarizer for Portraits
Focus on the Eyes
Build Rapport With the Model
Seek Good Light
Make the Portrait Shine With the Right Editing Techniques

Get on Their Level

portrait photography tips 1

^{photo by RichLegg via iStock}

One mistake a lot of portrait photographers make is not getting down on someone’s level.

When you take a portrait looking down on someone it can often give the feeling of them being small or powerless.

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo by via XiXinXing iStock}

Conversely, taking photographs from a low angle, looking up at someone will give feelings of power and looking down at you. (also it gives you a good look up their nose.)

While being above or below your subject can help convey different emotions, as a beginning photographer try to think of the lens of your camera as your own eye. If you create portraits of subjects looking eye to eye with them you will me more pleased with the results.

Use a Polarizer for Portraits

use a polarizer for portraits 1

I never realized how valuable a polarizing filter is in portrait photography until I accidentally left mine on from a landscape shoot.

It was years ago and I’d only just discovered the value of a polarizer for landscapes, so imagine my surprise when it helped me take better portraits!

While it’s true that polarizing filters are usually associated with big, wide open spaces, they lend an incredible hand to the portrait photographer. Using a polarizing filter for portraits opens you up to new, more vibrant colors in your portraits.

Also, if you’re shooting with children (or teens) polarizing filters are a huge help because they reduce the amount of oils you can see on someone’s face.

how to use a circular polarizer for portraits 1

^{photo by Saadetalkan via iStock}

If you’re dealing with a teenager that is already camera shy because they are self conscious about their skin, just about the worst thing you could do is present them with a final photo that has lots of glare off their oily forehead.

Polarizing filters also make all of the colors in your portraits more vibrant, which looks phenomenal when you’re doing outdoor shoots.

Take the above-photo as an example. The matte finish on this young woman’s face can be achieved with make up, but it can also be aided by the use of a polarizing filter like this one.

Editor's Tip: Get Kenko’s latest updates and access to promos for discounted gear. Click here to sign up.

I always use Kenko filters because you’re not going to get a better polarizing filter for the price. It’s extremely thin, which is a must if you’re buying a polarizing filter for portraits because it keeps your photos from darkening at the edges.

Then, once you’ve purchased your polarizer for portraits, you can read all about how to use a circular polarizer for portraits and some common issues you may run into when first starting out.

Learn More:

Focus on the Eyes

how to use a circular polarizer for portraits 2

^{photo by Peter Vahlersvik via iStock}

Sony cameras have this thing called Eye AF, which allows you to autofocus on a subject’s eyes with ease (and track their eyes if the subject is moving, too). The reason Sony has this is because the eyes in portrait photography are the single most important point you need to be focusing on.

Your photo could be beautifully lit, with sharp features and gorgeous composition, but if your model’s eyes aren’t absolutely sharp, then you’ve lost the essence of the portrait.

Watch the video above by Light Club for more information about how to use catchlights in your portrait photography to convey different emotions.

Build Rapport with the Model

polarizing filter for portraits

^{photo by FG Trade via iStock}

You’ll probably be taking someone’s portrait for one of two reasons: they’re paying you to do it or they’re a model and someone else is paying you both to do it.

In both of these situations, the model might have a creative vision that they would like you to carry out, and portrait photography tips leave this out far too often.

Before the photoshoot, ask your subject if there is a particular color they would like to wear or a particular theme they want to convey. Ask about emotions they want to highlight in their photos, locations they especially want to feature, and so forth.

The point is that you likely have all kinds of ideas of what you want to accomplish in the photoshoot, but the model might have just as many ideas - and excellent ones too! Work together to get a better final result.

working on creative things picture id654427740

^{photo by Georgijevic via iStock}

Then, throughout the shoot, make sure you’re taking the time to stop and show them the photos you’ve captured so far. Just a peek here and there will suffice; no need to spend all your time looking at photos instead of taking them!

Photographers often times get caught up in their own heads and forget to work both for and with the other people in the room, so the more collaborative spirit you have, the better things will go.

Seek Good Light

use a polarizer for portraits

^{Photo by Trevor Cole on Unsplash}

Portrait photography tips are really almost all “find good light.”

This obviously applies to the general lighting in the shot, like the dramatic sidelighting used in the image above to create such beautiful depth and contrast.

Creating catchlights in your model’s eyes is another way you can use light to create an image with more impact. You can do this in either a studio or a natural setting

portrait photography tips 3

^{photo by CoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

As shown above, the studio lights are reflected in the model’s eyes, giving them a piercing look that immediately draws your attention.

If you’re shooting outside, you’ll need a backup plan in case the lighting isn’t ideal. What happens if your model is late for an evening shoot and you’ve missed the best light of the day?

Essentially, always go to the worst case scenario for your lighting and have Plans B, C, and D set up just in case.

Sean Tucker is one of my favorite “light” gurus in photography. In the above series, he walks you through how to find good lighting in a natural environment.

Learn More:

Make the Portrait Shine With the Right Editing Techniques

A proper portrait photography editing workflow is needed if you're going to create images that are as stunning as possible.

In the video above, you can learn about a sample workflow that can do just that.

Using Exposure by Alien Skin Software, you can see how making changes to the white balance, improving sharpness, making tonal adjustments, and addressing touch-ups like blemish removal can do wonders for the quality of your portraits.

alien skin exposure

And the best part is that these changes can be made quickly and easily in Exposure - it's a streamlined process that focuses on helping you meet your creative goals without bogging you down in a complicated workspace.

If you've never used Exposure before, you can try it free to test it out. If you're like me, you'll be hooked!

With that, you have a variety of portrait photography tips that will help you elevate the quality of your photos.

As I mentioned before, you can use these tips on their own or together. Whatever your approach, following basic rules of photography like these will set you on a path to better portraits.

We Recommend

Easy Portrait Photography Tips for Better Photos of Your Kids

Written by PT Editor on 30 December 2019.

Easy Portrait Photography Tips for Better Photos of Your Kids

^{photo bywundervisuals via iStock}

When I first started learning how to take photos of my kids, I wasn’t very good. They’re pretty much the worst models in almost all cases, and for someone who had started their photography career before they came along, it was a real learning curve.

When I started looking for easy portrait photography tips, they all assumed your model was a willing participant, which oftentimes wasn’t the case with my toddler.

And here I was, never expecting it would only get worse as my kids grew and started complaining as soon as I whipped out my camera.

Along the way, I’ve picked up a few tips for better portraits of children. Some of them may surprise you.

Set a Timer

easy portrait photography tips 1

^{photo byMagnetic-Mcc via iStock}

As with all things children, they participate much better if you have a give and take relationship with them. As children grow, they need more freedom, more unscheduled play, and more time with you. But most importantly they need to know you are truthful.

I found myself promising the kids I was going to put the camera down in five minutes, or after just a few more shots. I sounded just like them when they’re begging to keep swimming for “just ten more minutes,” which inevitably turns into a half hour.

Basically, I felt like a sham, and my kids were getting sick of it.

So, I actually bought one of those old timers from a thrift store and will set it for 15 or 20 minutes at a time. When the timer is going, the kids need to behave and allow me to take photos of them. They’ll even pose. Then, when the timer goes off, I put the camera away for the day.

easy portrait photography tips 2

^{photo byNikhil Patil via iStock}

Out of all of these easy portrait photography tips, this tip has not only led to better photos of my children, but it has improved our relationship. Additionally, it’s improved my relationship with technology because I now know when to put the camera down and just enjoy my kiddos.

Let Them Choose the Location

easy portrait photography tips 3

^{photo byjacoblund via iStock}

Think about it. Are your kids going to behave better in church or in their favorite place in the world, like the zoo or aquarium?

When you’re scouting for locations, involve your children. Ask them where they would like to spend the day. Make a trade. You can go to the beach, if I can take photos of you while we are there.

All of the tips for better portraits I’ve found online sort of assume you, as the photographer, need help and not the other way around.

There is no better attitude adjustment than taking your child to a place they feel truly joyful.

easy portrait photography tips 4

^{photo bypatrickheagney via iStock}

By following these easy portrait photography tips, to let your children help scout locations with you and to really listen to their decision making, you will capture all of the best characteristics of your kid.

Your audience will be able to see the exact reasons you fall in love with them everyday.

Learn More:

Props Are Your Best Friend

how to take better photos of your kids 5

^{photo bytatyana_tomsickova via iStock}

Who doesn’t love sparklers, or bubbles, or confetti? Heck, we love these props so much even adults use them at celebrations like weddings and baby showers.

When you buy cheap props your kids love they’re not going to be focused on the camera, they’re going to be focused on their toys.

For photographers with camera shy children, or for photographers with children who really like to show off for the camera, props are a way to encapsulate your child’s true personality.

how to take better photos of your kids 6

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

As my children grew, I would take them into a dollar store and let each of them choose a certain amount of toys as I picked out a few especially photogenic props (bubbles, paint, balls).

We’d then take all of our newly purchased toys and head to the park to unwrap them and play.

Props not only ensure your camera isn’t the center of attention for the day, but they’re a great way to learn how to take better photos of your kids because props provide you more time to play around with your settings, uninhibited.

Don’t Make Them Wear Uncomfortable Clothes

how to take better photos of your kids 7

^{photo byBorupFoto via iStock}

How much did you hate dressing up for family portraits when you were a kid? Some things never change.

Part of the freedoms kids gain as they grow older is the opportunity to pick their own wardrobe, so why are we taking away this creativity in portraits?

Portrait photography tips

^{photo byolesiabilkei via iStock}

Looking back on my children’s portraits, I especially love the ones where they’re wearing brightly mismatched socks or their pants are on backwards.

This exploratory part of childhood is something we forget about as adults, and it’s something our easy portrait photography tips should celebrate.

No childhood is perfect, and sloppy, messy clothing captures what it is to have children.

Tell Them Stories

how to take better photos of your kids 8

^{photo byImagesbyTrista via iStock}

Many of my friends enjoy doing themed photoshoots with their kids, like vintage shoots. The problem is that the kids have difficulty understanding the “point” of the shoot.

They get around this by giving their kids history lessons surrounding the era they are aiming for in their photoshoots.

They’ll give them historical data about the 1920s, or make them the stars of their own story. They turn photoshoots into make believe.

how to take better photos of your kids 9

^{photo byalexandr_1958 via iStock}

All people love stories, and we especially love to be the protagonist of stories. Be creative in giving your kids background information for your shoots and I promise they will repay you.

Show Them a Beautiful Print

tips for better portraits

^{photo byrbv via iStock}

The only thing kids love more than pretending is seeing pictures of themselves. I went down to Mexico for some volunteer work a few years ago and I brought my camera with me. Every single child on the street asked me to stop, take their photo, and immediately show it to them.

I’d bet anything your kid loves photos of themselves as well. I always take the best photos I get of my kids and create canvases for them. I’ll give it to them on their birthdays to celebrate the past year of growth.

We will then plan where to hang it in the house together.

canvashq

You can get incredible canvas prints of your kids at CanvasHQ.

Firstly, CanvasHQ almost always has a promo code running so your prints won’t be as expensive as they would be if you went to your local print shop.

Secondly, CanvasHQ canvas is so much better than mass-produced canvases from say a Walmart or Costco. Each one of their workers cares about your finished product just as much as you do. They’ve caught errors in my photography before that I didn’t. They also hand-build every canvas frame, and hand stretch each photo print onto their frames.

What better way to celebrate your kids than with a beautiful print that’s made with care and attention to detail?!

After a great shoot with your kids, there’s nothing quite like having a gorgeous canvas to show off everyone’s hard work. Capture those memories and make them long-lasting with a print that will last generations.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Easy Summer Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 04 June 2020.

Easy Summer Photography Tips

^{photo bymartinedoucet via iStock}

Summer is quickly approaching those of us in the Americas (even if it may not feel like it) and I, for one, am absolutely not prepared.

Summer brings beautiful weather, longer days and happier kids, and a lot of these things also mean that summertime is one of the best times for photography.

If you haven’t started prepping for summer photography yet, it’s definitely time.

But, in order to do so, you’ll need some summer photography tips to get you started. Here’s a list of my favorite summer photography tips for beginners.

Use the Extra Light to Your Advantage

summer photography tips 1

^{Photo by Laura Pratt on Unsplash}

We receive 5.5 more hours of sunlight on the summer solstice than the winter solstice. That’s about how much sleep I received on a good day for the first 2 years of my son’s life, and it’s a ton of extra time that you can use to practice your summer photography tips.

Extra sunlight means you can take off earlier and get home later. It also means that you can specifically focus on learning better timing.

Understanding how the sun’s position changes your photographs, like how the light from certain positions plays in your photographs, is essential for doing any shooting outdoors.

summer photography tips 2

^{Photo by Damian Markutt on Unsplash}

One great tool I use is the Photographer’s Ephemeris, which is an app you can use on either your iPhone or Android that tells you exactly where the sun is at any point in the day at any point in the world.

I started using it originally because I wanted to capture the perfect sunset photo, but continued to use it because it was really helpful in pretty much every way. It allows me to know exactly what my schedule will need to look like in order to grab good backlit photos and portraits.

I’m an especially exact photographer, so shot planning tools like this one have made my life so much easier.

Be Thoughtful

prepping for summer photography 3

^{Photo by MI PHAM on Unsplash}

I think every photographer is guilty of the spray and pray method from time to time. After all, if you’re really photographing an event that is once in a lifetime, doesn’t it make more sense to snap away and hope you got something usable afterwards?

But, this method is costly (think about how quickly you fill up your SD card), and it doesn’t help you to understand what photos are actually worth taking.

prepping for summer photography 4

^{photo byyulkapopkova via iStock}

Phenomenal photographs can be taken by any photographer, but more importantly they’re taken by photographers who put a ton of thought into what photograph they wanted to take and what they wanted that photograph to say.

Of all our summer photography tips, this may be the most important one because being thoughful with your photography means you’re going to learn what you like.

And the moment you really understand what you like is the moment you will understand what your future clients will probably like.

Editor's Tip: Before you head out for summer fun activities, you need a high-quality face mask to help mitigate the transmission of COVID. The Dyota AG+ Ion Mask from f-stop is an ideal option because it's washable, reusable, and has three breathable layers. There's a soft nose guard and adjustable ear loops to improve comfort, and the outer shell, which has a water-resistant treatment, wicks moisture away to help keep it dry. The center layer is a non-woven poly that protects against particle and liquid penetration, and the innermost layer has a SILVADUR treatment to help prevent odors that result from frequent wear. These masks are available in a variety of colors and are priced right at $19.99!

Practice Using Different Focal Lengths

how to improve your summer photography 5

^{photo byRichLegg via iStock}

When you’re learning how to improve your summer photography, you’re really learning how to improve your overall photography, but in a low-stakes environment since you have more time to practice.

That’s why one of my favorite summer photography tips is really a good photography tip you can use year round. You should try to explore different focal lengths this summer.

By working with different focal lengths, you’re also going to be more specific with your photos, since choosing a focal length requires forethought.

how to improve your summer photography 6

^{photo byMesquitaFMS via iStock}

Many famous photographers have practiced their photography extensively with a 50mm lens, because the 50mm lens most closely resembles how the human eye sees a scene and this way the photographers would be able to frame a photo without actually framing a photo.

You can use this exact same technique, but with your focal length. The more extensively you practice with a specific focal length, the more you will understand the types of photos that you can produce with it.

If you don’t understand exactly how focal lengths work, don’t worry because we have all been there. That’s why Saurav Sinha created this video to show you the difference between focal lengths.

Some summer photography tips are truly photography tips we all just need to focus on more frequently. Focal length is one of them.

Learn More:

Make It an Adventure

Make It an Adventure 7

^{photo byDean Mitchell via iStock}

The summer months are dry, which means that summer is the best time to do some exploring because it's just a little safer to go off the beaten trail.

The more the world opens up, the easier it is to snap a photo unlike any that you’ve seen before because you’re being met with more options.

I like to use summer to try things in my photography that I otherwise wouldn’t. For instance, it’s a personal goal of mine to try to master underwater photography this summer.

Make It an Adventure 8

^{photo byhaurashko_ksu via iStock}

This is one of those summer photography tips that you can really take and run with it. What do you want to try this summer?

There’s never been a better time to explore your state, because the added safety of the built-in GPS’ our phones have ensures you can get lost without actually getting lost.

Don’t Let a Rainstorm Stop You

Dont Let a Rainstorm Stop You 9

^{photo byAaron Hawkins via iStock}

This is one of the incredibly important summer photography tips that people too often ignore.

Photographing in bad weather is an essential photography skill, not only because photographing in rain provides a completely different mood for your photos, but because if you’re serious about photography, you will end up in the middle of an essential photoshoot in the rain.

It’s much better to practice these easy summer photography tips in the rain now, then to learn on the job later.

Some of my favorite things to photograph in the rain are people. So, if you know a bad rainstorm is about to hit, head to a crowded area and try to capture the emotions of people getting stuck in rain.

Taking Photos in the Rain 1

You won’t be able to practice these summer photography tips without the right equipment, though, since rain and your camera do not mix.

Most summer photography tips articles suggest you keep garbage bags in your car and camera bag for the random rainstorm, but this is an incredibly uncomfortable way to shoot in inclement weather.

Taking Photos in the Rain 2

That’s why I use Camera Canopy.

Camera Canopy is an easy shield for your DSLR or mirrorless camera that fits directly into your hot shoe to prevent your camera from getting wet in rain, sleet or snow.

For under $100, it’s the best summer photography investment you’ll ever make! Head over to Camera Canopy to pick one up for your DSLR ($87.99) or your mirrorless camera ($59.99).

Learn More:

We Recommend

Easy Tips for Better Environmental Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 07 July 2020.

Easy Tips for Better Environmental Portraits

^{photo byvalentinrussanov via iStock}

If you want to learn a little about how to take environmental portraits, or want to know what are environmental portraits in the first place, stick around.

The current excitement for environmental portraits is actually nothing new, it’s a portrait genre that has been around almost as long as photography itself. What is making it so popular currently is partly due to how tastes change and evolve continuously, but also because it’s a lot easier to create good environmental portraits now.

What Are Environmental Portraits?

environmental portraits 1

^{photo bySisoje via iStock}

Environmental portraits are images of people, alone or in groups, that include extra visual information. The extra visual information usually tells us something about the people, such as what they do for work or fun or perhaps hints about their personality. In other words, we tell a story about the person.

Examples of environmental portraits that might tell a story about someone are someone working on their bike, a person painting, or someone sitting amongst a pile of stuffed animals. All of these examples tell us something extra about the person being imaged.

Environmental Portrait Tips

environmental portrait tips 2

^{photo byfranckreporter via iStock}

Learning how to create environmental portraits is actually a very simple thing to take on. For an environmental portrait tutorial, take everything you already know about portraits in general, including common portrait lighting setups, and add a few more things to that.

Such as…

Know your subject, widen out, posing and composition, getting used to portable lighting, and things like that.

Know Your Subject

environmental portrait tutorial 3

^{photo byGoodboy Picture Company via iStock}

In order to create good environmental portraits, you really need to know something about your subject. If they are a new client, an interview of some sort is often beneficial. It doesn’t have to be some elaborate session, simply talking to them for a while during the booking conversation can yield tons of ideas.

Be observant of visual cues. Did they ride up to your home office on a motorcycle? Might include bikes, a garage, or the outdoors somehow in their portrait.

Pay attention to their words. Did they mention a hobby or love of their pets at any time? Perhaps adding in their latest hobby project or them playing with their dog, iguana, or llama would be in order.

Their workspace or home is often a source of pride for some, especially if the environmental portrait session is of a group such as workmates or family. Be sure to just come out and ask them directly any of these questions if the cues aren’t readily evident. This way, you will capture something about them that helps explain to others who they are.

Widen Out

how to create environmental portraits 4

^{photo bySisoje via iStock}

In order to capture some surroundings, one of the basic environmental portrait tips is to use a wider lens than what you might normally be using for portraits. An 85mm or 100mm lens is fantastic for head and shoulder pics or headshots, but the Nifty Fifty or a lens a little wider like 35mm or 28mm is probably going to work better for this style of portraits.

Some interesting environmental portraits have been made with lenses that are even wider than that, such as 20mm and wider. If you use lenses that wide, it’s a good practice to use a tripod and level to avoid skewed lines, also be very aware of facial elongation with close up portrait subjects.

Learn More:

Posing and Composition

what are environmental portraits 7

^{photo byJohnnyGreig via iStock}

Subject placement, both posing and composition, is a vital aspect of setting up a workable environmental portrait. By varying the position of the subject in relation to the other parts of the image, you can change what is emphasized. For instance, the portrait subject off to the side of their work or hobby will emphasize the work or hobby more than the person.

Posing tips for environmental portraits include having the subject making eye contact with the camera for a more intimate feeling or having them look elsewhere, including off to the distance, for adding interest to the environmental part of the image.

Environmental portraits can often take advantage of the powerful composition techniques of Rule of Thirds and the Golden Ratio or Fibonacci Spiral. Just changing the orientation from vertical to horizontal can also change up the entire message of the image.

Use Portable Lighting

You might be tempted to rely on either available ambient light or an on camera flash for environmental portraits, but my experience has taught me that a good portable light or two is often the best choice for environmental portrait lighting.

Since you’re most likely away from wall sockets or without a lot of options for power supply, a small battery powered LED light such as the new Hakutatz LED light is a good choice for your environmental portrait lighting setup.

environmental portrait lighting

What I like about these types of lights is how versatile your portrait lighting setup is with them. The Hakutatz LED lights are about the size of an iPhone and can even be controlled by either an iPhone or Android device.

Using one light can help emphasize the person within the environmental portraits, two or three lights or a light and reflectors can be employed to even out ambient light conditions or create a natural feel to the scene.

portrait lighting setup

In order to have an effective and natural looking portrait, it often is best to light in such a way that nothing important is either in too deep a shadow or much too bright. Unless you’re intending to have a high-key or low-key image.

It's Easier Than We Thought!

how to take environmental portraits 8

^{photo byvisualspace via iStock}

If we take the approach of how to take environmental portraits by merely adding a few key thoughts or techniques to what we already know about portraits, we should end up with environmental portraits that tell a story about the subject.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Elevate Your Creativity With Your Own "Personal Lighting Assistant"

Written by PT Editor on 02 October 2020.

Let’s face it...taking good pictures and creating engaging videos is tough work.

Sure, some people have a knack for creating photos and videos that pop, but most of us have to put in lots of effort to get the results we want.

But as technology advances, photographers and videographers are finding that there are tools that can make all the difference in the world when it comes to fulfilling their creative vision.

I like to think of myself as being pretty tuned in and aware of emerging technologies - after all, I spend a fair amount of time reading about new products, testing them, and reviewing them.

One such product I recently stumbled upon is theTEKE Reactive and Animated DMX Lighting System. I like to refer to it as a “personal lighting assistant” because it truly makes creating engaging and dynamic lighting as simple as tapping your phone’s screen.

Is TEKE the right lighting setup for you? Let’s find out!

TEKE Makes Creating Dynamic, Animated Lighting Easier Than Ever Before

teke wireless light

I’m all about making the process of creating gorgeous photos and videos easier, and TEKE certainly delivers on that front.

These lights are controlled via a smartphone app that literally makes it as easy as tapping the screen to change how the light interacts with the scene.

For example, you can browse the TEKE library in the companion app for dynamic lighting styles to add visual interest to your photos or videos. You can add animated effects as well. For instance, if you’re creating a music video and want lighting that reacts to the beat, TEKE will do that for you, instantly!

The app also comes loaded with presets like lightning, police lighting, traffic, and plenty of others so you can get the precise effect you want in just a matter of moments.

You can even create custom color palettes and save them for future use. Simply upload a photo or video clip that has a color palette you like. Then, adjust the selection points in the app, and TEKE will automatically copy the brightness, hue, shade, and temperature of the pixels you selected.

Again, all this is done in the app. With that kind of ease of use, you can worry less about lighting and more about framing up gorgeous photos and video sequences.

For me, being creative isn’t the problem. The problem is having the gear I need to make that creative vision come to life and doing so without a ton of time and effort.

Here’s a prime example…

Let’s say you’re shooting portraits or creative fashion. With traditional lights, you would have to constantly reset your lights or gels or have assistants wave multi-colored lights around to get beautiful gradient lighting.

portrait lighting teke

But with TEKE, you can do all that on your own via the app. There’s no messing around with the original lighting setup. No assistants to pay to flail around with lights. Instead, you get the look you want quickly and easily. You can even connect multiple lights together if need be! You can also select from an array of instant moods for dynamic background or mood lighting.

instant moods

As I said earlier, making awesome photos and videos is hard work, so the last thing you want is to have to spend your mental energy fighting with something like your lighting. TEKE eliminates that problem by delivering high-quality light right at your fingertips.

Get Wireless Connectivity and Superb Battery Life With TEKE

video lights teke

In addition to having all kinds of bells and whistles that make creating dynamic animated lighting a breeze, TEKE streamlines your workspace by offering wireless connectivity and excellent battery life.

I’ve tested many lights over the years that have been positioned as a long-lasting wireless light, only to find that they didn’t live up to the billing.

But with TEKE, you get true wireless performance thanks to the aforementioned smartphone control and DMX technology.

photography lights

Unlike many Bluetooth lights that I’ve used in the past, TEKE’s DMX technology ensures vastly better signal strength and improved distance as well.

Ultra Bright

Additionally, TEKE has a five-hour battery runtime. That’s not at a reduced brightness, either - you get five hours with this thing at 100 percent brightness. That’s a fantastic battery life that will allow you to get the shots and video sequences you’ve envisioned without having to worry about when your lights will die. And, even if the batteries are running low, you can charge them while in use. Nice!

Work Smarter, Not Harder With TEKE

work smarter

Now more than ever, photographers and videographers need to take the old adage to work smarter, not harder to heart.

These are tough times we’re living in, and when every penny counts, you need to streamline your workflow by investing in tools that make your job easier so you can get more jobs done more quickly.

Two Sizes2

With TEKE, you not only get a lighting system that helps you achieve your creative goals (in 20-inch and 40-inch sizes, no less), but you also get a lighting system that’s easy on the pocketbook. Great lighting, improved results, and expanded creative abilities for a low price sounds like a pretty good deal to me!

If you’re ready to get your own personal lighting assistant,visit the TEKE Kickstarter page and start down the path of creating more engaging and dynamic content!

We Recommend

Essential Engagement and Wedding Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 06 September 2023.

Essential Engagement and Wedding Photography Tips

^{Photo by peopleimages via iStock}

Engagement and wedding photography is a specialty field or niche that overlaps both portraiture and events in how a photographer approaches the job.

Wedding and engagement photography is similar to creating portraits in that you are dealing with images of people. You want images that are flattering, elegant, and tell the story of the people. It’s similar to event photography in that it’s scheduled, has special significance, and you also are telling a story, in this aspect, about the event.

Whether you’ve been involved in engagement and wedding photography or are considering moving into this field, I’ve put together a few essential tips to help you succeed.

Engagement and Wedding Photography are Special Events

^{Photo by Dmytro Botvinosvskyy via iStock}

I don’t know if you’ve noticed this, but whenever I craft an article covering engagement and wedding photography, I always include a YouTube instructional or inspirational video from someone I haven’t used before.

I do this because wedding and engagement photography events are special, considered once-in-a-lifetime, and can be fast-paced and intense. So, I like to look at successful wedding imaging experts and put together helpful and tested hints and tips.

In this YouTube video from John Branch IV Photography, he lists some things anyone new to engagement and wedding photography needs to know. Plus, these work as great reminders for anyone already in the business. Have a look:

Whether viewed as a portrait or an event, engagement and wedding photography are cherished occasions. The resulting images are cherished as well, so having a list of images to capture is a good idea. You can use an app or a physical notebook to keep track of everything so nothing is missed.

Contracts, Payments, Insurance, and Order Fulfillment

Contracts Payments Insurance and Order Fulfillment

^{Photo by Mindful Media via iStock}

I say this a lot in all genres of professional photography: a photography business is a business, not a mere hobby that just happens to generate some income. The four topics of contracts, payments, insurance, and order fulfillment are vital to handle correctly, protecting you and your clients.

Contracts are essential since they will state in specific language what is expected of you, the service provider, and the customer. It’s a good idea to include in any contract being able to use your work for self-promotion, how copyrighted images can be used, and details such as cancellation procedure.

Payments are spelled out in a contract, including downpayments, final payments, pricing of packages, prices of added images or products, and cancellation policies. A clause covering arbitration could be important, too.

Insurance is vitally important to any photographer, but I consider it a must-have for engagement and wedding photography businesses. Insurance protects against theft, liability, and damages for unforeseen accidents or problems. Additionally, we can get a specialized form of insurance, errors and omissions, which covers those horrible instances where everything goes wrong.

Order fulfillment is also included in contract wording, specifying what physical items, such as a wedding album, are provided, how any electronic file delivery is handled, and how many images are expected.

In order fulfillment, we should also make it a simple process for the client to add on any extras or reprints down the road. Having a printing company we like using, such as Photo Book Press, lets us stay consistent with pricing and with what we make available as a physical product.

Providing Engagement and Wedding Photography Albums

^{Photo by 3bugsmom via iStock}

I find that engagement and wedding photography customers, more so than any other genre of photography businesses, will expect a wedding album or photo book as part of the package of order fulfillment.

Using a high-quality printing company like Photo Book Press helps us with this essential part of engagement and wedding photography. Their Premium Photo Book has sewn binding, lay-flat design, and customizable covers, making them a luxurious wedding album with heirloom quality.

There are so many options for designing a Premium Photo Book as a wedding album with several preplanned book-making templates and customizable features, including adding text and two-page images.

Engagement and wedding photography products can include more than the wedding album itself. You might offer packages incorporating other gift-type items, too. Ideas available from the same printer as your wedding album orders are custom wedding invitations, wedding-themed thank-you notes, and a custom wall calendar.

Equipment Considerations

^{Photo by surachetsh via iStock}

Anyone considering stepping into engagement and wedding photography likely has many questions about what equipment to use. You want it all to be high quality, of course, but durability is important as well. So are some useful features.

Engagement and wedding photography pros often standardize on certain types of equipment, such as Full Frame format cameras and fast primes or zoom lenses.

You don't necessarily need the highest megapixel count camera body, but you do need the best low-light performance. For lenses, you don't always need the fastest aperture; though speed is very important in some images, lenses with the best bokeh and least distortion are highly desirable.

A good flashgun is important since many engagement and wedding photography will be under lights you can’t control. Besides exposure concerns, we also need to consider light quality and color temperature, which a flashgun puts in our control.

Wedding photographers might also offer wedding videos, so our cameras and lighting equipment video capabilities are essential to know and plan around. Most videos also require additional post-processing software for best results.

“Do I Need a Second Shooter?”

Do I Need a Second Shooter

^{Photo by imtmphoto via iStock}

One of my biggest concerns for any photo job is always whether or not I can handle it all myself or if I need a second shooter. A second shooter can capture behind-the-scenes images, backup images, alternate viewpoint images of the same things you’re shooting, or video footage while you’re doing stills.

Any insurance should also specify your extra workers, which should include certain things in the contract wording. However, hiring someone to help or not is a decision you’ll have to make on the merits of your own particular needs and wants.

Whatever your choices are ultimately, engagement and wedding photography can be an exciting, profitable, and fun genre of photography business.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Essential Portrait Lighting Tips

Written by PT Editor on 01 November 2019.

^{Photo by CoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

Creating beautiful portraits depends on your ability to accomplish a variety of tasks - how you compose and frame the shot, the separation of the subject from the background, and, of course, the lighting that's used.

Not all light is made equal, and the manner in which you use lighting to illuminate the model will greatly influence how the final image looks.

In this quick tutorial, you'll learn a few techniques for manipulating lighting in a way that will enhance your portraits.

Let's get started!

Good Light Means Having Good Shadows

^{Photo by VikaValter via iStock}

In some portrait photography situations, you might strive to reduce shadows, like in a headshot.

In a headshot, shadows can be distracting. The point of a headshot is to be a clean, professional look.

But in other kinds of portraits, like the one shown above, shadows can actually greatly increase the visual appeal of the image. The interplay of the areas of light and shadow in this shot are hugely dramatic, are they not?!

It's important not to go crazy with shadows - they can be too much of a good thing - but experimenting with the placement of your lighting to create interesting shadows can be a fun and challenging exercise that helps you develop your creative eye.

Photo by momcilog via iStock

Shadows balance out bright light while also giving your photos a much greater sense of depth and dimension.

As a result, the portrait will seem more three-dimensional and much more lifelike.

The image above is a great example of this - the woman's shadow on the wall makes this portrait much more interesting to look at while also providing some of that depth you want.

Learn More:

Basic Portrait Lighting Principles

Understand How to Use Light to Get Just the Right Look

^{Photo by HRAUN via iStock}

Where you place artificial lighting will influence where the shadows fall in the shot. As discussed above, this can have an important impact on the overall look and feel of the portrait.

The positioning of the light also determines the kind of light you have to work with - frontlighting, backlighting, or sidelighting.

Where the light source is in relation to the model will have a significant impact on the results you get.

^{Photo by izusek via iStock}

For example, using frontlighting, in which the light source is directly in front of the model, helps illuminate the details of the person's face.

Shadows are minimized as well, because the shadows are cast behind them. This is often the kind of lighting used for headshots.

Frontlighting is quite easy to use - just place the light source a few feet in front of the model (at least to start...experimenting with distance is a good thing). There's one caveat, though - frontlighting can be a little flat and boring.

^{Photo by Umkehrer via iStock}

Sidelighting, on the other hand, results from light emanating from the right or left of the model.

With the light falling across the model's face and body, shadows appear, which as I noted before, increased the depth and dimension in the photo.

Sidelighting is therefore more dramatic than frontlighting, but it's just as easy to use. But, sidelighting doesn't have to be as dramatic as shown above. In the image below, much softer sidelighting was used, yet there is still a lot of dimension in the model's face thanks the presence of shadows.

^{Photo by JacobVanHouten via iStock}

Just have the model turn away from the light source or position the light source to one side or the other (it doesn't have to be at a 90-degree angle, so, again, experiment!).

Just take care in noticing where shadows are falling. If the shadows become a distraction, adjust the positioning of the model or the light source to manage the appearance of distracting shadows.

Backlighting is yet another option, but is the most difficult to pull off.

Since the light is behind the subject, the camera is bombarded with light. If you aren't careful, this can result in a silhouette (which can be quite fetching), but if that's not the look you want, you'll have to make some adjustments.

In the video above by Gavin Hoey, learn how to master the camera settings for a backlit portrait using just a single light source.

Invest in a Light That Expands Your Creative Possibilities

There are a lot of photographers that market themselves as "natural light photographers," and that's great, and most of them are truly masters at what they do.

But for some natural light photographers, it's a bit of a cop out because I've known a few natural light photographers over the years that use natural light because they're afraid of artificial light.

Yes, using artificial lighting can be trickier, but understanding how to create light and manipulate it to your needs is a skill worth having.

Back in the day when I was learning photography, using artificial lighting meant a scene in which there were light stands and diffusers and flashguns that had to be used.

But today, there are lights that are small, portable, offer tons of customization options, and are easy to use.

For example, I've been testing the Hakutatz RGB+AW LED light (shown above and below) for a few weeks now, and it is one of the handiest lights I've ever used.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open and ready for orders in early December.

Not only can you take advantage of crisp white light, warm amber light, and millions of RGB colors, but you can also change the color temperature of the light and use special effects to get truly unique results.

The accompanying smartphone app makes changing the light's settings a breeze, too.

Perhaps best of all, these lights can be used for frontlighting, sidelighting, and backlighting, and you can control multiple lights using the smartphone app.

Often, learning a new skill in photography takes a lot of time and practice. I'm not saying that you can master portrait lighting in a single afternoon, but armed with tools like the Hakutatz RGB+AW LED light, it's certainly an easier task!

Learn More:

2019 Best Lights for Photographers

We Recommend

Essential Portrait Photography Gear

Written by PT Editor on 18 May 2022.

Essential Portrait Photography Gear

^{photo byAleksandarNakic via iStock}

My thoughts on what is essential portrait photography gear lean towards the “less is more” theory…

The idea is that true value is decided by what the gear does for you in the long run. This usually means reserving your money for gear when you need it, not when you simply want it. This can be hard to do, though - camera gear is awesome!

Let’s have a look at the essential gear you need to take smashing portraits.

Portrait Photography Gear: The Camera
Portrait Photography Gear: Lenses
Straps and Bags for Workflow Solutions
Useful Accessories for Portrait Photography
Lighting Options for Portrait Photography
A Great Partner for Printing Portraits
Recommended Photography Gear

Portrait Photography Gear: The Camera

Canon EOS R6

^{Canon EOS R6}

One of our most basic needs for portrait photography gear is having the right kind of camera. While we technically can make portraits with any camera on the market, including smartphones, some types of cameras are better suited as portrait photography gear.

What makes one camera a better choice as portrait photography gear pretty much boils down to format size. Pixel count of the sensor doesn’t need to be super high, in fact, some lower pixel count sensors are better for portraits because of their enhanced low light performance.

Two digital camera formats I like to recommend for portrait photography are 35mm Full Frame like the Canon EOS R6 shown above and APS-C format (like the Sony a6400 shown below). Smaller sensor formats may be incredibly sharp, but these two formats are large enough to allow for us to have a wide range of selective focus options (shallow depth of field) for creating portraits that stand out, both from the background and as a work of art.

Sony a6400

^{Sony a6400}

APS-C format is going to be the more affordable format for cameras and lenses, even professional-caliber equipment, but if you have the budget for pro-level or prosumer Full Frame format gear, you’ll be happy you opted for them as portrait photography gear.

Since the “normal” lenses for smaller formats are shorter focal lengths, smaller format users will need to adjust techniques and use even faster lenses to gain a similar shallow depth of field for the classic portrait that pops out from the background.

Fujifilm GFX 50S II

^{Fujifilm GFX 50S II}

Medium format digital cameras like the Fujifilm GFX 50S II shown above are super expensive. This makes them out of reach for a large percentage of serious portrait photographers, so Full Frame is the format of choice outside of needing smaller money budgets.

New mirrorless cameras and all sorts of used DSLRs and mirrorless Full Frame can be very reasonably priced. Since you can use almost any lens ever made on a mirrorless Full Frame camera with the right adapter, this has become a very popular option for serious portrait photography gear.

Portrait Photography Gear: Lenses

Canon RF 50mm

^{Canon RF 50mm f/1.8 STM}

I’ll be listing Full Frame format lens focal lengths, so use the appropriate crop factor to adjust for APS-C or Micro 4/3rds format cameras.

Short telephoto lenses are great for portraits since their narrower field of view and apparent perspective result in a very natural appearance and virtually distortion-free facial features. All things being equal, a longer focal length lens also has less depth of field at any focusing distance, which works well for portraits in a large number of situations.

Canon RF 70 200mm

^{Canon RF 70-200mm f/2.8}

Since I’m preaching “less is more” today, a telephoto zoom lens is often a good choice as portrait photography gear. I like the faster zoom lenses, such as the f/2.8 versions of the 70-200mm zoom lens. A plus for opting for that type of lens is they are also usually pro-style lenses with added ruggedness and sometimes weather resistant sealing.

Telephoto perspectives and shallow depth of field isn’t all there is for a portrait photographer to use for creating a great portrait, other focal lengths are also quite useful. Deeper depth of field can be leveraged to great advantage for group portraits or environmental portraits, too.

Canon RF 35mm

^{Canon RF 35mm f/1.8}

The normal focal length lens is a wonderful all-around lens for any type of photography and they are awesome for use as portrait photography gear. You can get a very compact and very fast lens in the normal focal length in all of the formats.

Rounding out my options, I also like to carry a moderate wide-angle lens in my bag for portrait sessions. The faster, the better.

So, that’s three lenses. I could whittle it down to two lenses (less is more) if I use a fast zoom in the wide to short telephoto range, which will also include the normal focal length for that format. The f/2.8 versions are my preference for the same reasons as liking the 70-200mm f/2.8 zooms

Canon RF 24 70mm

^{Canon RF 24-70mm f/2.8}

So, if I were shopping right now for a camera and some lenses to use as portrait photography gear, I would look closely at the new Full Frame mirrorless cameras such as the Canon EOS R6, which has great low-light performance.

Canon EOS RF lenses in my discussion would be the Canon RF 70-200mm f/2.8 telephoto zoom, Canon RF 50mm f/1.8 STM lens, Canon RF 35mm f/1.8 macro wide-angle lens, and the less is more option for the Canon RF 24-70mm f/2.8 L zoom lens. If you’re shooting Sony Alpha a7-IV, Nikon Z6ii, or Panasonic Lumix S5 cameras, adjust this list as appropriate. Use the 1.5X crop factor to find similar use lenses if your cameras are APS-C format, such as the Fujifilm X-T4, or any other brand.

Learn More:

Straps and Bags for Workflow Solutions

HoldFast Money Maker Dual Camera Strap

As we get more serious in our photography, the bags and straps we first used start to show their limitations, making us want a better solution for comfort, security, and better workflow while shooting.

My favorite strap to use for photoshoots, from landscape treks and street photography to weddings and portrait sessions, is the HoldFast Money Maker Dual Camera Strap. It’s beautifully made from fine leather and is a harness-style strap that offers superb comfort and gear safety.

Explorer Lens Quiver Messenger Bag

It’s a dual-camera strap, which is why I’m listing it as a workflow solution for portrait photography. Being able to have two cameras at the ready with different lenses means I can instantly switch back and forth as needed during a portrait session. Another option is to attach their Explorer Lens Quiver Messenger Bag to the Money Maker for keeping an entire small system at the ready while you’re working.

Useful Accessories for Portrait Photography

Neewer 79 Multifunction tripod

Two of the most useful accessories for our portrait photography gear are a tripod and a wireless release. You could also include filters such as a soft-focus filter or some fun props, but the tripod and wireless release combination are more important for my shooting. Here’s why:

There are two basic methods for taking portraits, holding the camera freehand and moving around as the picture taker, or keeping the camera in one place and directing the subject’s poses. Both are valid professional techniques and I use both of them as needed.

Pixel TW 283 DC2 wireless remote

Holding the camera freehand and moving around the scene and subject is pretty self-explanatory, but let me tell you my reasons for also liking keeping the camera on a tripod. It’s about the lighting. When I am either in the field with portable gear or in my studio, I can set up a lighting configuration and keep it as is while I stand to the side of my camera and direct the subject.

I find this style of shooting often puts the subject at ease resulting in more natural poses and facial expressions. A medium-duty tripod such as the Neewer 79” Multifunction tripod is great for use as portrait photography gear and is super versatile for several different genres of photography. Paired with the Pixel TW-283 DC2 wireless remote, you have a good portrait setup.

Lighting Options for Portrait Photography

oval 24 X 35 5 in 1 reflectors

Whether inside or outdoors, a portable reflector is one of the primary essential pieces of portrait photography gear for my photo sessions. It allows for redirecting light into exactly where needed for a great portrait, such as when shooting with the Sun behind our subject and using one to reflect catch light or fill light back to their face.

I like using bigger reflectors such as these oval 24” X 35” 5-in-1 reflectors from Konseen. The multiple color choices make this even more versatile.

If you don’t yet have a studio lighting kit, Neewer has a nice low cost complete kit that even includes a background system. Other accessories can be added as you grow into your portrait lighting skills, such as portable LED panel lights for adding fill light outdoors.

Neewer lighting kit

Using this essential portrait photography gear will equip you to be ready to capture great portraits in your home studio or in any remote location, outdoors or inside. Combine this gear with your ever-expanding skills as a photographer, and your portrait images will please you, your subjects, and anyone viewing them.

A Great Partner for Printing Portraits

artbeat studios homepage

Having all the right gear to help you take great portraits is just part of the equation. You need to bring it home by partnering with the best printing company to bring your hard work to life in a gorgeous print.

There are plenty of printing companies out there that promise high-quality products, but only fraction of them actually deliver prints that live up to the hype. Artbeat Studios is one such company. After all, they won our 2020 metal print shootout and repeated as champs in 2021 as well.

So, what makes Artbeat Studios the ideal choice for printing your portraits?

artbeat studios canvas prints

For starters, you get a great selection of products from which to choose. You can go the traditional route and get a paper print, or you can go more modern with a metallic or acrylic print. Canvas prints are an additional option, as shown above.

Likewise, Artbeat Studios offers tons of traditional sizing options as well as custom sizing so you're sure to get a print that fits your specific needs. Add in various frame and mounting options, plus substrate-specific customizations (e.g., different surface options for metal prints) that can truly make your portraits shine.

why artbeat studios

Apart from the array of products, it's worth noting that Artbeat Studios uses the finest materials, offers free shipping, and gives you a happiness guarantee - if you aren't totally satisfied with your print, just return it and get full store credit.

In other words, Artbeat Studios puts their money where their mouth is!

But, I can tell you from experience that the chances of you not liking your print are slim to none. I've ordered many prints from Artbeat over the years, and have been blown away by the quality each time.

So, head over to Artbeat Studios to see for yourself what they can do to help you create the ideal portrait print. Take it from me, it'll be worth it!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Fall Family Portrait Ideas

Written by PT Editor on 05 October 2023.

Fall Family Portrait Ideas

^{Photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

It’s Fall! Photographically, the fall or autumn season is a prime time for all sorts of photography. Fall family portraits are one of the activities that we really love here at Photography Talk.

A fall portrait has a lot of options for making something very special, especially if you like doing environmental portraits or other forms of outdoor portrait photography. Studio portraits are also popular at this time and give opportunities for making fall portraits without being outside.

Follow along as we discuss some fall family portrait ideas that you can use for your own family or for capturing portraits for other people, such as your clients as a photography business.

Fall Family Portrait Ideas - Timing

fall portraits timing

^{Photo by fotostorm via iStock}

The timing for fall family portrait ideas will vary somewhat based on your location. More northern locations will have the warmer colors of foliage happening earlier than more southern locations. Elevation matters, too, with higher elevations encountering peak colors earlier than other areas.

Timing for fall family portrait ideas also covers the time of day you’ll want to be shooting. Golden Hour, morning or afternoon versions of it, has wonderfully warm lighting conditions that can be used to accentuate the already warmer tones of the turning leaves.

During the fall season, the clocks change off of Daylight Saving Time for many regions, so it pays to keep that in mind when planning out the hour of any planned outdoor photoshoot.

Yet another factor to note is that the shorter daylight hours mean that the transitions from full sun to Golden Hour to sunset (or reverse order for morning times) will happen quicker than they do during summer.

So, as a photographer, it pays to be prepared to shoot as quickly as possible to maximize your available outdoor hours. You don’t need to rush through the poses, but that lower light level of early evening will come up on you fast if you’re distracted.

Fall Family Portrait Ideas - Locations

fall portraits locations

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

What locations work for fall family portrait ideas is something you can scout out well ahead of time. It is also good to check out location ideas online to see what certain areas look like during this time of year.

Local parks are often an excellent area to consider as a photoshoot location. You’ll want to check for any local regulations covering using the parks in your area for taking pictures for profit, but if there are fees, they are generally low, and rules are easy to follow.

Another bright idea might be your own back or front yard. You'll want the proper insurance coverage when capturing fall family portraits as a professional. That’s often what some of the local park fees help cover, but it’s a good idea to be covered for liability in general as a photography business.

Remember that most homeowners, renters, and personal auto policies won’t cover professional endeavors. In that same line of thought concerning safety, bring a light of some kind if your session will end close to or after sundown.

Fall Family Portrait Ideas - Posing and Composition

fall portraits posing

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

Fall family portrait ideas can use the same posing and composition practices as we would for portraits any time of year. Depending on how large the family is, you can use simple ideas or become the conductor or director of your shooting session and be creative.

In outdoor settings, using things in the area often works well. A park, trail, or yard may have benches, low rock walls, rustic wooden fences, or tree stumps that can be incorporated into the posing and composition for sitting subjects, standing subjects, or as a prop to lean on.

Props for indoor settings fit into this category as well. You can bring in natural examples of fall foliage or use some realistic-looking fake stuff that can be at all sorts of stores during this time of year.

Fall Family Portrait Ideas - Displaying Images

fall portrait tips

Displaying and viewing wall art of your finished fall family portrait ideas can be every bit as much fun as it is to create them in the first place. Whether you’re using these fall family portrait ideas for your own personal fun or selling them as part of a portrait package as a professional photography business, you’ll want to have the highest quality materials and processes for prints.

Artbeat Studios has two types of prints that show off fall family portrait ideas in a fine way: Luster Finish Paper Prints and Giclée Canvas Prints. The canvas prints can be hung as-is, but you’ll probably want a frame for your paper prints. The Box frame option from Artbeat Studios is a nice choice for fall portraits.

fall portrait tips for beginners

For delivering the best possible fall family portrait prints, you’ll want to send Artbeat Studios the best image file possible. They can handle JPEG and TIFF image files up to 500 MB in size, and they prefer the 150 ppi resolution for printing, though they can provide 100 ppi to 300 ppi.

Here is a good explanation of the ppi differences in a YouTube video from the Artbeat Studios channel:

Large paper prints in a frame or large canvas prints with or without a frame will show off the end results of your fall family portrait ideas in a fine way. Artbeat Studios also has loyalty pricing, white-label shipping, and easy online ordering, which professionals can use.

Fall Family Portrait Ideas - Equipment

fall portraits equipment

^{Photo by ozgurdonmaz via iStock}

You likely already have the high-quality camera and lens equipment to take advantage of your fall family portrait ideas, so here are some helpful hints.

Family portraits can be made with wider or normal lenses. Still, it pays to have a short telephoto for single-person or two-person head and shoulder shots in addition to normal and wide lenses for groups and environmental shots.

A fast aperture for incorporating selective focus is also useful. You can actually get all of this capability in one lens if you have a fast aperture, wide to telephoto zoom lens.

The 24-70mm f/2.8 lens is a good choice in Full Frame format. Not only does this lens type have the focal length spread needed and a wide enough aperture for selective focus at the short tele end of the lens, but they're also almost always a pro-level lens with the extra ruggedness and reliability you want in serious photography gear.

A nice benefit of a high-quality zoom lens for outdoor portrait shooting is that you won’t have to spend time switching back and forth among lenses, taking full advantage of the limited shooting timing mentioned earlier.

The fall family portrait ideas will help you capture and display excellent photos, whether for your own enjoyment or as a professional photographer.

Recommended Photography Gear

Heads up: Clicking on our affiliate links and exploring our sponsored content helps us at no extra cost to you, and we only recommend gear we're absolutely crazy about!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Fall Photography Ideas

Written by PT Editor on 26 August 2020.

Fall Photography Ideas

^{Photo by Gabby Orcutt on Unsplash}

While it feels like this year has been about 5 years pushed into one, it really isn’t even fall yet. But, as someone who loves photographing different colors (and really just wants this year to be over), I’m getting started working on my list of fall photography ideas a little early this year.

And, it turns out I’m not the only one, since Starbucks is planning on unveiling its Pumpkin Spiced line early to fight the pandemic blues too.

If you’ve been in the photography industry for a while, then you know that it can be difficult to come up with unique fall photography ideas. Honestly, after seeing hundreds of photos of people throwing leaves up into the air, I could go without seeing another one ever again.

So, we steered clear of any cliche autumn photoshoot ideas in this list and instead opted for something just a little bit different.

Play Around With Your Colors

fall photography 1

^{Photo by Max Titov on Unsplash}

Since I already mentioned that shooting with different colors is one of my favorite reasons for pursuing the perfect fall picture at all, I figured I would start here.

One of my favorite fall photography ideas is to make sure your models are dressing in appropriate colors. While there is really nothing like photographing a redhead in autumnal colors, you can also pursue this idea by asking your model to dress in yellows, oranges, browns or reds and then finding areas full of complimentary colors.

These colors also just so happen to compliment a wide range of skin tones, so you’re unlikely to run into any problems with your clients when making this request.

fall photography 2

^{Photo by Dmitry Pankin on Unsplash}

As someone who never lived somewhere where autumn photography was simple, (i.e., I live in a pretty arid desert landscape and don’t have autumnal leaves in my city), I took to getting incredibly creative with my fall photography ideas.

Instead of using autumn leaves for my fall photography, I visited the nearest craft supply store and purchased different cans of spray paint and would actually color leaves myself (with my son, of course).

This is definitely another way you can play around with the colors in your photos, especially if you have children or if your clients have children. It’s a craft and a photoshoot rolled into one and it’s especially useful for people who may not get those gorgeous fall colors anywhere else.

Practice Photographing Children

fall photography 3

^{Photo by Lydia Winters on Unsplash}

If you’ve ever seen one of your friends post an adorable photo of their baby in a pumpkin then you know that autumn is one of the best seasons for family photographers.

One of my favorite fall photography ideas is to practice working with children as your models, especially if you’ve never done so before. Children love fall because it means all of their favorite holidays are right around the corner. There’s a sort of excitement in the air for them.

Children also love fall because it comes with a slew of new outdoor activities they didn’t get during the summer, like pumpkin patches, apple picking and movie nights with way too much hot chocolate.

fall photography 4

^{Photo by Paige Cody on Unsplash}

I think this is one of the most useful fall photography ideas because children will naturally have a blast if you take them to do any one of these activities, which means you don’t need a ton of experience posing children in order to capture them in a really playful light. All you need to do is follow them around and snap away!

Use Fairy Lights

autumn photography 5

^{Photo by Marcelo Matarazzo on Unsplash}

I don’t know exactly why this is, but most fall photography ideas use props. This isn’t true of many of the other seasons and I don’t know how we fell into the tradition as photographers, but I’m not complaining.

autumn photography 6

^{Photo by Gabriele Ribeiro on Unsplash}

One of my favorite props to use during this time is fairy lights. Since fairy lights are typically used during nighttime shots to add warmth, you can use them the exact same way during autumn if you live in a rather drab area. I already mentioned that I live in a desert, so I don’t get a lot of the warm autumn colors that the rest of the country gets. Learn more about fall maternity shoot on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

This is a useful tip for people like me, but it’s also a great idea for people who live in parts of the world that don’t receive much light during the autumn months.

Play Up the Indoors

autumn photography ideas 7

^{Photo by Dilyara Garifullina on Unsplash}

Fall photography ideas don’t all need to rely on the gorgeous outdoor weather. It’s also the perfect time of year to practice photographing food.

The softer lighting that the autumn months bring means you can easily get beautiful, dark photos indoors with just the natural light.

Plus, you’re probably going to be baking a ton during the autumn months anyways, so you may as well take the time to practice photographing it all.

autumn photography ideas 8

^{Photo by allison christine on Unsplash}

If food photography isn’t exactly your forte, then you can also just snuggle up with your family members and start snapping photos.

Not all of your fall photography ideas need to reinvent the wheel. If you’re having a fun evening with your loved ones, why not capture it on film?

Focus On Your Landscape

fall picture ideas 9

^{Photo by Erik Witsoe on Unsplash}

While most fall picture ideas focus on the changing landscapes the autumn months bring, you can change up this dynamic by using a wide-angle lens to create beautiful atmospheric shots.

By using a wide-angle lens, you can incorporate fall colors while also giving the image a nice, deep foreground. The foreground might be full of texture and fall colors like the one above, which helps set the autumnal tone for the image.

fall picture ideas 10

^{Photo by Thomas Morse on Unsplash}

However, if you’re going to be traveling during the autumn months anyways, then you may as well extend this traveling by a day or two in order to stop at some scenic spots along the way.

You might find a scene like the one above, in which the fall colors lend a completely different vibe to the shot than they do in the first example.

This image is bright and cheerful, and all the layers of colors give the images great depth.

Be Prepared for Inclement Weather

fall pictures 11

^{Photo by Nathan Anderson on Unsplash}

No matter which of these fall photography ideas you’re thinking of pursuing, you need to be prepared for bad weather because it just comes with the territory.

The first thing you need to be preparing for is how you’re going to protect your camera from rain, sleet, or the occasional snowfall this season.

camera canopy 1

I’ve been using a Camera Canopyfor a few years now and it has been a godsend. The idea behind Camera Canopy is pretty simple. Instead of using those awful plastic bags to protect your camera, you simply use a little plastic shield that fits into your camera’s hot shoe.

camera canopy 2

The Camera Canopy comes in two different sizes: one for your DSLR and one for your mirrorless camera (shown above). The DSLR Camera Canopy is $90, while the mirrorless Camera Canopy is $60.

No matter the option you choose, you can rest assured knowing that your fall photography won’t be interrupted by a technical malfunction. Your camera and lens will be well protected without obscuring your ability to reach the camera controls. Not bad, right?!

We Recommend

Fall Portrait Tips

Written by PT Editor on 27 September 2021.

Fall Portrait Tips

^{photo bySrdjanPav via iStock}

The seasons definitely aren’t changing fast enough for me here in southern California, but for many parts of the world, it is decidedly autumnal.

As the chill sweeps in and the late night fires begin, you may begin getting a lot more people looking for your portrait services. Let’s be honest, nobody wants to sit around when it is muggy and blazing hot while trying to pose for a photographer.

If you know what you’re doing, this could mean a huge boost in revenue for you throughout October. But, you’ll need some fall portrait tips in order to make the best of this new revenue stream.

Since a lot of fall portrait tips are pretty cliche at this point, I focused on finding fall portrait tips that are both practical and easy to implement. Hopefully, this means you can start shooting immediately.

Give Your Clients Outfit Recommendations

portrait photography tips

^{photo byskynesher via iStock}

Your clients need some fall portrait tips just as much as you do, because chances are, they’ve never done this before. So, help them out by leveraging the knowledge you have.

I cannot tell you how many times I have had clients show up for my portrait sessions in the middle of October when it is in the 50s in a summer dress. While you may originally think it won’t be a huge issue, most of my clients that do this inevitably start to freeze and either become cranky (which shows through the photos) or need to cut the session short.

In order to prevent this from happening, shoot a quick email with some fall portrait tips to your clients before their shoot. If they have children, this could be a good time to remind them to make sure everyone is well-fed and have their favorite, non-messy snacks with them. It’s also a good time to remind them what colors they should wear and to remind them to bring layers with them in case it gets cold.

Know When the Sun Sets

autumn portrait tips

^{photo byMartinan via iStock}

This tip could also be included in an article about tips for outdoor portraits, but I’m specifically including it here because the sun has been a problem for me in the past.

If you’ve been so accustomed to shooting throughout the summer, you may be genuinely surprised when the sun starts to set earlier and earlier and I have made the amateur mistake of booking a fall portrait session way too late in my calendar so that I barely had 15 or 20 minutes to get all of the photos I needed to.

If you’re booking a session more than a couple of weeks out, do yourself a favor and Google what time the sun will set on that date so that you don’t make the same mistake I have.

Learn More:

Ask Your Clients How They Feel About Fall Photography Cliches

tips for outdoor portraits

^{photo byjessicaphoto via iStock}

You know how I mentioned that a lot of fall portrait tips are pretty cliched at this point?

It’s because they are. However, they are for a reason. Everyone loves getting photos of their newborn in a pumpkin because there is arguably nothing more adorable than a tiny little baby in a giant pumpkin.

So, depending upon the interests of your client, you need to figure out whether they want to avoid these cliches like the plague or completely play into them. Typically, I find that clients will go one way or the other, they won’t want to get some cliched photos.

So, when I’m sending my clients that list of fall portrait tips, I like to also ask them some basic questions about what they are expecting. It can also be helpful to send photos that you’ve completed in past fall portrait sessions to ask which ones they like the most.

Don’t Scout Locations in Advance

Autumn is a great time for portraits

^{photo byHalfpoint via iStock}

When you’re shooting portraits in the fall, there’s a lot of unpredictable elements. One of these unpredictable elements is your location.

I’ve made the mistake of scouting locations a week or two in advance of a shoot, thinking it would be perfect, and then showing up just to find out that all of the leaves in that area had already fallen to the ground so that the trees were completely barren.

So, if you’re going to be scouting your locations, do so a day or two before your shoot.

Get Beautiful Prints

While these autumn portrait tips will help you get the best shots, you’ll also want them displayed in the best way.

That’s why I recommend that you get beautiful canvas prints from CanvasHQ and upsell your clients with them.

Prints from CanvasHQ are economical and sturdy. Each one is built to last a lifetime and is, in fact, guaranteed too. But, they are also priced realistically for clients on a budget.

The printmakers at CanvasHQ hand build each print so that there are no errors during the printing process.

CanvasHQ is also really straightforward about their timeline. You can actually see how long a print would take to make it to you (or your client) if you sent it in today directly on their website.

By shopping with CanvasHQ, you are going to get the most out of these portrait photography tips because your clients will be so thrilled with their final product.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Family Photo Ideas

Written by PT Editor on 09 February 2022.

Family Photo Ideas

^{photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Families love photos of everyone together! Whether you’re taking pics for yourself and your own family or taking photos for another family, either for fun or profit, here are some family portrait ideas that you will find helpful.

Some of the most basic family portrait ideas may already be well known to you if you’ve been a serious photographer for a while. I always like to review for myself some basic techniques and methods before getting everyone together, plus, there are always new thoughts that come up when I search for more family portrait ideas.

Family Portrait Ideas #1 - Posing & Composition
Family Portrait Ideas #2 - Clothing & Accessories
Family Portrait Ideas #3 - Lighting
Family Portrait Ideas #4 - Lens Choices
Family Portrait Ideas #5 - Camera Settings
Family Portrait Ideas #6 - Display & Delivery

Family Portrait Ideas #1 - Posing & Composition

simple family portrait ideas

^{photo by Wavebreakmedia via iStock}

How many are going to be in the family portrait? The number of people involved will help us narrow down some posing and composition family portrait ideas.

If you’re dealing with a small family unit, such as 3 to 5 people, the posing and composition options are plentiful. One of the things that tends to work well for semi-formal family portraits is to have the parents in the center area with their children around them.

Depending on how old or big the children are will determine how you might place them in relation to the parents.

family portrait ideas

^{photo by fizkes via iStock}

For instance, if the children are young and still small, placing them in front of the parents looks natural. With adult children, side by side or having them standing behind seated parents is one way to pose.

The family portrait may be all siblings or a mixed group of relations. In these types of family portraits, we can pretty much pose them as we please.

Interesting family portrait ideas of posing such as staggering heights, having some seated and others standing adds interest. We aren’t limited to that standard look of taller in the middle and shorter on the outside or lined up short to tall.

simple ideas for family portraits

^{photo by Image Source via iStock}

The more people involved, we can really start playing with our composition instead of just posing. Some groups of people tend to naturally arrange themselves in positions that correspond to photographic composition techniques. It’s an interesting phenomenon, but the more comfortable people are with each other, the more they tend to arrange themselves in a pleasing composition, requiring only some tweaks and hints.

ideas for family portraits

^{photo by RonTech2000 via iStock}

Everyone is always worried about what to do with their hands and how to hold their heads, where to look. Putting them at ease is one of the fundamental family portrait ideas that works with formal, semi-formal, and casual portrait settings.

We may not feel like a showman or a director, but as the photographer of the group, we actually do play those roles. Talk about the group, what they like doing, how they’re all related, what posing and position ideas they have. All of this will make the group more comfortable, which will show in the finished images.

tips for family portraits

^{photo by pixelfusion3d via iStock}

A tripod and a remote shutter release will be a great help as you implement these family portrait ideas, having them move around to different positions, talking to them, and gaining their confidence. With the camera on a tripod and a wireless release, you have a lot of freedom of movement, which can give you some great images in your family portrait session.

Family Portrait Ideas #2 - Clothing & Accessories

family portrait tips

^{photo by Arundhati Sathe via iStock}

Some groups want to have a unifying aspect to the portrait session, using similar clothing or accessories such as hats or jewelry items to match or be in harmony. Other family groups will think family portrait ideas such as that are corny. As the photographer, we can work with both ideas.

Some family groups will look to the photographer for ideas, so it’s a good practice to have a discussion ahead of time about clothing choices. If the group wants muted, subdued colors or styles, or if they want to show their personality through more noticeable clothing, this is something that can be decided on before the photoshoot.

For more casual sessions, perhaps spur-of-the-moment groupings, the clothing choices may be more limited. That’s where we go back to our family portrait ideas of posing and composition to make adjustments of who is next to who or in front of who. Many times, it’s a very dynamic situation, changes happening all through the photoshoot.

Learn More:

Family Portrait Ideas #3 - Lighting

portrait photography tips

^{photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Family portrait ideas concerning lighting will be different depending on whether we’re in our own controlled environment or if we’re on location. Indoors and outdoors also factors in.

For indoor portrait sessions on location or at our own home or office, LED lights with softboxes or umbrellas are one way to go. LED continuous lighting allows for the photographer to see at a glance what’s happening in regard to shadows and bright spots. Softer lighting contributes to less contrast issues and a pleasing light quality.

In our own studios, we could have either strobe lighting or continuous LED lighting, whichever we’re used to setting up and using. The amount of control over lighting will be greatest on our own home territory, our studio, or our house.

family portrait poses

^{photo by Alina555 via iStock}

Outdoor family portrait ideas can take advantage of two technologies, TTL flash and/or collapsible reflectors. TTL flash is such a workable technology for outdoor portraits, letting us balance natural light with fill flash.

One of the most basic family portrait ideas is that a collapsible reflector or two can be placed in such a way to fill in shadows, lessening contrast issues. Reflectors can also help change the light quality to a cooler or warmer color temperature.

Family Portrait Ideas #4 - Lens Choices

family photo poses

^{photo by digitalskillet via iStock}

Believe it or not, one of the better family portrait ideas is that a kit zoom lens in the wide to short telephoto range is a very workable lens option for these types of portraits. These kit lenses are usually fine performers optically, but their shortcomings are in how rugged they are and how fast a maximum aperture they have.

A zoom lens works in these situations because of the flexibility of being able to change focal lengths in an instant, opening up all sorts of candid poses and expressions to be captured.

Sticking with a similar focal length range of the original kit lens that came with your camera, a nice upgrade is to pick up a faster or a professional build lens. Some great family portrait ideas for lenses can be found used for far less money than new lenses. If you prefer prime lenses, those can be found used as well.

mpb

I like to shop for used lenses at MPB because of their 6-month warranty, 7-day return window, and their commitment to providing only the best used equipment they can find. Here are a few choices available for some different cameras and formats:

Full Frame Canon EOS DSLR users should look at the Canon EF 24-70mm f/2.8.
APS-C Nikon DSLRs would benefit from the speed of a Nikon 35mm f/1.8Glens.
Fujifilm APS-C shooters would like the Fujifilm 16-80mm f/4.0 zoom lens.
If you have an MFT camera, the Olympus 12-40mm f/2.8 lens fits.
A Sony Full Frame mirrorless camera can use a Sigma 24-70mm f/2.8 ART lens.

You get the idea - a medium-range fast zoom or a normal to slightly wide prime lens with a fast aperture will pair nicely with the needs of group portraiture.

Family Portrait Ideas #5 - Camera Settings

family photoshoot ideas

^{photo by nazar_ab via iStock}

The balance for exposure settings when considering family portrait ideas is to decide on a lens aperture that gives enough depth of focus for handling the group while still softening the background if not in our own studio.

The sweet spot aperture of a lens, which is usually two or three stops down from wide open, is a good starting point for our exposure triangle and depth of field considerations. Plus, the sweet spot has the best optical quality the lens is capable of giving. Shooting at a lower ISO gives good results, though some ambient lighting conditions may require us to use a slightly higher ISO.

Capturing our image files in RAW format is also a good practice. RAW format can have the color profile assigned in post-processing, and RAW also allows for a wider range of exposure tweaks to enhance the final image. Nothing beats carefully calculating a correct exposure, but being able to dial or slide in those small changes in post can really make our finished photos stand out.

Family Portrait Ideas #6 - Display & Delivery

$\family picture ideas$

^{photo by ChristinLola via iStock}

The final consideration of family portrait ideas for great images is to decide how to display the photos to others. Obviously, social media and sharing via email is on many people’s minds, so we could provide JPEG final files to enable them to be readily shared. Be sure to have these things carefully spelled out in any contracts if engaging in family portraits for profit.

Some other wonderful family portrait ideas for display and delivery are large physical prints, canvas prints, and metal prints. Many families are already primed to ask for these specialty processes because they’ve seen them at other people’s homes or perhaps on your office walls. Give the subjects some options, see what they want, and charge appropriately when engaging in work for profit.

Share your own family portrait ideas with us in our Photography Talk forums. Let’s see what everyone is doing!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Family Portrait Posing Mistakes

Written by PT Editor on 11 September 2019.

Family Portrait Posing Mistakes

^{photo by lisafx via iStock}

There’s a reason talk show hosts love to laugh at bad family portraits from the 80s…

Photographers make family portrait posing mistakes every single day. Sometimes they are incredibly bad.

So, here’s a quick list of tips that might prevent your family photos from ending up as an internet meme. Learn More about cool poses for guys on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

Family Portrait Posing Mistake #1: Having Men Cross Their Legs

portrait photography tips 1

^{photo by imtmphoto via iStock}

Yikes. Does anything look more unnatural than a grown man sitting on the ground criss-cross-apple-sauce?

Unless you’re taking yoga or workout portraits, you should not put a man on the ground with his legs awkwardly all over the place.

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo by Arundhati Sathe via iStock}

I think the only exception to this rule is if it’s a father playing with his child. Otherwise, just avoid putting grownups on the ground.

Family Portrait Posing Mistake #2: Using Trees Incorrectly

family portrait guide 1

^{photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

I don’t know why a favorite cliche for family portrait posing ideas is to put your family at the base of a tree. You can also view another post about photo pose for boys here.

Trees in the background of family portraits, like in the photo above, are fine. The depth of field keeps them out of focus and they give the portait a nice setting.

family portrait guide 2

^{photo by XiXinXing via iStock}

When you are outside using trees to shade your subjects from harsh sunlight, make sure the trees are part of the background. In the photograph above, the tree has become the foucs of the photograph taking up more space in the frame than the subjects.

It is also important to be aware of branches and other objects in the background. You don't want any of the subjects appearing as though they have a branch growing out of their head!

Family Portrait Posing Mistake #3: Not Staggering Couples

family portrait posing ideas 1

^{photo by Wavebreakmedia via iStock}

When multiple generations of family members are in the same photo, it’s important to stagger couples so viewers can identify who’s who.

For example, is there anything more awkward than having your sibling accidentally identified as your significant other?

In the image above, the mother and father should have been coupled in the middle of the shot, not their two children. Instead, their kids look like they’re the couple!

family portrait posing ideas 2

^{photo by Cecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

Since there are easy family photo pose that differentiate brother/sister pairs from married couples, this should be a portrait posing mistake that you don’t make.

Stagger couples in each family portrait. Make sure couples are touching or embracing and siblings aren’t.

In the image above, it’s clear who the couples are, not just because of their age difference but because of the manner in which they have been positioned in the shot.

Family Portrait Posing Mistake #4: Unrealistic Expectations for Children

family photo poses 1

^{photo by inarik via iStock}

Kids want to play, they don’t want to stand around for hours waiting to politely smile for a family portrait.

I also hate seeing family portraits where a toddler is standing with the exact same pose as their parents.

family photo poses 2

^{photo by oscarhdez via iStock}

You’re going to get better expressions out of children if you allow them to play around with their siblings and parents during the shoot.

While you can still get some more traditional portraits, make sure you intersperse these shots with more fun photos. Doing so will help you create a more authentic collection of images to present to your clients.

Family Portrait Posing Mistake #5: Relying Too Much on Formal Posing

Family Portrait Posing Mistakes 2

^{photo by Spiderstock via iStock}

Out of all family portrait posing mistakes, this might be the biggest one.

There are way too many cliches in family portrait photography. While these aren’t necessarily embarrassing, they are certainly boring.

Family Portrait Posing Mistakes 3

^{photo by filadendron via iStock}

If you allow the family to play during the shoot, or at least capture the in-between moments, they’ll appreciate the candid shots possibly more than the posed ones.

Besides, one of the best portrait photography tips you can use is to incorporate props into the photo shoot.

In the image above, the cookware and ingredients on the counter are excellent props for getting the family to relax in front of the camera and engage with one another in a meaningful way. The result of this is a much better portrait if you ask me!

Bonus Tip: Make the Most of Portraits by Printing Them on Canvas

While it isn’t practical to have a huge canvas print made of every family photo you have, for those special ones, canvas is the perfect substrate.

Personally, I love the look of canvas - the subtle texture brings photos to light and the thick frames on which canvas is stretched give it beautiful depth on the wall.

But not all canvas prints are made alike. I did a lot of shopping around before finding a good canvas printer, but I finally found them in CanvasHQ.

Over the years, I bought some pretty terrible canvas prints, but since working with CanvasHQ, I’ve gotten nothing but spectacular results.

The folks at CanvasHQ take care to ensure each canvas they ship is just what you want. And with fast shipping, you get it in a jiff.

Even if something does go wrong or you aren’t satisfied with the print, you can send it right back to get a new one. Not bad!

I appreciate the high-end materials that CanvasHQ uses, from the professional-grade inks to the gallery-quality canvas to the handmade frames.

I’ve lost count of how many prints I have from CanvasHQ, but what I can tell you for sure is that they have the best canvas prints money can buy. If you have family photos of your own or prints to deliver to clients, I can’t recommend CanvasHQ enough!

We Recommend

Family Portrait Tips

Written by PT Editor on 07 April 2021.

Family Portrait Tips

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Family portraits can go one of two ways. They can either be one of the best photoshoot experiences or they can go horribly, horribly wrong.

It’s one of the reasons why I love them so much. They keep me on my toes.

I actually got into family portraiture by taking photos of my own family when my son was first born a number of years ago. My first ever experience with a family portrait shoot was that my wife broke down in tears within the first ten minutes.

Thankfully, I think I’ve gotten a little better since then, as I’ve listened to plenty of family portrait tips from friendly photographers. Whether you’re trying to learn how to prepare for family portraits, trying to figure out what to bring for family portraits, or are just looking for some general family portrait advice, you’ve come to the right place.

Here are my top four family portrait tips.

Prepare the Kiddos

tips for family portraits

^{photo bykohei_hara via iStock}

Nobody is happy if the kids aren’t happy, which is a pretty terrible rule considering kids are rarely happy when you want them to be. It’s why the most important family portrait tips surround the kiddos.

Now, you obviously can’t control when one child decides to attack another child with a transformer toy just like you can’t control when one child decides to have a meltdown because you cut their sandwich wrong. But, you can control a few things that are absolutely necessary if you hope to have a good shoot.

family portrait advice

^{photo bymapodile via iStock}

For starters, make absolutely sure that all of the children are well rested before the photoshoot. If you decide to ignore all of the family portrait tips in the rest of this article, follow this one. Don’t plan a family portrait photoshoot during nap time. Don’t plan it too early in the morning. Don’t plan it too early in the evening. You want all of those kiddos well rested and ready to go.

You also want to make sure that everyone has eaten (and recently). I’ll get a lot of parents who are so worried about making sure that their kids’ clothing is clean that they won’t let them have snacks when they’re clearly hungry. Of course this leads to a horrific day of screaming and crying. I’m going to get to some wardrobe tips for family portraits later on in the article, but no wardrobe is worth having a hungry kid.

Pack Properly

how to prepare for family portraits

^{photo bygpointstudio via iStock}

I’ve read tons of family portrait tips over the years and very few of them touch on what you should make sure parents pack.

For starters, going off of my last point, bring lots of snacks. Of course, you don’t want to bring snacks that will stain your kiddos hands, teeth or tongue. You also don’t want to bring snacks that can melt or are incredibly messy. But, there are some good snacks you should pack. Things like crackers, dried fruit or meats and cheeses work wonders. Just make sure that you’re bringing far more snacks than you ever thought you would need. You’ll be thankful to have them.

You’ll also want to bring a second outfit for each person, as well as additional layers. You can follow all of these family portrait tips and still have a miserable photoshoot if everyone is freezing. And, no matter how careful you are about choosing your snacks, someone is bound to drop something somewhere. Bring backup clothing just in case.

Editor's Tip: Do you have old family portraits that are damaged or faded? You don't need to relegate them to a box in the attic - get them restored! PhotoRepairPro has you covered with comprehensive restoration services that won't break the bank. Their service is easy to use as well. Simply upload the image to their website and their restoration experts will make the image like new once again. Once the image is done, you'll get an online proof, JPEG download, and two 5x7 prints. PhotoRepairPro was the exclusive photo restoration service for Costco for over ten years, so you can trust that they have the tools and skills to restore your precious photos!

how to prepare for family portraits 4

^{photo bywundervisuals via iStock}

You should also bring any fun activities that the family likes to do together, especially if their children are young. For instance, you can bring bubbles or balls to play with. This helps to put everyone at ease and can actually lead to really fun pictures. Just make sure that your families bring whatever they enjoy.

P.S. I know I said I only had four family portrait tips for you, so I’ll count this as a bonus tip. If the family you’re photographing has a pet, but especially a dog, have them bring it along. Dogs automatically put children at ease (so long as the children are used to having the dog around). However, I’ve also had a family bring different snakes and lizards to a family photoshoot before and it turned out great.

Learn More:

Make Sure Everyone is Comfortable

wardrobe tips for family portraits 5

^{photo byVesnaandjic via iStock}

Just like my tip about the children needing to be happy, the parents need to be happy as well. Very few of my family portrait tips focus on this, because adults are just better at regulating their emotions than kids are, but one tip I always give parents is for them to wear something that they feel comfortable in.

I’ll frequently have parents show up in clothing that they want to like. Moms showing up in dresses that are just a little too short or too tight for their comfort zone and dads showing up in wingtips that have them limping rather than walking within a few minutes. You obviously want to look nice, but it is far important for you to be comfortable. I always let everyone know this upfront.

Once again, no family portrait photoshoot tips can make up for angry models.

Invest in Good Face Masks

fstop dyota face mask

You want to ensure that you're being as safe as possible when working with clients, and one of the best ways to do that is to have a good face mask to help mitigate the transmission of the COVID-19 virus.

f-stop makes a superb mask called the Dyota AG+ Ion that is washable, reusable, and has three breathable layers. There's a soft nose guard and adjustable ear loops to improve comfort, and the outer shell, which has a water-resistant treatment, wicks moisture away to help keep it dry.

The center layer is a non-woven poly that protects against particle and liquid penetration, and the innermost layer has a SILVADUR treatment to help prevent odors that result from frequent wear.

These masks are available in a variety of colors and are priced right at $19.99!

Capture Each Family’s Uniqueness

family portrait photo shoot tips 6

^{photo byAlessandro Biascioli via iStock}

Another thing that family portrait tips can’t really do is give you advice for each individual family. It is especially important for you to make sure that you listen to your family. If they tell you that they adore football, then try and work that into your photoshoot. If their baby is just starting to crawl, then make sure you go somewhere where they can have fun and be safe.

Regardless of whether or not you listen to these family portrait tips, just make sure that you’re listening to your family. And when it’s all said and done, give them the option of getting big, beautiful prints of their favorite photos.

I personally like canvas for family photos because the texture of the canvas adds a little dimension to the shot. And since you can get canvas prints in very large sizes, they can make a nice statement piece for a family’s home.

If you follow my articles on PhotographyTalk, you know that I’m a big fan of CanvasHQ. I have dozens of prints from these guys and I have yet to be disappointed. That’s part of the reason why they won our $100 canvas print shootout in 2019 and again in 2020 - the quality of their prints is simply impeccable.

The CanvasHQ secret is in the quality of the materials they use. The frames are hand-build and made of kiln-dried wood. The canvas is archival grade that will last for decades to come. The inks CanvasHQ uses are also top-quality and resist fading.

Family portraits are an important part of a family’s history. Help retain that history by offering your clients the option of getting gorgeous canvas prints made by CanvasHQ!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Fine Art Nude Photography

Written by PT Editor on 08 May 2020.

Fine Art Nude Photography

^{photo byJohn Rocha via Pexels}

Fine art nude photography is a genre of photography that has been popular since the inception of photography. When handheld smaller cameras and faster films became the norm for pros and enthusiasts, fine art nude photography seemed to really take off.

What Makes Fine Art Nude Photography Fine Art?

In our previous article 10 Nude Photography Tips, we learned some very practical steps that can help guide us towards creating great fine art nude photography images.

The factors that make fine art nude photography an actual art form are the same things that make other genres of photography qualify as fine art. The control of light, form, texture, exposure values, and composition can all work together or be taken separately.

Fine art nude photography makes an artistic statement. The human form is interesting, sometimes complex, sometimes simple, and can be beautiful. Showing those aspects to others is what makes this genre art.

Fine Art As a Feeling

fine art nude photography 1

^{photo byEternal Happiness via Pexels}

One of the things I like about fine art nude photography, whether I’m doing my own or enjoying the work of someone else, is how this type of art gets right to the core of art and evokes emotion. It’s as though stripping off clothing strips off distraction and all that’s left is the art.

It really doesn’t matter what the emotion is, just that it’s an emotion. Depending on how it’s shot, fine art nude photography could evoke a light, airy feeling, a dark and somber mood, an air of mystery, or a sense of wonder.

Looking at those 10 Nude Photography Tips, you can find a way to express any of those thoughts and feelings, as well as others that come up in your creative process.

Boudoir and Erotica Are Separate Arts

Boudoir photography is one of the hottest types of commercial photography currently. Erotica has been around since before photography was even invented, just look at the frescoes of Pompeii.

Both of these are photographic art, but fine art photography will generally take things a step beyond. For instance, while a pose or composition of these art forms might be sensual, fine art nude photography can strip down the emotional response to pure sensuality. Read more about how to take nudes photos on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

It’s actually pretty simple to move the photoshoot from boudoir to fine art nude photography while in the same session. Sometimes, though it might be a good idea to schedule these arts as separate sessions. Depends on the model, the photographer, and the relationship between the two.

It Can Help You Be a Better Photographer

fine art nude photography 2

^{Photo by nappy from Pexels}

One of the hidden gems of engaging in fine art nude photography is the potential for personal growth as an artist. Art is Art, true, but developing the skills necessary for enjoyable and meaningful images will bleed over into all other aspects of your photography.

Some of the skills concern photographic lighting, rules of composition, posing, exposing for high key or low key, selective focus or deep depth of field tricks, exposure compensation, and use of different focal lengths will be immediately usable in architectural photography, landscape photography, wedding photography, environmental portraiture, and even small product photography.

If you have always wanted to try out fine art nude photography, go ahead and take the steps needed. Be sure to follow all of the other fine art nude photography tips and techniques so you can start it off successfully.

We Recommend

Fine Art Nude Photography Tips From the Professionals

Written by PT Editor on 16 June 2020.

Fine Art Nude Photography Tips From the Professionals

^{photo byGoldmund via iStock}

Fine art nude photography is slightly different from the sometimes radically different form of nude photography with lots of variation possible in how it’s approached and presented. The basic rules and tips can still apply, several are listed in our article 10 Nude Photography Tips.

We’ve talked before about some of the reasons for trying out this genre. Let’s now look at some tips for fine art nude photography from professional photographers that can help us get started or get better.

Use Partial, Implied Nudity

For fine art nude photography, oftentimes a view or pose that doesn’t show actual nudity will be more interesting than fully nude images. This works because it becomes an exercise in presenting art to the viewer.

Of course, some other times, using specific body parts or a full view of male or female nudity can also be fine art nude photography, just don’t limit yourself to feeling like all nude photography projects require complete nudity. Learn more about nude male photography on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

Shoot In Monochrome

nude photography 1

^{photo bymiljko via iStock}

Working in black and white has been a staple of fine art nude photography for decades of the art form’s existence. Monochrome reduces the experience for presenter and viewer to basics of light, shadow, form, and texture.

Monochromatic fine art nude photography isn’t limited to black and white, either. Experiment with different colors of light or lens filters. This can add an air of surrealism or drama to the poses and composition.

Avoid Eye Contact

nude photography 2

^{photo bydundanim via iStock}

I mean, eye contact of the model or subject with the camera or viewer. You can have all the eye contact you want with the model, which might help directing the posing.

By having the model purposefully not engage the viewer in this manner, fine art nude photography creates a mood of detachment or separateness from the world. This can have a great effect on the overall mood of the final image.

Try it out for yourself. Create a pose that is appealing with the model having eye contact with the camera, then simply have them look down. The change is obvious and can become dramatic, romantic, or even somewhat eerie, depending on what you are attempting to create.

Use Various Lighting Techniques

A lot of the artful component of fine art nude photography comes from employing the various lighting and exposure techniques you already know. If you’re lighting with side lighting, try out the same composition with rim lighting, or move the lights to the other side of the model.

You can vary intensity, color temperature, soft or hard, and all of it will affect your fine art nude photography in a particular manner that could work for creative imaging.

Put It In Writing

If you are engaging in fine art nude photography as a commercial endeavor, you obviously need a contract, model releases, and so on. Even if it’s all between friends, having written agreements evens out any expectations. You can also view another post about male nude photography.

Don’t Touch

A cardinal rule in fine art nude photography is not to touch the model. Use your voice instead, directing clearly what you want the model to do. This is why all those preparations spoken of in other articles are so important.

Communicate

Before, during, and after, communication between model and photographer is vital for a successful fine art nude photography session. Talk out your ideas together, sow the model what you’re doing, and then let them see the results.

Following these professional tips will let you engage in fine art nude photography and achieve fantastic results.

We Recommend

Fine Art Photography Do’s and Don’ts

Written by PT Editor on 24 June 2020.

Fine Art Photography Dos and Donts

^{photo bymaxdis via iStock}

If you’re taking this down time to work on your fine art photography, you aren’t alone. Many photographers have always dreamed of participating in fine art photography, but find themselves getting caught up in the day-to-day operations of their business.

There can be good money in fine art photography. But, if you make any of these fine art photography mistakes (and you will, we all do) it’s going to be much harder to find clients willing to pay for your work.

This list of fine art photography do’s and don’ts were curated specifically by the PhotographyTalk team and our decades of experience.

Do: Be Cohesive

fine art photography 1

^{Photo by Eric Park on Unsplash}

If you’re hoping to display your fine art photography in any sort of studio or event space, you will need to have a collection of works that build off of one another.

If you’re brand new to fine art photography, this may mean that you are only shooting one specific style for a few months.

Whatever that style might be, each time you pick up your camera to create an image, strive to do something that fits with your style. Doing so will help ensure that your collection is a cohesive experience. And that experience doesn’t have to be based on a single subject matter. Your collection might be connected by color, shape, perspective, or some other specific feature.

Do: Create an Artist Statement

Creating an artist statement can be incredibly daunting if you’ve never done it before. That’s why you can let David M. Kessler Fine Art walk you through it.

If you create your statement before you start the project, it can help bring that cohesion we talked about to your work.

One mistake I frequently see in photographers’ artist statements is that they feel the need to be overly technical. Keep in mind that your artist statement isn’t for other photographers, it’s for anyone who is going to be viewing your piece (which includes potential clients).

Fine art photography artist statements should include the following elements:

2-3 sentences that provide an overview of the themes from your project
2-3 sentences that showcase how you exemplified these themes

Do: Showcase Your Work in a Gorgeous Fine Art Album

how to display fine art photography 1

^{Pictured above: The Journal ArtBook, with a leather-wrapped cover and hand-torn, cotton rag paper with deckled edges.}

If you follow PhotographyTalk then you know we recently began working with Qt Albums. Qt Albums creates fine art photography albums that are otherworldly.

The ArtBook, specifically, is what I use for my fine art photography because it is a museum-grade album. What I mean by this is that the ArtBook features 100% archival, acid free paper that is rated to last for over a century without any fading or discoloration.

how to display fine art photography 2

^{Pictured above: The Cotton Rag ArtBook with a linen hardcover and cotton rag pages with straight edges.}

Moreover, every ArtBook lays completely flat when open, so you won’t need to mess with the pages while displaying your work.

There are different options you can choose when it comes to the cover of your ArtBook, from a soft, leather-bound cover to a velvet or linen cover.

how to display fine art photography 3

^{Pictured above: Deckled Edge Cotton Rag Paper ArtBook with a hardcover and cotton rag pages with deckled edges.}

But, most importantly, your fine art photography album will be exactly what you make it and it will last a lifetime.

I specifically enjoy working with Qt Albums because they strictly work with photographers, which means you get a higher-level of customer service and a faster turnaround time. Plus, you’ll never have to Google, “how to display fine art photography,” ever again!

Learn More:

Don’t: Refuse to Photograph in Color

fine art photography 2

^{photo byFotos von Reisen, schwarz weiß und diverse. via iStock}

This is a huge pet peeve of mine when it comes to fine art photography. A ton of fine art photographers will refuse to take photos in color in favor of a strictly black and white portfolio.

I don’t have anything against black and white photographs, but I personally feel pretty strongly that if you’re going to strictly photograph in black and white, there must be a great reason for you to do so.

In essence, if you’re going to be shooting fine art photography in black and white, ask yourself what that choice is bringing to your work. Did you want to highlight the lighting in the photograph over the substance? Did you want to showcase the line work instead of the subject?

Don’t: Make Your Work as Vague as Possible

fine art photography mistakes 3

^{photo byAlexander Pyatenko via iStock}

This is definitely another fine art photography cliche that is sometimes painful to watch. Your portfolio should not be filled with vague images that are vague just to be vague.

It’s confusing for your viewers and probably won’t gain you a ton of clients, considering you must be of a certain echelon of photographers to sell work most people don’t like.

If you truly love vague fine art photography, then I encourage you to pursue it, just make sure you include those vague photographs in a larger body of work that bring meaning and substance to it.

Just like with shooting in black and white, only shoot vague photographs if you’re trying to point out a larger thematic element by doing so.

Don’t: Introduce Noise to Your Photos on Purpose

fine art photography mistakes 2

^{Photo by Florian Olivo on Unsplash}

If you’ve participated in the fine art photography industry for longer than a few months, chances are you’ve come across a photographer who shoots all of their work with a DSLR but adds noise to their photos in order to make them look like they were taken with a film camera.

To me, this move screams of unprofessionalism. If you love the look of film photographs so much, why not use a film camera?

It’s important for me to note here that I’m not talking about throwing out every shot you’ve taken in low light that naturally had some noise in it. Noise can sometimes add a surreal element to your photos.

Just be careful with it. Again, don’t add noise for the sake of doing it - make sure there is a purpose!

Don’t: Add Strong Vignettes

fine art photography mistakes 4

^{Photo by Adrien Tutin on Unsplash}

Another thing some fine art photographers will do is add a strong vignette to replicate what a film camera might have done.

When I first started in the industry, I also noticed that a lot of photographers would use a strong vignette to cover a badly composed shot.

While vignettes have a time and a place, they shouldn’t be used to try to hide a poor composition. Fine art photography is about those finely-tuned details - the image should beautifully composed and executed, not thrown together with a hope and a prayer!

Becoming a great fine art photographer takes time, practice, and patience, just like everything else in photography. With these tips, you can be on the road to success!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Five Winter Photography Tips That Will Drastically Improve Your Photos

Written by PT Editor on 30 December 2022.

Five Winter Photography Tips That Will Drastically Improve Your Photos

^{Photo by svetikd via iStock}

It’s Winter! What are your favorite winter photography subjects? For many photographers, winter is a great time to capture beautiful landscapes. For others, it’s all about the people and the events.

Whatever type of photography you enjoy this time of year, we have some winter photography tips and gear recommendations to help you capture images in this wonderful season.

Winter Photography Tips for Lighting Conditions

^{Photo by martin-dm via iStock}

Different seasons of the year have varying lighting qualities. The sun is lower in the sky during winter, and the weather is obviously different. Both affect the lighting quality and how long certain outdoor lighting periods last.

Winter landscape photography tips are filled with discussions on exposure compensation, too, and for good reasons. A landscape view covered with snow requires adjusting metering settings to capture bright whites instead of muddled grays.

Many cameras are good about making these changes automatically with evaluative metering. Still, sometimes it may work better if we take control of the exposure ourselves, either with fully manual mode or dialing in the proper amount of exposure compensation. Plus two stops of exposure is a good starting place on a bright day with lots of snow in the scene.

Golden Hour during winter months is much shorter than that same period in the summertime. Some areas can be extremely short when the daylight hours are shortest. But the results are worth it. A winter landscape or a cityscape photographed in Golden Hour can be amazing, so try it out as part of your photography tips for winter.

Accessories that Help

Accessories that Help OctoPad

Some accessories that are vital to have on hand for taking advantage of winter photography tips on lighting and exposure are a circular polarizer (C-Pol) filter, a graduated neutral density (GND) filter, and a tripod alternative like the OctoPad camera mount.

Looking first at the tripod alternative OctoPad, we find a low-cost and simple alternative to carrying a tripod. It’s a weighted disk that is super heavy-duty and can be used virtually anywhere, indoors or out.

The secret to the usefulness of the OctoPad is that the low-profile disk has a non-slip pad underneath, which allows you to put it on uneven and angled surfaces, even if angled up to 45 degrees. The ball head on top lets you point your camera anywhere, and the entire setup is rock solid and steady.

With the OctoPad, add a filter holder system to take advantage of a GND filter that lets you balance out exposure issues in landscape and cityscape photography. Filter holder systems are great because they allow stacking of filters, such as adding a C-POL, and you can move the gradient line of a GND to exactly where it's needed.

Learn More:

Winter Photography Tips for Weather

^{Photo by satamedia via iStock}

Most of us don’t need to winterize our cameras, but having weather-resistant cameras is nice. Keeping batteries charged is a significant part of any winter photography tips. In digital photography, if the batteries die, there is no taking pictures. Keep extra batteries in your pocket or a pouch to access them quickly.

It’s important to keep our feet and hands warm too. The day is miserable if your feet are cold, but most of us can last a long time if we have the right type of clothing. Of course, some places aren’t that cold, but it helps to be prepared just in case.

Astrophotography During Winter

^{Photo by Imgorthand via iStock}

I like to include astrophotography in our winter photography tips for a couple of reasons. One, some fantastic deep sky sights are best seen or sometimes only seen during this time of year. And two, the colder skies have less atmospheric disturbances that can affect the sharpness of our views.

Digital camera astrophotography can be extremely rewarding because we can stack exposures for better imaging and increasing apparent sharpness by reducing or eliminating noise.

Obviously, we need fully charged batteries and a good camera mount, either a tripod or a tripod alternative such as the OctoPad. Another method utilizes telescopic equatorial mounts for deep sky imaging. Any way you do it, astrophotography during winter produces wonderful images.

People and Events Winter Photography Tips

^{Photo by AntonioGuillem via iStock}

Winter is a good time for gatherings and family events. So another of our winter photography tips is to stay prepared for these holiday gatherings by brushing up on our natural light, flash photography, and post-processing techniques and skills.

A simple flash diffuser can turn a holiday party pic from a snapshot into a well-crafted portrait. Putting that OctoPad to another use, have one or two to place on furniture or ledges with a portable, battery-powered LED light mounted to them.

Included in our winter photography tips is to remember that so many of these photo tips also transfer well to become videography tips—especially the ones covering lighting. A single LED light can make it possible to record better videos for holiday vlogs and other videos.

Post-processing winter photography tips are relatively simple as well. Capturing images in RAW is a good idea for several reasons. Mixed lighting can be adjusted for color temperature, deep shadows and bright lights in the same view can be balanced out, and we can even add subtle softening effects to people’s faces for more flattering results.

Holidays are Short

Winter Photography Tips

^{Photo by Akiromaru via iStock}

The holidays are only a short part of the winter timetable. Winter photography goes on beyond holiday celebrations, both for landscapes and for capturing people's pics.

Some of the best action photography during winter months can be found on ski slopes well after December and New Years. The travel issues and burdens are lessened as well. One of my winter photography tips is to plan on photo treks during the weeks between the traditional western world New Year and the start of Spring.

Bonus Winter Photography Tips

^{Photo by Su Arslanoglu via iStock}

Some bonus winter photography tips we like to include are to try out film photography and to search for some trips to take as photo treks, either near our own homes or to a location far away.

And on those days when we simply don’t want to get out because of it being too cold or very difficult to get around, we can use that time to hone our post-processing skills and maybe even take a short course on some aspect of photography or videography in which we want to improve.

Whatever your approach this season, winter photography can have you reap nice rewards for your skills and efforts.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Fun Family Portrait Ideas to Try This Spring

Written by PT Editor on 03 February 2023.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas to Try This Spring

^{Photo by jacoblund via iStock}

Are you looking for ways to spice up your family portraits this spring? Well, you’ve come to the right place. Because in this ultimate guide to family portrait photography, we share tons of fun family portrait ideas that will help your images stand out from the crowd - including a hot tip on where to get beautiful prints made!

From including different generations of your family to heading to new locations, we cover it all here! So, what are we waiting for? Let’s dive in and discover the trendiest family photo ideas in 2023!

Check out the video above by B&H Photo Video to learn five tips for taking successful family portraits.

Show Off Different Generations
Dance
Selfies
Head Outdoors
Candid Photos
Go for a Hike
Seasonal Portraits
Pose With Your Pets
Use Props
A Loving Embrace
Funny Portraits
Different Perspectives
Final Thoughts
Recommended Photography Gear

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Show Off Different Generations

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Show Off Different Generations

^{Photo by Georgijevic via iStock}

Including multiple generations of your family in portraits is a wonderful way to connect with the whole family and make everybody feel loved - especially for family maternity photos. Not only do the photos look great, but you will also share valuable time and create lifelong memories with those you love most.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Dance

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Dance

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

One of our personal favorite family photo ideas is to let your hair down, turn on your favorite song, and DANCE! You will be shocked by the huge smiles everyone has on their faces and how natural the photos come out.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Selfies

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Selfies

^{Photo by _jure via iStock}

While they don’t traditionally come to mind when people think of family portraits, selfies are an amazing way to be spontaneous and capture your surroundings (especially on family vacations!). Moreover, everyone loves a good selfie, whether you take them with your phone or an action camera like the GoPro Hero 11 Black.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Head Outdoors

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Head Outdoors

^{Photo by adamkaz via iStock}

Taking your family photos outside instead of in a studio this spring is an easy way to liven up your images. For example, your family’s favorite national park would be a terrific place to go for family photo ideas. However, you can also take beautiful family portraits in your backyard or the neighborhood park.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Candid Photos

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Candid Photos

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

Historically, one of the most popular family photo ideas is taking candid portraits. We’ve found this technique particularly successful for families with young children since many kids tend to look like statues in staged portraits.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Go for a Hike

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Go for a Hike

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

Whether it’s a hike or a walk, a little exercise does wonders for portraits. Movement releases endorphins that bring smiles to our faces and coax out our inner beauty. Not to mention the gorgeous natural backdrops and natural lighting that nature provides!

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Seasonal Portraits

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Seasonal Portraits

^{Photo by AleksandarNakic via iStock}

Spring is one of the prettiest times of the year, so why not embrace the season for your next family portrait? Flowers, fresh fruits/veggies, animals, and Easter are some simple spring-themed family photo ideas to try this year!

Learn More:

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Pose With Your Pets

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Pose With Your Pets

^{Photo by gorodenkoff via iStock}

Our pets are just as much a part of the family as anyone, so why not include them in this year's family photo? Pets add happiness to our everyday lives and will most certainly add an extra layer of joy to your portraits too!

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Use Props

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Use Props

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

Props are another excellent family photo idea if you are trying to get creative with this year's portrait. If your family has a favorite book or movie, you could even use multiple props and costumes and do a themed portrait! And if you want to capture family maternity photos, you can use decorations for the baby’s room as part of your photoshoot.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: A Loving Embrace

Fun Family Portrait Ideas A Loving Embrace

^{Photo by AaronAmat via iStock}

Hugging and kissing in portraits are also great ways to show the world how much you love your family. While these public displays of affection are more common in wedding and couple portraits, they also look lovely in group shots.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Funny Portraits

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Funny Portraits

^{Photo by timnewman via iStock}

Thanks to the pandemic, it’s been a difficult couple of years for all of us, so now that it’s finally starting to go away, it’s time to relax and get silly! Funny faces, poses, and costumes are fantastic ways to let out your inner child this spring.

Fun Family Portrait Ideas: Different Perspectives

Fun Family Portrait Ideas Different Perspectives

^{Photo by pixelfit via iStock}

Using different perspectives is photography 101, and you will be thrilled to hear that it does wonders in portrait photography. With that said, why don’t you mix things up this year and try an overhead, aerial, or upward-facing shot?

Final Thoughts on Fun Family Photo Ideas

Thoughts on Fun Family Photo Ideas

^{Photo by Spiderstock via iStock}

As you can see, there are endless ways to take fun and original family portraits. And while we hope our guide to family photo photography has given you some new ideas, our main goal was to get your creative juices flowing and get you started in the right direction. With that in mind, we wish you the best of luck with your family portraits this spring!

One final family portrait tip is to always use a high-quality, trustworthy printing company. Printing is one of the most important steps in photography, but it’s also one of the most overlooked. That’s why it’s critical you know where to go to get the best quality prints.

Our go-to printing company is CanvasPrints.com. They are a leader in the online printing industry and offer a wide range of products and services, including canvas prints, metal prints, poster prints, glass photo prints, photo tiles, and more. Furthermore, it’s impossible to beat their combination of superior quality, low prices, and professionally-trained staff.

And if you need inspiration for fun and unique ways to showcase your family portraits, check out the list below of other items currently available for order at CanvasPrints:

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Fun, Inexpensive, and Easy-to-Use Portrait Photography Props

Written by PT Editor on 10 October 2022.

smoke bomb portrait

^{Photo by wundervisuals via iStock}

Using photography props can enhance your images in many ways - perhaps even some you may not have thought about before.

Props can add color, texture, or whimsy. They can be used to draw attention to the subject or mask the background, too.

Using smoke bombs and other fun props is easy to do, as well. It really is a win-win situation!

Let’s see how you can use these and other props for photography, especially as they relate to portrait photography ideas.

Smoke Photography Props

smoke bomb photography prop

^{Photo by GoodLifeStudio via iStock}

Are you at an impasse about coming up with portrait photography ideas? Using various props for photography is an excellent way to get past that problem!

With the holiday season fast approaching (some stores near me think it’s already here), we can ramp up our portrait photography business by using color smoke bombs as photography props.

Enola Gaye is my go-to company for finding just the right type of color smoke bomb or other smoke effect props for photography.Their smoke bombs are perfect for holiday photoshoots such as Halloween, but they can also be used to add a fun element to other holiday photos, like Christmas and New Year’s.

props for portraits

^{Photo by Lorado via iStock}

Photography props like smoke bombs are also great for gender reveals and for livening up any type of scene for a fun special effect type of portrait photography. As noted earlier, smoke bombs afford you the opportunity to add color and texture to any portrait, along with a sense of fun and liveliness that is hard to achieve with other types of props.

Of course, using smoke bombs requires a good dose of responsibility. If used incorrectly, you might injure yourself or others, cause a fire or property damage, or worse.

Fortunately, using smoke bombs in a responsible manner is easy. Be aware of combustible materials nearby, watch the wind and weather, and carefully read the instructions before popping smoke. Have emergency gear on hand, too (e.g., water and a shovel to put out flames; first aid kit). Go over safety protocols with your portrait subjects as well.

Above is a short video from Enola Gaye that demonstrates their new dual-vent smoke bomb.

Check out Smoke Effect to see how their smoke bombs might spark ideas for your next portrait photo shoot.

Movie Clapper Photography Props

^{Photo by Pofuduk Images via iStock}

A movie clapboard (AKA: Clapper) is a nice item to have for old-school verification of video and sound for videography. They also make for fun and unique portrait photography props.

A portrait of a harried parent or a set of kids waiting for their portrait can be enlivened by introducing someone (face not shown) holding this prop in front of the subject. Once your subject sees an example of this lighthearted portrait photography idea, they’ll be asking for it before you ever bring it up!

Handheld Light Photography Props

^{Photo by anton5146 via iStock}

Besides having usefulness as a key light or accent light, a handheld LED light that has variable color and power levels can be used to create an interesting effect for portrait photography ideas.

Don’t limit yourself to thinking of only using a small LED light as part of the lighting configuration - also look for ways to incorporate it into the image itself.

A light like this one is small enough to be hidden from camera view by the subject cupping it in their hands and shedding light onto the face for example. Light painting around the subject is another fun way to enhance a portrait, making this type of light one of the more useful photography props.

A Really Good Portable Stool

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

As far as portrait photography ideas and photography props go, a nice portable stool is one of the most valuable props for photography. I like to use a folding stool like this all-black 24-inch high folding barstool.

The black color helps it blend into the background, especially if we control our lighting to help obscure it. I find a stool is better for most portrait photography ideas as it allows the subject to be posed comfortably without it looking like they’re just sitting there.

Hats, Ties, and Scarves as Photography Props

Hats Ties and Scarves as Photography Props

^{Photo by 75tiks via iStock}

This amusing little set is just one of the ideas for photography props centered on clothing items or accessories.

I found this on Amazon and it really illustrates the idea, but I usually find my clothing photography props at thrift stores and garage sales. I always make sure to clean items before use, either as laundry or dry cleaning or by spraying disinfectant on them.

These portrait photography ideas for photography props such smoke bombs, small LED lights, and clothing items, among other things, should help free up your creative thoughts about using various inexpensive things as photography props. The result will be more dynamic and interesting images that you and your clients will enjoy!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Golden Hour Photo Tips

Written by PT Editor on 02 January 2020.

Golden Hour Photo Tips

^{photo bydeimagine via iStock}

Ah, Golden Hour… One of the most revered times of day for photographers from the early days of glass plates, though the film era, and continuing on in this digital age.

Beginner photographers hear all sorts of terms about photography. Golden Hour, Blue Hour, Sunny 16 Rule, Rule of Thirds, Golden Triangle and S Curve in composition, the Exposure Triangle, Law of Reciprocity, and so on.

Each of these terms has an important meaning behind them. It is beneficial to understand them to have a better grasp of the actual processes of photography. You don’t have to memorize them, they aren’t hard and fast rules. More like guidelines. But knowing when and how to use them will improve your photography.

What Time is Golden Hour?
What is Golden Hour Light?
The Light Quality of Golden Hour
The Science Behind the Quality
Golden Hour Photo Tips
Golden Hour Camera Settings for Landscapes
Golden Hour Portrait Photography Settings
Golden Hour Cityscapes
Use HDR During Golden Hour
Golden Hour Leads to Blue Hour
Golden Hour Photography Is Beautiful Photography

What Time Is Golden Hour?

golden hour 1

^{photo bycorradobarattaphotos via iStock}

Golden Hour refers to a time period in the day, but in reality it refers more to a quality of light during that time. The time of day is before sunset or just after sunrise, but not when the sunset or sunrise colors are prominent.

Depending on the season and the latitude of your location, Golden Hour can be from around 25 minutes or so to an hour and a half, so hour works as a good label. Sunlight takes on a specific quality during this time of day.

What Is Golden Hour Light?

WHAT IS GOLDEN HOUR LIGHT

^{photo byWildroze via iStock}

The specific quality of light the Sun produces during Golden Hour is dual in nature. Compared to having the Sun high in the sky, golden hour light is both warmer and diffused. Why is this so?

During the majority of daylight hours, the Sun is relatively high in the sky from our perspective. We expect colors to look a certain way and we see shadows with hard, distinct edges, and our brain is programmed to accept this as normal.

The Sun, though millions of times larger than our home planet Earth, is a point light source. Lighting tip: it’s those sharp shadow edges that tell when light sources are point or not. You can see this in your home studio when you use straight flash or bare bulbs versus shooting through an umbrella or soft box.

Learn More:

The Light Quality of Golden Hour

What Is Golden Hour Light 2

^{photo bym-gucci via iStock}

A point light source produces hard light. Hard light is a quality of light unrelated to color or intensity. A soft light can be bright or a hard light dim, that’s taken care of by your exposure choices. Both qualities are great for photography, but for different reasons.

As the Sun travels through our sky, the atmosphere affects the light. This is due to the angle of the Sun in relation to our location. When the Sun is closer to the horizon, its light passes through more atmosphere than when higher in the sky.

Passing through more atmosphere modifies the light. One transformation is going from a hard light to a more diffused light. It still acts very much like a point source, but it’s as though you passed the light through a screen. So the shadows, while still very distinct, have a softer edge to them.

Just like using a photoflood in an umbrella, if you move the light further away from the subject, the light quality gets harder even though it is more diffuse than a bare bulb.

The Science Behind the Quality

golden hour photo tips 4

^{photo bya_Taiga via iStock}

The Sun remains pretty far away regardless of time of day. On average, our sun, good ole Sol, is about 93 million miles from the Earth’s orbit. That’s so far that light takes 8 minutes to travel from the Sun to here. So any time of day, the Sun is a point light source, more or less.

Another result of the alteration of sunlight by means of our atmosphere is a change in color temperature. Our sun is a warm yellow star but we perceive its unaltered light as white. That’s just the way we’re wired. Anything else is seen as either warmer or cooler.

Color temperature refers to the relationship of light emitted by a perfect black body radiator and the color it actually takes on due to variables. In less scientific terms, is the light warm looking or cool? This is represented in measurements by degrees Kelvin or K.

Without the direct light of the Sun but lit by the brightness of the sky itself, the light is cool. Observe the difference in your old pictures of scenes or subjects lit by direct sun and those lit by skylight. Skylight has a cooler color temperature than direct sun.

golden hour photos 3

^{photo byBarcin via iStock}

Golden Hour daylight is a warmer color temperature. The lower the degrees Kelvin, the warmer the light is considered to be. Sunlight measures approximately 5600K. Skylight measures 6500K or cooler. Golden Hour light comes in around 3800K or warmer.

The end result of all of this science talk is a realization of why Golden Hour light is so special. It’s natural sunlight, but is softer, a little less intense, and warmer in color temperature. Which makes it perfect for certain types of photography.

Learn More:

Golden Hour Photo Tips

Golden Hour Photo Tips 6

^{photo byDieterMeyrl via iStock}

Now that we understand what golden hour light is, let’s put it to use. An important consideration for golden hour photo shoots is that it doesn’t last long. On average, you’ll probably have under an hour to take advantage of the peak time for this beautiful light.

Planning is necessary for a successful golden hour photoshoot. If considering a landscape or scenic photoshoot, you should see what spots will make a good vantage point for your intended images.

You will also need to see what the terrain is like so you aren’t surprised by anything. Your excursion will probably either begin or end in darkness.

Same idea for portraits. Scouting out ahead of time is a good practice for any limited timeframe photoshoots. You can take notice of any interesting parts of the scenery to include or pose around. Again, notice any possible hazards that you might not see in lower light.

Golden Hour Camera Settings for Landscapes

Golden Hour Camera Settings for Landscapes 7

^{photo byAnettaNecia via iStock}

Before we go any further, I highly recommend shooting your golden hour images in RAW. Your camera RAW image files hold much more exposure information than a Jpeg does. This gives you a lot of latitude to adjust your files in a post processing program.

Since your subject for a landscape is relatively static, you really have a lot of room for various exposure settings combinations.

If you are attempting some selective focus effects, a wider aperture is used, meaning your shutter speeds will be shorter to compensate. To capture deep depth of field, you’ll be using smaller f-stops, so shutter speeds will be longer.

Along with the warmer, more diffused light quality, the intensity is lowered some as well. A couple of words of caution are appropriate here. Any time you are using longer shutter speeds, a tripod becomes a valuable tool for sharper images.

Golden Hour Camera Settings for Landscapes 8

^{photo byDieterMeyrl via iStock}

The other caution concerning the lower light intensity, it’s not really that low. You are still using the Sun, so if you are under the impression that f/1.4 at 1/15th of a second and ISO 1600 is a good setting to start with, well, no. Those photos will be completely overexposed.

Exposure settings may need to be changed rapidly, though, so stay aware of the light. If your camera is on automatic, the meter may be fooled by large expanses of light or dark, which is why some photographers prefer manual exposure during Golden Hour photoshoots.

But what is accurate exposure at the start of the shoot won’t stay constant as the light fades. At the close of Golden Hour, light will fade rapidly. Another reason to scout out ahead of time, to practice what settings are best.

Learn More:

Golden Hour Portrait Photography Settings

Golden Hour Portrait Photography Settings 9

^{photo byjacoblund via iStock}

This is one of my favorite times to take outdoor portraits. The beautiful light makes virtually any subject glow with a calm attractiveness. Seriously, it doesn't matter what type of skin, what age or gender, or what skin color, golden hour portraits are awesome.

For many subjects, a combination of wide aperture for selective focus and fast shutter speed to allow for the model to move around comfortably works out well.

You can adjust your camera and subject position for various styles of portrait lighting. Have the subject face the light for an evenly lit portrait. Turn them to the side and now you have a golden hour split lighting scenario.

Have the sun behind them for either a warm silhouette or add a reflector for a subject that pops out of a bright background. All are beautiful methods which will yield superior results.

Golden Hour Portrait Photography Settings 10

^{photo bysoup__studio via iStock}

Another option for golden hour portraits is fill flash. In this instance, I highly recommend TTL flash automation, but maintain control with exposure or flash compensation.

With all of this going on with you, your camera, and your subject, keep in mind that time is limited. Move fast but maintain control. Some photographers tense up with time pressures. Golden hour will give you good results from beginning to end, just don’t lose track of the time. Relax, but keep shooting.

My number one tip for golden hour portrait photoshoots is twofold. Besides your camera and subject, bring a reflector (gold if you have it but any color will work) and bring an assistant.

The reflector will throw in the fill light that is needed in many instances to balance out shadows and highlights. A simple collapsible round reflector is perfect for the job.

The assistant will be your camera bag, subject poser, reflector holder, and can keep track of how much time you have left. A photographic assistant. If you have the means, by all means get one! Sometimes I trade out with other friends as their assistants and then they assist me. That way, we don’t have to worry about financial compensation. If you’re shooting portraits for profit, include that in the bid or budget.

Golden Hour Cityscapes

Golden Hour Cityscapes 11

^{photo byLeoPatrizi via iStock}

A city view, or any type of architecture, can become a work of art when shot during golden hour.

You will really need to scout out ahead of time for city or urban views. City streets can become tunnels of light and dark at this time of day. Consider which direction your desired subject faces to determine if you need morning golden hour or afternoon golden hour.

A tripod is invaluable in these situations. Since you have your tripod out already, let’s move on to the next idea, HDR golden hour photos.

Use HDR During Golden Hour

golden hour portrait photography settings 5

^{photo bykonradlew via iStock}

High Dynamic Range (HDR) photography is one of the best things to come about with digital photography. Besides the other worldly super artsy effect you can get with it (some people like that effect, some don’t), HDR is also able to render a scene that looks completely natural but encompases a wide range of light to dark exposure values.

Especially in landscapes and cityscapes is HDR a good option, but it can even be used in portrait photography. Simply have the subject hold still for a second or two. The results can be phenomenal.

If you are unfamiliar with HDR, it is a method or technique that blends together different exposures to extend the range of light to dark that can be captured in the image.

Learn More:

Golden Hour Leads to Blue Hour

Blue Hour

^{photo byAndrewSoundarajan via iStock}

Or vice versa, depends on whether you are shooting in the morning or evening. Blue Hour is the short time period when the Sun is below the horizon but the sky is still bright.

While Golden Hour light quality was quite warm and you could use hand holdable shutter speeds, during Blue Hour the color temp changes wildly depending on the direction you’re facing and how far below the horizon the sun is.

It’s another time of day to use to your advantage for outstanding views of the world around you. I like to schedule my Golden Hour and Blue Hour photo shoots together, since they come together already during the day.

Golden Hour Photography Is Beautiful Photography

what time is golden

^{photo by konradlew via iStock}

Regardless of your subject, with whatever equipment you have, even at any skill level you are at as a photographer, Golden Hour will provide you with endless photographic beauty and enjoyment.

Well, maybe not endless. For at least about an hour or so!

We Recommend

Hand Poses to Use in Portrait Photography (With Examples)

Written by PT Editor on 23 February 2022.

Hand Poses to Use in Portrait Photography With Examples

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

Let’s be honest, when most people think of portrait photography, hands aren’t the first thing that comes to mind. Yet, in my experience as a portrait photographer, they are without a doubt the body part that most people have no idea what to do with.

While the face is the undisputed star of most portraits, hands are oftentimes their biggest downfall. Awkward or misplaced hands can draw attention away from the focal point, distort an image, or in some cases, downright ruin what otherwise would have been a phenomenal portrait.

That’s why whether you are a photographer or a model, it’s absolutely critical you understand the dos and don’ts of what to do with your hands. In this article, we will first learn a few important tips and tricks, and then we’ll look at specific hand poses that will improve your portrait photography.

Additionally, I’ll give you some ideas on how to create compelling images by taking close-up pictures of hands, as well as how to best use hand poses when taking portraits of couples. With that in mind, here is all you need to know about hand poses to use in portrait photography!

Do: Relax the Hands and be Gentle with Your Hand Poses
Don’t: Hide the Hands Completely
Do: Use Flattering Angles in Hands Photography
Don’t: Put Hands too Close to the Camera
Do: Use Hand Poses to Capture Attention
Hand Poses That Highlight the Body
Hand Poses That Use Props
Unique & Creative Hand Poses
Taking Pictures of Hands
The Best Hand Poses for Couples
The Last Word on Hand Poses
Recommended Photography Gear

Do: Relax the Hands and be Gentle with Your Hand Poses

hand poses for pictures

^{photo byAaronAmat via iStock}

One of the keys to a great portrait is making sure the hands look relaxed, gentle, and natural. This helps create a friendly and inviting atmosphere in photos and prevents the hands from drawing any unnecessary attention.

The easiest way to make hand poses look relaxed is to stay clear of clenching or flattening the fingers. Both of these poses send a feeling of stress and/or tension and are to be avoided at all costs unless you have a very specific image in mind.

If you notice your hands are becoming tense, try giving them a light massage or shaking them out as if they were wet. The hands will instantly feel more relaxed, and your pictures of hands will turn out much better.

Another thing to consider is making sure you are gentle whenever placing your hands anywhere on the body. If you press too hard against the skin, it creates unwanted lines and negatively distorts your features.

Don’t: Hide the Hands Completely

hand poses for photos

^{photo byjuripozzi via iStock}

While many fantastic hand poses partially hide the hands, a huge no-no is eliminating the hands altogether from a shot. The hands are a quintessential, beautiful part of the body, and whenever you hide them entirely, you are accomplishing two things.

The first is that you are severely limiting the creativity of a portrait. The number of hand poses out there is limitless, and each and every one of them adds a unique style and dimension to a photograph.

The second drawback is that it creates an element of tension. Let’s say, for example, you are posing with your hands in your pockets. If the hands are only partially inside the pockets, you will look natural and comfortable. Alternatively, if they are hidden deep inside the pockets, you will seem nervous and tense.

Do: Use Flattering Angles in Hands Photography

cute hand poses

^{photo bykimberrywood via iStock}

Besides the hand poses themselves, another super important detail to pay attention to is the placement of the hands. Some angles will make the hands look more attractive, while others will, unfortunately, do the opposite.

A good rule of thumb is to shoot pictures of hands from the side or angled away from the camera. This helps prevent image distortion and makes the hands look smaller (which is a good thing!) One thing you should try to avoid is pointing fingers directly at the camera, as this makes them appear short and stubby and is rarely the outcome you want.

Don’t: Put Hands too Close to the Camera

hand poses for photography

^{photo by AaronAmat via iStock}

Once again talking about hand placement, you don’t want to place hand poses too close to the camera. Whenever anything is too close to the camera, especially if you are shooting with a wide-angle lens, it will appear much larger than it is in real life.

We have all seen photos where the hands are in front of the subject (closer to the camera) and are way larger than they should be. First off, this just looks crazy weird! Secondly, the hands are immediately where the attention goes. The last thing you want to do is unnecessarily take attention away from the subject, especially when it’s easily avoidable.

Do: Use Hand Poses to Capture Attention

posing hands

^{photo byBasilico Studio Stock via iStock}

However, if there’s a specific aspect of your portrait you do want to ensure is noticed, hand poses can be a terrific way to capture attention. A great example of this is framing the face with the hands to show off a specific facial feature.

A different way this technique is commonly used is when you want to highlight something in the portrait other than the person. Having your model point at something (such as an animal or a product you are selling) draws all the attention towards it.

Lastly, this is one of the go-to hand poses for maternity photography. One of the most popular and iconic shots of pregnant women is when they frame their “baby bump” by placing one hand below and one hand on top of their stomach.

Learn More:

Hand Poses That Highlight the Body

posing hands in photography

^{photo byizusek via iStock}

Some of the most popular hand poses in portrait photography are ones that direct attention to specific parts of the body. If used well, they create dramatic and stunning imagery that will help your portfolio stand out from the crowd. Let’s take a look at a few of these iconic poses.

Hand on the Neck

hand pictures 4

^{photo byLumiNola via iStock}

Whether the model is looking directly at the camera or not, this is an amazing pose. It not only highlights the neck but also manages to look both relaxed and fashionable at the same time. Try not to have the hand completely turned away from the camera, though, since this can enlarge it.

Hand on the Chin

hand poses for pictures

^{photo byalvarez via iStock}

By placing the hand on the chin, you are ensuring that the viewer's primary focus will be guided to the face. Having the model tilt their head to one side, or having them slowly move their hand, will create a more natural look when using this hand pose.

Hands in the Hair

posing hands in portraits

^{photo byKiuikson via iStock}

This one is an absolute all-timer. If someone has particularly gorgeous or unique hair, you definitely want to try and get at least a few shots of them playing with it. Keep in mind that you don’t want to completely hide the hands in the hair and make them disappear.

More Wonderful Spots to Place the Hands

Hips
Waist
Cheeks
Knees
Baby bump

Hand Poses That Use Props

hands photography 3

^{photo byAleksandarNakic via iStock}

A great way to give the hands something to do while also adding an extra layer of creativity to your portraits is to use props. Almost anything can be used depending on the location and style of the photoshoot, but here are some of the most commonly used props.

Holding a Cup

hands photography 4

^{photo byMorsa Images via iStock}

Posing with a cup or a glass is a classic shot. If you are trying to create a relaxed, laid-back mood, a coffee mug is a perfect prop. Alternatively, if you want a more lively atmosphere, you will want to go with a champagne glass!

Holding Flowers

pictures of hands 1

^{photo byCarlosDavid.org via iStock}

Everyone loves flowers, and because of that, they are one of the best props to use in portrait photography. Not only are flowers beautiful, but they also come in every color imaginable and can be used either to complement the subject or create contrast in an image.

Holding an Instrument

pictures of hands 2

^{photo bykimberrywood via iStock}

One last prop you can never go wrong with is an instrument. The model can hold it, play it, or even do something crazy like pretend to smash it! While guitars are the most common choice, other instruments can also be used to make tasteful pictures.

More Magnificent Props

Bag/backpacks
Cameras
LED string lights
Books

Unique & Creative Hand Poses

pictures of hands 3

^{photo bybagi1998 via iStock}

Some of the most memorable portraits are, without a doubt, made when people think outside the box. Making shapes out of the hands is one fun idea, especially if you are working with children. Additionally, here are a few more clever ideas that will make your work stand out.

Blow Something Out of Your Hands

pictures of hands 4

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

Snow, leaves, glitter, and confetti all work well and add unique styles to photos. Don’t limit yourself just to those, though. If you experiment with other products, you may stumble upon a special look you adore! When playing around with these hand poses, don’t forget to use a fast shutter speed in order to generate clear and sharp results.

Pose with Your Pet

portrait photography tips 1

^{photo byYakobchukOlena via iStock}

When I’m shooting portraits, these are unquestionably some of my favorite shots to take! I always ask my models beforehand if they have pets and if they would be willing to take a few shots with them. Even if it doesn’t match the style of the photoshoot and the photos won’t be used, it’s a fantastic way to create a fun atmosphere and loosen up both the model and the photographer.

Dancing

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo bySergiyMolchenko via iStock}

Whenever you start to notice a model getting stiff or tired, one thing you can do is ask them to do a little dance. It will instantly bring some life back into them, loosen them up, and can also yield some amazing pictures!

Taking Pictures of Hands

holding hands picture 1

^{photo byDelmaine Donson via iStock}

Taking pictures of just the hands oftentimes creates fabulous imagery and tells a story in its own right. When shot well, you can transmit love, hate, and everything in between using no more than the hands.

One of the most important rules when shooting close-up hand pictures is to make sure you nail the framing. Even being a little bit off can throw the image, and therefore the whole story you are hoping to tell, out of whack.

When shooting hand pictures, many of the same tips we talked about earlier still apply. For example, you always want your hands to look relaxed, you want to give them something to do, and props still come in extremely handy.

One other key tip is to make sure the model's hands are clean and well-manicured. Unless you want the hands to convey a specific story, such as someone working in a garden, dirty and ungroomed hands can kill an image.

The Best Hand Poses for Couples

holding hands picture 2

^{photo bySanja Radin via iStock}

Whether you are a wedding photographer or a landscape photographer, everyone ends up shooting a couple's portraits at a certain point in time. And you know what that means… four hands instead of two! Oh no!

All jokes aside, hands are a critical element in couples photography. They are an incredible tool that both connects the two subjects and magnifies the love between them. However, if hand poses aren’t used properly when shooting couples, instead of looking madly in love, the couple will look cold and distant.

Using one of the hand poses below is always a safe way to shoot winning photos.

Holding hands picture
Showing of an engagement or wedding ring
Hugging each other
Kissing each other
Holding arms

The Last Word on Hand Poses

portrait photography

^{photo bym-imagephotography via iStock}

Now that you know all the top hand poses to use in portrait photography, the next step is to put them into action. If you are a photographer, be confident and don’t be afraid to direct your models. Likewise, if you are a model, see if you can go a whole photoshoot without the photographer telling you what to do with your hands.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Headshot Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 24 May 2022.

Headshot Photography Tips

^{photo byDelmaine Donson via iStock}

Headshot photography is a basic tool for business. It lets other people see who a person is, presenting them in a favorable light.

Headshots are used on business cards, on personal and business websites, in advertising, as a place card for talent, and for a whole lot more.

In fact, a great headshot can be used for just about anything, so I thought some very basic headshot photography tips would be welcome by any photographer wanting to try out this method of portraiture.

What Is Headshot Photography?
My Top 5 Headshot Photography Tips
Talk It Out
Choose the Right Clothes
Separate the Subject from the Background
Flattering Lighting Headshot Photography Tips
Cropping Headshot Photography Tips
What About Prints?
Recommended Portrait Photography Gear

What Is Headshot Photography?

tips for headshot photography

^{photo byGeorge Marks via iStock}

Headshot photography is pretty much exactly how it sounds. It’s a portrait of a person emphasizing their head. Well, head and shoulders, actually, but emphasizing the face. It shows who the person is, an instantly recognizable pose saying, “Here I am.”

However, it isn’t simply a static picture of a person. At its best, headshot photography is an artistic version of the reality of the person. So, some tips for headshot photography will help out any photographer wanting to try out this style of portrait photography.

My Top 5 Headshot Photography Tips

tips for headshot photography 2

^{photo byIgor-Kardasov via iStock}

We could talk all day about all the nuances of technique, posing, lighting, exposure, and post-processing in regards to headshot photography. To get us started, here are my top 5 headshot photography tips:

Talk It Out
Choose the Right Clothes
Separate the Subject from the Background
Flattering Lighting Headshot Photography Tips
Cropping Headshot Photography Tips

Talk It Out

tips for headshot photography 3

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

Any portrait photoshoot should begin with a conversation between the photographer and the subject. This accomplishes things on both sides of the discussion. For you as a photographer, it gives you an opportunity to find out what the person really wants out of the session, an important aspect of headshot photography tips.

Do they want to use the headshot photography images on business cards? If so, a very clear image is usually better than anything overly artsy or dramatic. Or is it going to be used in a website “About Us” page? Then a more artfully designed headshot may be in order.

This is also your opportunity to show your previous work, and perhaps talk about using the session for other styles of portrait photography. As a working professional, this could also gain you some extra sales of hard copy portraits, such as a nice canvas print.

If you’re not charging for the headshot photography, it still works as one of the more important headshot photography tips to talk about the session ahead of time. A model release or a contract is a good idea either way, spelling out that you can use the images for your own promotion, or establishing clear limits on what either you or the subject can do with the images after delivery.

Choose the Right Clothes

headshot photography

^{photo bySiri Stafford via iStock}

“Clothes make the man” (or woman) is the saying, it is especially true with regards to headshot photography. You would likely be discussing this in your pre-session conversation, but I like to separate these two headshot photography tips.

Since this is headshot photography, we want the clothing to accentuate the images, not overpower them or distract from the person. With that in mind, we still have many options available for styles and colors of clothing.

Sometimes, the clothing may be an essential part of the image telling the viewer about the person. A uniform may immediately tell us that the headshot photography subject is a chef, a doctor or nurse, a member of the armed forces, a part of a sports team, an entertainer, a service provider, or any other vocation or avocation that can be readily discerned by clothing choices.

Regardless of the color, style, or other aspects of the clothing, it should be clean and pressed. Otherwise, it could detract from the headshot as viewers may be distracted from the person by the condition of the clothing.

Separate the Subject from the Background

pleasing portraits for your clients

^{photo byCarlosDavid.org via iStock}

This is one of the headshot photography tips that will include some equipment options as well as our photographic skills and techniques. There are several ways we can separate the subject from the background: lens choice, aperture, lighting, and post-processing.

A short telephoto lens is the first choice of many headshot photographers. It provides a good, tight framing of the person’s head and shoulders from a moderately close distance, it gives an apparent perspective that is pleasing for human faces, and it is a simple job to open up the aperture a bit to have shallow depth of field.

That aperture will be a prime consideration for separation. At a moderately close distance, a short or medium telephoto lens will have the shallow depth of field for the selective focus technique even if you stop down a bit from wide open. In Full Frame format, lenses from about 85mm up to 135mm are likely to give you the focus separation you want.

Another way to separate the subject from the background is to use contrast control and color control. A well-lit subject against either a substantially brighter or darker background will achieve good separation. Both contrasting colors and complementary colors can be used effectively, depending on just how much separation you want.

Learn More:

Flattering Lighting Headshot Photography Tips

Octopad

I’m listing lighting headshot photography tips separately here, but you can also use lighting as a method for separating the subject from the background. The best lighting will help accomplish that as well as make your portrait subject appear naturally modeled with highlight and shadow control.

If you’re inside, either in your own studio or at some other indoor location, you may want to use some portable lighting that’s easy to move around, but that emits a clean, neutrally colored light. I really enjoy the battery-powered LED panel lights for this. I can adjust two lights by position and power in order to get exactly the facial modeling effect desired.

Lighting can also help give us subject separation from the background by using a third light behind the subject. It can be dialed up or down in power, and many of these LED panel lights have color control, too, which can also enable the person to POP out from the background.

Octopad 2

You can set up a good lighting configuration almost anywhere with battery powered LEDs and some small mounts like the OctoPad. Since the OctoPad can be placed on virtually any surface, even if it’s sloped up to 45 degrees, having a few in your lighting gear is awesome for any of your on-location headshot photography sessions.

Included with lighting for these headshot photography tips will be posing. It’s a simple enough discussion for the most common headshot photography styles. Wherever you have your camera, place the person with their body facing 45 degrees or so from the camera and then have them turn only their head back toward the camera.

If you’re setting up lights, the main light can be directly in front of their body position and higher, up to a 45-degree angle point down on the subject. Typically, that light would be the key light or main light and be at a higher power setting.

The second light could be on the other side of the camera position, with an angle of up to 45 degrees, though that angle can be reduced. Reduce the power on that light as well, half or 1/3rd the intensity of the main light seems to work with many subjects. This is your fill light or catch light. A reflector could also be used in this position.

The 3rd light would be behind the portrait subject, either shining on the background or on the person. It can be placed high or low and it can be at an angle from the person, though directly behind the body position seems to work out much of the time for me. Use your OctoPad to place on the floor, on a chair, on a wall, whatever’s there, and then play with the power setting and colors to get the look you want.

Cropping Headshot Photography Tips

portrait photography tips

^{photo byYagi-Studio via iStock}

The final of my top 5 headshot photography tips is to use cropping effectively in order to have the final image be the tight head and shoulders portrait of a classic headshot. Your post-processing program can be used for this to tighten up the framing, but you will want to get it as good as possible in-camera.

Vertical or portrait orientation is the preferred choice of the majority of finished headshots and the Rule of Thirds is a good guide on where to place the subject framing since headshots look good with a little headspace. Landscape orientation can also work well for headshot photography depending on the final use of the image.

While you’re in your post-processing program, you can tighten up the cropping, size it to what the finished image should be, such as 4x6, 4x5, 3x5, and so on. Look at some of the other tools, too. You can blur out the background more if you need to and can also fine-tune or tweak the exposure, contrast, and color levels.

These headshot photography tips will help you to capture these basic and essential business portrait images while providing a flattering and well-crafted photograph.

What About Prints?

what about prints

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

In many cases, the headshots you take of clients are for digital applications, like a website or their LinkedIn page. However, sometimes, clients need a print of their headshot, so you need to be prepared with a printing partner that will help you deliver the highest-quality print possible.

I've gotten prints from a lot of companies over the years. Some have been fine. Others have been just plain terrible. And a select few have been absolutely sensational.

Artbeat Studios is in the sensational category, and I can't recommend them highly enough for your printing needs.

artbeat studios homepage

Sure, most of the prints I've ordered from Artbeat Studios have been landscapes, but when you see quality, you see quality - and these guys can print portraits with the best of them!

I think it's safe to assume that a paper print would be most appropriate for a headshot, and Artbeat Studios has you covered with a great selection of paper print sizes, from 4x6 up to 48x96 (plus custom sizes!).

artbeat studios paper prints

What's more, as you can see above, there are four different paper styles to choose from, each with a unique look. Personally, I'd go for the Fine Art Paper option, as it includes museum-grade paper that's both beautiful and durable.

There are various styles of frames available as well, that way you can customize the print even further to match your clients' office aesthetic.

paper print frames from artbeat studios

Of course, just because you get tons of customization options doesn't mean you'll have to pay out the nose for these prints. That's what makes Artbeat Studios such a unique company - they offer beautiful, well-made products that are also budget-friendly.

So, that means you can create gorgeous headshots, offer your clients impressive framed prints, and still have plenty of wiggle room for making a profit.

If you're in need of a new printing partner to help bring your headshots and other images to life, I strongly suggest you give Artbeat Studios a try!

Recommended Portrait Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Hot Wedding Photography Trends 2020

Written by PT Editor on 28 September 2020.

Hot Wedding Photography Trends 2020

^{photo byD-Keine via iStock}

Despite the fact that a lot of photographers aren’t working right now, I’ve heard from some of my friends who are in the wedding photography industry that they’ve never been busier. It looks like not even a pandemic can stop love.

If you run a wedding photography business, you probably know what I’m talking about. Lots of large venues are being cancelled and couples are opting to do more adventurous weddings that are much smaller and more intimate.

But, this is just one of many wedding photography trends this year. Let’s dive into what other wedding photography trends people are looking for right now so your wedding photography business can stay on top.

Shooting the Proposal

wedding photography trends 2020 1

^{photo byskynesher via iStock}

Boring, traditional proposals are out and modern proposals are in. More women are proposing to their partners than ever before. Proposals are also getting incredibly grandiose. Plus, every moment of the proposal is being captured by a professional photographer.

Engagement photos are incredibly exciting because, most of the time, one of the people in the couple doesn't see it coming and surprise elicits the best emotions that are really simple to catch on tape.

If you are thinking about getting into wedding photography this year, you can start by doing easy shoots like the proposal. This will let you feel out whether or not you like working in this sort of environment. Plus, it’s always fun to be a huge part of someone’s life.

Using Traditional Film

wedding photography trends 2

^{photo byDorianGray via iStock}

Polaroids and other forms of film cameras are also a huge wedding photography trend this year. It’s definitely a throwback to when every wedding would have a Fujifilm disposable camera on each table.

But, this trend is now being taken a bit further. Couples are actually asking that all of their wedding photography be captured using traditional film cameras.

And, if you’ve never used traditional film cameras, this may be a bit daunting. But, film cameras capture the timelessness of a wedding unlike modern cameras. They create the best wedding portraits that are dainty and light. Film is incredibly romantic, so it’s no wonder wedding photography has finally embraced it yet again.

Learn More:

Creating Large-Format Canvas Prints

Another wedding photography trend this year that harkens back to a simpler time is printed photos.

Couples love the option of canvas prints for some of their favorite shots from their big day so that they can decorate their new home together.

I use CanvasHQ to create my large-format canvas prints for a number of reasons. Firstly, they are one of the cheapest options, which my clients and I both like. Secondly, each one of their canvases are crafted by hand. The frames are hand-built and each canvas is hand-stretched so that your image has a personal touch from the very beginning to the very end of the process.

Every canvas created by CanvasHQ is rated for decades so your wedding photography will double as a family heirloom down the line. This is because each canvas is made with museum-grade ink that won’t fade over the years.

The last reason why I love to work with CanvasHQ is that they have a countdown on their website to tell me exactly how long my production will take if I send in a photo today. In the era of Covid madness, this is an especially phenomenal trait to me. As of the writing of this article, their turnaround time is just 3 days.

Given all that, it’s no wonder they won our 2020 best canvas print company award. See how they did it!

Day-After Photoshoots

wedding photography 3

^{photo bymediamasmedia via iStock}

Savvy couples are beginning to realize that it doesn’t make a lot of sense to spend potentially tens of thousands of dollars on a wedding if they’re being ushered from one step of the wedding to the next. They will just feel hurried all day!

This is why a lot of couples are participating in day-after photoshoots. These photoshoots can be a lot more laid back, since the couple isn’t rushing to get to eat their dinner or talk to their relatives. It’s less stressful for the couple, but it’s also less stressful for you as the photographer.

Aerial Shots

wedding portraits 4

^{photo byAleksandarNakic via iStock}

Another wedding photography trend in 2020 is aerial shots. If you don’t own a drone and you hope to continue your wedding photography business for years to come, I strongly suggest you get one.

Aerial shots are wonderful because they allow you to capture the landscape of the wedding in such a unique fashion. For instance, if a couple is getting married on a large farm, it makes sense to include this in their photos, but it could be difficult to do from anywhere other than the air.

Aerial shots are also much more dream-like than other traditional forms of wedding photography. You can really make them whatever you want them to be.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How Does a Variable ND Filter Work?

Written by PT Editor on 20 July 2020.

How Does a Variable ND Filter Work

^{Photo by Matthew Leland from Pexels}

A variable ND filter is an interesting piece of equipment. With one, you can dial in a changeable amount of attenuation instead of being held to one fixed amount of density. While many photographers enjoy using these interesting tools, others may have some questions about them.

Should you use a variable ND filter? How does a variable ND filter work? How do variable ND filters vs fixed ND filters compare? Are there any problems with variable ND filters to be aware of? Can you use variable ND filters for video?

We’ll tackle these questions and give you a few tips about variable ND filters and ND filters in general. Let’s start by looking at a good example of a variable ND filter that I’ve been using recently.

Haida NanoPro MC Variable ND Filter

One thing I like to do with specialty screw-in filters is to buy the largest size I need and adapt it to smaller filter diameter lenses. So, for this screw-in variable ND filter, I picked up the 82mm size Haida NanoPro MC Variable ND Filter. You can see it mounted on my personal camera above.

The small handle makes it easy to adjust the variable attenuation and helps you avoid accidentally smudging the glass. Like all Haida filters, it’s multi-coated for reflection control and made from high quality optical glass and lightweight metal. It’s a lot of fun to use.

How Does a Variable ND Filter Work?

how does a variable nd filter work 1

^{Photo by TIffany Pepe from Pexels}

It seems like some form of wizardry to be able to twist a filter and have it slowly darken. What’s happening is called cross polarization. You may have played around before with your filters, mounting two polarizers together and seeing the view go from dark to complete black.

When two polarizing glass planes are both placed within a light ray, the polarization of both pieces can essentially block out most of the light from exiting that optical path.

This is how a variable ND filter works its magic. It is two polarizers mounted together which you twist around on an axis to see the gradual change of light attenuation. Words don’t convey the effect adequately, you’ll have to see it in action.

Learn More:

Should You Use a Variable ND Filter?

should you use a variable nd filter 2

^{Photo by Ezekixl Akinnewu from Pexels}

Sure! There are multiple uses that come to mind and not all of them include that awesome motion blur effect, though that is one good reason. So let’s start there. Using a variable ND filter to create the long shutter speeds needed gives you options on just how long an exposure time you get. It also allows for more creative use of aperture along with the long shutter speed.

While motion blur of water and clouds was my first thought when I got into ND filters, another very useful trick concerns aperture. Sometimes, a scene is so bright, I find it difficult to be able to use my portrait lens wide open enough for the selective focus effect. Using a variable ND filter, I can easily balance my creative wants with the exposure needs of the scene.

Variable ND Filters VS Fixed ND Filters

variable nd filters vs fixed nd filters 3

^{Photo by Ba Phi from Pexels}

The whole reason for having a variable ND filter is to enable you to have options of how much density to add without physically changing filters. If that isn’t important enough, a fixed ND will work just fine.

I like to take my filter holder system with a lot of different filters with me when I’m on a nature photo trek. I take just my variable ND filter when I am planning on being more mobile such as an environmental portrait session or doing street photography. They are both valuable choices for my personal needs and style.

Problems With Variable ND Filters

problems with variable nd filters 4

^{Photo by Александр Прокофьев from Pexels}

There isn’t too much to worry about with using variable ND filters in most photographic situations. The main things that might be problematic at times are due to pure physics.

Since a variable ND filter is really two polarizers, you might not get the polarization effect desired for a scene since your variable ND filter is already polarizing the light.

The other problem is that while the filter changes the effect gradually as you twist it, when you get close to the maximum attenuation, it happens very fast. So while it’s slow and gradual about 90% of the time, the density closest to maximum happens with very little extra movement, just something to keep in mind.

Can You Use Variable ND Filters for Video?

Absolutely! In order to achieve a frame rate that appears natural while still using your f-stop for focus depth control, a variable ND filter becomes a must-have tool for videography. Especially when filming in bright light like outdoors in broad sunlight.

Check the video above by Jaren Polin to see what I mean.

It’s a Tool and a Toy

variable nd filter 5

Photo by Lisa Fotios from Pexels

My variable ND filters get quite a workout. I use them in videography all the time and they are my go-to filters for shooting more mobile genres and styles of photography.

Plus, I have to admit, sometimes I just go outside with my gear and play around. I love photography, it has made me happy. Not only do I get to make a living from it, I get to enjoy it as a creative pastime and hobby. As an added bonus, I get to share my fun with you!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Create Heirloom Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 04 November 2020.

How to Create Heirloom Portraits

^{photo byLisa-Blue via iStock}

When I was growing up, my grandparents had their home absolutely filled to the brim with family photos. Some of them had obviously been taken in the very early 1900s or late 1800s, while most of them were pictures of new and growing grandchildren taken much more recently.

I think this is where my obsession with photography started, but as I looked up at the shelves filled with dozens of photographs, I noticed that some of them were clearly much more important than others.

I couldn’t exactly name the difference between the photos at the time, but looking back on it I think that the novelty of heirloom portraits, or the portraits signifying an important event in someone’s life, came across in those photos. The photos of my cousins were cute, but the photo of my grandparents’ wedding, or the photo of my great aunt’s missionary trip to Africa in 1903, seemed so much more important.

heirloom photography 1

^{photo bybauhaus1000 via iStock}

Heirloom portraits are photographs you (or your clients) will hand down to future generations. When done correctly, they should tell a very specific story about the people in the photograph and the era the photograph was taken in. When done incorrectly, they likely won’t make it down through the generations at all.

I’ve never liked to specifically shoot heirloom portraits because I think heirloom portraits come across much more authentically if you simply choose a portrait from another major life event, like a graduation or a wedding.

If you’re interested in heirloom photography, this article has some portrait photography tips about choosing the correct photo and learning how to display it.

Pick the Right Photo

heirloom portraits 2

^{photo bytriloks via iStock}

Like I said in the introduction to this article, choosing your heirloom portraits is as easy as picking the most significant people in your life and the most significant events in your life.

If you look at a photo and it immediately overwhelms you with joy or pride, then it will probably make an excellent heirloom portrait.

Heirloom portraits can also help spur your memory, and likely will as you get older. Pick the photo from your wedding day that helps you remember exactly how you felt when you first married the love of your life. Or, pick the photo of your kids messing around at your child’s graduation that makes you so thankful you decided to have more than one.

Another way to look at this is to tell you exactly how not to choose heirloom portraits. For instance, don’t just pick a photo because it has everyone you love in it. Also don’t just pick a photo because it was taken on a specific day.

Of the thousands of images I’ve taken, only a handful are good enough to be considered heirloom portraits. They’re special for a reason.

Learn More:

Print It

Heirloom portraits aren’t worth anything if you can’t admire them.

I think this is something that makes heirloom portraits even more special now, since printing portraits seems like such an ancient art.

I obviously recommend you print more of your photos altogether, but heirloom portraits deserve something a little more special, which is why you should print them on metal.

ArtBeat Studios is one of my favorite metal printing companies because all of their materials are archival quality, which means your heirloom portraits will literally last for generations.

Each metal print from ArtBeat Studios comes with Chromaluxe aluminum, which resists fading for over 65 years.

Plus, they sell metal prints for relatively inexpensive prices. An 8 x 10 metal print will only run you $30. If you need a customized size, that isn’t a problem with ArtBeat Studios since each piece of metal is hand cut in house.

Since you’ll want your heirloom portraits to be as unique as your family, you can also choose from a wide range of customizable options, like different mounting, hangers, and finishes on your print.

I’ll admit that the first time I purchased a metal print it was a little overwhelming. So, if you’ve clicked around on the ArtBeat Studios website and aren’t finding what you’re looking for, or still don’t know exactly what it is that you are looking for, their customer service reps are awesome and knowledgeable. That’s just part of the reason why they were named the best metal print company of 2020!

Or, Display It More Creatively

portrait photography tips 3

^{photo byChristinLola via iStock}

Another incredible option for displaying your heirloom portraits is choosing something that fits your family.

My sister has a locket of a portrait of our mother from her childhood. I have a photo album from my grandparents’ first few years of marriage together.

You could also display your heirloom portraits in different displays like a handmade box or a beautiful frame.

Whichever display method you choose, you’ll want to ensure that it is made of really high quality materials, like the metal prints I talked about earlier, because it is the most disheartening thing in the world when an heirloom that’s been in your family for decades breaks.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Create Interesting Compositions in Boring Places

Written by PT Editor on 27 October 2021.

How to Create Interesting Compositions in Boring Places

^{photo byPortra via iStock}

I obviously recommend that you try and shoot in fascinating locations as often as you can, both because it will be more fun for you as the photographer and because it will make your compositions far better. But, what do you do when you have to create interesting compositions somewhere boring?

I know this was something that I severely struggled with at the start of the pandemic when I was trying to learn how to compose an image in my backyard, and I know that a lot of other photographers struggled with this too, especially those who were stuck in small studio apartments in New York City or London.

Thankfully, you can learn how to create interesting compositions anywhere, even in your own home or a not particularly stunning field or parking lot.

Manny Ortiz recently released a video filled with photography composition tips for photographers working specifically in boring places.

I recommend that you watch his whole video, since it will help you learn how to create interesting compositions, but if you don’t have time to, I’ll give you the breakdown here.

Use Your Camera’s Autofocus System

create interesting compositions

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

If you get to a location that is particularly boring, you may have trouble identifying where you should place your model. In order to combat this problem, Manny suggests that you focus your camera on the ground first. Then, trail your camera from the ground to potential places you want to put your model.

By keeping your camera out of focus, you can figure out what parts of your environment would look good as a background for your images. It will help you pick out particularly bold colors or odd patterns you wouldn’t otherwise see with your naked eye.

After you’ve found a good background, you can place your model in that spot and start shooting away.

After you’ve used this tip a couple of times, you’ll naturally know how to create interesting compositions without using the trick at all.

Find Interesting Lighting

photography composition tips

^{photo bykatleho Seisa via iStock}

When you’re learning how to create interesting compositions, even in the best location, you’re still going to be looking for lighting. But, when you’re learning how to create interesting compositions in bad locations, this tip becomes even more important.

Manny found an old lighting fixture inside a movie theater that he was able to use in the background of one of his shots. If you’re not shooting in the city, then you may be able to find interesting lighting coming off of a street light, someone’s house, or the sun.

You can then incorporate that lighting into your shot in a huge variety of ways, so play around with lighting to find the most interesting applications.

Learn More:

Add Plants

how to compose an image

^{photo bypuhhha via iStock}

One of my favorite composition tips for photography is to include plants in the foreground of your shots. It’s a pretty basic tip in landscape photography, but it’s also a great tip for portrait photographers who are working in a boring location.

You can find plants pretty much anywhere you go. The plants might not be the prettiest, they may just be weeds or grass, but even weeds or grass can help your composition if you don’t focus on them and instead just include them for their coloring.

Include Anything Interesting from Your Location

composition tips for photography

^{photo byJasonDoiy via iStock}

I know that this is an article all about learning how to create interesting compositions in boring places. But, here’s the thing. You can find interesting things in any location you’re going to shoot in, even if it’s just your backyard. The big problem is that if you’re shooting in a location you know well, you’re going to have to look at it with new eyes.

Manny finds some beautiful old apartment complexes in Chicago where he is shooting and he incorporates them into the background of one of his shots. You can do the same thing if you’re shooting in a city.

composition tips

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

If you’re shooting out in the country, you may need to include old dilapidated barns or felled trees into your shots.

If you’re shooting in your backyard, try and figure out what interesting information exists there. For instance, in my own backyard, I have a big hole in my fence that catches really great light at certain times of the day. So, when I was home shooting during the pandemic, I would have my son climb up on a stepstool and peer out of that hole to create really beautiful photos of his face.

Overall, though, the important thing that you need to remember when you’re learning how to create interesting compositions in boring locations is that you only have to include as much background and foreground as you want to. So, the direction of each photo is really up to you.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Enhance Your Wedding Photography Packages in One Simple Step

Written by PT Editor on 12 October 2023.

How to Enhance Your Wedding Photography Packages in One Simple Step

^{Photo by Pekic via iStock}

When photographing weddings, capturing timeless moments and crafting the perfect love narrative can be challenging. With that said, as wedding photographers strive to deliver exceptional content for their clients, following one simple step can elevate your wedding photography packages to a whole new level.

Lucky for you, this article aims to share that step with you and teach you how to easily implement it in your wedding photography business! However, before we jump straight into the money-making secret, we will also explore a few bonus wedding photography tips to enhance the quality of your photos and videos.

So, join us as we unravel the simplicity behind this crucial step and discover how it can enrich your wedding photography packages, increase the satisfaction of your clients, and, ultimately, make you more money as a wedding photographer!

Check out the video above by John Branch IV Photography for more wedding photography tips if you are new to shooting weddings.

Wedding Photography Tips: Invest in the Right Gear and Learn How to Use It
Wedding Photography Tips: Plan Properly
Wedding Photography Tips: Shoot RAW Photos & Be Creative
The One Simple Step to Wedding Photography Packages
Final Thoughts on Wedding Photography Packages
Recommended Photography Gear

Wedding Photography Tips: Invest in the Right Gear and Learn How to Use It

Wedding Photography Tips Invest in the Right Gear and Learn How to Use It

^{Photo by Mordolff via iStock}

Our first tip for wedding photography is to buy the right equipment. And while this might sound obvious, it starts with your camera and lenses. There are certain cameras (interchangeable lens cameras like DSLR and mirrorless cameras) and lenses that will help you consistently capture better wedding photos.

Other important wedding photography products you should own include tripods, a lighting kit, external flashes, camera bags, spare memory cards/batteries, and a backup camera body. Once you have all the gear above, don’t forget to get to know it and practice shooting with it before working in a professional setting.

Additionally, we highly recommend using two separate cameras when photographing a wedding. Having two cameras with different focal length lenses speeds up your workflow and makes you more prepared to capture the perfect shot regardless of the shooting situation.

Wedding Photography Tips: Plan Properly

Wedding Photography Tips Plan Properly

^{Photo by Alexander Shelegov via iStock}

Another important part of the wedding photography process is the planning. This includes many often-overlooked (but important) things like establishing a good relationship with your client, scouting the location before the wedding day, having a plan B in case your primary shoot location can’t be used, and so forth.

Creating a detailed and unique shot list before every new wedding is a must-do. While it’s okay to have a few generic shots on your list, you also need to speak with the soon-to-be-married couple beforehand to see if there are any specific shots they are looking for. Knowing the location well also helps build a successful shot list.

If it’s a large wedding (especially if the couple wants photos and videos), don’t be afraid to hire help. Having multiple photographers allows you to capture different angles and perspectives of the wedding and increases the number of pictures you’ll have in your final photo pool.

Learn More:

Wedding Photography Tips: Shoot RAW Photos & Be Creative

Wedding Photography Tips Shoot RAW Photos Be Creative

^{Photo by grinvalds via iStock}

One of the most common mistakes new wedding photographers make is shooting JPEGs instead of RAW files. While the colors of JPEGs might look bolder and brighter at first glance, they offer significantly less editing capabilities. And today, editing has become an integral part of the photography process.

In contrast, with RAW files, the editing possibilities are nearly limitless. Inside your post-processing software (Adobe Lightroom is our go-to), you can adjust everything from the exposure and colors to the clarity and noise of RAW files.

And don’t forget to always be creative – whether that’s while you are shooting a wedding or editing your images. In the end, photography is an art, and it’s up to you to make your wedding photography packages stand out against the competition.

The One Simple Step to Wedding Photography Packages

The One Simple Step to Wedding Photography Packages 1

Finally, providing high-quality products to your wedding clients is the one simple step that will instantly enhance your wedding photography packages. Tons of wedding photographers only give digital copies of their wedding photos to their clients, but you can set yourself apart by offering amazing physical products, too.

The One Simple Step to Wedding Photography Packages 2

Our favorite product to include in our wedding photography packages is this Premium Gift Box by Saal Digital. It is 100% customizable, doesn’t include any distracting brand logos, and is made from premium-quality materials like a 0.15”-thick customizable acrylic cover. Combined with a beautiful leatherette, the gift box is a true statement piece for your client’s photo book.

The One Simple Step to Wedding Photography Packages 3

Your photography clients will absolutely love the personalized touch a premium gift box adds to your packages, and it will give them something physical they can hold in their hands and look back on to remember their special day forever. And at the end of the day, happy customers translate to more wedding gigs and more money for you!

Check out the video above by Saal Digital Corporation for a closer look at one of the photo books you can get with the Premium Gift Box.

Final Thoughts on Wedding Photography Packages

While tons of photographers are taking great wedding photos, only a handful of them are providing the wedding photography products their clients deserve. That’s where you come in! You can improve your photography business overnight simply by adding higher-quality products, like the Premium Gift Box, to your wedding photography packages!

Final Thoughts on Wedding Photography Packages 2

Interested in adding other products to your wedding photography packages, too? Here’s a list of more wedding photography products currently available on Saal Digital:

Recommended Photography Gear

Heads up: Clicking on our affiliate links and exploring our sponsored content helps us at no extra cost to you, and we only recommend gear we're absolutely crazy about!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Get Inspired for Photoshoots

Written by PT Editor on 10 November 2021.

how to get inspired for photoshoots

^{Photo by AleksandarNakic via iStock}

We've all been there...

That feeling of panic as a photoshoot date draws near and you have absolutely no idea how you're going to approach it.

It's a terrible feeling, for sure. But it's just part of the ebb and flow of a photographer's creative juices.

You don't have to go into a photoshoot with zero ideas or inspiration, though...

As the folks at Mango Street discuss in the video above, sometimes all you need to get inspired is to look at other art forms. Specifically, they talk about how to draw inspiration from movies, TV, music, and books.

It's an interesting lesson in tapping into your creativity by getting inspired from genres outside of photography.

Of course, there are plenty of other sources of inspiration if you're not really feeling too creative...

See What Other Photographers are Doing

portrait photography inspiration

^{Photo by Urupong via iStock}

It's perfectly fine to get inspired by the work of other photographers...

There needs to be a delicate balance, though, because you don't want to simply copy another photographer's style. That's why Mango Street wants you to look to other sources for your creativity - it might help you devise plans that are truly unique.

But, the work of our colleagues is everywhere, from Facebook to Instagram, LinkedIn to YouTube, so it's easy to peruse the work of people we admire and find a creative spark for our own work.

Consult the Classics

portrait photography inspiration 2

^{Photo by Luis Camarasa via iStock}

When you're not feeling all that inspired, why not consult classic works from painters, sculptors, and other artists?

A quick visit to an art museum (in person or online) will present you with a wealth of inspiration for using colors, shapes, forms, and light.

If you're a landscape photographer, you might be inspired by the colors of a Monet painting. If you're a portrait photographer, you might find the lines of a Rodin sculpture to be what sparks a creative idea for a photoshoot.

Again, the point is that there is nothing wrong with using other people's work to inspire your own - so long as your work is yours and not simply a copy of what others have done.

Learn More:

Let the Scene or Subject Move You

landscape photography inspiration

^{Photo by FabrikaCr via iStock}

I'm not advocating that you show up to a photoshoot and wing it, but sometimes you'll find that when you get to the location and see the subject or scene, you might find an instantaneous spark of creativity.

Maybe it's the fall colors or the light as it filters through the trees or the sounds of the waves crashing on the beach. Perhaps you see an interesting building on your drive to the shoot or a passerby whose clothes give you an idea for a color palette for your photos.

Whatever the case, just have your eyes and ears open to the surroundings, because you never know when inspiration might strike.

It Isn't Just Portraits...

how to find inspiration for photos

Photo by jk78 via iStock

Though most of the examples and photos in this article are oriented towards portraiture, it isn't the only genre in which you need to be inspired and creative in order to make the best shot.

Landscapes, street scenes, architectural photography, heck, even food photography all benefit from a creative approach to composition, framing, post-processing, and so forth.

So, no matter what subject you're photographing, open your mind to being inspired and use that as fuel for developing your own unique creative vision for your photoshoots.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Get Started With Artistic Nude Photography

Written by PT Editor on 29 May 2020.

How to Get Started With Artistic Nude Photography

^{Photo by Lola Russian from Pexels}

One of the first things we tend to do when we start to learn nude photography is to try out our hand at artistic nude photography. It’s exciting, it’s new, and we really want to create art. It’s that desire to make real art that will drive us to try new things and master new techniques as we learn nude photography.

When we search for nude photography tips, many of the results will be showing us tips and techniques that prompt us to look at the artistic side of nude imaging. A nice side effect of our guided photographic self-education is that as we learn nude photography techniques and methods, we are already learning tips that apply to artistic nude photography.

What Makes A Nude Artistic?

As we learn nude photography and adapt lighting, posing, focus, exposure, and composition techniques, we’re being artistic. The things that make an image have the label artistic attached to them have more to do with methods than with subject matter.

Any subject can be transformed into fine art photography, from landscapes and cityscapes, to still life, portraits, and even product images. Variations of lighting, exposure, composition, and post processing can be used to make this happen. If it looks “special” compared to a standard view, we can label it artistic. Learn more about nude photoshoot ideas on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

What Variations Are Artistic?

Let’s take one extremely useful technique and play with that a little as we learn nude photography. Rembrandt Lighting is one of the most discussed portrait lighting configurations and has been since before photography was even invented.

Rembrandt Lighting is a variation of the Chiaroscuro technique of creating and manipulating contrast within the image. To learn nude photography with Chiaroscuro, it can be helpful to work in Black & White.

learn nude photography 1

^{Photo by nappy from Pexels}

The contrasts between light and dark are very noticeable in B&W images, so as we learn nude photography methods that work with Chiaroscuro, we can readily notice the differences of what works and what doesn’t. You can also check nude photographys here.

You can adapt what you’re using in regular nude imaging to your artistic nude photography by simply changing one or two things at a time. For instance, if you are setting up your lights for the portrait lighting configurations you already know, just change up the position or power level of the lights until you see more visual contrast.

Then, adapt your exposure techniques to take advantage of the changed lighting, perhaps exposing for a low key effect where shadows dominate as opposed to averaging or high key.

Artistic Thinking to Learn Nude Photography

learn nude photography 2

^{Photo by Julia Kuzenkov from Pexels}

Since any subject can be transformed into an artistic image with simply a few changes, a fantastic method to get started with artistic nude photography is to keep on with your continuing fine efforts to learn nude photography in standard situations.

Really, aren’t we being artistic with any portrait, nude, or figure study? Look for whatever you can do to make the image differ from what might be considered standard or the norm. You can also view another post about nude shoot at this place.

Sure, some ideas may not ever see the light of day or social media, but that’s all part of the fun of what happens as you learn nude photography. Keep on looking at your subject with an eye towards making the subject stand out. You’ll enjoy the learning process!

We Recommend

How to Make Someone Comfortable in Front of the Camera

Written by PT Editor on 18 January 2021.

How to Make Someone Comfortable in Front of the Camera

^{photo byGeorgijevic via iStock}

Many of our portrait photography tips cover the technical aspects of the exposure, lighting, or composition. Interaction with our portrait subject or model, making them comfortable in front of the camera, is another aspect well within our ability to control.

Posing the subject so that they feel natural is often an important part of our portrait tips or modeling session tips. It goes right along with composition when considering how to do portrait photography or how to work with portrait models. In addition to good posing techniques, what else can we do to help our subject be more comfortable in front of the camera?

Booking Conversation

comfortable in front of the camera

^{photo byFG Trade via iStock}

This is what you talk about right after booking or, if it’s an informal photo shoot, simply a pre-session conversation of what to expect. Some of the things that your portrait subject may need to know before the shoot is what type of clothing or makeup to wear, how to prepare their hair, and whether the shoot is just them or are others getting photographed too.

You may also tell them or show them what type of lighting, whether it’s strobes or continuous light, if you’ll be shooting indoors or out, and if they’ll be standing, sitting, or other poses.

Invest in Good Face Masks

fstop dyota face mask

You want to ensure that you're being as safe as possible when photographing your clients, and one of the best ways to do that is to have a good face mask to help mitigate the transmission of the COVID-19 virus.

The center layer is a non-woven poly that protects against particle and liquid penetration, and the innermost layer has a SILVADUR treatment to help prevent odors that result from frequent wear.

These masks are available in a variety of colors and are priced right at $19.99!

Use a Posing Guide

portrait photography tips

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

As we’re discussing with our client or subject how to do portrait photography, we may figure out that they might need a little extra guidance for posing for them to be comfortable in front of the camera. A printable or sharable posing guide is often just what’s needed.

We could also show them previous work we’ve done, but a posing guide helps make it more personal to them since they won’t be seeing someone else’s face as they think about posing. The posing guides I prefer are monochrome illustrations that are easy to distinguish.

Most subjects, even some professional models, are going to be unsure about what to do with their hands. Nothing makes a portrait subject feel uncomfortable quite like the nervous indecision of how to pose their hands, so be sure to concentrate some effort on that, especially for those not used to being in front of the camera.

Learn More:

Speak Positively

portrait tips

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

All of that rapid fire, witty banter or nonsensical pratter you hear on TV shows and movies depicting a photographer interacting with the model isn’t necessary, or even realistic, but it does help for the subject to hear positive words from the photographer to make them more comfortable in front of the camera.

So, what do you say? Unless you’re very familiar with the subject, you may want to avoid appearance specific compliments or suggestions that may either sound judgemental or perhaps even risque.

As you have them go through the poses you worked out ahead of time, generic compliments are certainly welcome. “Good job!” “That looks nice. “ Tilt your head a little, put your chin up.” will all work. Even as you’re directing to avoid unflattering posing or expressions, try to keep the directions simple and upbeat. Instead of saying no or don’t do something, just direct to the good pose or expression you want.

Take Breaks

how to do portrait photography

^{photo byAaronAmat via iStock}

Your business model may have time constraints for the portrait or model shoot, but you may want to pad your schedule a little bit to include short breaks within the actual photo shoot. Don’t shortchange the client or cause schedule conflicts, but there’s only so much in a row most portrait subjects can pose. Professional models, not so much of an issue.

With a non-professional client or a friend, you might take some time during a short break to let them see some of the images you’ve captured. If that’s not your shooting style, that’s fine, too. A tethered or wirelessly tethered computer or tablet will make this an easy step.

Seeing their good poses and expressions will motivate them to have a good time in what time is remaining, no need to discuss what went wrong in any not so great shots, just compliment and build on the good things.

Be Professional

how to work with portrait models

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

Even if you’re not a professional or aren’t charging for the portrait session, maintaining a professional demeanor will go a long way towards inspiring confidence and helping the subject stay comfortable in front of the camera.

If you are confident in your skill and ability, that confidence is reassuring to the portrait subject, leading to them being more likely to be comfortable in front of the camera, resulting in more natural posing and expressions.

Which in turn will lead to better portrait images, which is our main goal with all portrait photography tips.

Equipment Choices

help models relax and have fun

^{photo byGeber86 via iStock}

You may have noticed that we didn’t recommend any equipment choices in this portrait tips article. Not any camera, lens, or lighting gear will automatically make your portrait subject more comfortable in front of the camera.

The best things to do are to communicate well, before, during, and after the photo shoot, be confident in your ability and familiar with your equipment, whatever it is, and act professionally whether with family and friends, a portrait client, or professional models.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Make Your Portraits Look More Professional

Written by PT Editor on 24 August 2020.

How to Make Your Portraits Look More Professional

^{Photo by Gabriel Silvério on Unsplash}

When you are just beginning to venture into portrait photography, everything seems a bit daunting. Before I dive into some portrait photography tips, I wanted to take a moment to be honest about this pretty difficult photography niche.

Portrait photography isn’t something that comes naturally for a lot of photographers. It takes a lot of practice. So, while these tips about how to take better portraits will allow you to get started, you should know that the only way for you to master portrait photography is through time and lots of practice.

Definitely don’t expect for all of your photos to be professional-looking portraits after just a few weeks. By managing your expectations about portrait photography, you will be more likely to continue practicing for months on end.

Play with Eye Contact

portrait photography tips 1

^{Photo by Tyler Nix on Unsplash}

One of my favorite portrait photography tips for beginners is to learn to play with eye contact. When you first get started with portrait photography, most photographers get into the nasty habit of making their models stare directly into the camera lens.

While this works for the first few portraits you take, you definitely can’t do a whole shoot like this. Firstly, your model will get bored posing the exact same way all of the time. Secondly, you will get bored flipping through those photos after the shoot is done.

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo byAzmanJaka via iStock}

The first easy way to get out of this portrait photography habit is to simply give your model something to look at in the frame. If you’re photographing a couple, for example, you might have them look at one another rather than at the camera.

portrait photography 3

^{photo byIgor Alecsander via iStock}

Another option is to just have your model stare at something off camera. This is an especially fun shot if your model is showcasing some emotion at whatever they are looking at. One good tip that I’ve used in the past is to put the model’s significant other off screen.

Don’t Just Rely on Posing

professional looking portraits 4

^{photo byHarbucks via iStock}

Portrait photography is definitely a lot about posing, but you should never let how you pose the model get in the way of the story you are trying to tell with your camera.

Sometimes the best portrait photography shots are the shots you didn’t plan at all. This is especially true if you are working with children, or an especially anxious adult.

professional looking portraits 5

^{photo bykatrinaelena via iStock}

You should always be anticipating moments when your model may do something surprising. To do so, consider putting your camera in burst mode so you can fire off multiple shots in short order.

Another idea is to keep shooting during breaks when you’ve told the model to sit back and relax. Often those candid moments between “real” shots can be very fruitful for a candid portrait.

Learn More:

Try Creating Portrait Series

how to make portraits look professional 6

^{Photo by Caleb Lucas on Unsplash}

If you frequently take photos on your phone, you may have noticed the trend that started a few years ago where phones now let you take photos in a burst mode.

This technology was specifically introduced to help amateur photographers work on their portrait photography. If the camera is taking all of the photos for you, then you can be sure that you aren’t going to miss any of the action.

Burst mode represents a good opportunity to create a series of photos.

portrait photography strategies 7

^{photo byHannesEichinger via iStock}

portrait photography strategies 8

^{photo byHannesEichinger via iStock}

As mentioned above, you can do this on the down-low to get some interesting candid shots. However, you can also simply let the model know that you are going to be shooting in a burst sequence and ask them to strike different poses as the camera takes the shots.

It will help your model if you give them something to do during this short period of time (even if your directions are just to go through as many emotions as possible in 5 seconds).

Use New Perspectives

portrait photography tips for beginners 9

^{photo bystock_colors via iStock}

Another one of my favorite portrait photography strategies for beginners is to use new perspectives. This basically just means that you, as the photographer, should find different angles to photograph from.

This can look like the example above, which is a favorite perspective of many boudoir photographers, or you can get down low on the eye level of a child as they play

how to take better portraits 10

^{photo byWeekend Images Inc. via iStock}

While the primary goal of portrait photography is to capture your model as accurately as possible, you don’t want to do this and sacrifice all of the intrigue in the photograph. Besides, if you play with angles and perspectives, there’s a good chance you’ll capture a portrait that is much more interesting than a traditional posed shot with the model looking right down the barrel of the lens.

Create Beautiful Prints

If you’re learning how to make portraits look professional, then you need to focus on how you present those portraits.

Print photography is a fantastic avenue for portrait photographers because they allow your work to be showcased in someone’s house on a regular basis. This basically acts as free marketing for your business, but it also allows your clients to show off photos of themselves that they are proud of.

While you could go the traditional route and print your portraiture on paper, I always think it is a much more fun unboxing experience if you opt to buy canvas prints.

Canvas prints allow the colors of your photo to be incredibly vibrant to the point where the image looks like it is about to jump off of the page.

Canvas prints also act as family heirlooms when you choose the right canvas printing company. Canvas prints will last much longer than paper prints. They also look more professional.

When I purchase canvas prints, I choose to work with CanvasHQ. I first started working with CanvasHQ a few years ago and never looked back at any other canvas printing company.

Every canvas that CanvasHQ creates is rated for over a century, which means your clients can happily pass it onto their children and grandchildren.

Additionally, every canvas is handbuilt. The frames are hand created and your print is hand stretched onto that frame. This ensures that your canvas print won’t crack over the years.

CanvasHQ’s customer service is phenomenal, even right now. They quickly answer any questions I have and will notify me right away if they come across any problems during the crafting process. It’s just one reason why they won our 2020 canvas print shootout!

If you are truly a beginner photographer, CanvasHQ can perform some touch-ups to your photographs, like removing red eyes and blemishes.

They also have a countdown on their website that will tell you exactly how much time you can expect it to take for your canvas to get created if you send in a print today.

Plus, CanvasHQ creates canvas prints that won’t break the bank!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Master Family Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 26 August 2021.

How to Master Family Portraits

^{photo bykupicoo via iStock}

I didn’t realize I could love photography more until I had my son and got to start taking family portraits.

Kids bring an entirely new level to the art of photography. Let’s be honest, they can be a handful and getting them to cooperate for family portraits is half of the battle.

But, with the struggles come the wins because kids also get the best emotions out of adults who are shooting with them. You’ll never see better family portraits than ones where kids are being their crazy selves.

Perhaps you’ve just had a kid of your own and want to start doing family portraiture, or perhaps you’re interested in doing family portraits for a living. All of the family portrait tips in this article will apply to you regardless.

Keep in mind that these family photography tips are for beginners.

First Things First - Don't Neglect Old Family Portraits

^{photo by kool99 via iStock}

While taking current family portraits is certainly important, before learning how to get the perfect shot, it's necessary that we discuss the value of the old family portraits you already have.

If you're like me, you probably have a favorite family photo from long ago, and as time has gone by, that photo might have faded or otherwise experienced damage.

Fortunately, you don't have to live with that kind of damage because photo restoration services like PhotoRepairPro can beautifully restore the images.

Simply upload the image or a scan of the image to PhotoRepairPro, and they'll take it from there.

From eliminating water damage to making creases and tears disappear, their photo restoration experts will make your old family photos look new again.

Not only that, PhotoRepairPro can retouch images - colorize a black and white photo, for example - or remove backgrounds or people from shots.

It really is a one-stop-shop for breathing new life into old family photos.

See what I mean by visiting PhotoRepairPro today!

Treat the Kids As Equals

family portraits

^{photo byRyanJLane via iStock}

If you don’t have kids of your own, you may not know how to act around them. I certainly had this problem until I had my son. Not all of us are naturals around small humans.

But, during your shoot, you need to remember that this is exactly what kids are. They have their own personalities. As someone shooting family portraits, it is your job to get to know these personalities so that you can capture them on film.

Some questions I like to ask before going out for family portraits are questions about the kids. What hobbies do they like? Are there any favorite toys you could bring to the photoshoot? What makes them smile?

By incorporating some of the kids’ favorite activities into a family photoshoot, you will ensure that they have fun, which will ensure that you get great photos.

One other way that you can treat the kids as your equal during family portraits is by getting on their level. You never want to be shooting down at a child because it will make them look and feel small. Instead, get on your knees and photograph them at eye level.

Pay Attention to the Aperture

family portrait tips

^{photo byfiladendron via iStock}

If you decide that you really love taking family portraits, then eventually you will figure out what aperture settings work for your style of photography.

However, until that happens, there are some basic rules you should follow.

If you’re taking individual pictures, then you should use a lower f-number because it will ensure your background has nice bokeh and it will make your subject really stand out. You don’t have to slam the aperture to its lowest number, but a good rule of thumb is to use f/4 or below if possible.

If you’re shooting a group shot, on the other hand, then you should shoot with a higher f-number so that you have enough depth of field in the photo to keep each person nice and sharp.

There are other factors that influence depth of field, but paying attention to the aperture is a good start.

Learn More:

Set the White Balance to Auto

family photography tips

^{photo byAlessandro Biascioli via iStock}

If you are completely new to photography, then the above heading might not make a lot of sense to you.

Your camera’s white balance is a setting that controls the color temperature of a photo. It is used to ensure that the color of the light in your image isn’t too orange or too blue. It basically makes sure that all of your colors look natural.

If you’re shooting in one single location, with the same lighting source, like in a studio, then you can adjust your white balance manually to exactly where you like it.

However, with family portraits, you will likely be shooting in different locations with different lighting. You may start at a park and then transition to a family’s home. Or, even if you’re just shooting in a park, the lighting could change minute by minute thanks to clouds.

So, allow your camera to do all of the hard work for you by setting your white balance to “auto.” Your camera will essentially do what it thinks is best, which is far better than what you’ll do without any formal training. It will also help you to waste less time adjusting your settings so you can spend more time with the family.

And since the camera will get it close, you can make minor adjustments in post-processing without too much time or effort.

Rent Different Lenses (If You Don’t Already Own Them)

family portraiture

^{photo byeclipse_images via iStock}

While there are no such things as specific family portrait lenses, you will want a variety of lenses to shoot with during your time with a family.

Have a telephoto lens (i.e., an 85mm) in your bag to capture family moments from afar. Have a standard prime lens too (i.e., a 50mm) for close-up work.

However, you’ll also want a wide lens (i.e., 24mm or 35mm) to shoot with so that you can capture the background. This is especially true for a family who just bought their first house and may want to include it in their shots.

Of course, lenses can be incredibly expensive, so if you don’t already own these types of lenses, you can rent them for the day. Just make sure to build that cost into your pricing plan.

Top It Off With a Gorgeous Canvas Print

One of my biggest pet peeves about photographers who offer family portraits is that a lot of them don’t also offer different types of physical prints for those families, despite the fact that it is one of the easiest upcharges you can sell.

I recommend that you offer canvas prints to the families you photograph, both because canvas prints are a relatively cheap way for families to show off the investment that they made with your photography and because they are long lasting, so long as you bought them from a reputable print shop.

All of the canvas prints that CanvasHQ makes last for over a century. That means you can sell your canvas prints as family heirlooms, since they will likely be passed from generation to generation.

I personally like working with CanvasHQ both because of the quality of their materials and because of the quality of their customer service. When you’re upcharging your clients for specific physical items, you need to make sure that those items get to your clients when you say they will.

I’ve had issues working with other canvas printing companies in the past, but CanvasHQ has a countdown on their website which tells you exactly how long it will take them to make your print if you sent it in today.

Plus, if they ever do encounter any problems (like shortages during the pandemic), they are sure to communicate that to you quickly and efficiently so you don’t leave your clients hanging. What’s not to like about that?!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Photograph Your Newborn

Written by PT Editor on 03 April 2020.

How to Photograph Your Newborn

^{photo byFatCamera via iStock}

One of my close friends is incredibly pregnant right now and she’s worried she may not be able to hire a photographer to come to the hospital with her. Actually, she’s more worried her spouse may not be able to join her in the delivery room. Unfortunately, that’s a reality thousands of parents are dealing with in the midst of this pandemic.

However, mothers are resilient and she’s determined to get those precious newborn photos with or without a professional. The only problem is she has about two weeks to learn how to photograph her newborn.

So, I decided to help. And, I figured since many other parents are in the same predicament, I’ll teach you all how to photograph your newborn too.

Focus on the Lighting

photograph your newborn 1

^{photo byOrbon Alija via iStock}

Hospital lighting is harsh. I understand why it’s needed but it puts me on edge and it definitely doesn’t translate to photographs very well.

The first rule of thumb when learning how to photograph your newborn is to use natural light.

Most hospital rooms have windows you can utilize to perfect this. You’ll simply want to angle your newborn so that the sunlight streaming in through the window hits their head first. Make sure your baby has a slight shadow under their nose so that you know they’re at the right angle to the sun (which should be around 45 degrees).

photograph your newborn 2

^{photo bytatyana_tomsickova via iStock}

Additionally, turn the lights off in your hospital room as frequently as possible and pull the blinds wide open. This way you’ll be able to catch those special, impromptu moments without rushing to fix the lighting first.

If there are sheer blinds on the windows, even better! They can help soften direct sunlight coming into the room which will minimize shadows and give you more even lighting for your newborn portraits.

Keep Your Newborn Happy (At All Costs)

newborn photography tips for parents 3

^{photo by chayathonwong via iStock}

You’ll never be able to photograph your newborn if they’re hungry. You’ll also never be able to photograph your newborn if they’re anxious. You’ll also never be able to photograph your newborn if they’re cold.

So, make sure your baby is happy and you’ll get better shots. Feed them about 10 minutes before your photoshoot so you’ll have time to burp them and clean up any spit up.

newborn photography tips for parents 4

^{photo by ideabug via iStock}

Wrap them in one of the many precious blankets you received at the baby shower or in a baby wrap, and I find it really helpful to download a white noise app on your phone to play during the shoot.

“Sound Sleeper,” is the one I use because it features lullabies, rain, and even the sound of the womb, but you can download whichever one you prefer.

Plus, you’ll need a white noise app when you start trying your hand at newborn photography at home.

Download the app for iOS and Android devices.

Learn More:

Don’t Take Any Risks

newborn photography at home 5

^{photo by DaydreamsGirl via iStock}

Don’t take any risks with the baby while you’re trying to photograph your newborn. I’ve seen all sorts of crazy shots that parents take that look really unsafe and I can’t imagine they’re worth it.

Plus, I think newborn photography should be simple and organic. Don’t try to force things; just enjoy your new baby and document those precious moments in the first days of their lives.

If you want to recreate a classic newborn pose (i.e., the baby curled up in a basket), be sure you have plenty of soft supports underneath the baby, particularly its neck and head.

You can use molded foam bumpers to give the baby support and to position on either side of the baby to prevent it from rolling sideways.

Using props can also enhance the look of the shot. Just be sure whatever you use is soft and baby-friendly, like these adorable newborn outfits.

Experiment

newborn photography at home 6

^{photo by wundervisuals via iStock}

Some parents get really crazy, like moms who photograph their babies as they’re being born. I’m not suggesting to photograph your newborn in any way that makes you uncomfortable, but feel free to experiment with your shots.

I think a lot of people are too stringent about following newborn photography tips for parents to a tee, which means your photos of your baby look exactly like everyone else’s photos of their babies.

newborn baby sleep in parent hands sleeping new born kid child and picture id680684508

^{photo by narik via iStock}

This is also a great tip for premature babies or babies with health complications that require them to be in an oxygen chamber or otherwise hooked up to machines. Move around your newborn and experiment with different angles rather than moving your newborn around!

Print Your Photos

Learn how to photograph your newborn

^{photo by Andrew_Howe via iStock}

If you took all this time to learn how to photograph your newborn then you need to show the photos off. Print them out and hang them on your walls in your home.

Printed photos of your newborn are also great presents for your parents or in-laws, since they’re no doubt incredibly excited about the addition of a grandchild to their family.

I use CanvasHQ to print my photos because their canvas quality is high, but their prices are low. They’re currently running a 30% off coupon and all of their canvases are money-back guaranteed. Plus, as I discuss in the video above, they've won my canvas print shootout two years running!

Plus, they’re a small business, so they could really use your help during these trying financial times.

I’ve ordered dozens of prints from CanvasHQ over the years, and I have never been disappointed with the quality, shipping time, or customer service. These guys know how to make a beautiful canvas!

You’ll find that the materials they use are superior to what you can get elsewhere, and the time and care taken to build solid, strong frames means that the canvas is square, tight, and doesn’t bow over time. Truly, if you order a canvas today, it’ll look like a million bucks generations from now.

If that’s not the perfect way to celebrate a newborn, I don’t know what is!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Plan a Portrait Photoshoot

Written by PT Editor on 11 October 2021.

How to Plan a Portrait Photoshoot

^{photo byvalentinrussanov via iStock}

Thinking about how to plan a portrait photoshoot can be a daunting task. Even if we’ve been crafting fine portraits for years, there is always the aspect of considering the human element of someone else being involved, the portrait subject.

For some of us, planning a portrait photoshoot may seem to be an unnecessary task. Perhaps we think that we can just go with the flow since we know how to take great portraits already. What often happens, though, is that we may forget a series of images that we should have included, or some other unexpected and thus unplanned for snag shows up.

Some of these snags that may or may not happen can be handled readily, provided we’ve thought about them ahead of time. Plus, planning our photoshoots can streamline our workflow in general.

Many of these portrait photography tips for planning a photoshoot will be usable for other types of photography, especially any genre that is done on location.

Ideas First

Plan a Portrait Photoshoot

^{photo byWavebreakmedia via iStock}

The first tip in our portrait photography tutorial is to get a good idea of what we’re going to do in our portrait photoshoot.

We usually do this anyways, right? Because if we’re offering our services as a paid photoshoot, the client needs to know what to expect and we need to know how best to please our client. We have a discussion with the intended subject, they tell us what kind of imagery they like, we show them examples, everyone is on the same page.

Unless we’re shooting in our own studio, this is the step of how to plan a portrait photoshoot where we figure out where we’re going to be shooting. If we have our own studio, this step is also where we can consider backgrounds, including greenscreen options for post-processing afterwards.

Storyboard Your Shoot

portrait photography tips

^{photo bysmolaw11 via iStock}

Storyboarding is a regular and vital step in many professional videography projects. It can also be used when planning a portrait photoshoot. When planning a portrait photoshoot, our storyboard doesn’t need to be nearly as detailed as a videography project storyboard.

Simple changes such as adjusting lighting styles, changing props, or using different lenses or techniques can be spelled out here so we don’t accidentally neglect anything during our photoshoot.

Any method you like to use can work. Some may want to write the storyboard on index cards or a notepad, others could find that one of the many free or low-cost smartphone apps will best suit their style.

Learn More:

Scout Locations

planning a portrait photoshoot

^{photo bysborisov via iStock}

Another step in how to plan a portrait photoshoot is to determine where you’re going to take the pictures and find out certain necessary things about that location. You really don’t want to find out that you can’t shoot there or that it’s the wrong time of year for that particular location on the day of or during the portrait session.

Renting a photographic studio is an option for photographers that don’t have one of their own in their home or office. Times of the photoshoot and any items provided will be spelled out clearly in a rental contract. So will payment arrangements, all of which you need to know before meeting the client there.

Options in your area may include picturesque parks or other locations. Interestingly, many of these types of areas will have regulations and maybe fees pertaining to paid photoshoots.

One that is near is very popular for engagement and bridal portraits, but has strict rules governing how long you can occupy the space and requires a temporary day license to be purchased prior to any photography. Violations can be costly, varying from monetary fines to being barred from future photoshoots, so do your research!

You need to know other things in addition to fees and legalities, you also need to know what times of day provide what lighting conditions. Check out the safety of the area as well, which can include steep terrain, sharp rocks, or being frequented by thieves or muggers.

Lighting and Lenses

tips for planning a photoshoot

^{photo bytap10 via iStock}

This will end up as part of your storyboard in a lot of cases. While one lens will be perfect for a headshot, a ¾ length or full body portrait will require a different lens. Environmental portraits will probably require yet another different focal length lens. Having your game plan already set out ahead of time will greatly simplify the portrait photoshoot workflow.

Similar ideas concerning the lighting equipment and choices. Knowing when the sun will be in what position and how the lighting conditions change as the day progresses is part of the scouting the location step.

Know the Results You Want

portrait photography tutorial

^{photo byWavebreakmedia via iStock}

When I’m shooting to create black and white images as an end result, I change how I approach exposure and lighting decisions. It’s similar for any of the end results of what I desire and having a goal ahead of time is a large part of how to plan a portrait photoshoot that successfully delivers the images that will please our clients and other viewers.

Low key, high key, selective focus, environmental, glamourous, romantic, powerful, soft… All of these different effects and methods should be planned out before the portrait photoshoot actually happens.

The storyboard becomes very useful when we are capturing exposures for a variety of these results. Then, we can shift to that part of our creative mode as the time for it comes up in our scheduled workflow.

Post-Processing is Part of the Photoshoot

portrait photography

^{photo byWavebreakmedia via iStock}

Time spent for post-processing any of these styles and also for portrait-specific processing should be factored in to the workflow we’re scheduling for the photoshoot.

Things like adding a custom background through green screen, converting to black and white, and other special techniques take extra time and processing, so does correcting for blemishes or subtly adjusting lighting levels and colors.

All of these considerations can be involved in how to plan a portrait photoshoot in order to achieve the best results that will please both you and your subject.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Position Lights for Photography

Written by PT Editor on 19 April 2021.

How to Position Lights for Photography

^{photo bydlewis33 via iStock}

Knowing how to position lights for photography and videography are important skills for beginner photographers to learn. Many intermediate and advanced photographers might also benefit from a refresher covering photography lighting techniques.

There are as many photography lighting setups as there are types of photography lights. Some of the most used photography lighting setups have their own name, such as Rembrandt lighting or butterfly lighting. Check out our specific photography lighting guides to learn how to position lights for photography with those configurations, today we’ll take a more general approach.

When to Use Photography Lighting

types of photography lights 1

^{photo byFabrikaCr via iStock}

There’s a running joke among some photographers I know that if someone says they prefer natural light, it’s because they haven’t learned how to position lights for photography yet. That’s actually understandable because we’ve all seen the difference between a well lit scene and one that looks either flat or harsh because the lighting was not positioned properly.

Photography lighting for beginners is actually easy to learn and put into practice right away. After all, lighting is one of the basic elements at the heart of photography and videography, so here are some situations when photography lighting is a good option.

Portraits
Group Portraits
Small Product Photography
Vlogging
Documentation for Insurance

Portrait Photography Lighting

photography lighting 2

^{photo bykupicoo via iStock}

I put this at the number one position because most beginners want to know how to position lights for photography of their friends and family. An on camera flash is convenient to use but can provide flat or harsh light which may not be very flattering to the subject.

One of the first photography lighting configurations we can learn and use is to simply put the light off to one side. For a simple setup, I like to position the subject with their body posed to one side a bit, maybe 45 degrees, and have them turn their face toward the camera.

Place one light on a stand about 45 degrees to their side and 30 to 45 degrees above them. With the posing position they’re in, this simple setup provides loop lighting, meaning there’s a small loop of shadow from their nose. Use a soft light for a flattering modelling effect, a harder light will provide drama.

Learn More:

Types of Portrait Lighting

photography lighting 3

^{photo byPortra via iStock}

With this basic photography lighting equipment and a few adjustments in light position and subject posing, you can also create board lighting, with the light falling on the side of the face closest to the camera you have broad light, if the light is falling on the side away from the camera, you have short lighting.

Adjust the light position and their pose just right and you can achieve Rembrandt lighting. For portraits of an individual, creating a shadow is key to modeling the facial features. Adjust power, hardness or softness, and the positions to get as much or as little modeling as desired.

All of this can be accomplished with one light. Plus, if that one light is a continuous light, then you can get double duty from it by using it for video, too.

Group Portrait Lighting

photography lighting setup 4

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Group portraits are one of the situations when a flatter light is often more desirable than any of the modeling effects of general portrait photography lighting setups. This is because the different poses and facial positions could cause all sorts of odd shadow effects.

Depending on how large a group it is and what the posing and positioning of everyone is going to be, you might have one large diffused light centrally placed or several soft lights fanned out from the camera position.

A small group like a family or several friends can be posed in a semi circle or a triangle and lit similarly to the first portrait method we listed above. A larger group, such an office staff or theatre troupe may be arranged in more of a line formation. A bank of softboxes laid out in a line, equidistant from each other is a good method of how to position lights for photography of large groups which will result in few obscuring facial shadows.

Small Product Photography

photography lighting setup 5

^{photo byNeha S via iStock}

Selling things online requires clear images of the items, so photography lighting is important for this, too. An excellent method of how to position lights for photography of small products is to use a light tent and one or two small continuous lights.

I like to recommend continuous LED lights as photography lighting for beginners shooting small product photography since it’s easy to see where the obscuring shadows are falling. Using softer lights, such as a soft box, is often more desirable for small product photography.

types of photography lights 6

For really small items, a ring light is a fantastic option. A ring light allows you to shoot through a circle of light, allowing virtually shadowless photos of your tiny subjects captured close up. The Oryon RLB40-M 14” ring light from Ikan is a good example of this style of light.

Lighting for Vlogging

types of photography lights 7

Sometimes an on camera light is our best option. Filming yourself or someone else for a vlog is an example of one of those times. You won’t need to wonder how to position lights for photography when the light is mounted on your camera, but it’s nice to have some versatility in adjustment available with the light.

Again, I like to recommend continuous LED photography lighting for beginners since it’s a simple process to calculate exposure and you can see what’s going on as you adjust the lighting. Ikan makes a great light for this purpose, too, the Onyx OYB120 LED light is compact, powerful, and versatile, making it a great option.

types of photography lights 8

This battery powered LED light is compact in size and weight, making it a good fit for most of the entry level and intermediate DSLRs and mirrorless cameras I’ve reviewed recently. It’s battery powered, very bright, and has adjustments for changing power levels and the color temperature of the light to balance with ambient lighting.

I like using Ikan for photography, videography, and audio accessories for my own use and for recommending to others. Since Ikan designs and makes their own equipment, they are able to provide very high quality, innovative, and useful equipment for lower prices than other brands.

Since we’re using one light on camera for many of our vlogging sessions, being able to tilt the light up for bouncing off a ceiling or varying the power level gives us the control we want for better looking videos and still images.

Documentation for Insurance

photography lighting for beginners 9

^{photo byWichitS via iStock}

An added benefit of having a digital camera and decent lighting is that we can make a video or a series of still images of our properties and belongings which can be used as insurance documentation. It’s a simple video shoot to use an on camera LED light like the Onyx OYB120 and our entry level camera with kit lens to make a walk through video we can upload to the Cloud.

How to Position Lights for Photography and Videography

photography lighting techniques 10

^{photo bySDI Productions via iStock}

It really isn’t that difficult to learn how to position lights for photography and videography of all sorts of subjects from portraits to products to vlogging. Using continuous lights helps us see immediately what the changes we’re making are doing for the scene we’re photographing or recording.

Have a look at some of our other articles discussing photography lighting techniques for lots more information of how to position lights for photography.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Set Up a Simple Home Portrait Studio

Written by PT Editor on 21 April 2023.

How to Set Up a Simple Home Portrait Studio

^{Photo by AleksandarNakic via iStock}

Creating a portrait studio in your home can be a cost-effective way for photographers to expand their services and offer clients a convenient and comfortable space for their photo sessions. Whether you're a professional photographer or just getting started, setting up a simple home portrait studio is easier than you think.

This article shares tips and tricks for building a home portrait studio, the essential gear you’ll want to invest in, and more. From choosing the right space and equipment to how to set up the lighting and backdrop, we'll cover all the steps you need to follow to create a professional-looking studio in your home.

So, whether you want to offer your clients a more personalized experience or improve your portrait photography skills, this guide will help you set up a simple home portrait studio that is both functional and beautiful. Keep reading to find out more!

Check out the video above by Laura BC to learn more about setting up a home portrait studio on a budget.

Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Space
Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Lights
Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Tripods & Stands
Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Stabilizing Equipment
Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Backdrops & Props
Final Thoughts on Setting up a Home Photography Studio
Recommended Photography Gear

Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Space

Home Portrait Studio Essentials Space

^{Photo by mgstudyo via iStock}

The first step in the design process is deciding where your home portrait studio will go. A common misconception is that you need a ton of space to create a home studio, but that is false. We have seen people set up gorgeous studios in spaces as small as 10 square feet.

Actually, if it’s your first time building a photo studio, we recommend keeping it small and simple. It will be more affordable, and you can discover what works for you and what doesn’t. Later on, you can always move to a larger space if needed. Spare rooms, garages, and guest houses are wonderful places to set up a home portrait studio.

Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Lights

Home Portrait Studio Essentials Lights

^{Photo by frankpeters via iStock}

Ideally, you want to choose a space with lots of natural light, but that can be extremely difficult to find. That’s why the first thing you need to purchase is studio lights. They allow you to shoot around the clock and help eliminate unwanted shadows in your portraits. This professional lighting kit is a great starter pack.

While most people start with one light, owning multiple gives you much more creative freedom behind the camera. Depending on your studio's size and shape, you should definitely play around with light placement to see what works best. Different effects you can create using artificial light include sunlight, soft/hard light, backlighting, etc.

Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Tripods & Stands

Home Portrait Studio Essentials Tripods Stands

^{Photo by Anatolii Kovalov via iStock}

Another must-have piece of photography gear in any home portrait studio is a sturdy and reliable tripod. Tripods eliminate movement and camera shake during shooting, leading to sharper, higher-quality portraits. Things to think about before buying a tripod are price, height, weight, stability, and load capacity. Our favorite tripod is the Vanguard VEO 3 + 236CB.

Stands are equally important. They are what will hold your lights, reflectors, umbrellas, diffusers, etc. C Stands are the most common in the photography industry, but you will also want to invest in a backdrop stand.

Learn More:

Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Stabilizing Equipment

Home Portrait Studio Essentials Stabilizing Equipment

One of the worst things that can happen during a photography session is that your lights fall down or shift during the shoot. If this happens, it can be difficult to recreate the same effects, and your work may suffer. That’s why properly stabilizing your stands (and tripod) is crucial. But how do you do this?

Enter StandDaddy’s innovative stabilizer system. It’s a one-of-a-kind system that is practical, easy to set up, and affordable – just place a barbell weight over the leg, add the StandDaddy below it, and you’re all set! You can use StandDaddy with lighting stands, boom stands, tripods, and more, to ensure your home portrait studio is a safe environment.

tripod stabilizer system by StandDaddy

StandDaddy is CNC lathe machined for the ultimate strength - it offers 6000 psi tensile strength, in fact! This product is engineered to grip extremely well with just slight hand pressure, so you don’t need tools to attach StandDaddy to your tripod or other gear.

On top of all that, StandDaddy is made in the USA and comes with a lifetime warranty - it’s guaranteed not to fail! Not bad, right?!

Home Portrait Studio Essentials: Backdrops & Props

Home Portrait Studio Essentials Backdrops Props

^{Photo by kostsov via iStock}

A backdrop is the last item you 100% need in a home portrait studio. White backdrops are the most versatile and the go-to choice of most professionals, but you can also get creative with them. A simple Google or Amazon search will yield hundreds of fun backdrops ranging from green screens to wood to beaches.

Props are also a fun and imaginative way to spice your portrait photography. Common props include string lights, food, animals, and balloons. However, don’t feel like you have to copy what you see, and use whatever comes to your mind.

Final Thoughts on Setting up a Home Photography Studio

Thoughts on Setting up a Home Photography Studio

^{Photo by gorodenkoff via iStock}

You can create a simple and budget-friendly home portrait studio by following the above mentioned tips and techniques. First, you must choose a suitable space in your home that will provide you with the flexibility you need as a portrait photographer.

After that, it’s all about investing in the right equipment, such as lights, stands, stabilizers, backdrops, etc., and setting up your studio in a way that best suits your needs and style. With the right preparation and attention to detail, a home portrait studio can be a valuable asset to your photography business and a great way to showcase your skills and creativity.

So, start planning your studio setup today and get ready to capture stunning portraits that your clients will love!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

6 Video Lighting Techniques (That are Useful for Photography, Too)

We Recommend

How to Shoot Nude Photography

Written by PT Editor on 03 June 2020.

How to Shoot Nude Photography

^{photo by belovodchenko via iStock}

Nude photography is a fantastic way to exercise our creativity as nude photographers, to hone our skills, and to try out new things. In order to shoot nude photography, it helps to look at it as an artistic expression coupled with an opportunity to learn.

The education opportunity also comes from reading and viewing others experienced in how to shoot nude photography. So many articles, videos, and books cover how to shoot nude photography and all the variables involved. Here are my top 3 tips on best to shoot nude photography.

Exercise Your Creativity

When you shoot nude photography, it’s beneficial to approach it differently than simply as pictures of people with no clothing. Many of the same skills apply as in portrait photography, or even still life photography, but we have an opportunity to really get adventurous.

One way to explore your creative side is to shoot nude photography in back and white or monochrome. What this can do is to narrow down the subject to the interplay of light vs dark, shadow vs brightness, high key vs low key.

By constraining ourselves to only looking at the lighting aspect of the nude photography image, we actually widen out our scope of what’s available for us to control. B&W imagery isn’t limited to low key, high contrast imagery, play with high key, low contrast, and subtle patterns, too.

This same approach can be realized with focus and depth of field, composition, and posing, too. Take any aspect of your photographic skills and knowledge and concentrate on that one thing as you shoot nude photography.

The resulting images may never be seen by anyone but you and the subject, but you’ll be glad you took them, exercising your creative muscle as a photographic artist.

Hone Your Skills

learn nude photography 1

^{photo by Leedsichthys via iStock}

As you open your photographic thoughts up to different ways to create an image, use some sessions to get better at the photographic process. As you shoot nude photography, perhaps concentrating on one aspect of the art, you can deepen your appreciation of the craft skills you’re using.

Perhaps take this step one aspect at a time, too. If you want to get better at lighting for portraits or even for product photography, this is a good time to see how well you understand light placement and contrast ratios.

Other skills you can hone, with a willing subject, are composition and posing and depth of field effects such as selective focus or deep depth of field.

An additional skill to hone as you nude shoots photography is post processing. If you’re shooting RAW for your image files, you have to use some sort of post processing program to get shareable images, so take some time to check out what your program does.

Adjust all the sliders, use masks and layers, adjust luminosity and contrast, change color depth, and so on. The more you are familiar with the controls, the better you’ll get at operating the program, just like with your camera.

Try Out New Things

learn nude photography 2

^{photo by Sergeeva via iStock}

As you shoot nude photography, be sure to try out something new as often as possible. If you are new to this particular aspect of the art of photography, it can really help you grow all across the field as a fine art nude photographer.

If you’ve never tried monochromatic high key or low key imaging, this might be a good time to try it. If you have wondered how you might make abstract images, try it out as you shoot nude photography.

Everything you learn in one form of photography transfers over to the other styles and genres of our art and craft. Shoot nude photography for the fun of it and with an eye on improving your photography in general. You’ll enjoy the process.

We Recommend

How to Take Group Photos

Written by PT Editor on 02 November 2021.

How to Take Group Photos

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

One of the side benefits of a photographer knowing a lot of people in various industries and having a wide range of clients is that you are often thought of first when these people you’ve done work for in anything also need group photos.

It’s not just companies that need good group photos. Some types of events seem to automatically lend themselves to being a group portrait situation. Weddings, reunions, awards, BBQs, local clubs, fairs, and so on, all could use your knowledge of how to take good group photos, even if you’re there as part of the group.

So, regardless of if portraits, headshots, and other people images aren’t your primary business, knowing how to take group photos is a valuable skill to have. If it makes you a little nervous to think of directing multiple people, try out some of these group portrait photography tips and group photography settings.

Talk First, Then Shoot

group photography tips

^{photo byNeustockimages via iStock}

Any time we’re imaging people, the gift of gab is a skill we can use to our advantage. You may not naturally be all that talkative, maybe your primary subject matter is landscapes, product photography, or commercial real estate.

Still, we all have some basic people skills already if we’re marketing ourselves or our images successfully. Channel those skills into a natural, unhurried, but confident mode of speaking. If you or whoever is requesting the group photos has some ideas for posing or how formal or informal, this is the time to say it all upfront.

We don’t need or want to take a long time doing this, but it helps with all the other steps of how to take group photos to end up with great pics. A rule of thumb, the larger the group, the less time should be taken, but no one wants to wait around too long before the picture taking starts.

Avoid the Line Up

how to take good group photos

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Lining people up and having the more important people of a company in the center and up front if there are multiple rows is a standard way to take formal group photos for some businesses or institutions. When that’s what ‘s requested, that’s what we deliver.

There are other ways to take more informal group photos, though, and lining people up isn’t always the most pleasing photograph of the day. Whether the group is small or large, we can use some other posing and composition ideas that make for interesting group portraits.

So while lining up is one method of how to take group photos, let’s have some fun trying out different arrangements.

Stagger Heights and Positions

how to take group photos with everyone in focus

^{photo bydigitalskillet via iStock}

Unless you’re photographing the starting line up of a professional sports team, there will likely be a lot of variation of height and body size in our group portrait. A great method of how to take group photos is to use that difference in our posing and positioning.

If it seems like you would normally have the taller people in the center of a small group or in the back row of a larger group, adjusting the group so that taller and shorter people, thinner and thicker people, and all the different complexions, are all intermixed will probably give you a group dynamic that actually looks and feels more natural.

You can also have some in the group sit on something, such as a stone wall or a chair, some sitting or reclined on the ground, some standing, some standing on something… the sky's the limit for how many variations you can use in a group portrait.

Vary Arrangements

^{photo by}^{Morsa Imagesvia iStock}

Going along with that tip of how to take group photos by staggering heights is to change the arrangement of the group, which may result in the dynamics of the photo being changed.

A couple of examples: After taking the pose of the wedding party with the bride and groom in the middle or up front, move them over to one side of the group, or in back of the rest of the participants.

Same with employee and employer groups. You will have many shots with the principles of the company front and center. After that pose is done, change it up just like the wedding party example with the boss de-emphasized or mixed in.

Learn More:

Use Composition Tools

group portrait photography tips

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

These tips of how to take group photos will start to make sense as we see the group dynamic change up, loosen up. People are having some fun, being relaxed. For a lot of portraits, a relaxed subject results in awesome pictures. Same with our groups.

An interesting thing happens with groups of people that are relaxed with the process of taking photos and comfortable with each other, they start to arrange naturally into certain somewhat predictable patterns.

group photography settings

^{photo bycourtneyk via iStock}

This is a very good thing, as Martha Stewart always says. (Yes, I watch shows and read magazines about hosting, decorating, crafting… It gives me ideas I can adapt to creative photography!)

Among the good things about relaxed groups is that they tend to form pleasing compositions almost naturally, we just have to tweak it a little by our directing. One pattern I see a lot in photos of small to medium size groups is a variation of the Golden Spiral. Also S Curve, Rule of Thirds, and Leading Lines.

Leave Room On the Edges

how to take group photos 2

^{photo byjacoblund via iStock}

Another thing that many group photos have in common is that people want copies and physical prints or enlargements for themselves.

Since the most common enlargement and frame sizes are a different aspect ratio than our camera sensor, some cropping will be needed to get the right size physical print. To avoid cutting out anyone or crowding the edges, just leave yourself some room in composing and capturing the image in the first place.

Be Careful with How Wide

how to take group photos 3

^{photo byFigure8Photos via iStock}

Leaving room at the edges as a tip of how to group portraits also helps with another common problem of group portraits, edge distortion.

Thinking about how to group photos with everyone in focus and everyone in the frame, our mind gravitates toward wider lenses. This is fine, but as we compose with wider lenses, the apparent perspective and the edge distortion of ultra-wide-angle lenses can play havoc with our final images.

Even with a very well-corrected ultra-wide zoom lens like many of us own, a person right at the edge of the frame is going to appear slightly stretched. It’s an attribute of these types of lenses that may not be noticeable at all with other subject matter, but the person at the frame edge in the image will notice.

So, leaving some space in the image area at the edges and corners is a good idea for this reason as well as for the cropping issue.

Broad Lighting

how to take group photos 4

^{photo byJovanmandic via iStock}

We can use broad lighting in two ways for this tip of how to take group photos. One, a broad lighting configuration has the side of the subject closest to the camera receiving more direct lighting. In group portraits, this is often the simplest set up. We’re not going to get Rembrandt lighting in a group of 5 to 125 people.

Secondly, it can refer to having a broad set up of lights for more evenness of illumination. Indoors, this may mean setting up 2 to 5 soft boxes, spread out to cover everyone as evenly as possible.

Outdoors, we may want to plan our shooting position to take advantage of sky light as our light source. Not only is sky light a softer light than direct sunlight, it may also result in more even illumination. Be sure to compensate either in-camera settings or post-processing for the cooler color temperature of sky light.

Exposure Settings

how to take group photos 5

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

That last bit segues into the next tip of how to take group photos, what camera settings are most appropriate or useful. Shooting for RAW files, we can adjust the color temps in post, but for JPEGs we may need to manually adjust the camera white balance or trust the camera’s auto color balance tool.

Shutter speeds should be fast enough to avoid blur due to either subject motion or photographer movement. But we also want an aperture that gives us the depth of field effect we want, either deeper such as for larger groups, or shallower for selective focus.

how to take group photos 6

^{photo byCasarsaGuru via iStock}

Since enlargements are often requested even from spur of the moment group shots with friends, choosing a lower ISO is a good practice, as long as the ISO fits in your other criteria such as shutter speed and lens aperture.

Generally speaking, it’s probably a good idea to manually focus to maintain the depth of field you desire, though smaller group candid photos may benefit from continuous AF. Either way, just be sure to monitor focus closely.

Also, this is a good step to use to make sure everyone’s face can be clearly seen, unless the purpose of the intended image requires something else. Being partially hidden behind Aunt Mary or Bob from accounting won’t make Clyde or Samantha very happy when they see the final pics.

Use a Tripod and Wireless Remote

how to take group photos 7

^{photo byCecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

Taking camera movement out of the equation sometimes frees up everyone, photographer and subjects, to allow them to concentrate on the posing, composition, and group dynamics. This is where the tips of how to take group photos that we put under settings about focus and depth of field can really start to create results.

For larger groups and more formal group portraits, it helps the photographer keep track of and correct any posing or position adjustments. For smaller groups or less formal settings, it allows for a more natural response from everyone toward the camera since you’re not behind the camera.

Taking the pics while talking away from the camera can also shift their gaze from directly at the lens over to you which results in their posing being different and oftentimes more relaxed.

Camera Height

how to take group photos 8

^{photo bynanausop via iStock}

While we would normally list at or near eye level as the camera height for how to take group photos, for naturalness of perspective and for good lighting and posing, changing camera position up or down can also be used.

Having people look up at the camera results in a different feel of the image and the group, as does having them look down at the camera. With environmental group portraiture, it may allow more of the environment itself to help define the group.

Direct Calmly

how to take group photos 9

^{photo bydigitalskillet via iStock}

As we’re taking these images, setting up the camera, changing settings, considering posing and position options, we will get constantly better results if we don't use our “work voice” when directing the subjects.

We may need to speak louder to compensate for environmental noise or group size and their distance from us, but a calm, relaxed manner on our part is infectious. Conversely, a rigid, strict, demanding manner is also infectious, making most people uncomfortable.

With very large groups, it is a very good idea to have an assistant or two to help make any one-on-one comments to individuals in the group. This avoids both embarrassment or any possible confusion of who’s being spoken to and directed.

Let Them Pose, Too

portrait photography tips

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Sometimes, the group is so comfortable with you as a photographer that they really let their personalities come out. When this happens, it can be a great opportunity for more images that really show off the group dynamics.

Interestingly, I’ve seen on numerous occasions that when a group of people is completely at ease with each other and with you, they naturally self-arrange into certain compositions. The Golden Spiral is one of the most fascinating to see and I think it happens more often than other group self compositions.

how to take group photos 10

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Some of my friend’s, client’s, and mine and my family’s favorite group portraits occur during this type of situation.

Your skill and confidence will be rewarded as you learn more about how to group photos, and you and the group will be very happy with the results.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Take Photos in Harsh Sunlight

Written by PT Editor on 17 August 2021.

How to Take Photos in Harsh Sunlight

^{photo bygradyreese via iStock}

Taking photos in harsh sunlight creates challenging situations with regards to exposure choices, camera settings for bright sunlight, and other aspects of photography.

When you walk around and you’re squinting, you can be pretty sure that qualifies as harsh sunlight. Here’s how to deal with it.

What is Harsh Sunlight?

photos in harsh sunlight 1

^{photo bymiya227 via iStock}

What exactly is harsh sunlight? In addition to the squinting clue, I would define harsh sunlight as direct, unfiltered, unmodified direct illumination from our home star, the sun.

Some examples could include shooting at or near noon, shooting on a cloudless day, taking pictures in the city with bright concrete, the beach with bright sand, or a snow covered scene on a clear day.

We might also run into bright sunlight indoors or in an otherwise shaded area with unfiltered sunlight streaming into the scene. This may cause additional things to consider such as staying within a usable dynamic range.

Just as there are multiple scenarios for taking photos in harsh sunlight, there are multiple methods and techniques we use to capture good images.

Find Some Shade

photos in harsh sunlight 2

^{photo bygrafxart8888 via iStock}

For many situations, finding shade is the simplest solution. For other situations it doesn’t work at all, but we’ll get to those in our next points.

If we’re photographing people in the direct sunlight, a major problem, how to take photos at noon, is to avoid the direct sunlight altogether.

There are many items outside that offer shade, sometimes a sliver of shade is all we need. A tree, a house overhang, a gazebo, a tall building, a covered porch, awnings, or an umbrella can provide the shade we need to avoid our subject squinting in the bright light.

If that isn’t an option open to us, turn the subject to face a direction that doesn’t have the sun right in their eyes. Even at noon, there is often a little bit of directionality to the sunlight. We can add a foldable reflector to provide some good catchlight, opening up the shadows and putting sparkle in their eyes. Be careful not to focus any really bright reflection right into their eyes!

Learn More:

Lens Flare

photos in harsh sunlight 3

^{photo byaheflin via iStock}

Sometimes the issue isn’t the subject position or eye squinting. We might be photographing something else, a landscape, architecture, or flowers.

The problem might occur that the direct sunlight isn’t affecting the subject but rather the lens. When sunlight, or any bright point light source, strikes the surface of our lens elements, it can cause reflections and refractions that are described as lens flare.

Lens flare manifests itself as a light streak, a halo, or maybe a ghost image of either the light beam itself or some of the internal components of the lens, the lens aperture blades are a common culprit. You may not actually see any lens flare as a specific image element, but it can also cause a loss of contrast or a color cast to the image. This is especially problematic with zoom lenses.

There are a couple of simple solutions for this problem. One, embrace the lens flare, make it a part of your image. To be honest, most of the time this comes out looking goofy, but sometimes we can frame another part of the scene with the flare. It’s worth at least playing around with.

how to take photos at noon 4

^{photo byDariaZu via iStock}

Two, change the camera position. It may only require a slight turn of our camera direction to avoid the lens flare. So instead of wondering how to take photos in direct sun, we eliminate the directness of the sunlight.

Finally, and what I think is most effective, use a lens hood. Most of the lenses I’ve purchased or reviewed over the years have their own dedicated lens hood. It may be built-in or it might be a removable lens hood.

The hard lens hoods for many zoom lenses are reversed for storage, so make sure to mount them in working position when actually taking photos in harsh sunlight. A lens hood is also great physical protection from accidental damage.

A word of caution for buying lens hoods not specifically designed for your lens is to watch out for the hood intruding into the image area. Using a lens hood made for a short telephoto lens on a wide angle lens will result in noticeable vignetting.

Bright Scenes with Lots of Sun

how to take photos at noon 5

^{photo byMorsa Images via iStock}

Knowing how to take good pictures in bright sun may also involve lens filters, extra processing, or both. This will require some spending, both of money and time, but filters are usually pretty affordable for most photography budgets and current post processing programs are easy to learn.

Plus, you can find YouTube tutorials on most of these ideas. The makers of the software programs tend to have great online training available, some for free and others at minimal cost.

ND Filters, GND Filters, Polarizers

how to take photos at noon 6

^{photo byАлексей Филатов via iStock}

Lens filters allow you to be more versatile as a photographer. The top three most useful lens filters for most photographers are neutral density (ND), graduated neutral density, (GND), and circular polarizers (C-POL).

Neutral density and GND filters add density to or subtract brightness from a scene by means of a colorless tint in various strengths. An ND filter is one strength all the way through, a GND filter is clear in part of it with a transition area that either be hard or very quick, or soft, very gradual.

The way to use an ND filter is to have it bring down the entire brightness level of the scene, as far as light passing through the lens to hit the sensor. So if a scene is very bright overall, we can add an ND filter to tone it down or to be able to use exposure triangle values that we prefer.

how to take photos in direct sun 7

^{photo byIgnacio Ruiz Casanellas via iStock}

GND filters are used to take photos in harsh sunlight when a portion of the scene is not in full sunlight. The reason we might need to be concerned with this scenario is that the part of the scene in deep shadow and the part in direct sunlight are so far apart in exposure value that they are outside of the range that the sensor can capture.

That is what is known as a dynamic range issue. A GND filter is used to bring down the exposure value of the brighter part of the image by blocking out some of the light so that the entire range of brightness levels can be captured properly by our sensor.

A polarizer filter is beneficial for taking photos in harsh sunlight in that it adds about 2 stops of neutral density as well as being able to help control reflections in glass or water plus adjusting contrast levels and removing the effects of light scattering haze.

Post-Processing

how to take photos in direct sun 8

^{photo bydusanpetkovic via iStock}

There are two general ways to use post processing to allow us to take good photos in harsh light. One method uses the slider controls to adjust highlights, midtones, and shadows, the other is a more involved method known as bracket and merge or HDR (high dynamic range) photography.

HDR photography uses multiple image files of the same scene, taken at different exposure values, and blends them together for a balanced view of everything in the scene. The effect can be subtle, as you may see in real estate listings, or you can choose to make it very artsy and interesting.

For HDR photography, you will need a tripod or some sort of tripod alternative, manual control of the exposure settings, and RAW image files for best results. Also, you will either need a program specifically designed to make HDR images or one that has those functions of blending exposures. The special use HDR programs are more versatile and are friendly to most budgets.

camera settings for bright sunlight

^{photo byGeber86 via iStock}

The slider control method uses only one image file, but you’ll be able to control and adjust a lot more of it when you record our images as RAW files. RAW files hold more exposure information than compressed JPEGs do.

Choosing a well exposed image file, we can then adjust the different light values, highlights, midrange, and shadows, up or down by means of their separate controls. In most of the programs I’ve seen, these are adjusted with easy to access slider controls, using either keyboard shortcuts, a mouse, or a tablet input device.

For either of these post processing techniques, it’s a lot simpler to actually do the method than to read about it, though we have several excellent articles discussing the ins and outs of various post processing methods and techniques.

Harsh Sunlight Can Be Tamed

how to take good pictures in bright sun

^{photo byTom Merton via iStock}

Photography is literally defined as “writing with light.” Sunlight is a major tool for all sorts of photography, though at times it may seem hard to control. Take control by using these methods and techniques for making great photos in harsh sunlight.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Take Photos in the Rain

Written by PT Editor on 01 February 2021.

How to Take Photos in the Rain

^{photo byNickyLloyd via iStock}

Learning how to take photos in the rain was one of the most difficult things I’ve ever had to do, but once I really figured it out, I absolutely loved it.

One major problem I had when learning how to take photos in the rain was that I didn’t have gear for rain photography. As an outdoor enthusiast, I should have known that gear can make or break your experience.

But, I also just didn’t have anybody to help me. I didn’t have any photographer friends when I first got started, so I didn’t have anyone recommending tips for taking photos in the rain. I basically did it all on my own.

But, one positive thing about this learning curve was that I now know how to take photos in the rain like an absolute champ.

If you’re just learning how to take photos in the rain, then these rain photography tips could drastically improve your experience.

Bring Your Rain Photography Gear

rain photography 1

^{photo byAlenaPaulus via iStock}

I already mentioned that the biggest mistake I made when learning how to take photos in the rain was ignoring all of the gear recommendations.

This was a pretty stupid move on my part, too, since most of the rain gear you need is super cheap.

For instance, just by bringing towels, I have been able to save so much of my gear over the years by simply having something to wipe the rain off of my camera and lenses.

rain photography 2

^{photo bySandra Dombrovsky via iStock}

You’ll also need to bring a tripod, which I typically carry with me regardless of the weather, and a way to protect your camera from the rain.

This part is, obviously, the most important part of learning how to take photos in the rain.

You can go the traditional route and get one of those plastic ponchos that goes over both you and your camera. The problem with this route, though, is that it is really messy. It’s frustrating to use one of these rain ponchos because, inevitably, you will get either yourself or your camera wet.

gear for rain photography 3

Instead, you can opt to purchase a Camera Canopy. Camera Canopy acts as a rain shield for your camera. It mounts directly onto your camera’s hot-shoe and it protects your camera and lens from rain, sleet, snow, and hail.

There are two different sizes. The traditional Camera Canopy is designed for a DSLR and sells for $88, and the Mini Camera Canopy, shown below, is designed for your mirrorless equipment and sells for $60.

gear for rain photography 4

If you have a super zoom lens, you can even add an extendable shield to either one of those units.

I love supporting Camera Canopy because it is such a small company and because their product is truly wonderful. The shield works with absolutely any camera that has a hot shoe connection, which means you can purchase one and use it across all of your different cameras.

Each Camera Canopy is made and assembled in the United States.

The Camera Canopy is also so easy to use because you don’t have to assemble anything.

Since the Camera Canopy weighs only 2 pounds, it is also easy to throw in a backpack for your adventurous photoshoots.

Learn More:

Stay Positive

rain photography tips 6

^{photo byNickyLloyd via iStock}

While this isn’t necessarily a trait you can teach, the most important part about learning how to take photos in the rain is learning how to remain positive under any circumstances.

One way I’ve helped myself to stay positive in inclement weather is to make sure that both myself and my equipment is dry. I see a lot of photographers worrying so much about keeping their gear dry, but then neglecting the fact that they also have to keep themselves warm and dry in order to have a good shoot.

Bring a rain jacket, umbrella, and a warm coat. Keep them in your car, if you have to. Don’t get caught without one.

Finally, you’ll also need to head into each shoot with an open mind. If you wanted to get a 4-hour shoot in, but the weather is truly awful, perhaps you should take the hour you have to complete as much as possible.

This is an especially important tip if you’re working with other people. Your models will pick up on your energy and will notice if you are stressing out, and so will other photographers on photoshoots with you.

Have a Backup Location

rain photography tips 7

^{photo bydusanpetkovic via iStock}

Sometimes learning how to take photos in the rain is really more about learning how to plan your photoshoots more appropriately.

For example, if you’re shooting a wedding, you likely won’t be able to convince your happy bride and groom to ruin their outfits that they’ve spent thousands of dollars on in order to shoot with the exact background you were hoping to. And that’s okay, so long as you have a backup location in mind.

Your backup location could be an indoor venue, or it could be an area under an awning or even tree cover.

Of course, if you are shooting an event, then you will need to work with other people in order to figure out what your backup location could look like. Even if there is 0% chance of rain on the day of your shoot, you should have a backup location.

I have a backup location for every photoshoot I do and it has saved me countless times. Sometimes parks are closed. Having a backup location not only keeps the photoshoot from being ruined due to the weather, but a plethora of other reasons.

Open Up Your Aperture

tips for taking photos in the rain 8

^{photo bypiskunov via iStock}

The best tip I was ever given about how to take photos in the rain is to open up the aperture a little bit.

While you will want to keep the aperture relatively large to help maximize depth of field, you don’t need to slam it down to f/22, either.

When it’s raining, try shooting at f/4, f/5.6 or even f/8. The extra light the lens can collect will help brighten your images and will help you avoid dark, depressing shots.

Plus, those larger apertures are great for outdoor raining portraits, if that’s your thing.

Give these easy rain photography tips a try and see how they might help you improve your rainy, moody photos!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Take Professional Headshots

Written by PT Editor on 12 February 2021.

How to Take Professional Headshots

^{photo bydragana991 via iStock}

Providing professional headshots for clients is good for your bottom line as a professional photographer. You can offer the service as part of your portfolio of portraiture, you could specialize in it, or you may want to only dabble in professional headshots from time to time.

There are techniques for taking headshots that are very similar to professional portrait photography tips in that we are concerned with our camera settings and lighting configurations as well as posing hints. For this session of headshot photo advice, we’ll concentrate on 4 ideas helpful for how to take professional headshots.

Talk It Out

professional headshots 1

^{photo byRidofranz via iStock}

Who are our clients for professional headshots? Most of the time, we’re probably not going to be shooting models or actors. It’s fair to say that many subjects won’t already know how to take headshots. However, we can always let them know how to take professional headshots with a pre-shoot conversation.

This conversation may happen at the time we book the photoshoot or right before taking the portraits. Let them know what the intent is for the final images, perhaps by showing them your promotional images of previous headshots.

It’s also important to talk during the actual session. Small adjustments to the subject’s posing or facial expression are appropriate to say. You might make light small talk, too, so it’s not all just direction or correction to the subject. This helps keep the subject relaxed which will result in better portraits.

Use Flattering Light

how to take headshots 2

^{photo bybrusinski via iStock}

Unless it’s specifically requested otherwise, professional headshots should be clearly lit with flattering light. The contrasty lighting styles such as Rembrandt lighting may not be the best choice for professional headshots.

Simple broad lighting is a good look for professional headshots. A key light and fill with perhaps a 2:1 or 3:1 lighting ratio, reflectors can also be used. The background can be either lit or unlit, depending on if you want it bright or dark.

Position the main light 45 degrees to the side of the camera, elevated from 0 to 30 degrees or so, but definitely avoid having the light below subject eye level. Have the subject turn their body toward the main light and turn their face toward the camera. Use your fill or reflector to add light back to the face.

This configuration gives a flattering modeling effect for the face without obscuring any features. It also makes for an attractive eye catchlight.

Learn More:

Put Them On a Pedestal

how to take professional headshots 3

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

We adore our clients, true, but this headshot photo advice is about posing. A tall stool is one of the best items for a portrait studio, especially so for professional headshots. Anything from a purpose made adjustable posing stool to an old barstool will work.

Using a stool is usually better than a chair because it allows freedom of movement to fine tune posing the subject. A stool positions the subject in such a way where their hands fall naturally in front of them, resting on a leg, so it also helps alleviate nervousness about what to do with their hands.

Lens Choice Matters

professional portrait photography tips 4

^{photo byPoike via iStock}

A short telephoto lens is often used for the head and shoulders portrait as well as three-quarter body shots. Since professional headshots are primarily framed as head and shoulders, the short telephoto focal lengths remain the standard choice.

While you would have that focal length in a kit lens, a single focal length prime or faster zoom will have the wider open maximum apertures that give shallow depth of field which portrait artists prefer. Selective focus is one of the standard techniques for taking headshots.

A short telephoto lens is preferred for portraits because of the flattering slight foreshortening apparent perspective effect. Other fast lenses such as our Nifty Fifty (or the equivalent normal lens of whatever format we’re using) with a very fast maximum aperture aren’t a first choice for many portrait artists because of the slight distortion of facial features which occur when close enough to fill the frame with head and shoulders.

Bonus: Review and Feedback

headshot photo advice 5

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

We said 4 professional portrait photography tips, but let’s add in one more bonus tip for our professional headshots session, reviewing captured images with the subject.

It doesn’t take long at all to scroll through a few images and get or give feedback with the client. Many of the current DSLRs and mirrorless cameras, especially the prosumer models, have wireless tethering capability. A wirelessly connected tablet becomes the perfect feedback tool.

What kind of feedback are we talking about? We could build on our pre-session conversation about posing to give helpful hints. Keep it upbeat and positive, highlight the poses that are working really well and suggest copying more of those for the rest of the scheduled session.

As a client, the subject could also have some input they can offer. In fact, we can ask for their feedback. The images they like the best tell us what type of posing, position, and expression direction and coaching we might focus on for the remainder of the session.

When photographing large groups of professional headshots, such as for a company wanting their employees to have portraits all at once, you will probably eliminate this step for time saving and simplifying the workflow. The feedback step is completely optional whatever the setting, but it can result in truly superb professional headshots when employed well.

What’s Your Business Model?

techniques for taking headshots 6

^{photo byMorsa Images via iStock}

Your professional portrait offerings are part of your business model, so you want to get the best results out of your efforts. Use the professional portrait photography tips that enhance your bottom line. Professional headshots can be a useful and profitable part of your photography business.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use a Continuous Light for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 04 February 2020.

How to Use a Continuous Light for Portraits

^{photo by Nkarol via iStock}

Portraits are easy to do, but they are also easy to mess up. For many people, they may not even know the difference since the process of taking a basic snapshot has become second nature to anyone with a smartphone.

The messing up part isn’t really ruining the picture, it’s more along the line of not making full use of the potential of your existing equipment. Sometimes all that is needed is adding simple continuous lighting.

Portrait Lighting Tips with Continuous Lighting

litra pro

One of the biggest improvements you can make to your portraits is to light them properly. For beginners and more advanced photographers, I like to recommend continuous lights, especially the newer LED lights.

(Here is one of the excellent small LED continuous lightingexamples I’ve had fun with, the Litra Torch LitraPro.)

So, why am I recommending continuous lighting instead of the built-in flash that is in so many cameras?

Pros and Cons of Continuous Lighting

continuous lighting examples 1

^{photo by avlntn via iStock}

Let’s get to the biggest con for using continuous lighting first. It’s another piece of equipment. Adding more gear to your kit doesn’t guarantee better results. You need to know why you are getting something, what you are expecting to do with it.

Extra equipment adds bulk, adds price, and requires taking care of settings and placement of the new stuff. In other words, it also adds complexity. But the tiny built-in flashes just can’t do all we want to accomplish with regards to portraits.

Which brings us to one of the biggest pros of continuous lighting versus other types of artificial light. In addition to costing less, many choices of continuous lighting are pretty easy to set up and use compared to strobes. Especially a compact LED light like the LitraPro.

Pros and Cons of Continuous Lighting

If you are a smartphone photographer or if you just got your new DSLR or mirrorless camera, take a look at LitraPro.

Another con is you need to power the lights. Regular incandescent photo floods use a lot of power, meaning you want battery powered versions of those. Plugging in to AC power limits where you can use them.

The next pro is specific to LED bulb continuous lighting. LEDs are super efficient, so you can find many battery powered options. LEDs operate at a much lower temperature than incandescent bulbs, part of their efficiency.

Besides temperature relating to heat, color temperature is generally consistent with LED bulbs. The LitraPro, for instance, has a CRI of 95+, meaning that the color rendition of the lighting is superb and stays that way from portrait to portrait.

Recommended Portrait Lighting Books:

How To Use Continuous Lighting

continuous lighting examples 2

^{photo by aabsys via iStock}

There are as many ways to use continuous lighting as there are styles of portraiture.

A small light can be attached directly to the camera or on a bracket holding the camera, action cam, or smartphone. Since the compact LED light we are leaning towards is battery powered, this frees us up to take it anywhere and point it in the direction your camera is aiming.

However, the whole reason we are adding continuous lighting to our photo kit is to improve our portraiture, so let’s get it off the camera. Now, we can employ some of those portrait lighting techniques we learned.

portrait lighting tips 3

^{photo by NADOFOTOS via iStock}

When you picked up your compact LED continuous light, you probably also grabbed a mount or stand of some sort. Put your light on the stand and move it over.

An excellent lighting configuration is to move the light about 45 degrees to one side and raised up a little. What this does is create a modelling effect of light and shadow.

This is a very flattering light for most portrait subjects. Just enough of an angle to add interesting shadowing and highlights, but not so much that textures are emphasized. Pose your subject to make eye contact with the camera, turning their face to you but with their body turned toward the light.

See how easy that is? Whether you are using a smartphone, a simple camera, or an advanced system camera, just one continuous LED light on a stand can add dimension and depth to your portraits.

Learn More:

Go Beyond the Basics

portrait lighting tips 4

^{photo by CasPhotography via iStock}

Now, let’s go beyond the basics. We still are using only one light on a stand, but now we’re going to add some drama to our portrait.

With your subject still posed as described above, move the light over to the 90-degree position. This is split lighting for portraits. Split lighting right away makes a portrait dramatic. Half of the face is well lit, the other half falls away into deep shadow.

Texture is greatly emphasized with split lighting, so it really makes a subject’s features stand out. If you also expose for low key, you have an interesting portrait to add to the results of your effort.

Still with the same small LED light, move it around the back side of your portrait subject for rim lighting. If you expose for the highlights, the shadows will be deep and moody. If you expose for the shadowed area of the face, the same rim lighting can create a high key effect.

Compact Continuous Lighting Adds Freedom of Choice

pros and cons of continuous lighting 5

^{photo by tatyana_tomsickova via iStock}

As we mentioned at the start, we rarely recommend extra photographic equipment without having a very good reason for doing so.

Having at your disposal a compact, battery powered, LED continuous light opens up a whole lot of possibilities for your portrait photography. Doesn’t matter what type of camera you have or what level of photographer you are, this is one simple accessory that can give you freedom of choice for creating outstanding images.

The reason I recommend LED continuous lighting comes down to a few factors. It doesn’t usually cost very much, it can be used with the camera in any exposure mode with great results, it gives you a simple way to start using portrait lighting techniques.

These are the same lighting configurations used by professional photographers and other advanced photographers. Make use of them for your own portraits and your subjects will love the results. So will you.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use a Reflector for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 24 November 2020.

How to Use a Reflector for Portraits

^{photo bypowerofforever via iStock}

Kristine Fernandez is a wildly popular YouTube photographer who has created a series of different self-help videos for photographers who are just getting started with their photography journey. Many of these videos include portrait photography tips, including info about the best photography lighting.

This video is all about how to use a reflector.

If you’re looking for more info about using a reflector for portraits, you can watch the whole video above, but if you’re just looking for the quick and dirty about how to use a reflector, then keep reading.

Why You Should Use a Reflector

why you should use a reflector

^{YouTube Screenshot / Kristine Fernandez}

Before we walk you through how to use a reflector, we should probably walk you through why you would want to use one in the first place.

Reflectors allow you to create better lighting conditions without actually using artificial light.

So, if you’re shooting outside on a cloudy day, then you may want to use a reflector to bounce light onto your subject’s face if it’s a little dark or you can use a reflector to better highlight part of your subject.

What’s more, reflectors can be used as an alternative to a fill light to bounce light onto the subject’s face to fill in any shadows. In the screenshot above, you can see how a silver reflector was used to brighten the model’s face in the example on the right.

Learn More:

How to Place a Reflector

how to use a reflector

^{photo byAlina Demidenko via iStock}

So, now that you understand why you would use a reflector, let’s walk you through how to use a reflector.

Reflectors come in a variety of different colors. I’ll touch more on this later. But, each of these reflectors will be placed in much the same way.

You want your reflector to be facing the direction of the sunlight, so that it can easily catch the sunlight and bounce it back onto your subject. You’ll want to place your reflector at least a couple of feet away from your subject. I find that when I place my reflector around 3-6 feet away from my subjects, this tends to work best because the reflected light is softer and more evenly distributed.

The most important part about learning how to use a reflector is learning how to place it. Make sure you hold it at an angle and don’t be afraid to play around with different positions because they will ultimately affect the quality of the finished product.

Different Colored Reflectors

different colored reflectors

^{Youtube Screenshot / Kristine Fernandez}

Now that you understand how to use a reflector, you’ll need to understand how to choose the type of reflector you need for your portrait.

Reflectors come in a wide array of colors, but the three most popular colors are silver, gold (shown above, right), and white.

The silver reflector is best for photographers who are learning how to use a reflector for the first time because it reflects the most amount of light, so there’s basically no way to use a silver reflector and not see a difference in your finished photo.

silver reflector

^{Youtube Screenshot / Kristine Fernandez}

Silver reflectors also don’t change the color of flash or studio lights, so you can use it both in the field or in your studio.

Silver reflectors can also be placed much farther away from your subject, because it reflects the most light.

Gold reflectors, on the other hand, are usually only used for outdoor portraits because they help to mimic the warm, bright colors of natural sunlight.

White reflectors, like silver reflectors, don’t really change the color of the lighting that is present during your shoot. But, unlike silver reflectors, white reflectors don’t add any shine to your subject. For this reason, white reflectors are much more difficult to use while you’re learning how to use a reflector because they create a much more subtle, natural look.

silver and gold reflector

^{Youtube Screenshot / Kristine Fernandez}

Of course, there are other colored reflectors, like blue, green or even white-and-gold zigzag (shown above). After you have a basic grasp on how to use a reflector, you can start experimenting with these other colors.

We hope that this article walking you through how to use a reflector was helpful. Make sure to like and subscribe to Kristine Fernandez’s channel if you liked this tutorial!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use an On-Camera Video Light for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 02 December 2019.

on camera video lights 1

^{photo bylaflor via iStock}

It used to be that using speedlights, strobes, softboxes, and other expensive lighting equipment was the only way to go when doing portrait photography.

Not any more.

There are numerous options now to achieve professional-looking portraits without breaking the bank with expensive gear.

One of these ways is to use on-camera video lights. Yes, video lights to do portrait photography! They are light, portable, and less expensive than the traditional studio lighting options. These types of lights are sometimes referred to as continuous lighting.

On-camera video lights can be an excellent lighting solution for portraits. More and more photographers are successfully using them for their portrait sessions. They can offer interesting lighting options and can also give you better creative control.

What are On-camera Video Lights

on camera video lights 2

^{photo bythanasus via iStock}

Continuous lighting has its advantages, and one of the most important ones is that you get to see and direct your light as you want it — no fussing with testing flash lighting and time-consuming adjustments.

Videographers use on-camera video lights to light up their scenes when filming. These video lights are gaining popularity with photographers as well. Beginners and professionals alike can learn to use continuous lighting for portraits. They are simple to use, are easy to transport, and provide quality lighting for a variety of situations.

They attach to your camera but can also be fixed on a tripod for even more varied lighting effects.

litrapro on camera video light

One of the on-camera video lights that we especially like is the Litra Torch LitraPro. It’s a pioneer in the full spectrum bi-color compact light category. It’s light, compact, and can be controlled with an app on your smartphone. It can accommodate items like a softbox for even greater versatility.

How to Use On-camera Lights for Portraits

video lights for portraits 1

^{photo byPAPStock via iStock}

You can use the on-camera lights as the main light, the fill light, backlight, or a combination. You can set up a combination of lights to create your desired effect. Remember that LED video lights don’t have the same range as larger, traditional portrait lighting and this will provide more dramatic portraits.

Some video lights can accommodate a diffuser or small softboxes, and this can help smooth the light for your portraits.

Portrait Lighting Tips

The on-camera video light may create harsh background shadows. Make sure to adjust the direction and intensity of the light.
Get those catch lights! One excellent thing about video lights is the catch lights that they create in the eyes. This effect is much better than with larger lighting.
Move away. The closer the light is to your model, the brighter and harsher the light will be.

how to use an on camera light

^{photo bystock_colors via iStock}

Trend Alert: These on-camera video lights have become popular with wedding photographers to get those exciting shots that light up the subjects just right.

On-camera video lights will not always be the perfect option for your portrait photography, but they sure are a great solution when you want simple, inexpensive, and versatile lighting.

We Recommend

How to Use Fill Light for Outdoor Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 02 December 2019.

How to Use Fill Light for Outdoor Portraits

^{photo by Ridofranz via iStock}

Photography is all about light. We all know that. But light can be tricky or non-sufficient sometimes. What do you do if you don’t have the best lighting situation when doing outdoor portraits? Do you suck it up and wait for better conditions?

No, you absolutely don’t have to wait.

There are a few simple ways to add some light and still keep your outdoor portraits looking natural. Fill light for outdoor portraits can be an easy solution when you want to lift harsh shadows, expose your subject and background evenly, and even add lights in the eyes.

What Is Fill Light

how to use fill light

^{photo by MStudioImages via iStock}

Directing the light and having control over how soft or how harsh it hits your subject is essential in portrait photography. Sometimes there simply is not enough available natural light, and sometimes the light is too bright and your model has dark shadows appearing on his or her face.

An excellent way to remedy lighting issues is to use a fill light. A fill light can be the flash on your DSLR, a strobe light, an LED light, or even your smartphone.

What type of fill light you use will depend on your photo project at hand. Knowing your needs will determine which fill light is best for you.

Maybe you need something light and portable because you’re heading outside to do portrait photos?

Fill Light for Outdoor Portraits

Fill light is useful when shooting mid-day when the sun is high. Shooting in these conditions may create shadows like dark circles under the eyes of your model.

That’s when a fill light comes in handy to cast light to soften these shadows. Watch what happens to the facial features when you add fill light.

Some new and exciting lighting options have been introduced in the photography industry in the last few years. One of these lighting solutions is the affordable, pocket-sized, rechargeable LED lights that have hit the market.

hakutatz app

These small and convenient LED lights are perfect to use as a fill light for outdoor portraits. Sometimes you don’t have the possibility of being able to carry heavy gear like flash, softboxes, and tripods on your portrait shoots. These small and light LED lights are perfect for those occasions.

We personally like the Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB+AW LED Light because it’s versatile, has different lighting options, and lets you get creative with your portrait shoot. And it really does fit in our pockets! It has different colored lights that let you achieve the mood you want. All this can be controlled through the app on your smartphone.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open and ready for orders in early December.

Outdoor Portrait Lighting Tips

How to Use Fill Light for Outdoor Portraits

^{photo byRidofranz via iStock}

Here are a few simple outdoor portrait tips to help you get those fantastic shots that look professional.

Golden Hour The end of the day, when the sun is setting, is called the golden hour. This is usually an excellent time to shoot portraits because the light is warm, soft, and the shadows are long. The light may be nice for the background but insufficient for your model. This is when a fill light can come in handy.
Exposure Expose for the background and cast the fill light as you wish on your model. This way, the sky will remain true to color and won’t be overexposed or blown out. Your model will have sufficient light with the fill light, and your shot should be evenly exposed.
Avoid Direct Sunlight Avoid placing your model in direct sunlight, as this will cause squinting and unflattering facial expressions. Look for shade or use a diffuser and fill in the light with a fill light when necessary.
Catch Lights Using a fill light when doing portrait photography can add catch-lights in your model’s eyes.

You don’t have to wait for the perfect exterior lighting conditions to shoot portraits outside. There are many lighting solutions that you can bring along with you to achieve the perfect portraits

that you want. You can get those professional-looking portraits by using affordable LED lights like the Hakutatz Pocket Size LED Light as a fill light for your outdoor portraits.

We Recommend

How to Use Loop Lighting for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 20 January 2020.

How to Use Loop Lighting for Portraits

^{Photo by Kareya Saleh on Unsplash}

One of the most popular lighting techniques for portraits is Loop Lighting. It is also sometimes called Glamour Lighting. It can be accomplished by using one light, a single light and reflectors, or multiple lights.

In this quick tutorial, learn how to use loop lighting to create beautiful portraits.

What is Loop Lighting?

loop lighting 1

^{Photo by Atikh Bana on Unsplash}

Loop lighting is a very simple light configuration that creates a somewhat flat lighting with a little bit of modeling. It is characterized by a loop of light and shadow under the nose.

Why is loop lighting for portraits a desirable lighting pattern? Because it gives photographers a way to have some light and shadow effect without any extremes of modeling that can be unflattering.

Another reason loop lighting is a great light configuration for portraits is because it is incredibly easy to set up.

How To Use Loop Lighting

loop lighting for portraits 2

^{Photo by Imansyah Muhamad Putera on Unsplash}

In its simplest form, loop lighting can be accomplished with one light.

Pose the subject and frame up your shot. Place the light near the camera position and raise it a little bit above eye level, but not so much that casts a noticeable shadow under their nose and chin, though. Then, move the light over to one side or the other, not more than about 45 degrees.

That is your basic one light loop lighting configuration. Have your subject turn their torso and face one way and then the other, noting how the light and shadow helps mold the face without showing a whole lot of texture. Loop lighting for portraits is one of the best ways to control your portrait lighting.

hakutatz 3

Any type of light will work. You can use a studio strobe, an off-camera flash, a video light, or some other type of continuous light. A battery powered LED light such as the Hakutatz LED light shown above is a great choice for this portrait lighting effect.

The Hakutatz LED light is controllable by an app for Android smartphones or iPhones, so you can use loop lighting for iPhoneography portraits as well. Additionally, lights like this offer tons of flexibility in terms of the color of light (i.e., amber, white, and RGB) as well as the brightness, both of which are fully adjustable, even from the smartphone app.

Learn More:

Loop Lighting Tips

how to use loop lighting 3

^{Photo by Jurica Koletić on Unsplash}

A top tip for using loop lighting for portraits is to add another light source to the set up. A reflector can be added to the side across from the light. This will soften the shadow effect by redirecting some light back on to the face of the subject. I like to point this reflector at the subject’s eyes, making them shine brightly out of a slight shadow.

A second flash or continuous light can also be used in place of the reflector. If you choose to add a second light, lower the intensity of the light so there isn’t a 1:1 ratio between it and the main light. This would essentially be two main lights and the results would look very flat, which is a good setup for small product lighting, but not good for most portrait subjects.

hakutatz 4

If the power output of the second light is adjustable, start out ¼, ⅓, or ½ power and see how that looks. A multicolored light like the Hakutatz LED light can add color effects to your portrait when used as the fill light. That may not be to everyone's taste, but give it a try if you have access to a light with that feature or some color gel filters.

Inverse Square Law Gives You Control

loop lighting tips 4

^{photo by masterzphotois via iStock}

If your second, or fill, light doesn’t have variable power, you can change the intensity of the second light by moving it away from the subject. The inverse square law will allow you to figure out how much light fall off there will be for the distance you move the light away from the subject position.

The Inverse Square Law in photographic lighting is calculated quite easily. If you double the distance from light source to subject, you reduce the light to ¼ intensity. That’s a general purpose calculation, other components factor in, but this will work as a rule of thumb. Being aware of this characteristic of light gives you control over lighting ratios.

Adding More Lights

loop lighting 5

^{Photo by Alexander Dummer on Unsplash}

Other lights that can be added to this very basic loop lighting configuration are background lights and hair lights.

Background lights can be varied in several ways. The placement of the background light can be adjusted by pointing the light directly at the subject or at the background. The light can be the same color as the main and fill or any number of other colors. Power level changes also have an effect on the final image, too.

A hair light is often done with a snoot (a sort of light funnel) or a lens. The hair light can come from any direction and be any color or intensity.

Loop Lighting and Other Patterns

Loop lighting is simply one of the basic lighting patterns available to portrait photographers. Above is a simple-to-follow lighting patterns tutorial from Ernesto Sue Photography that helps explain portrait lighting for beginners and advanced photographers.

Using loop lighting for portraits will enhance your portrait photography skills and give you amazing results with just a little extra effort. Give these tips a try and see what a difference they can make in helping you get gorgeous results!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use Natural and Artificial Light for Outdoor Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 30 July 2020.

How to Use Natural and Artificial Light for Outdoor Portraits

^{Photo by Philip Boakye from Pexels}

Natural light is great! For photography and videography, supplementing or enhancing natural light is also a good method to get the results we want. Adding an artificial light for outdoor portraits frees us from the exposure and directional constraints we are under when using natural light alone.

Done properly, adding an artificial light for outdoor portraits will still appear very natural in the finished pictures. Sometimes, it even looks more natural than ambient light on its own. Let me explain…

Natural Light Causes Unnatural Shadows

artificial light for outdoor portraits 1

^{Photo by Luiz Fernando from Pexels}

Human vision is a marvelous process. Light comes into our eyes, controlled by the iris (our natural aperture blades), hits our rods and cones (our natural sensors), and is interpreted by our brain’s vision centers (our natural image processing engine).

When we’re outside with another person, we look at them and all of these processes happen automatically. It’s so automatic that our brain actually helps interpret the scene to compensate for wide ranges in contrast of light and shadow. Auto HDR and matrix metering, you might say.

That’s our brain. Our photographic and video sensors and processing engines don’t have the computer power or intelligence to interpret scenes this way. They’re really good, but we have to help them along.

portrait photography tips 2

^{Photo by Omotayo Tajudeen from Pexels}

A scene that includes brighter areas and shadows requires extra work from the photographer or videographer in order to end up looking as natural on screen or paper as our brain would have interpreted it in real life.

That’s where our nifty gadgets and tools of artificial lighting come in. Learning how to use natural light and artificial light together will free us up from the directionality and exposure constraints mentioned earlier, plus it will give us results for still photography and videography that look natural.

So let’s get started with what you came here to find, outdoor portrait lighting tips, the best portrait lighting setups, and some general portrait photography tips.

Fill Light for Outdoor Portraits

outdoor portrait lighting tips 3

^{photo byajr_images via iStock}

Even when partially or fully obscured by clouds, trees, or manmade structures, the Sun is a powerful source of light. It also has excellent natural characteristics, so it’s reasonable to use it for imaging people.

You may have noticed that when you turn someone to face the light for a portrait, either full on or lightly to the side for a little added modeling depth, that the exposure is easy to get correct, but the high contrast from light areas of the face to shadowed areas looks distracting in the final image.

how to use natural light and artificial light 4

^{Photo by Mateo Almendares from Pexels}

In addition, the portrait subject will be squinting, even if only slightly, which affects the natural, pleasant facial features we’re trying to capture. So, we turn them around to not face the Sun. Now they have stopped squinting but their entire face is in shadow and there is little or no contouring or modeling.

The simple solution is to add some light back onto the subject. There are two common methods to do this, a reflector or an artificial light from camera position or nearby. A reflector is great but they are somewhat limited in directionality.

Learn More:

Fill Flash or Continuous Light?

best portrait lighting setups 5

^{photo bydiego_cervo via iStock}

Automatic flash control is one of the boons for photographic automation that many photographers like me have enthusiastically adopted. Whether doing it manually or in an auto mode, fill flash for outdoor portraits works by adding just the right amount of light to fill in the shadows while balancing the ambient light for a natural appearance.

You can use flash as the primary light source which can be beneficial at times but that approach tends to underexpose the surroundings. Fine if that’s your intent, but the natural look we’re discussing with artificial light for outdoor portraits mixes and balances ambient and added light.

We have a lot of options in our current digital photography, one of them being super lightweight, compact, cool operating, and powerful LED continuous lights, such as the Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB LED Light.

The Hakutatz is light enough to comfortably hold at arm’s length and the LED lights are cool operating so you won’t have to worry about heat if holding it in your hand.

Instant Visual Feedback

Use Natural and Artificial Light for Outdoor Portraits 6

^{Photo by Matt Hardy from Pexels}

An advantage of portable continuous lighting for adding artificial light for outdoor portraits is that you can instantly see the fill and the modeling effect of the light as you move it around.

I highly recommend moving the Hakutatz LED light around as you also direct your subject since you will be able to capture some very natural and spontaneous views of the portrait subject. After all, that’s our primary intent for this discussion, achieving the natural look our brain automatically sees.

You might want your camera on a tripod for this, but I also find that I can use my autofocus points and other camera controls one handed while holding the Hakutatz light in various positions. Practicing our good general hand holding technique will help.

Keep Them Moving

master the use of natural and artificial light 7

^{photo byyuriyzhuravov via iStock}

My outdoor environmental portrait sessions are some of the most enjoyable photo shoots I do. Using all of the modern tools of digital photography can really free up your creativity, the model’s too.

Whether your camera is on a tripod or handheld, you can keep the model moving and also keep rearranging the light in your hand or on a bracket for implementing the best portrait lighting setups.

I like to tell my subject in these sessions to change facial expression or move slightly every time they hear my camera shutter. Although with my new mirrorless cameras, I may also say something each time since these cameras are very quiet and we are outside.

For a close up of their face or head and shoulders, you can ask the subject to hold the light themselves, opening up some more creative posing and portrait lighting setups such as split lighting or Rembrandt lighting.

Works Well for Video, Too

outdoor portrait lighting 8

^{Photo by Ali Madad Sakhirani from Pexels}

The same tools and many of the methods we use for adding artificial light for outdoor portraits will transfer over to our outdoor videography as well. Keep trying out new methods, new tools, and new ideas, you’ll get some very natural looking results.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use Natural Light for Indoor Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 28 October 2021.

How to Use Natural Light for Indoor Portraits

^{photo bygawrav via iStock}

Indoor portrait photography comes with a whole set of challenges that you might not be accustomed to if you typically find yourself shooting out in nature or on location.

For starters, the lighting scenario is completely different if you’re shooting portrait photography indoors. It’s actually pretty difficult learning how to use natural light for indoor portraits if you’ve never done it before.

For example, you may get frustrated because your house isn’t oriented correctly to get the most light in certain rooms, or you may get frustrated because you’re actually only seeing a ton of harsh light in the rooms you want to use.

Thankfully, a few portrait photography tips can turn your natural light photography from drab and boring to fascinating with just a few changes.

Here are some options.

Use Windows as Often as Possible

natural light for indoor portraits

^{photo byElena Perova via iStock}

This tip is pretty basic, but when you’re figuring out how to use natural light for indoor portraits, you need to make windows your best friend.

Each window is going to provide a slightly different type of light, particularly in parts of the world that don’t receive a ton of bright light already. I’m lucky because I live in California where we receive plenty of light, but the further north you live, the more important finding the right window will be.

So, when you first get to your indoor location, take a walk around and figure out which windows will be the best to use throughout the day. Some windows may receive better light in the morning, while others will have better light in the afternoon. Make sure that you examine the location outside of these windows so that you don’t miss something.

For example, make sure that there aren’t any large houses or other buildings close to the home that may prevent natural light from getting to a window after a certain hour.

Other than that, just keep it in mind that the color of natural lighting changes every hour. Eventually, you’ll know how to use natural light for indoor portraits without thinking about it. But, until that time comes, just be open to continually experimenting.

Don’t Use Natural and Artificial Light at the Same Time

portrait photography tips

^{photo byFG Trade via iStock}

One huge mistake that a lot of photographers make when they’re learning how to use natural light for indoor portraits is that they will want to supplement the natural light with artificial light if they aren’t getting enough of it.

For example, they may be tempted to turn on a lamp in the living room to help light up their model’s face if the window isn’t receiving enough natural light.

This is a huge problem for a few reasons. The first is that natural light and artificial light have vastly different colors. This means that your picture will look discordant and it’s a problem you’ll need to fix during the editing process. This is time consuming and unnecessary.

It becomes an even bigger issue when you use different types of artificial light because each one of those light sources will provide different coloring and this will vastly expand your editing time.

Instead of using natural and artificial light at the same time, either get creative and find natural light to use or shoot on a different day.

Learn More:

Aperture Priority Mode is Your Best Friend

natural light photography

^{photo bytatyana_tomsickova via iStock}

Depending upon how experienced you are as a photographer, this may seem kind of scary to you. But, using aperture priority mode will let you control the depth of field (how much of the background is in focus) without requiring you to use manual mode. So, it’s still a baby step.

Aperture Priority, which is usually marked as “AV” or “A,” ensures that you can pick your aperture, but your camera will still pick your shutter speed. This means that you can play around with your depth of field to create bokeh in your background by selecting a large aperture, like f/2.8, to help maximize the blurriness of the shot.

Of course, controlling depth of field isn’t just up to the aperture you use. Learn more about depth of field in this guide.

Always Carry Reflectors With You

portrait photography

^{photo byMlenny via iStock}

Most photographers know that they should carry reflectors on them when they’re shooting on location, but you need to have reflectors with you when you’re learning how to use natural light for indoor portraits too.

Reflectors allow you to create light where it otherwise wouldn’t exist. So, if you’re having problems getting enough natural light into your home or studio, a reflector is a lifesaver.

Plus, reflectors are so simple to use. All you have to do is point it both towards your natural light source and towards your subject to illuminate their entire face.

Use Households Items to Diffuse Light

indoor portrait photography

^{photo byPyrosky via iStock}

Another one of my favorite tips for learning how to use natural light for indoor portraits is to use household items to create softer light.

Some items, like curtains or blinds, are already going to be set up next to your natural lighting source already. If the light coming through a window or door is too harsh, you can simply pull the curtain back to create a softer glow.

Sometimes you may need to pull these items from other parts of the house, though. For example, you can use bedsheets to do the same exact thing.

We hope that all of these tips are going to help you learn how to use natural light for indoor portraits. Let us know which ones you try!

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use Rembrandt Lighting for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 30 December 2019.

How to Use Rembrandt Lighting for Portraits

^{Photo by JJ Jordan on Unsplash}

Rembrandt lighting is one of the most recognizable lighting techniques for portrait photography. What is Rembrandt lighting for portraits? What makes it so special? How do you configure your portrait lighting set up to make use of this technique?

Rembrandt Lighting for Portraits

Rembrandt lighting is a form of lighting similar to split lighting but with one crucial difference. Split lighting is a configuration that can be used to create a lot of contrast between the highlights and shadows. The light comes from the side of the subject and can be accomplished with a single light, a light and a reflector, or any number of multiple lights.

The thing that makes rembrandt lighting unique is the small triangle of light seen on the shadow side of the subject’s face.

How To Create Rembrandt Lighting for Portraits

hakutatz 1

Here is a very simple method to create the classic Rembrandt lighting. All you need is one light. It can be a large light bank such as a soft box or you can choose a smaller LED light bank such as the Hakutatz Pocket size RGB LED Light.

A sunny window could be your one light if the time of day is right. Using a soft box or window light will tend to lessen the overall effect of Rembrandt lighting, which may be a good thing for that particular portrait.

hakutatz 2

An LED panel light will provide the harder edge lighting that makes the Rembrandt lighting effect most noticeable. The Hakutatz Pocket size RGB LED Light has a feature that makes it an interesting choice for iPhone photography. It can be controlled from an app on the phone. That way, this portrait lighting technique is available to you at any time.

Learn More:

The Actual Light Set Up

rembrandt lighting 1

^{Photo by Hatim Belyamani on Unsplash}

The easiest way to get the triangle of light on the shadow side of your split lighting portrait is to seat your subject so you can have a head and shoulders portrait, facing the camera. Get a little creative and have the subject place their torso at a 45 degree angle to the camera position and turn their face toward the camera.

Place your single light 45 degrees to one side of the subject and raise it up so that it also points down at about that same angle. The exact angle is not vital when initially setting up, because you will be adjusting it in a minute.

You can create this lighting effect with a single light, a light and reflector, or multiple lights. If using more than one light, use these instructions for the main, or key, light.

rembrandt lighting for portraits 2

^{Photo by Joseph Gonzalez on Unsplash}

Focus carefully on your subject’s eyes. Focusing elsewhere may cause visual confusion which could detract from the overall feel or mood of the portrait. Rembrandt lighting is inherently somewhat moody.

Now, have the subject move their head slightly so you can see a little triangle of light on the cheek that is in shadow. If you don’t see it, you will need to move the light slightly.

You may need to move the light more toward the camera position or away from it, also up or down as necessary. Have the subject maintain their pose so you can see what the light and shadow are doing.

Play with subject position and posing as well. Shooting from lightside or darkside will change up the mood and feel of the final portrait. Having the front of the torso either in light or shadow will also dramatically change the effect in the final image.

For the strongest version of the effect, minimize ambient light where you’re setting up. Overhead fluorescent lights will pretty much wash out what you’re attempting to create. Get more details on Rembrandt Lighting in the video above by Advancing Your Photography.

The lens f-stop or aperture will probably be very wide since you are shooting a portrait and will want to minimize depth of field for selective focus. Balance the exposure to get detail in both the highlights and the shadows.

Shooting in RAW will help you balance out exposure in post processing if desired. But, high contrast lighting is part of the reason for using Rembrandt lighting for your portraits in the first place.

Variations of Rembrandt Lighting

portrait photography lighting setup 3

^{Photo by Jurica Koletić on Unsplash}

In order to be Rembrandt lighting, there really can’t be too much variation. Without that triangle of light on the cheek, it’s simply a form of split lighting. Which is okay. Rembrandt lighting doesn’t work with all subjects.

Don’t think you have to limit using this lighting technique for subjects that have a lot of texture. Glamour and beauty portraits can be made with Rembrandt lighting and other split lighting. Try it out on your next portrait subject.

Learn More:

Rembrandt Lighting History

The lighting technique is named after the man who exemplified its use in painted portraits during the 17th Century, Rembrandt Harmenszoon van Rijn of the Netherlands. Rembrandt was a master of the style in drawing and painting known as Chiaroscuro.

Chiaroscuro is a method of using shading and brightness, or shadow and light, in order to create contrast and subject modeling. It can be employed on any subject. Besides portraits, you see this a lot in still life arrangements and renderings of architecture.

Rembrandt took this art methodology and tweaked ever so slightly, as true geniuses often do, and made his lighting idea one of the most iconic styles of portrait lighting in art, whether drawing, painting, or photography.

Try It Out for Your Next Portrait

photography lighting tips 4

^{Photo by Oladimeji Odunsi on Unsplash}

Your subject matter doesn’t have to be the creased face of an elderly person or the rugged face of a cowboy or oilfield roughneck. Though those faces make great portraits with Rembrandt lighting.

Use Rembrandt lighting with your regular subjects. Kids, senior portraits, beauty portraits, boudoir, or basic headshots. Any one of your subjects might look amazing with Rembrandt lighting.

We Recommend

How to Use Shadows in Photography

Written by PT Editor on 01 February 2021.

How to Use Shadows in Photography

^{photo byRanta Images via iStock}

Photography is drawing with light, part of the overall lighting of a scene is shadow. Making use of shadows in photography can improve our imaging in general and is a great tool for certain types of photography.

In order to know how to use shadows in photography, it helps to know what is happening when we see shadows already there and how to create shadows in photography when the scene may not naturally have what we’re pre visualizing for our finished images.

What are Shadows in Photography?

shadows in photography 1

^{photo bycoldsnowstorm via iStock}

Photographically speaking, exposures can be separated into highlights, midtones, and shadows. Many post-processing programs have tools to adjust these channels separately. If you are a fan of the Zone System, exposures are divided into 11 different zones (O-X or 0-10) with the zones darker than Zone V being shadowed.

Any time light is blocked or decreased in a scene, the result is a shadow. Darker tones are also called shadow as in “shadow detail.” So, basically, shadows in photography either refer to the lighting in the scene or the darker part of a recorded image.

How to Create Shadows in Photography

shadows in photography 2

^{photo byRickLordPhotographyvia iStock}

Portraiture is one of the types of photography that benefits greatly from our creating shadows. Rembrandt lighting and low-key imaging are portrait techniques using shadows in photography.

Rembrandt lighting is an outstanding photographing lighting technique that takes advantage of chiaroscuro or contrast control in order to create a strong contrast between light and dark. It is exemplified in the painted portraits by the artist Rembandt and in photographic portraits by various photographers such as Yusof Karsh, Edward Weston, and Richard Avedon among others.

In addition to light placement, light attenuation, and power levels, posing will also affect the contrast levels. You can create harsh shadows or softer shades by varying all of these factors. Low-key photography in general also relies on contrast, using key lights to fill light ratios of 3:1, 5:1, or even higher.

Learn More:

Why Use Shadows in Portrait Photography

how to use shadows in photography 3

^{photo byRetroAtelier via iStock}

There are good reasons to use shadows in portrait photography. Creating, modifying, or eliminating shadows on a face can change, enhance, or reduce certain characteristics and attributes of the subject. Controlling shadows in photography can also change the mood and impact of the image, adding drama and interest.

In general, high-key portraits will have an airy mood, while low-key will lean more towards somber. Both methods can be romantic, depending on choices of posing and other variables.

Rembrandt lighting and other similar portrait lighting techniques will usually invoke a feeling of power, drama, intrigue, or importance. Even if you’re primarily shooting for some other effect, adding in the contrast of shadows for some of the images often results in outstanding images that grab a viewer’s attention.

Try Shadow Photography as a Subject

how to use shadows in photography 4

^{photo bymomcilog via iStock}

A fun and exciting portrait technique that we can play with is actually making the shadow the point of interest in the photograph. This can be accomplished with all of the same gear we’re likely already using. The trick for how to take shadow photography is to adjust your light placement, subject posing, focus, etc., until the shadow or shadow lines take precedent in the image.

Shooting with the intent of processing into black and white is helpful to emphasize this effect. Simple props, such as window blinds or a kitchen colander can be used to artificially create shadows.

shadow photography 5

^{photo by RetroAtelier via iStock}

If you want to try out some shadow photography with a portrait subject, use a single light and don’t diffuse the light. A fresnel light or a panel light are easy to use for this idea. Put the item you’re using to make the shadows between the light and the subject.

Your shadow lines, or the transition from light to dark, can be adjusted by moving the item closer or further from the light source. Remember that the further away form the subject, the harder the light quality from a single bulb. Harder light makes more distinct, harsh shadows.

Shadow Detail and HDR

how to create shadows in photography 6

^{photo byBrad_Buchanan via iStock}

A technique we don’t always think about when shooting portraits is HDR photography. Using HDR methods, we can create some very interesting portraits. A huge part of the HDR technique is deciding how much to process the images. You can decide if a more natural feel is going to work best or a more artsy approach.

A main thing to consider when shooting HDR portraits is that you’ll be capturing multiple exposures. So you will want to eliminate or at least reduce camera and subject motion. It can be done, shoot on a tripod and ask the subject to remain still, similar to capturing a long exposure portrait.

It Takes Two

harsh shadows 7

^{photo byokeyphotos via iStock}

It takes two methods to make good use of shadows in photography. The first method is your shooting procedure. Lighting, posing, focus, and exposure all play a part in creating an image.

The second method is your post-processing. Converting to black and white, merging for HDR, adjusting contrast levels up or down from the captured image are all processing techniques for shadow photography. Using a program with non-destructive editing will ease up your workflow so you can play around with various ideas.

Experiment

how to take shadow photography 8

^{photo bySlavica via iStock}

Any or all of the methods for shadow photography might be something you want to try. One of the best things about digital photography is the ability to shoot a lot and process immediately without waiting on the film to come back.

The digital image techniques we add to our general photographic skills open up all sorts of possibilities. Using shadows in photography can involve all of our skills, from posing to lighting to processing. So, try it out and see which method or technique works for you.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use Silhouettes in Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 26 April 2021.

How to Use Silhouettes in Portraits

^{photo bykieferpix via iStock}

Creating photographic portraits have us concerned about adjusting the lighting, posing, and exposure just right. Beautiful silhouette photography is a memorable style that we can add to our repertoire. Best of all, we can learn how to use silhouettes in a few simple steps.

How to Take Silhouettes

how to use silhouettes 1

^{photo byNDStock via iStock}

To know how to take silhouettes in a controlled method, we need an understanding of modern camera light meters and backlit situations. Most cameras have multiple metering modes with the default mode often being some form of evaluative metering, also called matrix metering or smart metering.

Evaluative metering will usually try to avoid silhouette camera settings, the built-in computer having “evaluated” that you want the main subject properly exposed. So, if you have any of the auto exposure modes on, the evaluative metering computation will tend to provide a very bright, washed out background and a subject as properly exposed as possible.

There are a couple of silhouette photography tips that will take care of this situation.

Exposure Compensation

how to use silhouettes 2

^{photo byStockSeller_ukr via iStock}

Using any of the automatic exposure modes except the green dot full auto mode, the camera control for exposure compensation can be used for making a silhouette portrait.

Before evaluative metering was common, and even now in some extreme lighting situations, we would have normally dialed in about 1 ½ to 2 stops of overexposure when snapping a picture with the light source behind the subject in order to end up with the subject correctly exposed.

If we’re wanting a silhouette now with our camera in auto, we would need to adjust the exposure compensation to underexpose from it’s computed settings. Taking the opposite approach, we dial in to the minus side by 1 ½ or 2 stops, up to 3 stops is actually preferred if your camera control has that much range.

Learn More:

Manual Exposure Control

how to take silhouettes 3

^{photo byKlubovy via iStock}

For a more predictable method of how to use silhouettes in portraits, taking the camera exposure settings out of auto is a good method. We can still use the fantastic meter in our camera, but we decide how to adjust the settings of ISO, shutter speed, and lens aperture.

Even out of the automatic modes, some cameras' default metering pattern may still be the evaluative type, so you should check your camera instruction manual to find out for sure. It’ll likely be in the larger manual or on the CD-ROM or the downloadable version and not in the brief printed flyer style basic instruction manual.

An excellent method for calculating exposure settings is to find the spot or selective area metering pattern of your camera and meter on the brightness behind or surrounding the person you’re photographing.

how to take silhouettes 4

^{photo bymapodile via iStock}

If it’s silhouette photography outdoors, pointing the camera meter at the bright area of sky will work, but not directly at the Sun. Pointing your lens right at the Sun while looking through it could damage your eyes, the camera meter cell, or both. Then meter the person and see how many stops difference there is. We’ll come back to those meter readings in a minute.

When doing silhouette photography indoors, you may not have a bright area to meter because of how the lights are positioned. So an 18 percent gray card can be used. Meter the unobstructed light falling on the card, then meter the subject from camera position. See how many stops difference there is.

A little bit different result can be achieved by placing a light so that it illuminates only the rim or edges of the subject. Careful light placement will allow this style of image.

How Dark a Silhouette Is Wanted?

silhouette camera settings 5

^{photo byМихаил Руденко via iStock}

Calculations for how to use silhouettes have several variables. The difference in light levels from background or backlight to the part of the subject facing the camera might be extreme or slight. The intent of the photographer will be a factor as well. Do we want the silhouette subject to be completely in shadow or do we want some detail to show?

The difference in exposure values between the back light and the part of the subject facing the camera give us the information needed to make the changes from complete shadow to merely a darkened figure.

silhouette camera settings 6

^{photo byLightFieldStudios via iStock}

A difference of about 3 stops of exposure can be used to make a silhouette that looks like a black cut out figure. If there is at least that much difference, basing the exposure on the background brightness or light source brightness will yield an image with detail in anything directly lit and the deep shadow areas to be virtually free of detail. In fact, underexposing a little bit from those reading might even be better for creating some interest in the silhouetted subject.

If there are less than 3 stops of difference and your intent is making a dark figure, you will need to underexpose the entire image a little. Otherwise, you’ll begin to see some detail in the silhouetted figure. Sometimes, that style of silhouette is preferred.

When making silhouette photography outside, the position of the Sun might determine how great a difference in exposure values there are. The Sun high in the sky will likely cause a lot of reflected ambient light to fall on the subject, while a low Sun will result in higher contrast.

Post-Process the Contrast Level

silhouette photography 7

^{photo byMartin Barraud via iStock}

Since we’re working in digital photography formats, we have another fantastic option for controlling contrast levels of the final silhouette portrait. The exposure sliders for highlights, midrange, and shadows are the tools for this bit of fun.

You will still need to expose the camera as well as you can calculate, but the post-processing program will let you fine tune how much contrast there is and what detail shows in the subject.

To create a partially silhouetted subject, the control sliders for shadow and midtone will be adjusted up and the highlight slider either untouched or adjusted down by a small amount. For a greater contrast result with a very dark figure, bump up the highlight level slightly and turn down the shadows until you see the detail in the shadow area disappear.

These settings are not a rule, simply a rule of thumb, since the exact amount will be determined by the initial camera exposure and the intent of the type of silhouette.

Be Careful of Noise

silhouette photography tips 8

^{photo by ImagineGolf via iStock}

Unless we want to evoke a certain nostalgic feel of older high speed celluloid film stock, we want to be very careful of the digital noise level within our image. Digitally, noise is more apparent in the shadow areas of our images.

Since our subject is going to be either completely in shadow or partially in shadow, excessive digital noise might detract attention from the intended subject. There are several ways to control noise.

The primary way to limit noise in our shadow areas is to shoot with as low of an ISO as we can use. The higher the ISO is set, the more sensitive the sensor is to light but that comes at the cost of increased noise. It’s almost exactly the same as how high speed celluloid had larger grain than lower speed films. The reasons are different but the result is similar.

A lower ISO of any size sensor will produce a cleaner image file than high ISO settings. In an APS-C format camera, ISO between 100 to 800 is likely to be pretty clean. Full Frame format sensors have better performance overall in this regard, while MFT is going to be a little more difficult at much higher ISO settings.

Another method used to reduce noise is to adjust for noise during post-processing. Most of the popular programs have excellent preset values that let you clean up the file with one mouse click or you can adjust the thresholds yourself.

Don’t Take My Word for It

silhouette photography outdoors 9

^{photo byRelaxFoto.de via iStock}

Try it out yourself! Use silhouettes in portraits in both major styles, try it out indoors and outdoors, use auto exposure with exposure compensation and setting shutter speed and lens aperture manually. Post-process to enhance either style and then try out more extreme and more subtle settings.

Any way you attempt it, silhouette photography makes great portraits, so enjoy the process and the end result.

Learn More:

We Recommend

How to Use Split Lighting for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 10 January 2020.

How to Use Split Lighting for Portraits

^{Photo by Petr Ovralov on Unsplash}

When looking into portrait lighting setups, we come across many one-light portrait tips. Split lighting is one of the more commonly used lighting configurations for portrait photography.

What Is Split Lighting?

Split lighting illuminates one side of the subject’s face, leaving the other side in shadow. In its purest sense, the light is perpendicular to the person compared to the camera position.

Of course, there are also variations to this portrait lighting setup, including posing options, adding extra lights or reflectors, and exposure settings.

How To Set Up Split Lighting

hakutatz 1

As mentioned earlier, in its most simple form, split lighting can be done with one light. It really doesn’t matter if that single light is a strobe or a continuous light, but if you’ve recently started exploring portrait lighting setups, a continuous light will make it easy to see what’s going on.

A compact portable lamp such as the Hakutatz LED lightmakes the operation simple. You can even use it with your iPhone for iPhoneography portraits. In other words, you can start using advanced portrait techniques with any type of camera, from smartphones to full frame DSLRs and mirrorless cameras.

Here is an arrangement that works well: Using a short telephoto lens (or a zoom lens with that focal length range), mount your camera to a tripod and frame your photo so that you have a head and shoulders pose. A short telephoto lens and framing for head and shoulders is a basic method for capturing flattering images of people.

A bar stool for the subject will make them more comfortable when posing. Have your subject face the camera and place the light to their side, lined up with one of their shoulders. In your captured images, you have a visual definition of split lighting.

Above is a nice video by Robert Silver Photography illustrating a simple one-light lighting portrait setup for split lighting.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open and ready for orders soon.

Add Variety to Your Portrait Lighting

split lighting 1

^{photo byCasarsa via iStock}

One of the first things you are likely to notice is that merely raising your single light a little bit adds some flattering modeling effects.

Adjusting subject posing adds subtle improvements as well. Since you’ve put your subject on a stool, there are a lot of poses they should be comfortable doing. Turn the model’s torso about 45 degrees towards the light and have them turn only their head to face the camera. Then reverse that with the torso turned away from the light.

split lighting 2

^{photo by RonTech2000 via iStock}

Now, let’s play with the light position. Moving the light closer to the camera position softens the effect of chiaroscuro (lighting for contrast and drama) in your final image. Moving the light further away, somewhat behind the subject, increases the Chiaroscuro effect, adding drama.

Learn More:

One Light, Two Light, White Light, Blue Light

hakutatz 3

Have fun with portrait lighting and play around with it. Using a small, portable light like the Hakutatz LED light, which gives you an array of controls right from your smartphone, you have some great options for adding interest to your portraits.

As an example, try this out: Take one light and place it in the split lighting position, perhaps a little higher up and slightly closer to the camera position. Use a second lamp behind your subject. Lower the intensity of that lamp and change the color output. Red, blue, yellow, whatever works with your model and your ideas.

What this will accomplish is to add visual interest to your composition. This especially might work with environmental portraits, for artists, for cosplayers, and so on. It will also allow your average Joe or Jane to act out or roleplay in the sessions. Making it fun almost always results in great images.

what is split lighting

^{photo by standret via iStock}

As another variation, place the second light much closer to the camera position, with the brightness reduced by 1/3rd or 1/4th from full power of the main side light. The chiaroscuro will be lessened quite a bit, but the end result will also be softer overall, possibly more flattering for certain subjects. A reflector will also work fine for this portrait lighting setup.

How To Expose for Split Lighting

how to use split lighting

^{photo byRanta Images via iStock}

Previsualization is the key. Know what you want the end result to be and work back from that goal to accomplish it.

The first thing I like to consider is if I’m trying for a high key effect, which would generally also be less contrasty, or a low key, higher contrast effect.

Both high key and low key are capable of producing outstanding portraits, but there is definitely a mood difference in the two techniques’ results. High key tends towards a light, airy mood, playful even, while low key lends itself to the dramatic, somber or serious, with glamour and beauty also being capable of being highlighted.

portrait lighting setups

^{Photo by Riki on Unsplash}

Let’s examine another example: Couples portraits. High key might be perceived as playful, peaceful, family oriented, and so on. Low key couples portraits can become intense, romantic, with a fictional air. Experiment, get used to seeing how your images turn out in relation to your initial expectations.

To expose properly for a high key portrait, you will take meter readings from the shadow side of the subject. For low key, meter the lit side. You want the shadows to open up for high key, the highlights might even burn out, which is fine. You want to create contrast for the low key while preserving detail in the highlights.

If you are seeking a medium, more balanced, less extreme medium key effect, average out your readings, adjust the lights for optimal positioning, and go from there. I recommend shooting in RAW if your camera has that capability, because it provides more digital information to use when tweaking or adjusting in your post processing program.

Other Lighting Techniques

Split lighting is merely one of several basic techniques or lighting configurations for portraits and other subjects. I think it’s probably one of the easiest to accomplish and the quickest to master, too.

Whatever type of camera you’re using or what you use for lights, get out there and try split lighting for your next portrait.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Inexpensive Portrait Lighting Ideas

Written by PT Editor on 01 May 2020.

Inexpensive Portrait Lighting Ideas

^{Photo by Daniel Edeke from Pexels}

Sophisticated lighting techniques can be accomplished within any budget. Sometimes all we need to do is be a little creative. Inexpensive portrait lighting ideas can come from just about anywhere. I like to periodically search online for tips from others.

I can put what I find or what I came up with myself into two categories. Cheap portrait lighting gear and inexpensive portrait lighting ideas. Some people call these ideas hacks, but I find that if I search including the word “hacks,” I get an awful lot of fluff and some ideas that really don’t make much sense.

Inexpensive Portrait Lighting Gear

inexpensive portrait lighting 1

^{photo byViktorCap via iStock}

Here are a few things I’ve been using for my own portrait lighting. You’ll notice that several of these are extremely useful for shooting portraits on location. Other tips are probably best suited for in our studios. Some ideas would make MacGuyver proud.

Portable Reflector

inexpensive portrait lighting 2

^{Photo by Leah Kelley from Pexels}

I love using reflectors in my outdoor portrait lighting. They are also very useful in a studio or other interior location. Most often, we use a fold up reflector as a fill light, perhaps even an eye catch light

By strict definition, a reflector is not a light source, but rather a light modifier. This is because it does not produce any light on its own, it reflects light from another source. A nice trick or tip is to use the reflector to redirect light so that it actually becomes a form of light emitter itself.

As a thought exercise, we have moved our portrait subject around the park so that there is no direct sunlight falling on them. That skylight is a wonderful, soft light, like having a 28,000 mile wide softbox.

inexpensive portrait lighting gear 3

^{photo byXiXinXing via iStock}

Trouble is, skylight is still rather directional, mostly from above, and it’s a little cool in color temperature. If your position is favorable, you could capture some direct sunlight in the reflector and throw it onto your subject. Thus the reflector could become the key light. Not available in every situation, but we’re just conducting a thought exercise.

Handheld Portrait Light

handheld portrait light 1

If everything in the above scenario falls together perfectly, that’s an awesome portrait look. Nature often tends to be different from our ideas of perfect control, though. So other options for cheap portrait lighting should be on the table.

Perhaps the most usable option I have found for many different situations is a portable handheld portrait light. My current favorite is the Hakutatz LED light. It’s an LED light with adjustable color, battery powered, lightweight, and controllable from an Android or iPhone.

handheld portrait light 2

Let’s go back to that skylight lighting portrait scenario. If you don't see a shaft of sunlight peeking around a corner or a bright spot on the ground nearby indicating a clear view of the Sun, then you don’t have much for the reflector to work with.

So, pull out your small, smartphone sized Hakutatz LED light and use it as illumination. The portrait subject could hold it in their hand, with skillful direction from you on where to point it, and now it is either a fill light or primary light. Since you can control color and intensity from your smartphone, you have all the creative control necessary.

handheld portrait light 3

If your portrait subject feels odd holding the light, or if your framing would reveal the light in the picture, you could use a clamp or the always handy OctoPod to make using it handsfree.

An advantage of using a portable LED light is that you have control over where to position the light. An on camera light or flash will work, but having your inexpensive portrait lighting separate from the camera opens up a whole bunch of options.

Since it’s a continuous light source, you can see the results before snapping the picture. That makes positioning the light very simple, no guesswork involved. Your camera meter can provide the proper exposure or you can override with exposure compensation or manual settings.

Learn More:

Inexpensive Portrait Lighting Ideas

inexpensive portrait lighting gear 4

Some of the best options for cheap portrait lighting gear is to use what’s already available on your camera, in your photography gear bag, or in your vicinity. Without buying anything, or at least not anything else, you can take control of your portrait lighting for studio or on location shoots.

Built-In Camera Flash

cheap portrait lighting 5

^{photo by Koldunov via iStock}

I often preach loud and clear about using some sort of lighting equipment other than the tiny flash built into your camera. Because those built-in flashes are tiny, they don’t have much power. Also, being so close to the axis of the lens, they can produce the dreaded red eye effect or give flat, unflattering lighting.

As explained in the video below from Adorama, properly controlled, the built-in flash can be very useful as cheap portrait lighting gear. In order to properly control it, we need to dig a little into our camera control settings menu. Look for the option that says something like Bracketing/Flash or Flash Control.

If you have it set for TTL Auto, you will probably get good results when employing it as outdoor fill light. Another method is to manually set it to a fractional output level. Some cameras allow variation from ½ power all the way to 1/128th or 1/256th power.

If the ambient light is bright enough, you probably won’t be bothered by red eye effects. Subject position and pose can also be used to control that extremely common portrait light mistake.

Exposure Compensation

cheap portrait lighting gear 6

^{photo by Ridofranz via iStock}

Sometimes, there isn’t much you can do about light placement, especially if the light source is the Sun.

To avoid our outdoor portrait subject having squinty eyes, we often turn them away from the Sun. If the Sun is low in the sky, that may put us in a situation where the camera meter will give settings that result in a silhouette.

Opening up the camera menu, pressing the button, or twisting the dial for exposure compensation, we simply dial in on the plus side and add enough exposure to their face. You didn’t even have to spend a dime.

Coming Up With Ideas

cheap portrait lighting gear 7

^{Photo by Andrea Piacquadio from Pexels}

The best light for any photographic situation that may come up for you is that metaphorical light bulb that indicates an idea in your head.

Take stock of your current gear and methods, see where an addition of a reflector or a handheld light could benefit you. Also imagine situations to use what you already have and know but apply them to portrait lighting.

Inexpensive portrait lighting ideas are everywhere. Some are not worth trying, but many are. Try out what works for you and let us see the results!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Learn Killer Portrait Photography Tips in Just Six Minutes

Written by PT Editor on 11 November 2021.

Learn Killer Portrait Photography Tips in Just Six Minutes

^{Photo by Cecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

I'm a landscape photographer, but I occasionally like to take portraits of friends and family, just to challenge myself to try something a little different.

And if you've done the same - hopped from one genre of photography to the next - you know that it can be a humbling experience. After all, taking a great photo of a six-year-old is a much different challenge than taking a great photo of a sunset.

So, that got me thinking...

What can I do to improve my portrait photography game without having to spend a ton of time doing? The answer? Manny Ortiz...

In the video above, portrait photographer Manny Ortiz shares six minutes worth of epic portrait photography tips.

From using symmetrical lines to give a shot balance to changing the perspective from which you shoot to improve the angle to considering the background of the image and how it impacts the portrait, you can learn all sorts of quick, simple, and effective tips for making awesome portraits.

I think the best lesson that Manny gives, though, is to hunt for better lighting for the portraits you're taking.

There's no need to take outdoor portraits in which the model is squinting into the sun. Instead, simply find a shady spot with a pleasing background, and you can get a much more impactful portrait in soft, even light that is really flattering for the model.

At any rate, this video packs a lot of tips into a six-minute time frame, so take a few moments to check it out and learn some high-powered portrait photography tips!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Learn Nude Photography With the Camera You Have

Written by PT Editor on 26 May 2020.

learn nude photography

^{photo byvolkankovancisoy via iStock}

Whatever camera you now have is an excellent gear choice to use to learn nude photography. It can be an entry-level DSLR or mirrorless, a bridge camera, a smartphone, or even a classic film camera. The important part of how to learn nude photography is to be open to learning new thoughts.

Much of what goes into beginning to learn nude photography involves basic ideas, principles, and techniques of photography in general. The Exposure Triangle, rules of composition, focus techniques, posing tips, and other thoughts and practices from general photography can be applied to nude photography.

Camera Choices

To learn nude photography with the camera you already have, it would be good to know what your camera is capable of with regards to photography in general.

Many of us have a smartphone with a pretty decent camera built in. The camera app supplied with the basic operating system might need an upgrade, though. There are some very good and full featured camera apps available for free or very low cost for Android, iOS, and Windows Mobile.

I like my smartphone camera because it’s almost always with me, but I still like to have control over settings such as flash, exposure, focus, color, and other variables. Some of the new smartphones even have lens options that add to their capabilities. You can learn nude photography with most of the newer smartphones.

The entry-level DSLRs and mirrorless cameras are where we really get to have some fun as we learn nude photography. If you have an entry-level camera and the kit lens or lenses that came with it, there are two simple things to realize.

One, you obviously have a desire to create great images, since you actually own a very capable camera. Two, that entry-level camera and kit lens is an awesome photographic imaging machine. With those two things, you can easily learn nude photography.

Relax and Keep It Simple

learn nude photography 2

People photography of any kind can cause some anxiety for beginner photographers. It does for many pros and other serious photographers, too. Learning to relax and keeping it simple will help relieve that anxiety and let you learn nude photography. You can also check nude photograph on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

There are obviously valid reasons for experiencing a little apprehension with regards to nude photography. The photographer and subject may both feel somewhat vulnerable. Focusing on the basic rules of people imaging will let you relax and have fun learning nude photography.

Allowing the subject time to relax and get used to their situation is beneficial as well. Some may prefer another friend to accompany them, others will be most comfortable one-on-one. A low-level of music may also help. Whatever style is their favorite. To relax both the photographer and subject, it probably is best practice to keep the volume down.

Shoot a Lot

learn nude photography 3

^{photo byefenzi via iStock}

If you are just starting to learn nude photography, you will probably have some ideas of how you want to shoot, but you will find yourself adapting as the photoshoot progresses. It’s that adapting that allows you to actually learn nude photography.

Keep shooting, relax, use the camera you have now, and you will learn nude photography to create great images.

We Recommend

Lifestyle Portrait Tips

Written by PT Editor on 26 February 2020.

Lifestyle Portrait Tips

^{Photo by Ben Dutton on Unsplash}

Creating a lifestyle portrait gives you the opportunity to tell the story of the portrait subject in a way that communicates intimate details in visual form. A lifestyle portrait places the subject in surroundings that fit the person.

Some lifestyle portrait subjects that I’ve seen have a business person in their office, a sports star on the practice field, a craftsman working their craft, or a parent at home playing with the kids. As you can see, a lifestyle portrait can describe a person’s real life, not simply how they look.

Lifestyle Portrait Photography Tips

lifestyle portrait 1

^{Photo by Gustavo Borges from Pexels}

The techniques, gear, and methods for lifestyle portraits are pretty much the same kind of things I share as regular portrait photography tips.

At its simplest, portrait photography is composition, posing, lighting, and focus. Interweaved in this is using your photographic equipment properly, sometimes choosing the right gear is part of that.

Composition and Posing

lifestyle portrait 2

^{photo by AJ_Watt via iStock}

When engaging in lifestyle portraits, the rules of composition are important to use to create a sense of balance. Since you are incorporating scenic elements with the main portrait subject, using some of the most common rules of composition can make positioning the subject within their surroundings.

The Rule of Thirds and the Golden Ratio are two of the rules that tend to work best for making lifestyle portraits. Both of these portrait techniques work by putting the viewer at ease with the placement and spacing of the visual elements involved.

Posing goes hand in hand with composition in making the final image comfortable to look at. A choice that needs to be made in regards to posing is whether to have the portrait subject make eye contact with the camera or to present the scene as some sort of slice of life scene.

lifestyle portrait tips 3

^{photo by standret via iStock}

As an example, a lawyer in an office can be posed in front of their bookshelf of law books, slightly off center, looking straight at the camera. Another pose could be the subject in front of that same bookshelf, but this time looking an open book in their hands, the subject’s head and shoulders on one point of the Rule of Thirds, and their hands and book on another.

Both of these poses and compositions will make a great lifestyle portrait of the main subject. Search for examples on some of the photo hosting sites. In addition to the term lifestyle portrait, also include in your search the words environmental portrait.

Portrait Lighting Techniques

lifestyle portrait tips 4

^{Photo by Jan Kopřiva from Pexels}

Just like with the rules of composition, the same portrait lighting tips that are good for regular portraits are also usable for lifestyle portraits. A couple of techniques I like to employ for lifestyle portraits are Rembrandt lighting and loop lighting.

This is one of the cases where having the proper lighting gear for portraits can make the job easier. One of the newest lights I’ve been using for lifestyle portraits is the Hakutatz Pocket Size LED Light.

hakutatz 1

What makes this light so useful is that it’s battery powered, portable, can sync with iPhones for iPhoneography, and is very well corrected for color. Just because we are taking the pictures on location doesn’t mean we can’t control our portrait lighting.

hakutatz app

Place a couple of these small LED lights on multi use mounts and you can set them wherever you need them for tha lighting technique you’re wanting to use. Since they are continuous lights, you can even leave your camera in auto exposure mode for ease of use.

Or use manual settings in combination with the Hakutatz multi power settings for creating the lighting ratio needed for the lighting technique you’ve chosen.

Learn More:

Focus and Lens Selection

portrait lighting techniques 6

^{photo by dmbaker via iStock}

Among the more useful portrait photography tips are selecting fast lenses and short telephoto lenses to take advantage of selective focus. When engaging in lifestyle portraits, it’s often more beneficial to use wider lenses and smaller f-stops for deeper depth of field.

Incorporating the surroundings into the image is part of the process for telling the story of the subject. A normal lens such as the Nifty Fifty for full frame cameras is also an excellent option. This lens focal length makes great lifestyle portraits due to its natural appearing perspective.

A lens like this can do double duty for portrait work. Used at a middle distance and a small aperture, it’s perfect for lifestyle portraits. Move in a little closer and open the f-stop for employing selective focus for a regular style portrait.

Other Lifestyle Portrait Tips

portrait lighting techniques 5

^{photo bySouth_agency via iStock}

In addition to what is listed above, some other helpful tips are to use the RAW file recording option when you can in order to be able to pull out detail in some of the shadows of the scene of the lifestyle portrait. A second option for this is to use HDR photography in order to balance out the dynamic range of the scene.

Take advantage of good outdoor lighting such as what is found during Golden Hour to add interest to the portrait. A small LED light like the Hakutatz discussed above can ensure proper exposure in the fluctuating light conditions of Golden Hour.

Try out multiple light techniques, vary up your composition and posing, and employ various camera settings for beautiful and interesting lifestyle portraits.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Lighting Setups for Portraits of Men

Written by PT Editor on 10 May 2020.

Lighting Setups for Portraits of Men

^{Photo by Royal A from Pexels}

Men need portraits, too. Configuring lighting setups for portraits of men is simple to do. The same lighting setups will work just as well on men, women, or children. Even pets.

When deciding how to light a portrait for male subjects, we should decide how we want to have viewers perceive the subject. We can employ several of the different lighting setups in our repertoire, depending on what the desired end result is.

Smooth, Harsh, or Somewhere in Between
Hard Light
Rembrandt Lighting
Direct Sunlight
Soft Light
Softboxes and Diffusers
Skylight
Men Are Great Portrait Subjects

Smooth, Harsh, or Somewhere in Between

how to light a portrait 1

^{Photo by Brett Sayles from Pexels}

Taking portraits of men can be very rewarding. With some men, they are open to several styles of portrait lighting.

I like to look at some of the classic portrait work from artists such as Yusof Karsh, Richard Avedon, and Edward Weston. In their portrait work, they used light as a very powerful tool. With some subjects, they lit it with hard lighting setups to emphasize texture. With others, diffused light can be used to soften lines. Both styles work great for portraits of men.

Somewhere in the middle of harsh lighting and soft, diffused light is a range that can emphasize texture without making texture the focus of the image.

Hard Light

how to light a portrait 2

^{photo by RyanJLane via iStock}

Hard portrait lighting setups that show texture can also create a mood or even a sense of power. The texture doesn’t have to be extreme, either. It can be the strong masculine features of the face or form, or it can be smaller scale, such as skin or fabric.

Since not all of our male subjects want their images to remind people of Winston Churchill or Fidel Castro, we should configure our lighting setups to not be too extreme. Basic portrait photography tips besides lighting can also be used.

In addition to lighting, such tools as posing, camera lens choice, rules of composition, and exposure techniques can all be used together to make portraits of your main subjects that themselves and others will like to look at.

Learn More:

Rembrandt Lighting

portrait lighting tips 3

^{photo by m-imagephotography via iStock}

One of the most talked about lighting setups in all of photography is Rembrandt lighting. While it may appear to be complicated at first, it’s surprisingly easy to make use of this portrait lighting setup.

We need two sources of light. But one of the sources can be sunlight, existing light, or even a reflector. The two most important aspects of this technique is that it is a modified form of side lighting and that we are looking for a particular shadow detail in the face.

Contrast is created by having the key or main light several stops brighter than our fill light. The side of the face closer to the key light can be bright or somewhat subdued, but we want the shadows on the face to be noticeable.

The triangle of light on the cheek away from the lit side is what makes the technique work. Without that tringle, it’s just a form of high contrast lighting setups. Posing and light position work together to create the proper effect.

A simple and quick way to get this effect either in the studio or in the field is to use a portable light that you can move around easily. I found success in the small battery powered LED lights from Hakutatz.

handheld portrait light 1

What makes this style of lighting gear a good choice is that they are small enough to be placed just about anywhere and the LED bulbs are so cool that a person can hold in their hands if they need to. That way, you have a lot of freedom to try out more or less severe versions of Rembrandt lighting for your male portrait subjects.

Direct Sunlight

portrait lighting tips 4

^{photo by shevtsovy via iStock}

The ultimate point light source for outdoor portraits of men is the Sun. Point light sources are harder than diffused, broader sources. Point sources are also highly directional. You can take advantage of these qualities as part of your outdoor lighting setups for portraits of men.

If you want a little more control over direct sunlight, you'll have to add another light source. A reflector is a very good choice. It’s also a good situation to use a portable continuous light like the Hakutatz LED light. One of the reasons for using the Hakutatz in this situation is the ability to adjust not just the power level, but also the color balance to blend it in with the sunlight.

handheld portrait light 2

Soft Light

portrait photography tips 5

^{photo by alvarez via iStock}

Moving the other way, employing some form of soft light is beneficial for pleasing portraits of men, too. Soft lighting setups minimize the effects of contrast, allowing for a smooth rendering of portrait subjects.

Some sort of diffusion is often the key in creating a soft light portrait. The results can take years off the face of older subjects or make people appear generally more approachable and friendly.

Softboxes and Diffusers

portrait photography tips 6

^{photo by PRASANNAPiX via iStock}

It’s right there in the name, a softbox softens the quality of light falling on our male portrait subject. These are broad lights, which also softens light compared to point sources.

Besides the softboxes and umbrellas being broad themselves, the lighting technique of using broad lighting setups will result in a smooth, flattering effect. You can still get shadow modeling and contrast with soft light, it’s just quite a bit lowered compared to hard lighting setups like Rembrandt.

Skylight

lighting setups 7

^{Photo by Nathan Cowley from Pexels}

The outdoors in daytime can be a soft lighting setup, too. An object or person lit by skylight can be brightly lit and yet virtually shadowless. In portrait lighting tips, this is sometimes referred to as open shade.

You find a spot without the Sun directly falling on the subject. Let the wide expanse of the open sky be your lighting setup. The light is diffused and therefore soft because it’s a huge light source. Over 28,000 miles wide as a natural softbox.

For fill light or eye catchlight, try out the small Hakutatz LED light here, too. Maybe adjust the color temperature to add a little warmth, since open skylight is also somewhat cool.

Men Are Great Portrait Subjects

how to light a portrait

^{photo by ultramarinfoto via iStock}

There are lots of reasons to want to make great portraits of men. From business headshots, to senior portraits, to family and environmental portraits, make use of your favorite lighting setups to create great portraits of male subjects.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Newborn Photography Lighting Tutorial

Written by PT Editor on 07 June 2020.

Newborn Photography Lighting Tutorial

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Babies make awesome photographic subjects. Parents love portraits of their precious newborn family members and other people are drawn to well done portraits of a newborn because the subject matter touches the hearts of most. Newborn photography lighting is a vital part of what makes these images so heartwarming.

As photographers, you probably won’t be surprised by what you will see in a newborn photography lighting tutorial. The way you light other subjects is also how to a newborn portrait, but with a few changes to make the configurations work better for newborns.

How To Light A Newborn Portrait

newborn photography lighting 1

^{photo byRealCreation via iStock}

There are several concerns to factor in with newborn photography lighting. We want to be able to control the lighting, both in placement of the lights and intensity, so we can get the lighting ratios and other things right. It is a portrait, so our regular techniques can apply, with some adjustment.

I have found that the best lights for newborn portraits are LED continuous lights. Continuous lights avoid the issue of startling the subject, which when involved with very small children and infants, can pretty much end the photo session right then and there.

An issue with standard continuous photography lighting gear, such as incandescent bulbs or quartz, is heat. Those lights get hot and that leads to the subject being uncomfortable, which in turn will also end the portrait session. LED bulbs are much cooler operating than other bulbs, even cooler than CFL bulbs.

LED bulbs are also incredibly power efficient, so you can find some excellent battery powered LED lights such as the Hakutatz LED lights. Portable, small, battery operated lights will open up the possibilities when taking newborn portraits as environmental portraits, which many parents prefer over coming to a studio.

Even in your own studio, small lights like the Hakutatz LED lights are very handy for setting up with a minimal floor footprint. This can allow the parent to stay close to their newborn and not be worried about bumping into your lights, tripping over a cord, or getting uncomfortable with heat.

Your Set Up For Newborn Portraits

photography lighting tutorial 2

^{photo bykokouu via iStock}

The camera and lenses you choose will depend on the desired end result, just as with adult portrait subjects. You choose your lens focal length based on what type of pose and composition you want. Lenses in a range of moderate wide angle to short telephoto, including normal lenses, will often be the best choice.

For full frame format, the focal lengths of 35mm, 50mm, and 85mm will give you a pleasing perspective and the right angle of view for the basic portrait compositions. Fast primes are useful for selective focus techniques, but a high quality normal range zoom lens will also work well. Kit lenses will work as well, but with less selective focus opportunities due to the slow maximum apertures.

Learn More:

Safety And Comfort

photography lighting gear 3

^{photo byBlue Planet Studio via iStock}

There are multiple options for where to place the newborn subject. Some like large chairs and sofas, beds are a good option, and the floor is also available. Personally, I don’t like posing tables, because even though they may be sturdy, I worry about the baby falling. I’ve never heard of that happening to any photographers I know personally, but still…

Whatever space you use for the subject, you’ll need to adjust your camera and light placement to achieve good results. This may mean you will be low to the ground and will have to adjust your lighting configuration, too. That’s another reason I like to use small battery powered LED lights so you can move them around easily and not worry about cords.

The safety and comfort of your newborn subject is paramount. A nervous parent or photographer could transfer tense emotion to the young subject, too, so ensuring safety and comfort should also result in better images overall.

Newborn Photography Lighting Tutorial

how to light a newborn portrait 4

^{photo byktmoffitt via iStock}

Lighting newborn portraits is very much like lighting any other subject in your photography. If you have already taken any other photography lighting tutorials, the same principles apply as do many of the same configurations.

Some of the best portrait lighting techniques for newborn portraits include Rembrandt lighting, broad lighting, short lighting, and window lighting. You will probably be modifying these classic configurations somewhat to compensate for the special needs of each individual subject.

Most of these classic lighting techniques require two lights or a light and reflector to make them happen. You can find detailed explanations of these lighting techniques in our previous articles.

Window light can give us a very natural feel and is often soft and diffused. You can mimic window light by using a softbox and LED lights that allow for changing the color temperature of the light emitted.

Soft And Neutral

best lights for newborn portraits 5

^{photo bykatrinaelena via iStock}

Newborn photography is a fairly specialised niche of portrait photography with certain lighting and posing techniques working better than others.

A soft approach is often preferred over dramatic renderings. Soft light, soft poses, soft colors, even soft furnishings tend to appeal to the parents of the newborn over attempts at making exciting portraits.

As the kids grow up, the parents will want different styles in their kid’s portrait. Delivering the soft, loving view of a well lit and composed newborn portrait will please the parents and should create a satisfied repeat client for you.

And if you have a newborn of your own, congratulations! Take lots of newborn portraits in addition to all the candid shots you will get. You’ll cherish the memories with these beautiful images.

Learn More:

Check Price View on Amazon

We Recommend

Nude Male Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 28 August 2019.

^{Photo by vuk8691 via iStock}

Though photographing the male form isn't all that dissimilar from photographing the female form, there are some male-specific tips to consider when creating male nude photography.

Nude male photography is much more than simply a naked man posing for the camera.

Instead, with the tips outlined below (and these 10 nude photography tips), you'll learn how to create nude male fine art photography - images that celebrate the human body in a way that's tasteful, beautiful, and respectful.

It's important to note that for illustrative purposes, we've used images of men that are covered up. This is a family-friendly site, and though the models are clothed, the photos still illustrate the critical points we're making for improving the results you get in your nude male photo shoot.

Let's begin!

Nude Male Photography: The Basics
Nude Male Photography Tip: Finding Models
Nude Male Photography Tip: Models Don't Have to Be Totally Nude
Nude Male Photography Tip: Use Props
Nude Male Photography Tip: Use Dynamic Posing
Nude Male Photography Tip: Try Different Types of Lighting

Nude Male Photography: The Basics

^{Photo by oleg66 via iStock}

Before we get to the tips specific for male naked photography, let's quickly review some basic tips for working with nude male models.

First and foremost, you must have a completed and signed model release form. Under no circumstances should you work with a model without having this documentation!

Not only is it unprofessional, but it could land you in very hot water down the road should a model sue you for using their likeness without permission.

naked male photography ^{Photo by Robert Daly via iStock}

Secondly, when working with nude male models, never, ever touch them unless you have express permission from them.

Just like when working with a nude female model, a nude male model is in a vulnerable position, and it's your job to make them feel comfortable and safe.

If you feel as though you need to direct the model (say, to have the model in the photo above dip his left shoulder), do so by verbalizing what you'd like them to do or simply demonstrate the best nude poses for him. If you must touch the model, they must give you permission to do so first.

^{Photo by Goldmund via iStock}

Third, make the environment as comfortable as possible for the model.

We'll get into shoot locations for nude male photography a little later, but for our purposes at this point, just know that the more comfortable you make him, the more likely you'll be able to get the best results from the model.

This can be something as simple as warming up the temperature in the studio, providing a bathrobe to wear between shots, and having water and snacks on hand in case the model needs them.

This is all just common sense practice, but these tasks can easily get lost in the excitement of preparing for the shoot.

Nude Male Photography Recommended Reading:

Nude Male Photography Tips

1. FINDING MODELS FOR NUDE MALE SHOOTS

^{Photo by Full rights with model releases via iStock}

Not everyone in the world enjoys having their photo taken even with their clothes on, so you might imagine how difficult it can be to find people that are willing to have their photo taken in the buff.

Finding models for male nude photo shoots is not something you should try on places like Craigslist. That just opens up a big can of worms that you don't want to deal with.

Instead, it's best to use a modeling agency to find male models that are comfortable posing in the nude. When working with an agency, the more specific you can be about the needs of your photo shoot, the better.

^{Photo by m-imagephotography via iStock}

By that, I mean you should be able to clearly explain to the agency the types of photos you have in mind, the purpose of the photos, the body parts you'd like to focus on, and the physical characteristics you need the model to have. The more information the agency has, the more likely they'll be to help you.

Quick Tip: If there's not a modeling agency in your area, try consulting with local artists, other photographers, art professors at the local college, and so forth. Though you might not have a finger to the pulse of the local modeling community, others in the arts world might. Additionally, it is imperative that you have references who can vouch for your professionalism as a photographer. Models want to know that you're not just some guy in his basement with a camera, so provide them with at least three former clients that can speak to your abilities behind the lens.

2. MODELS DON'T HAVE TO BE TOTALLY NUDE

^{Photo by gece33 via iStock}

You have the ability to highlight the male form without the model being completely nude.

The image above is a perfect example of this...

The model's chest and abs are on full display, giving this shot a masculine vibe. Yet, the fact that the model is wearing a leather jacket and jeans makes the shot that much more masculine.

^{Photo by Milkos via iStock}

Additionally, as is the case when photographing a female model, having clothing on can actually make the shot more sensual - it helps direct the viewer's attention to the parts of the body you want them to view while also creating some playful mystery as to what the rest of the model's physique might look like.

As shown above, well-placed clothing can also provide the model with some anonymity - the hood casts a shadow over his face, leaving us to wonder what he might look like.

Often, in nude male photos, people tend to think of images that are risque. But as you can see here, not only do the models not have to be nude for a great shot to be had, but having clothing on can actually make the image even more visually appealing.

Nude Male Photography Recommended Reading:

Check Price View on Amazon

3. USE PROPS FOR MALE NUDE PHOTOGRAPHY

^{Photo by KazanovskyAndrey via iStock}

One of the most basic - yet most helpful - portrait photography tips is to incorporate props into the shot.

This does a couple of things for the image.

First, props add color, texture, shapes, and other means of visual interest to the photo. For example, in the image above, the light not only boosts contrast in the scene, which helps accentuate the model's physique, but the shape of the light also adds visual interest.

What's more, the light gives the model something with which to interact. Being active in this manner rather than simply lying there or standing in front of the camera often results in a more interesting and dynamic shot.

male nude positions

^{Photo by pkline via iStock}

Second, props can be used to tell us more about the person in the image.

In nude male photography, it's still important to convey who the model is - it's not just a photo of his body.

As you can see above, the addition of the boxing gloves helps make the narrative of the photo more clear. This man's muscular build is in part due to his love of boxing.

Quick Tip: Props can help the model relax in front of the camera. Playing a role, or in the case above, highlighting a personal quality, trait, or interest, can go a long way in helping a male nude model release some tension and stress and enable him to pose more effectively or the camera.

4. USE DYNAMIC POSING

^{Photo by Juanmonino via iStock}

As mentioned above, one of the benefits of including props in a nude male photo shoot is that it gives the model something with which to interact, which often results in a more dynamic shot.

Taking that a step further, by using dynamic posing as shown above, you can create a far more interesting pose that engages the viewer's eye.

Notice how this shot accomplishes two things: First, the extended arms help lengthen the model's body, giving our eyes more territory, so to speak, to inspect.

Secondly, this is a much more unusual pose than you'd normally see. That uniqueness is an advantage when creating nude male photography - you want to add poses that are novel in some way, that way the collection of images you create retains the attention of viewers and isn't just a collection of typical nude male poses.

^{Photo by volkankovancisoy via iStock}

Another element of dynamic posing is highlighting the musculature of the model.

Granted, not all nude male models have defined muscles, and that's okay. But if they do, putting them in a pose that helps you highlight their muscles can result in a beautiful shot.

As shown above, this dynamic pose helps put the model's shoulder and arm muscles on full display. Note how this image also hits on other themes we've discussed - there's anonymity since the model's face is hidden and he's also not completely nude. Combining these tips for nude male photography in this way is an ideal method for creating the best-looking nude male photos.

Quick Tip: Be careful when using dynamic posing that is isn't too dynamic. That is, you don't want the model to be moving around, per se. Instead, focus on nude model poses like those above, in which the model is bending, stretching, and extending their body.

Nude Male Photography Recommended Reading:

Check Price View on Amazon

5. TRY DIFFERENT TYPES OF LIGHTING

^{Photo by Victority via iStock}

If it's dramatic nude male photos you're after, try using a single-light setup for the shot.

As you can see above, having one light helps create beautiful contrast that showcases the model's body.

The dynamic range of this shot is fantastic, with bright highlights and deep shadows that turn it into a fine art example of nude male photography.

Using a single-light setup is easy too - just place the light to the left or right of the model, have him turn slightly toward it so the sidelighting falls across his body, and you'll get the same kinds of highlights and shadows you see above.

^{Photo by Jun via iStock}

But it's important to experiment with other lighting, too, like the high-key lighting shown above.

In this case, the abundance of light washes out the background and brightens the overall image for a completely different vibe than the previous photo.

Yet, though the lighting situation is completely different, we still get a result in which the model's form is highlighted. Notice how the more subtle shadows on his body nonetheless help define his musculature, similar to what we saw in the previous image.

In the end, nude male photography isn't that much different from normal portraits.

You need to be supportive, communicative, and sensitive to the model's needs. You need to explore different poses, introduce props, and create different lighting schemes to vary the results that you get as well. Do you want to know "Why Do People Do Nude Photography?", we have got a good article for it too.

If you can follow these simple nude photography tips, you'll be in a position to create images that are much more than just nude men photos. Instead, they'll be beautiful and tasteful representations of the male form.

We Recommend

Nude Photography - Tips for Photographers and Models

Written by PT Editor on 16 June 2020.

nude photography tips 1

^{photo by1001nights via iStock}

Nude photography can be a lot fun, for both the photographer and the model. We compiled some nude photography tips to help ensure that your experience with nude photography is enjoyable and produces great images.

You can find some very helpful tips for nude photography in our article 10 Nude Photography Tips which concentrates on things the photographer needs to consider. For this list of tips, we also include guidance for the models.

Tips for Models

As a model for nude photography, what you think and feel can enhance the photoshoot beyond the skill of the photographer. You are contributing some of the most important aspects of the nude photoshoot, you are the subject. Without you, there won’t be any pics.

Bring a Wrap

Even in a climate-controlled room or studio, exposing your skin to the air can make you uncomfortably cold while in the session. A wrap of some sort is beneficial to help keep you warm between sections of your photoshoot.

The wrap can also double as a prop for the photo shoot, allowing some semi-nude or implied nudity images. The photographer should have props and wraps, too, having your own may be a little more comfortable for you.

Wear Loose Clothing on the Way to the Photoshoot

Another essential nude photography tip for the model is to avoid tight clothing or underwear for a little while before the session starts. The elastic bands of some clothing items can leave pressure imprints on your skin which may take a while to dissipate.

Maintain Good Posture

nude photography tips for models 2

^{photo byChristopherBernard via iStock}

With the exception of specific posing ideas, good posture makes any body type of either gender a generally more pleasing final image. This also helps the photographer see what nude photography tips for better nude poses and composition will work well with you, making the session run smoothly.

Have Fun

You are the subject, the model. All the attention is on you. Instead of getting nervous about performing well, relax and have fun. And if the photographer doesn’t make you feel like the photoshoot is enjoyable, you can always take control of your own situation.

Tips for Photographers

As the photographer, your nude photography tips will cover both the model or subject and your own conduct and skills.

Relax the Mood

Especially if this is the first nude photoshoot for you or the model, try to relax. The shoot should be enjoyable, fun even. The nude photography tips in other articles about pre planning will go a long way towards this goal.

Use a Simple or Blank Background

Since you are concentrating on the subject and lighting, having simple or blank backgrounds can remove distracting elements from both the final image and the process of taking those images.

Try High Key and Low Key

nude photography tips for photographers 3

^{photo bykomargallery via iStock}

This nude photography tip covers lighting, contrast, and exposure techniques. High key for a light, airy feel, or low key for a moody, dramatic effect can enhance the experience and the final photographs. We have covered important points in our article about How Does Someone Get Started in Nude Photography as a Photographer? Check it out!

As either the photographer or the model, following these simple nude photography tips can enhance the experience and result in better images.

We Recommend

Nude Photography: The Beginner's Guide

Written by PT Editor on 11 May 2020.

Nude Photography The Beginners Guide

^{Photo by Alexander Krivitskiy from Pexels}

At some point in their photographic journey, a photographer has probably at least contemplated trying their hand at nude photography. Actually doing it is another thing, and doing it well might be a challenge. Nude photography for beginners can be both challenging and a lot of fun.

As a beginner’s guide for nude photography you might review our article on 10 Nude Photography Tips. It has some great tips, techniques, and methods listed and illustrated. There are 3 crucial tips you might need for nude photography for beginners.

Nude Photography Tip #1: Have a Plan

When starting out with nude photography for beginners, having a plan of action will definitely make things run more smoothly. What would a plan of action for a nude photography session look like?

One of the points would be deciding where to have the photo shoot. Finding a place to use for nude photography for beginners is pretty straightforward. Just use your own home studio, a spare room, a room in the subject’s home, a private patio, a yard with high fences, or any place else that is comfortable for you and the model and that affords a great deal of privacy.

Another point on the action plan step for our beginner’s guide for nude photography is figuring out ahead of time what types of poses and composition to use. If you’ve done previous portrait sessions with the subject, you already know what poses, positions, and compositions are flattering to them and which ones they feel are comfortable.

Talk with the subject about those poses, gather their input. It’s also a good idea at this point to decide on how far the model wants to go in regards to nudity. Some male or female models may be perfectly fine with full frontal nude views, while others may prefer to not have their face recognizable for fully nude poses. Others may opt for partially clothed or only implied nudity.

The overall style of the shoot is another aspect of the initial planning stage of nude photography for beginners. This where we decide for color or black and white, glamour or fine art, lighting effects or a natural look. All of these aspects can and should be decided on before the camera comes out of the bag.

Nude Photography Tip #2: Keep the Mood Light

nude photography

^{Photo by Engin Akyurt from Pexels}

We don’t mean the exposure or lighting effects here. We’re talking about keeping the model and the photographer relaxed and calm. The mood of the images can be anything you want, light and airy, romantic, dark and moody, while maintaining a comfortable mood for the act of making the images.

Considering all the nerves that may be involved in nude photography for beginners, maintaining our own calm is essential. If we are relaxed, our model will be, too. If we are nervous or uptight, the subject will pick up on that, affecting their own nervousness. The resulting images will reflect the comfort level of you and your subject.

Every person is different in what calms them enough for a relaxed nude photo shoot. Most of the time, it’s a good practice to limit the participants in a beginner nude photoshoot to the photographer and the subject. Sometimes, it’s beneficial to one or the other to have a third party present. The third party can even make themselves useful by holding the reflectors or something like that. You can get more information about how to take good nudes on our website PhotographyTalk.com.

Some other things that help with a relaxed mood could be music. Soft rock, country, classical, pop, whatever is the favorite of the subject will work. A helpful hint in our beginner’s guide for nude photography concerning music is to keep the volume low. You want it as background to make the model comfortable, you lose a calm mood if you have to shout instructions.

Nude Photography Tip #3: Use Simple Poses

nude photography simple poses

^{Photo by nappy from Pexels}

Deciding on the best nude poses is part of our tip number one for nude photography for beginners, but now that we are in the light mood of the photo shoot, we don’t want to overthink our previous decisions.

A posing guide, either printed out or on a tablet, is handy to keep around and refer to from time to time. Complicated poses might seem interesting, but directing those poses could be difficult for us as a photographer and uncomfortable for the subject to attempt.

Enjoyable Nude Photography for Beginners

Using these tips as your own beginner’s guide to learn nude photography should result in fun images and a pleasant experience for all, photographer, model, and your viewers.

We Recommend

One-Light Portrait Lighting Tips

Written by PT Editor on 25 June 2020.

One Light Portrait Lighting Tips

^{Photo by Omid Armin on Unsplash}

You know the lighting configurations for various portrait lighting techniques already if you’ve been following our article for a while. Let’s now go over some helpful one-light portrait lighting tips and best practices, along with some information you can apply in general.

One-light portrait lighting can actually be done with multiple light “sources” such as a light and a reflector, a light and window light, or as a fill or main source outdoors in direct or indirect sunlight.

Get a Versatile Light

Learning how to light a portrait with one light is incredibly simple when your one light is a multi-purpose light. One of the best new multipurpose lights I’ve enjoyed using the last few months is the Hakutatz Pocket Size LED light.

What I like about this light is its portability coupled with high quality and good features. It’s not enough to have a portable light to use for your portraits, that portable light also needs to be usable and durable.

The Hakutatz has a lot of versatile features that you can use in your portrait work. Being small and portable means to me that it can be used anywhere.

Eye Level or Higher

one light portrait lighting 1

^{photo byCarlosDavid.org via iStock}

Light position for one-light portrait lighting is very important, too high or too low of the light placement can make the portrait either look a little bit odd or it can totally ruin what you’re trying to accomplish.

If you look at diagrams of how to light a portrait with one light, you’ll often see the angle of the light relative to the camera and subject, but it might not be completely obvious how high to put it. A little bit above eye level to about 45 degrees up seems to work best with many portrait lighting techniques.

Use Reflectors

one light portrait lighting 2

^{photo bySpace_Cat via iStock}

When looking at portrait lighting tips, we do well to think about reflectors. With reflectors, we can essentially double our lights. We use reflectors all the time to tame and redirect sunlight, those same properties are usable with one-light portrait lighting configurations.

Especially consider reflectors to provide that eye catch light that works so well with many portrait lighting techniques. A reflector can often open the shadows caused by the position of our single light.

Supplement Sunlight or Window Light

portrait lighting tips 3

^{photo bygawrav via iStock}

Sometimes, our single light takes on the role of the secondary light, such as when shooting environmental portraits with strong window light or when outside in sunlight.

In this situation, position the light where we may have been thinking of putting a reflector. Using the light instead, we can adjust the brightness level and even vary the color to make it appear very natural.

Learn More:

Further Away Is Harder

portrait lighting tips 4

_{photo bychee gin tan via iStock}

One of the things that makes a light source hard or soft is how far away it is. The closer a light is, the softer the light and the further it is, the harder. Which is why direct sunlight is a hard light because the Sun is a point light source.

If you have a bright portable light that you’re using as your single light source, vary the placement of it to change it from a hard light to a softer light. Some portrait subjects look better with hard light and very defined shadows.

Spot Metering Is Your Friend

portrait lighting techniques 5

^{photo byperkmeup via iStock}

When playing around with one-light portrait lighting, light and shadow and contrast ranges are often at the top of our thoughts. The metering required for proper exposure is important to get right, so I like to use the spot metering capabilities of the camera I’m using.

Averaging and matrix or evaluative metering patterns can’t always cope with the scenes lit by a single light, at least not completely. Spot metering takes care of that problem. Some cameras allow you to take several spot readings and add them together for an accurate exposure.

Tone Down Background Highlights

portrait lighting techniques 6

^{photo bydigitalskillet via iStock}

Since you’re using your spot meter, take note of the hot spots in the background behind the portrait subject. If they are too bright or too defined, these hot spots could be distracting. A simple approach to fix this issue is to move your camera position in order to remove them from view.

Another option is to turn up the brightness of your single light. Doesn’t always work out if the background spots are extremely bright, though. Another option is to dodge and burn in post processing.

Barn Doors and Lens Hoods

how to light a portrait with one light 7

^{photo byneilkendallvia iStock}

Using one-light portrait lighting may cause lens flare depending on where the light needs to be placed for our lighting technique. Barn doors on the light or a lens hood on the lens can help eliminate light spillage which causes flare.

Even if you don’t see the flare, it can still affect the image by lowering contrast in the image. Barn doors control light from the lamp, lens hoods block light coming at it from the side angles.

COLOR TEMPERATURE

If your one-light portrait lighting lamp has the capability to adjust color temperature, use that feature to balance out when using it to mix with sunlight window light or for balancing out your image.

The Hakutatz LED light can be adjusted in color temp and brightness level from your smartphone, so you can get what you want to have happen from the camera position without physically touching the light, useful for when you have the light mounted out of arm’s reach.

One-Light Portrait Lighting Tips

how to light a portrait with one light 8

^{photo byprimipil via iStock}

These tips should help you fine tune your own techniques and skills, resulting in great looking portraits that you are completely in control of, from start to finish. Grab your favorite light and start shooting.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Outdoor Portrait Tips

Written by PT Editor on 22 October 2020.

Outdoor Portrait Tips

^{photo bypixdeluxe via iStock}

Let’s get ready for some outdoor portraits! Some of the best things about outdoor portraits is that you have a huge variety of settings, backgrounds, and props available to you, changeable oftentimes by simply walking a few feet.

What outdoor portrait tips and techniques will help us get interesting, fun, and professional looking images of our portrait subjects? We will examine three main areas, portrait poses and positions, lighting for outdoor portraits, and what camera settings for portraits will work great outdoors, plus we’ll add in some extra ideas for outdoor portrait techniques.

Portrait Poses and Positions

outdoor portrait 1

^{photo byVladimir Vladimirov via iStock}

One of the things you need on the watch for when shooting outdoor portraits is the image being too busy. There are various fixes for simplifying what the viewer ends up seeing in the outdoor portrait, first we will consider poses and camera and subject position.

Placing our subject in a field of sunflowers gives us some really fun images, but the viewer will be noticing the sunflowers most of all. Same with shooting in a busy city street or on an outdoor porch. Go ahead with the fun and interesting image but then let’s move things around some for the rest of the portraits.

Changing to a higher or lower camera position can radically alter the background and other surroundings showing in the outdoor portrait. Having the subject, squat, kneel, lie down, or lean against something provides us with more options.

Also be on the lookout for those distracting elements that negatively impact the viewing of the final portrait, such as twig or light pole that looks as though it’s coming out the outdoor portrait subject’s head. Sometimes simply moving our camera to one side or up or down by mere inches can eliminate that distraction.

Lighting for Outdoor Portraits

outdoor portrait 2

^{photo byPoike via iStock}

The Sun and sky are probably the primary light source for most of our outdoor portraits, but we can control outdoor portrait lighting in several simple methods.

Among the most simple outdoor portrait techniques in regards to lighting blends in with the poses and position tips. In broad daylight, move the subject around so they aren’t looking into the Sun. You can even put the Sun directly behind the subject and adjust exposure to lighten the face sitting in the shadow.

Which brings us to a second technique of lighting for outdoor portraits is to add in a reflector to fill in the shadows produced by moving our subject and camera position around. Depending on your lens choice, you could have the subject holding the reflector themselves.

A third technique really opens up some creative options of outdoor lighting, adding an auxiliary light source. A small rechargeable LED light can be used as a key light or a fill light, depending on where you place it.

lighting for outdoor portraits 3

You can put your small LED light anywhere by mounting it on the OctoPad camera and accessory mount. OctoPad is a unique gadget that takes the place of tripods, clamps, bean bags, or light stands for holding photographic equipment.

lighting for outdoor portraits 4

It’s a small weighted pad with a rubberized non slip pad on the bottom and a ¼-20 screw thread on top that a bracket or ball head can be attached to in order to hold the light on various types of surfaces up to a 45 degree angle. Perfect for outdoor portrait sessions.

I also use my OctoPad for holding video accessories such as mics or for holding an action cam to shoot B-Roll footage for video projects (such as a tutorial for shooting outdoor portraits).

Learn More:

Camera Settings for Portraits

outdoor portrait techniques 5

^{photo byshapecharge via iStock}

Several of the issues raised about distractions in the image or lighting situations can also be solved or accentuated by means of varying camera settings.

When looking in the viewfinder of our camera and seeing that distracting twig growing out of the top of their head or losing the outdoor portrait subject in a busy background or surroundings, we can adjust our camera position, change lenses or zoom to a longer focal length, or open up the lens aperture to limit depth of field for selective focus of the subject alone.

Lens focal length and lens aperture or f-stop are major considerations for creating effective outdoor portraits. A longer focal length (telephoto) lens provides a pleasing apparent perspective without any unflattering distortion. The larger aperture affects depth of focus as well as the exposure triangle.

By the way, you can use the automatic exposure modes of your camera and still do this. Set the camera in aperture priority and pick a wide open f-stop, letting the camera match shutter speed for correct exposure. Some cameras will let you adjust the program mode to favor wide apertures, but avoid the Green Dot auto setting as that surrenders all creative control to the camera instead of the photographer.

You can also manually adjust everything exposure related for complete control if you’re comfortable enough with your camera and the process of photography, which many of you already are, so go for it!

Watch Your Focus

camera settings for portraits 6

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

In addition to using outdoor portrait techniques such as selective focus, varying camera position, and adding lighting, it is vitally important to the finished portrait image to be focused correctly.

One of the most important outdoor portrait tips is the same as studio portraits, focus on those eyes. If the eyes aren’t sharply focused, the portrait image will suffer. Even if the subject’s eyes are closed, being focused on them will draw the viewer into a relationship with the subject, meaning the outdoor portrait will resonate with viewers.

If the eyes are out of focus but other elements are sharp, the portrait will seem to be either tense or unimportant, unfocused if you will, causing the image to be quickly passed over. So, keep those eyes in sharp focus.

Adjust Color Balance

camera settings for portraits 7

^{photo bykumikomini via iStock}

An outdoor portrait subject will take on whatever color balance the lighting imparts to it. Sky light without the Sun in it will look cool while direct sunlight might be warm depending on where it is in the sky.

If you’re shooting JPEGs, you should adjust the white balance according to the light quality and color tint. You could also let the camera automatically do it, but it’s easy to change yourself, so you should try it out on your next outdoor portrait session.

Another option is to shoot in RAW and adjust or correct in post processing. Many post processing programs have a one click adjustment for white balance. Alternatively, carry a Gray Card or a Color Checker with you and shoot first and last images with them in the image area, also whenever your lighting changes shoot an image with one of these.

Outdoor Portrait Fun

camera settings for portraits 8

^{photo byRichLegg via iStock}

Try out these outdoor portrait techniques and tips in your next portrait session and enjoy the fantastic results you’ll obtain. It doesn’t take much extra effort to move your camera position, repose the subject, add light, or change camera settings. Try them out for yourself!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Peru Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 12 June 2020.

Peru Photography Tips

^{Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski}

If you’ve never been to Peru, it’s a place that many call “mystical.” It’s a true photographer’s paradise with a wide range of landscapes, an intensely beautiful culture, and a rich history that dates back thousands of years.

From the bustling streets of the modern city of Lima to the quiet mountaintop location of Machu Picchu, there is a seemingly endless variety of scenery to capture with your camera.

In this Peru photography guide, I’ll go over a few essential tips for making the most of your time in this enchanting country.

Take a Variety of Lenses

^{Photo Tours and Expeditions/George Plucienkowski}

While I’m all for traveling lean and mean, when you head to Peru for a photography adventure, you need to pack more than one lens.

At a bare minimum, I’d suggest taking a wide-angle and a telephoto lens.

The wide-angle lens is ideal for capturing wide vistas and taking in massive scenes like Machu Picchu. The drama you can create with a nicely layered shot - foreground interest, the subject in the middle, and an interesting background to complete the shot - is something a wide-angle lens is purpose-built to help you do.

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

Having a telephoto lens is a must for creating much more intimate images.

Use your telephoto as you roam the streets of Lima, taking candid photos of people on the street. You can also use it to compress landscape scenes and exaggerate the enormity of the peaks of the Peruvian Andes.

If you have room in your bag, throw in your Nifty Fifty, too. If you ask me, there’s no better all-purpose, walkaround lens!

Basic Camera Settings

Photo Tours and Expeditions/George Plucienkowski

When you’re exploring the city streets, open the aperture to f/1.8-f/2.8. This allows you to blur the background so you can separate your subject in the frame. Likewise, with all that light entering the lens, you can bump up the shutter speed to freeze movement (and help keep camera shake at bay as well).

peru photography adventure 4

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

But when you’re in the mountains, close down the aperture to maximize the depth of field. You don’t need to shoot at f/22, either - far from it. If you aim for f/8, you’ll find that you get the depth of field you need to keep everything from the foreground to the background nice and sharp.

Regardless of where and what you’re shooting, keep the ISO as low as possible. A setting of 100 or 200 will do the trick to minimize digital noise.

Machu Picchu is a Must

peru photography tour 5

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

Obviously, if you’re going on a Peru photography trip, you have to make time to explore Machu Picchu.

This place is one of the Seven Wonders of the World for a reason - it is absolutely spectacular. And when you consider the story behind it - it was unknown to the outside world until 1911 - you begin to realize the true magnificence of this five-mile-long mountaintop citadel.

peru photography workshop 6

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

Machu Picchu is impressive not just because of its size but also because of its location. High in the rocky countryside northwest of Cuzco, it is unimaginable how the fortress was built by hand.

While you’re there, get wide shots of the citadel, but also go in for detailed images, say, of the many stone steps that link the different levels of the ancient city. The ruins of the stone buildings are a worthy subject as well.

You’ll want to be there for sunset, too. The fading light illuminating the city and the surrounding mountains is definitely something to behold.

It’s Not Just About the Landscapes

peru photography expedition 7

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

Peru’s landscapes are stunning, no doubt. But there is much more to photograph in Peru than its mighty mountains.

Take some time to explore the city of Cusco, the ancient capital of the Inca Empire and a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

Photo Tours and Expeditions/George Plucienkowski

This vibrant city is an excellent location to hone your street photography and architecture photography skills. There are busy plazas full of people, gorgeous archaeological remains, and Spanish colonial architecture that oozes with bright colors.

Be sure to drop by the Plaza de Armas - Cusco’s central square - where you will find the locals wandering through Incan ruins, old arcades, and breathtaking wood-carved balconies.

Planning Your Peru Photography Trip

peru photography tour

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

I’m a big fan of making traveling as easy as possible...

That’s why I like to visit new locations with a photography tour as often as I can. I’ve been on tours in many parts of the U.S. and abroad, and not having to worry about things like in-country transportation, food, or my itinerary is quite freeing!

What’s more, going on a photography tour means that you can rely on experts who know the area like the back of their hand to get you to the must-see places (and the off-the-beaten-path areas) for the best shots.

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

If you’re thinking about visiting Peru, the photography tour company I recommend is Photo Tours and Expeditions.

They’ve got a 14-day Peru photo tour coming up in the summer of 2021 that takes you from Lima to Arequipa, Cusco to the Sacred Valley and points in between.

You’ll have an opportunity to photograph people, places, cities, and landscapes, and hone your photography skills in a small group setting (no more than 12 participants).

Photo Tours and Expeditions/Daniel Korzeniewski

This is an all-inclusive trip, so you don’t need to worry about where you’ll stay, how you’ll get from Point A to Point B, what you’ll eat, or tickets to attractions like Machu Picchu.

Instead, you can relax in the air conditioned ground transportation as you’re whisked from one location to another, learning more about Peru’s rich history from a local English-speaking guide, and getting feedback on your images from the tour leaders and your tour mates.

Photo Tours and Expeditions/George Plucienkowski

For my money, there is simply no better way to explore this mysterious place than as part of a photography tour.

If you’re ready to take the plunge and take a true South American adventure, visit Photo Tours and Expeditions for details about this once-in-a-lifetime Peru photo tour.

We Recommend

Pet Portrait Lighting Tips

Written by PT Editor on 09 June 2020.

Pet Portrait Lighting Tips

^{photo byKonstantin Aksenov via iStock}

Pet portraits are one of the hottest photography trends right now, you can get into the field for profit with just about any camera and some basic portrait lighting gear.

As with other types of portraiture, you can make use of simple gear or high-end equipment, which includes whatever you choose for pet portrait lighting.

Pet Portrait Equipment

pet portraits 1

^{photoClarkandCompany by via iStock}

What do you need for good pet portraits? A camera with adjustable settings is preferred. If you’re taking these pictures for your one enjoyment, one of the better smartphones with a full featured camera app will work.

An interchangeable lens camera, mirrorless or DSLR, will generally give you a whole lot more creative control, including lens focal length. An entry level APS-C camera with the kit can be used with great success. It’s not really so much the megapixel count you need as it is the control.

Generally speaking, kit lenses tend to have rather slow maximum apertures, so a fast prime might work well for you, especially if you want to try some selective focus techniques or include bokeh as part of the image.

A quiet spot in your home or office could prove beneficial as the place to set up for these shots, outdoors or other location environmental portraits might have too many distractions competing for the pet’s attention. You have more control over noise, lighting, and temperature inside.

Easy Pet Portrait Lighting Tips

pet portrait 2

^{photo byStockImages_AT via iStock}

There are some types of lights I tend to avoid for pet portraits, flash, quartz bulbs, and incandescent bulbs. I prefer to use LED lighting or CFL bulb lights, with LED being my top choice.

My reasons have more to do with reactions of the subjects than with quality of light, since all these do a good job and I own some of all of them. But, a flash going off can startle the pet, and the heat produced by quartz or incandescent can make the pet very uncomfortable, neither of which makes for easy pet portraits.

Hakutatz Pocket Size LED light

A light I’ve been using for a lot of my photography is the Hakutatz Pocket Size LED light with a smartphone control app.

It’s a great light for taking advantage of all the one light portrait tips in this article and others. The Hakutatz LED light is battery powered, has adjustable brightness and color temperature, and you can control the settings from your smartphone.

Simple Pet Portrait Lighting Configurations

pet portrait lighting tips 3

^{Photo by Binyamin Mellish from Pexels}

Using one light and a reflector or two small lights allows for several classic portrait lighting techniques to be employed as pet portrait lighting.

Two pet portrait lighting tips I like using are the broad lighting and short lighting techniques due to their simplicity and consistently good results. You really don’t want to get too complicated with the light configurations, since the pets will likely move and change poses a lot during your session.

Learn More:

Broad Lighting

one light portrait tips for pets 4

^{photo bySeregraff via iStock}

Perhaps the easiest one light portrait tips for pets is the broad lighting technique. Broad lighting is when the side of the subject facing the camera has the most light falling on it.

In other words, if you are to the left of the subject, and the main or key light is to the left of the subject, and the subject is turned to face left towards the camera and light, then the largest part of the subject image is lit and you have broad lighting.

This will produce a pleasing and natural pet portrait that should also show lots of good detail if the image is exposed properly. The Hakutatz LED light works well for this type of pet portrait lighting since it’s small enough to hold in your hand while you are snapping pics with a remote release and your camera on a tripod.

Short Lighting

one light portrait tips for pets 5

^{photo bySensorSpot via iStock}

To make a short lighting configuration, keep everything the same as above, but move the light over to the other side. Now, the brightest light is on the side of the subject showing least in the image. You may find that adding a reflector for a catch light gives better results than the single light by itself.

This lighting technique shows texture such as the pet’s hair more clearly than board lighting does. How much texture can be varied by moving the light more towards or away from the camera position.

This pet portrait lighting technique can be used to create a mood as well. Since small LED lights like the Hakutatz can vary color temperature, you could also use that as part of the settings for creating a mood.

Your Pet Portrait Studio

easy pet portrait lighting tips 6

^{photo bySeregraff via iStock}

It’s also fun to make portraits of pets outdoors or in their own environment, but the indoor studio, even a small one, will afford you much more control over all the variables involved in pet portrait photography. And believe me, there will be many variables involved in taking photos of pets.

Start out with your own pets for practice and for experimenting to see what style of pet pet portrait lighting you are comfortable using. And let us see the results!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Photo Restoration Just Got Easier

Written by PT Editor on 09 March 2021.

Photo Restoration Just Got Easier

^{photo byLisa-Blue via iStock}

Unless you’re a youngster, you more than likely have a collection of old photos somewhere in your house. They might be from your childhood in the 1980s or maybe they’re family heirlooms that have been passed down to you by your parents.

If your boxes of old photos are like mine, many of them are creased, torn, or otherwise degraded. In other words, they’re in need of photo restoration.

I think a lot of folks hear the term “photo restoration” and are immediately concerned. It sounds expensive for one, and secondly, you don’t want to hand the only copies of your photos over to someone that might “restore” them in a way that ruins them forever.

So that begs the question...what do you do for photo restoration in 2021?

Editor’s Note: I personally use PhotoRepairPro as my go-to photo restoration service. As such, I use them as an example of what to look for in a photo restoration service.

Restore Your Photos Digitally

photo restoration 1

^{photo byLisa-Blue via iStock}

Back in the day, a friend of mine shipped boxes and boxes of family photos to a photo restoration center to have them digitized. It was a nerve-wracking experience for her. What if the photos were lost? What if they were ruined?

Photo restoration today is much different. You don’t need to send the delicate, original image to a photo restoration facility. Instead, you simply send them a digital copy of it.

scan the image for photo restoration

You can scan the image or use your phone or tablet to take a photo of the photo. Or, if you’re not confident in your scanning or photo-taking abilities, you can use a local scanning service like FedEx or UPS to scan your photos.

Then, all you have to do is upload the image files to a photo restoration service and they’ll take it from there.

So, this takes care of one of our two primary worries mentioned earlier. But what about expense?

Photo Restoration in 2021 is Not as Expensive as You Might Think

photo restoration in 2021 2

^{photo bygisele via iStock}

When digital photography became a thing, you might have had to pay hundreds of dollars to get a few photos digitized and restored. That’s simply not the case today…

Some online photo restoration services charge a sliding scale depending on the condition of the image. So, one that is badly damaged might set you back $45 whereas one that only has a few creases and tears in it might cost you $25.

Other photo restoration services like PhotoRepairPro charge a flat rate, though. So, no matter the damage to the image, you pay the same price per image. This could be an advantageous arrangement if you have a lot of photos that are badly in need of restoration.

While it could get expensive to restore a lot of photos, if you have a select few that you want to repair, photo restoration is an affordable option.

Learn More:

How Long Does Photo Restoration Take?

online photo restoration 3

^{photo bysuteishi via iStock}

The period of time you have to wait depends on several factors, not the least of which is the condition of the image you are having restored. Obviously, one that is heavily damaged will take longer to fix than one that needs only minor retouching.

As a rule of thumb, it’s a good idea to allow about seven business days for a typical photo restoration to be completed.

What Format is the Restored Photo In?

online photo restoration services 4

^{photo byShanina via iStock}

The format you get your restored photo in depends on the service you use. In some cases, you might get a .JPG file in return and nothing more.

But some services, like PhotoRepairPro, send you a .JPG file in addition to two 5x7 prints of the image.

Having both digital and print copies of the image you’ve had restored is a nice bonus. You can keep the digital copy for posterity and immediately put the printed copies on display for you and your family to enjoy.

Are Other Services Offered in Addition to Photo Restoration?

other services from photo restoration companies

Again, this depends on the photo restoration service you utilize.

In some cases, they specialize in restoration, so that’s the only service they provide. But in other cases, you can get images retouched, restored, or recreated depending on your wants and needs.

For example, PhotoRepairPro can restore an image to like-new condition, colorize black and white photos, retouch portraits to remove stray hair, wrinkles, and so forth, and they can add or remove people or objects from an image if you like.

Which Photo Restoration Service Should I Use?

best photo restoration services 5

^{photo byilbusca via iStock}

There are a ton of online photo restoration services you can choose from. Most are perfectly fine. Some should be avoided at all costs. And a few are the cream of the crop.

When it comes to restoring your favorite old photos, you certainly want to avoid the bottom and the middle of the pack. This is a you-get-what-you-pay-for situation, to be sure.

That bargain-basement online photo restoration service that you found on Google is going to give you bargain-basement results.

Instead, opt for a service that has a proven track record of success, like Photo Repair Pro.

photorepairpro photo restoration

Even if you’ve never heard of PhotoRepairPro, you might have actually used their services before…

That’s because they were the exclusive photo restoration providers for Costco for 10 years.

You don’t have a partnership with a company like Costco without having built a solid reputation for providing quality services. And that’s precisely what you get with PhotoRepairPro.

You might recall that a few weeks ago we talked about Costco ending their photo services. If you missed it, you can check that video out above.

Needless to say, this came as a shock to the photo industry as a lot of photographers - professional and amateur - relied on Costco for their printing and restoration needs.

But you can still get that high-quality service for your photo restorations right from the source!

So, if you have precious photos you want to be returned to their original glory, head over to Photo Repair Pro and start the process today. You won’t be disappointed!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Photo Shoot vs Photoshoot: Ideas and What You Need to Know

Written by PT Editor on 24 December 2019.

photo shoot vs. photoshoot

^{Photo by powerofforever via iStock}

If you're a photographer or a writer, or like me, both, you've probably Googled "is photo shoot one word or two?"

It's a common question for those of us in the photography industry, but a more important question is, which one is the right way to spell it? Photo shoot or photoshoot?

Photo Shoot vs Photoshoot: Which is Correct?

photo shoot vs photoshoot which is correct

^{Photo by Rawpixel via iStock}

As it turns out, both photo shoot and photoshoot are considered correct. However, photo shoot is a much more popular term than photo shoot.

According to Grammarly, the popular writing assistant software, photo shoot is much more common, but photoshoot has gained in popularity in recent years.

Not that long ago, "photoshoot" would have been flagged by spell checkers as being incorrectly spelled, but that also has changed in recent years.

So, in the photo shoot vs photoshoot battle, the former is still king, but the latter is becoming more commonly used. Either way, you are spelling the word (or words) correctly and using them correctly as well.

In fact, there is no difference in their meaning - both are noun phrases that refer to a thing (a session with a photographer), so whichever way you like to spell the word, go for it!

I personally like to use it as a two-word term, so from here on out, that's what you'll see.

Popular Kinds of Photo Shoots

Now that we have photo shoot vs photoshoot out of the way, let's explore some popular kinds of photo shoots.

Additionally, let's take a look at some sample images from photo shoots to help you generate some ideas for your next session with a client.

Boudoir Photo Shoot

boudoir photo shoot

^{Photo by Studio-Annika via iStock}

As is explained in our article on boudoir photography tips, boudoir photo shoots are a sensual type of portrait photography that has been around for generations.

In years past, boudoir photography was perhaps best known as a way for women to present their significant other with a seductive photo. However, in recent years, boudoir photography has become a more popular choice for women who want to express who they are and celebrate their bodies for no one but themselves.

Boudoir Photo Shoot Ideas

boudoir photo shoot ideas 1

^{Photo by Adene Sanchez via iStock}

Boudoir photos are all about celebrating the subject's body, but they don't have to be nude to do that.

As shown above, this model's showing plenty of skin, which makes this a very sensual boudoir photo.

Ask the model to show off their arms or legs (or both) to reveal the shape and form of their body without having them be nude. As you can see, having the model extend their arms and legs can do wonders for showing off their body.

boudoir photo shoot ideas 2

^{Photo by ultramarinfoto via iStock}

Another boudoir photo shoot idea is to get in close and focus on a single body part.

As shown above, the lips can be very seductive, and with all the detail that the shape of the mouth provides, this is a very engaging image to look at, even though it is very tightly framed and prevents us from seeing much of the model.

A model's hands, feet, eyes, and the nape of the neck are further ideas for creating close-up boudoir photos.

boudoir photo shoot ideas 3

^{Photo by DaniloAndjus via iStock}

Something else to keep in mind about boudoir photo shoots is that they don't have to take place in the bedroom or a studio set up to look like a bedroom.

On-location boudoir photo shoots can be a little tricky, particularly if the model is a bit shy.

But as you can see above, beautiful and sensual photos can be had if you put the model in the right location.

Also notice that boudoir photo shoots aren't just for women - men are certainly worthy subjects as well.

Nude Photo Shoot

nude photo shoot

^{Photo by Geber86 via iStock}

Believe it or not, nude photo shoots are one of the most popular types of portrait photography today.

Like boudoir photography, nude photography has been around for ages, and before that, paintings, sculptures, and other art forms have focused on the nude human form.

Since this is a family-friendly website, the examples of nude photo shoots and nude photography ideas that I've compiled below feature models that are clothed, or are at least obscured in some way.

Nevertheless, the examples below demonstrate how you might approach posing a model for a nude photo shoot.

Nude Photo Shoot Ideas

nude photo shoot ideas

^{Photo by Jun via iStock}

The purpose of a nude photo shoot is much the same as a boudoir photo shoot - to display the sensuality of the human form.

But don't be afraid to incorporate other elements into the shot to give it some color, contrast, and visual interest.

As shown above, colorful makeup adds an additional layer of interest to this photo, yet does so without distracting from the model's beautiful body.

nude photo shoot ideas 2

^{Photo by Staras via iStock}

Another nude photo shoot idea to try is to use light to highlight the model's form.

As shown above, lights on either side of the model showcase her body while creating intrigue with perfectly placed shadows.

The black and white treatment is also eye-catching and enhances the beauty of the interplay between dark and light.

Notice as well how the model lengthens her body by extending her arms above her head, but does so without appearing rigid. The result is quite striking!

nude photo shoot ideas 3

^{Photo by miljko via iStock}

When creating a nude photo shoot, your model might want their significant other to be in the shot with them.

As you can see above, this presents even more opportunities for celebrating the human body and for showcasing the relationship between two people.

It's important to approach these kinds of nude photo shoots with a focus on the artistic quality. Using light and shadow, as discussed above, getting in close and framing a close-up of the models' bodies, and avoiding cliche shots like two people in bed together can help you create high-quality nude photos.

Want more ideas for nude photography? Check out our list of nude photography tips.

Maternity Photo Shoot

maternity photo shoot

^{Photo by Adene Sanchez via iStock}

Aside from newborn photo shoots, maternity photo shoots might be the most precious kind of portrait you can take.

Showcasing the relationship between an expecting mother and her unborn child takes great skill, and a ton of maternity photo shoot ideas to help you bring your creative vision to fruition.

The sample images below offer just a sampling of some of the ideas you might use the next time you're photographing an expecting mom.

Maternity Photo Shoot Ideas

maternity photo shoot ideas 1

^{Photo by FG Trade via iStock}

Pregnancy is tough and can take a toll on a woman's body. As a result, some expecting moms might not feel like they're all that beautiful for their portraits.

When heading into a maternity photo shoot, it's important to give the model as much props as you can. Comment on how she's glowing, how nice her hair looks, or how gorgeous her skin is.

Giving her these positive reinforcements before you start pressing the shutter will give her a confidence boost that enables her to feel her best while you take photos that make her look her best. A little confidence will go a long way in helping you do that!

maternity photo shoot ideas 2

^{Photo by katrinaelena via iStock}

The best time to take maternity photos is usually in the third trimester when the baby bump is really showing.

But during the third trimester, mom is going to be tired and achy, so it's important to bear that in mind as you ask her to pose this way and that.

Do your best to pose mom in one way, like standing, and work your way around her to capture photos from different angles.

Give her direction for changing up the shot (i.e., having her hands on her belly, and then having her hold a prop of some sort, like flowers), that way you can get as many different looks from each pose before moving her to another pose.

This will help minimize how much the model has to sit down, stand up, and so forth, and she will thank you for that!

maternity photo shoot ideas 3

^{Photo by inarik via iStock}

A final maternity photo shoot idea in mind is to pamper the model and help her look and feel glamorous.

As I mentioned earlier, most pregnant women don't feel all that great, nor do they feel as though they look all that great.

By giving her the opportunity to get dressed up in a gorgeous gown (like the one shown above), you give the model a moment to escape reality and feel like the beautiful woman that she is.

Besides, adding the color and texture and shape of a maternity gown only adds more visual interest to the portrait.

Get even more direction on how to plan and execute a successful maternity photo shoot in our expansive maternity photography section.

Engagement Photo Shoot

engagement photo shoot

^{Photo by Lisa5201 via iStock}

When I think of a photo shoot vs photoshoot, I think of engagement sessions and weddings.

Engagement photo shoots used to not be a thing, but in the last decade or so, documenting the moment that a person proposes to their significant other has become hugely popular.

There is also a big demand for posed engagement photos, either after the moment the proposal is made or well after the fact.

Here are a few ideas for engagement photo shoots you can use to create memorable photos.

Engagement Photo Shoot Ideas

engagement photo shoot ideas 1

^{Photo by olegbreslavtsev via iStock}

When tackling an engagement photo shoot, keeping things light and candid can get you some great results.

As shown above, this photo looks more like a private, funny moment this young couple was having together rather than a staged portrait.

You can elicit this sort of interaction by having the couple think of a funny moment they shared together, a favorite memory they have, or even by having them whisper something ridiculous to each other, such as a lame dad joke.

Whatever the approach you take to get a candid shot, the relaxed and genuine results you get are well worth it!

engagement photo shoot ideas 2

^{Photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

Capturing the moment someone asks another person to marry them is a huge responsibility, and one that requires great skill on your part, not just as a photographer but also in terms of being sly about it.

To capture a photo like the one above without the woman knowing what was about to happen would necessitate you taking the shot from a distant location with a telephoto lens.

This isn't the easiest way to capture a portrait, but if you work with the person popping the question ahead of time, you can scout locations where you can be out of sight, but have a clear view of the spot where the question will be asked.

engagement photo shoot ideas 3

^{Photo by LaylaBird via iStock}

Playing with the composition of the engagement photos you take enables you to find the best angles and perspectives to highlight the couple.

In the image above, for example, shooting up toward them from a low shooting position creates a sense of the couple being larger than life.

Also notice how the low perspective enabled the photographer to place the couple in front of the sky, rather than the structures in the background.

This helps separate the couple in the shot while also bringing in the brightness of the sky for a high-key portrait.

Family Photo Shoot

family photo shoot

^{Photo by kate_sept2004 via iStock}

Family photo shoots are a unique animal. Not only do you have to worry about more difficult posing scenarios, but you also have to worry about ensuring that each member of the family is looking at the camera, smiling, standing up straight, and so forth, and doing all of that at the same time.

If a family has young kids, these tasks become even more difficult.

With the family photo shoot ideas listed below, you'll get a few ideas for making the most of your next family portrait session.

Family Photo Shoot Ideas

family photo shoot ideas 1

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

One of the best family photo shoot ideas I was ever given was to just let the interactions between the members of the family play out.

That is, rather than forcing everyone into a stiff pose, allow them some time to relax, to talk to one another, and to get comfortable in front of the camera.

Often, what I'll do is tell the family that I just need to test my camera settings before we get started. Then I'll take candid shots, which usually end up being some of the best of the bunch.

No one ever said a family photo shoot had to end with heavily posed portraits, so put your camera on burst mode and capture the genuine type of moments you see in the image above.

family photo shoot ideas 2

^{Photo by pixdeluxe via iStock}

Going along with the candid family photo shoot tip above, try putting the family in their element for the purposes of the portrait.

Rather than having them come to your studio or taking them to the local park to take their photos, why not go to their turf to photograph them?

Not only might this help the subjects be more relaxed in front of the camera, but it also gives you an opportunity to highlight where this family is from and what they do in the image.

In the photo above, this farming family is simply walking through their fields, exploring the land that they cultivate. What a great way to make the family portrait more meaningful!

family photo shoot ideas 3 1

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

family photo shoot ideas 3 2

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

family photo shoot ideas 3 3

^{Photo by skynesher via iStock}

A final family photo shoot tip to think about is to consider each photo as a part of a larger whole.

The series of images above shows this concept to perfection - each image tells a different part of the story, and while not each family photo might be able to stand on its own, as a collection of shots, it's quite compelling.

General Photo Shoot Ideas

general photo shoot ideas

^{Photo by sanjeri via iStock}

Obviously there are many other kinds of photo shoots than what is listed here. This is just a sampling, for sure.

But the photo shoot ideas outlined above don't just apply to these specific types of portraits.

The advice to compliment portrait subjects before a shoot will help build the confidence of the model whether they're a pregnant woman, a teenage boy, or something in between.

general photo shoot ideas 2

^{Photo by pixdeluxe via iStock}

Likewise, the advice to capture candid moments doesn't have to be used only with families. Candid portraits of individuals, couples, and groups can be every bit as meaningful and compelling.

general photo shoot ideas 3

^{Photo by Kharchenko_irina7 via iStock}

Thinking about the wardrobe the portrait subject will wear is good advice for all kinds of portraits, not just maternity portraits.

You get the idea...

No matter who you're photographing, approaching the photo shoot with a solid plan, plenty of ideas, and contingency plans in case something goes awry will help you ensure the success of each photo shoot.

Final Thoughts: Photo Shoot vs Photoshoot

photo shoot vs photoshoot conclusion

^{Photo by jacoblund via iStock}

When planning a photo shoot of any type, it's necessary to think not just about posing, wardrobe, and other artistic elements, but also the technical elements too - things like camera settings for portraits, lighting setups, and how you'll process the images after the fact.

Taking beautiful portraits of any kind is a tall task that requires a lot of steps to be taken. But the more you practice, the more tutorials you read, and the more photos you take and critically evaluate, the better your photo shoots (or photoshoots!) will be.

Give the photo shoot ideas outlined in this tutorial a try, explore our portrait photography section for more tips, and practice what you learn so you build confidence behind the lens.

We Recommend

Planning a Family Photoshoot: Tips for Timeless Treasures

Written by PT Editor on 19 December 2023.

Planning a Family Photoshoot Tips for Timeless Treasures

^{Photo by pixelfit via iStock}

Planning is essential to taking great family photos. That said, it’s also one of the most commonly overlooked steps in the photography process. We wanted to change that, so we created this in-depth guide to planning a family photoshoot!

Below, we’ll cover the three most important things to consider before every family photoshoot—choosing a family photographer, family photoshoot ideas, and family photoshoot outfits. Additionally, we’ll share what to do with family photoshoot images, a handful of bonus tips, and more!

Now, without further ado, it’s time to dive in and explore everything there is to know about planning a family photoshoot and why it’s key to capturing timeless treasures that will live on forever!

Check out the B&H Photo Video Pro Audio video above to learn more about planning a family photoshoot and other family photography tips.

Planning a Family Photoshoot: What to Look for in a Portrait Photographer
Family Photoshoot Ideas
Family Photoshoot Outfits
What to Do With Family Photoshoot Images
More Family Photoshoot Tips
Recommended Photography Gear

Planning a Family Photoshoot: What to Look for in a Portrait Photographer

Planning a Family Photoshoot What to Look for in a Portrait Photographer

^{Photo by Kemal Yildirim via iStock}

Thanks to recent advancements in camera technology and today’s freelance economy, there have never been more portrait photographers. So, with so many out there, how do you know which one is best for you? Here are a few things to look for when searching for a photographer for your next family photoshoot.

Photography portfolio
Photography style
Photographer availability
Photographer price
Photographer relationship & reliability

No two photographers are exactly alike. That’s why reviewing their portfolios and choosing one that aligns with the style of photos you want is a good idea. Only then will you know what to expect beforehand. And if the photos don’t meet your expectations, you can communicate that with the photographer.

Availability and price will also dictate who you hire. If the photographers' schedule doesn’t align with yours or their rates are out of your budget, you must adapt accordingly. Furthermore, do you know anyone who has worked with a specific photographer? Recommendations from family members and friends are a fantastic way to find high-quality photographers.

Family Photoshoot Ideas

^{Photo by cokada via iStock}

Behind most timeless family photos, you will usually find great ideas. Those ideas are what make family photos unique and make us smile years later when we look back at the photos. Here are a few creative ideas you can implement in your next family photoshoot.

Seasonal family photoshoots
Themed family photoshoots
Outdoor family photoshoots
Candid family photoshoots
Studio family photoshoots

Experienced portrait photographers will also bring tons of family photoshoot ideas of their own to the table. With that in mind, the right photographer should also be flexible enough to incorporate your thoughts and ideas into a photo shoot. Just ensure you communicate with the photographer in advance so everybody is on the same page before you start taking pictures.

Learn More:

Family Photoshoot Outfits

^{Photo by inarik via iStock}

Another part of planning for a family photoshoot is deciding what to wear. If you want to have a themed photoshoot (aka Christmas), it’s easy, but we know it can be challenging if you want to have a more traditional photoshoot. One top tip is to try to coordinate the whole family. You don’t want everyone wearing completely different colors and outfits—that’s a recipe for disaster.

Likewise, wearing stylish clothes that will age well will ensure your photos remain timeless forever. For example, opt for a more sophisticated look instead of wearing clothes that show off the latest fad. Collared shirts, jeans, leather jackets, and solid-colored shirts are classic looks we recommend. The same goes for hairstyles and accessories.

What to Do With Family Photoshoot Images

^{Photo by AndreyPopov via iStock}

OK, you’ve completed your family photoshoot, and the photographer just sent you digital files of all the photos—now what? Well, it would be a huge shame for all of them to sit in a folder and waste away on your computer, don’t you think? Instead, we recommend selecting your most treasured photos and printing them out.

One excellent resource for printing family photos is Photo Book Press. They are a trustworthy and reliable online print shop that has satisfied customers with their high-quality, affordable products for nearly forty years. Photobooks are their signature products (and our favorite way to display family photos).

They have hardcover, softcover, lay-flat, and signature-sewn photobooks. On top of that, they offer custom wall art, photo calendars, cards, apparel, drinkware, office supplies, and more. We’ve worked with them for years, and their products always blow us away. So go check them out today!

More Family Photoshoot Tips

^{Photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Now that you know why planning for a family photoshoot is crucial, it’s time to start planning for yours! In the meantime, here’s a list of some more tips for family photography to help you create timeless treasures.

Get a good night's sleep the night before
Be ready way earlier than you need to be
Go with the flow / expect the unexpected
Don’t micromanage kids / let their personalities shine
Communicate with the photographer in advance
Breathe, relax, and have fun!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait and Landscape Photography: Similarities and Differences

Written by PT Editor on 11 May 2022.

Portrait and Landscape Photography Similarities and Differences

^{photo byMarioGuti via iStock}

Portrait and landscape photography are a lot of fun to do and can also provide extra income for established professionals in any genre of photography work. The images for each genre also look fantastic when we get creative with shooting, post-processing, and display options.

Here is a view of all of the things we consider, such as our planning, preparing for capturing the images, what gear is involved, what techniques are used, and how similar the two genres can be, as well as what differences are involved in these photographic endeavors.

Portrait and Landscape Photography Planning
Preparing for Portrait and Landscape Photography
Printing Portraits and Landscapes
Gear Options for Portrait and Landscape Photography
You Can Be an Expert in Both Portrait and Landscape Photography

Portrait and Landscape Photography Planning

portrait and landscape photography 1

^{photo bymihailomilovanovic via iStock}

With regard to planning our portrait and landscape photography, there are many similarities, some of which may be a little subtle, and a few major differences.

What are those things we plan about portrait and landscape photography that are the same? In my mind, I always go through a mental checklist of everything I’m about to do regarding photography. That’s pretty much the day before and the day of the shoot, but I also do a lot of similar planning work long before that couple of days comes up.

Especially with regards to outdoor or environmental portraiture, my planning will be very much like how I plan landscape photography. The time of year and where I’ll be will influence quite a lot of my planning for outdoor portrait and landscape photography alike.

portrait and landscape photography 2

^{photo bysborisov via iStock}

The time of year will determine when my preferred outdoor lighting will occur. For a lot of my exterior imaging work, I lean towards a lower position in the sky for the Sun. Golden Hour is a great time of day for portrait and landscape photography, but any time of day where our home star the Sun isn’t directly overhead is a great time for me.

With regards to portraits, I can add reflectors or fill flash when the Sun is shining at an angle, any angle. This allows me to get soft eyes with no squints and the resulting facial frowning that sun squint also adds. It also lets me play around with contrast levels and gives me an opportunity to use backlighting, side lighting, and other shadow control techniques.

portrait and landscape photography 3

^{photo byDaveAlan via iStock}

For landscape photography, those times of the day which have the Sun sitting lower in the sky than directly overhead give me opportunities to use light and shadow for modeling effects in the scenery. The planning for my landscape ideas might also lead me to choosing my accessories, such as a tripod or tripod alternative for HDR photography or a graduated neutral density (GND) to use instead of HDR for contrast control.

Preparing for Portrait and Landscape Photography

portrait photography 1

^{photo bygolubovy via iStock}

Planning ahead of time is part of my preparation for portrait and landscape photography and it naturally leads into preparing for the actual shooting either the day of the shoot or a day or two before I take the pictures.

So, what is involved in the preparation? Several things I always do: charge batteries, reformat cards, clean lenses, and repack my bags. This is a good checklist for any type of photoshoot.

Batteries going dead and not having spares already charged means there is no digital image capturing happening that day. That’s simply a fact of life in the digital age. Our newer cameras have great battery life compared to just a few years ago, but our camera’s high-quality sensor capturing an image file and employing all of those wonderful special features simply won’t happen with no power.

portrait photography 2

^{photo bynicolas_ via iStock}

I reformat my cards in the camera I’m going to use them in. There are many options of how to accomplish the same thing, it gives me peace of mind to do it this way. I know for sure that the card or cards are at maximum capacity and that no time is wasted with the camera attempting to lay down a file without the card being ready for it.

Cleaning the lenses may also include cleaning the camera and possibly the camera sensor. I make a habit of cleaning my lenses before and after every photoshoot, portrait and landscape photography. Cleaning the camera and especially cleaning the sensor I do on an as needed basis.

portrait photography

^{photo byMikhail Dmitriev via iStock}

Preparing for portrait and landscape photography will also include repacking my camera bag or bags so I’m bringing the equipment I think I’ll be needing.

The equipment I end up packing may vary somewhat between portrait and landscape photography, things such as reflectors and a fill flash for portraits and GND filters or maybe a nodal panorama mount for landscapes. Some lenses and my favorite camera mounts will be in my bag for all photoshoots.

Printing Portraits and Landscapes

printing portraits and landscapes

^{Photo by KatarzynaBialasiewicz via iStock}

Before I dive into some gear recommendations for portraits and landscapes, I want to mention a critical component of the process that sometimes gets left out - printing your images.

I know we live in the digital age and that most of our work exists online, but I argue that printing our work is still a crucially important part of the process.

I'm not saying you need to print every image you create, but getting prints of your best work is a nice way to tie the process together and celebrate your success. You don't even have to keep all the prints - they make great gifts!

The question is, what printing company should you use?

artbeat studios homepage

After getting many prints over the years from Artbeat Studios, I wholeheartedly recommend them for your portrait and landscape photo printing needs.

As you might know, I'm a landscape photographer, so most of the prints I've ordered from Artbeat Studios have been landscapes. I can tell you that the prints I've gotten have been outstanding in terms of their color accuracy, vibrancy, contrast, and detail. These guys won our metal print shootout in 2020 and again in 2021 for a reason!

Since I've mostly ordered metal prints from Artbeat Studios, that's the specific substrate I'd like to highlight.

Their HD metal prints are nothing short of breathtaking - the ChromaLuxe® aluminum they use offers the highest quality possible and since the image is heat infused directly into the metal, you get unparalleled color vibrancy and resolution.

So, in other words, Artbeat Studios takes their craft very seriously - and it shows!

Now, I know from experience that some printing companies talk a big game and deliver prints that are nowhere close to what was promised. But Artbeat Studios is different. They know that their products are a cut above, which is why they offer a 100 percent happiness guarantee.

If you don't like your print, just send it back and you'll get a full store credit. They're that confident in their products - and they should be!

Give Artbreat Studios a look to see for yourself. There's simply no better printing option for your portraits and landscapes!

Learn More:

Gear Options for Portrait and Landscape Photography

portrait photography 3

^{photo byGaretsworkshop via iStock}

Here’s where I may surprise some of you. Much of my gear for portraits and landscape photography are interchangeable between the two genres. In fact, I may use some of the same items for most of my photography of any kind.

What items go in my gear kit for portrait and landscape photography? If I am planning a photoshoot, I almost always have 2 cameras in my bags. In addition to having the insurance of a usable camera should one fail, I can also mount a different lens to each camera for speeding up my response to changing ideas or needs.

landscape photography

^{photo bybjdlzx via iStock}

A general setup for me has a wide lens (zoom or prime) on one body and a fast telephoto zoom on the other. Additionally, I may have a macro lens when shooting landscapes so I can capture close-ups of flowers and stuff, or I may include a really fast prime lens such as my Nifty Fifty or a short telephoto for portrait sessions in order to allow for greater application of the selective focus technique.

A good filter kit can be useful for portrait and landscape photography. With landscapes, a GND filter and a circular polarizer (C-POL) could be considered essential, while a softening filter could be useful for portraits.

There are two things I use on a regular basis for camera support for both portrait and landscape photography. A steady tripod is essential for some types of photography and there are extremely useful tripod alternatives such as the OctoPad that can do the job of a tripod without all the bulk and bother of hauling around a full-featured tripod.

OctoPad

OctoPad is a small weighted disk with a ball head on top and with a non-slip pad on the underside. It can hold a camera and lens on virtually any surface indoors or outside, even if that surface is angled up to 45 degrees. Besides mounting a camera for long exposure landscapes, you could also use it for outdoor portraits to hold a fill flash or LED lights to create great modeling effects for that portrait.

You Can Be an Expert in Both Portrait and Landscape Photography

landscape photography 2

^{photo byg-stockstudio via iStock}

You really can, since they are actually very similar in about 80 or 90 percent of what you need to do with portrait and landscape photography. And what few differences there are, usually concern how best to expose, frame, compose, and post-process the image. As an expert photographer in any of the genres, you have the skills and probably most of the equipment needed to also excel in another.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait Lighting Mistakes

Written by PT Editor on 24 April 2020.

Portrait Lighting Mistakes

^{Photo by Moose Photos from Pexels}

We are making great looking portraits with the basic and advanced portrait lighting techniques taught here. Having fun with it all, too. But nobody’s perfect. There are some common portrait lighting mistakes we should be aware of so we can eliminate them from our photo shoots.

It’s easy to look at a portrait and say that it was not lit properly. Determining what actually is going on is harder, but vital if we want to avoid these same issues recurring. I will assume you are familiar with the common portrait lighting tips, techniques, and methods from earlier portrait lighting tutorials.

Lights Too Low - Power

portrait lighting 1

^{Photo by Ary Shutter from Pexels}

Some of the most common portrait lighting mistakes involve one or more lights in our configuration being turned down to low. Several of our portrait lighting techniques are accomplished with two or more lights and positioned or adjusted for lighting ratios.

Broad lighting, short lighting, Rembrandt lighting, loop lighting, high key, low key, and other techniques rely on manipulating chiaroscuro or lighting ratio and contrasts. If we don’t have the key light at a high enough power level, then the fill light ratio may not be able to be adjusted enough for our desired portrait lighting technique.

I have a lot of different lighting options in my main studio, but if I’m in my small home studio or on location for environmental portraits, I like to use small, battery powered continuous LED lamps with remote control as my lights. The Hakutatz LED lights shown above are a great addition to my portrait lighting equipment.

The Hakutatz lights are small and portable, emit good color, and I can control them from my smartphone for a smooth portrait session. The remote control function is what I really appreciate when on location or in cramped quarters. I can be at my camera, viewing my lighting ratios, and can change them without leaving my shooting position.

Lights Too Low - Position

how to light portraits 3

^{Photo by William Carlson on Unsplash}

We know how to light portraits. Where to place the lights so we get the lighting rato we want. Sometimes, especially if in a hurry to set up, we may put in our lights in the correct position relative to the camera, but may neglect positioning at the proper height relative to the subject.

If we put the lights too high, probably not going to be much of an issue. For the most part, it won’t affect our lighting ratio or anything like that. Besides, if it’s really high up, we can see it easily.

When we place the lights too low relative to our subject’s face, then we introduce some extremely unflattering shadow effects. Under lighting makes people look scary. The effect is menacing. As kids, did you ever put a flashlight under your chin pointing up? Yeah, same effect.

how to light portraits 4

^{Photo by Augusto Lotti on Unsplash}

Even just a little below eye level will add an unnatural, undesirable shadow or contrast effect that your subject won’t like when you show them the images. Which is another reason I like using portable continuous lights like the Hakutatz when on location.

Setting up location shoots can be a little hectic sometimes. So having the instant feedback of continuous lighting helps eliminate portrait lighting mistakes like this. Without even looking through the viewfinder or at the viewscreen, you can tell if your lights are poorly placed.

Learn More:

Poor Shadow Placement

portrait lighting tips 5

^{Photo by Alexander Mils from Pexels}

This portrait lighting mistake can happen anywhere, with any type of portrait lighting equipment.

The purpose behind several of our portrait lighting techniques is creating and controlling shadows on the face of our subject. As an example, the Rembrandt lighting effect is a very specific shadow shape on the cheek of the portrait subject.

In our portrait lighting tutorials, we showed where you place the lights in order to get that triangle of light and shadow. But it’s more than just the lighting gear placement, the pose of the person also comes into play.

portrait lighting tips 6

^{Photo by Wendy Wei from Pexels}

Same thing with loop lighting, broad lighting, short lighting, and the other chiaroscuro techniques. In many instances, simply directing the portrait subject to turn their a little or tilt it one way or the other is all it takes to correct this portrait lighting mistake.

To be in control of this before even taking the picture, I either use continuous lighting or turn on the modeling lights of my strobes. Then, I will review the exposures in camera to see if any further adjustments are necessary.

Don’t take too long doing this type of image review, though. If you check after each and every click of the shutter or spend a long time reviewing, you’re likely to lose the confidence of your client or subject. And that is one of the most damaging of the common portrait lighting mistakes.

Losing the Subject’s Confidence

portrait lighting tutorial 7

^{photo by Chris6 via iStock}

The portrait subject, the person in front of your lens, is placing their trust in you as an artist and craftsman. They have confidence in you as a photographer that you know what you’re doing and are going to give them the results they desire.

The person whose picture you’re taking often knows nothing or little about portrait lighting or other portrait photography techniques. To them, that’s your job. If you’re spending their session time mucking around with your lighting configuration or chimping every shot, they won’t come back, won’t recommend you to others.

That’s not to say that you can’t review shots or adjust lighting. You still need to do that, otherwise you’ll make these other portrait lighting mistakes. Just be sure to have your basic lighting configuration set up and be confident enough in your own capability to show your own confidence to them.

Losing Your Confidence

portrait lighting tutorial 8

^{Photo by Anna Shvets from Pexels}

The worst of the portrait lighting mistakes is not having confidence in your ability, talent, or capacity to learn. You’re good enough, you’re smart enough, and dagnabbit, people like your photography!

Learn from your own mistakes how not to repeat them. Learn from the portrait lighting mistakes of others so you won't be making them in the first place.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait Lighting Tips for Couples

Written by PT Editor on 12 August 2020.

Portrait Lighting Tips for Couples

^{Photo by DreamLens Production from Pexels}

Many of the portrait lighting tips and techniques we’ve learned for individual portraits can also be applied to couples, families, or small groups. Large groups can also benefit from these techniques, but the regular portrait lighting configuration would be greatly modified to cover a large group of people.

Portrait lighting tips for couples will have to be modified somewhat from general portrait techniques to compensate for differences in height, position, and posing. So, let’s look at those issues and some good methods to take care of them.

Portrait Lighting Height

portrait lighting 1

^{Photo by Andrea Piacquadio from Pexels}

There is a high probability that the couples coming to you for portraits will be different heights. With a lot of the couples I photograph, it’s not unusual for there to be as much as a foot of height difference. If that is the case, many of our couples photography lighting tips may need to be modified a little bit.

This type of situation is why I often choose continuous LED lights as my portrait lighting gear, since being continuously on allows me to see exactly what effect my repositioning lights is having. I could also do it with the modeling lights on my strobes, but for most subjects, I tend to use LED lighting anymore.

You want the Goldilocks range for the best light height, not too high, not too low. If the light is too high, the shorter person will probably have some unflattering deep shadows under the nose and chin. Too low, and the taller person will look like they’re in a classic horror movie.

Portrait Lighting Position

portrait lighting tips 2

^{photo byImage Source via iStock}

Positioning the lights will be where the biggest changes will come with our couples photography lighting tips. Since we are dealing with two people, certain configurations such as what we may use for Rembrandt lighting or butterfly lighting may need to be modified to take into consideration having two subjects.

I like to set up my lights as a key light and a fill light and I often use diffusers such as umbrellas or softboxes. The key light will be the brighter light and my fill light will be just a little dimmer, usually a 2:1 ratio instead of the 3:1 and 4:1 that I tend to use for individual portraits.

I will also vary which sides are key and fill since I have two subjects I’m imaging. This step will go hand-in-hand with subject posing to get the best results.

Learn More:

Couple Portrait Subject Posing

portrait lighting tips for couples 3

^{photo byCarlosDavid.org via iStock}

Here is where most of the action will happen during the couples portrait session. It’s usually best for me that I choose ahead of time a couple of workable portrait lighting setups. Then, during the actual photoshoot, I will vary their posing.

We can change the direction each one is facing. Start with a mostly straight on pose, facing the camera and with their outer shoulders angled slightly toward the camera. Then switch to the inner shoulder closer. Have them turn more towards each other next and take several images, varying which light is key and fill.

Now, you can have some fun with posing and the portrait lighting by trying to get the effects and techniques such as Rembrandt lighting in our couple portraits. For example, in order to get the right shadow shape for Rembrandt lighting with two people, have them face the same direction and then direct their posing until each of them has that triangle on their cheek.

Studio and Environmental

couples photography lighting tips 4

^{Photo by Truth Enock from Pexels}

All of these couples photography lighting tips can be accomplished with your portrait lighting equipment either in your studio or out on location such as for environmental portraiture. Some of the same portrait lighting equipment can be used as well.

For location shoots, I prefer small battery powered LED continuous lights or a camera controlled electronic flash unit set up. I always plan to be able to use at least two light sources if at all possible. The two lights can be sunlight and a reflector, sunlight and a flash or LED light, or two artificial lights. I carry additional reflectors just in case.

With these portrait lighting tips for couples photography, you will be able to provide your subjects with great looking couples portraits that will enjoy viewing and sharing.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait Photography Services That Will Earn You More Money

Written by PT Editor on 03 November 2023.

Portrait Photography Services That Will Earn You More Money

^{Photo by CoffeeAndMilk via iStoc}k

Working in portrait photography is an enjoyable genre of photography, especially if you’re comfortable with dealing directly with people. In addition to the standard portrait sitting, there are several other portrait photography services you can offer to clients.

We’ve compiled a few portrait photography tips, including some of the various portrait photography services you can use to improve your bottom line.

Portrait Photography Services - Headshots

Portrait Photography Services Headshots

^{photo by FangXiaNuo via iStock}

Many classic or formal portraits are head and shoulders, ¾ length, and full length. All of these poses go all the way back to the pre-photography days of painted portraits.

Think of “Girl with a Pearl Earring” by Johannes Vermeer for head and shoulders, “Portrait of a Young Man” by Bronzino for ¾ length, and Louis XIV by Hyacinthe Rigaud for a full-length portrait. All of these show that formal portraits are a time-honored art that has carried over into photography.

A relative newcomer to poses for portrait photography is the straight-on headshot. I’m sure this pose and crop was around for a while, but it really came on the scene with images used for self-promotion. The “Glossies” that actors, models, and other performing artists passed out are most often tightly cropped headshots.

A use for headshots in digital photography and web-based communication is putting a face with a name in online applications, ID cards for businesses, and also for adding to a business card’s info pack.

Providing a well-crafted, properly focused, nicely lit portrait with some post-process smoothing makes your client stand out from the crowd of low-quality, poorly lit selfies from a cell phone.

It’s a simple task to add this to a regular portrait sitting...

Just have the portrait client square up their shoulders with the camera as you tighten your framing. You can use the same lights (but in a butterfly lighting pattern). The result is that you've added portrait photography services to their package while also adding to your bottom-line profits.

Portrait Photography Services - Environmental Portraits

Portrait Photography Services Environmental Portraits

It will be a little different than adding an extra simple pose to your studio portrait sitting, but environmental portraits are an important part of portrait photography that can be added to your portfolio of portrait photography services.

The setting of the portrait characterizes environmental portrait photography. Environmental portrait photography services can be framed as a long shot with all sorts of things in the frame that help define a person or their job, or you can crop in tighter while still showing an interesting side to your client.

Artists, artisans, and craftsmen like to have their work area or their finished works included in an environmental portrait. In contrast, a dog lover environmental portrait could work with a closer view of the person and their pets.

Environmental portraits can be added to your repertoire of portrait photography services and can set your portrait photography business apart from your competition. Whether it’s done for group portraits, families, couples, or individuals, environmental portraits can both to your good reputation as a portrait artist and to your bottom line profits.

Portrait Photography Services - Classic Canvas Prints

Portrait Photography Services Classic Canvas Prints

How a client displays your portrait photography work creates additional portrait photography services that can earn your business more money.

Two excellent products that come to mind are Canvas Prints and Wood Prints from Printique, the professional printing company under the umbrella of Adorama companies servicing professional and other serious photographers.

Canvas Prints from Printique are printed on durable, long-lasting cotton canvas material and hand-stretched over 1.5” pine frames. These can be made from black and white or color digital files and are perfect for displaying your gorgeous portrait photography.

Wood Prints from Printique

Wood Prints from Printique are a unique way to display portrait photography and can be added to your portrait photography packages for increased profit potential.

Whatever style of portrait photography services you provide and what prints you offer, here is a helpful YouTube video from the Printique channel covering how to post-process for the best results with the various printing methods available from Printique:

Portrait Photography Services - Fun Themes

Portrait Photography Services Fun Themes

Another idea for extra portrait photography services that you can use to add extra sales and extra profit for your professional portrait photography business model is to step away from the formal approach and add some light-hearted elements to the portraits.

This can be done in several different ways. In the studio, props can be added for all kinds of themes, from holidays to events like graduations, or for the interest of the portrait photography client, such as hobbies or sports.

Besides props, simply going to a different location can add a fun theme. It doesn’t have to be environmental portrait photography; it can be all of the regular poses and styles we already do, just in a different, fun location.

Another idea is to use post-processing portrait photography tips such as filters, overlays, and plug-ins to create fun themes after the photoshoot. From an easy sepia-toned vignette to making an animated GIF, these can be added to your packages for extra profit.

Make use of these portrait photography tips and ideas for adding new portrait photography services to your portrait photography business.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait Photography Tip: How to Create a Low-Key Portrait

Written by PT Editor on 16 December 2019.

Portrait Photography Tip How to Create a Low Key Portrait

^{photo byLookAod via iStock}

When creating portraits, control of the lighting is an essential factor in whether it will turn out as a wonderfully artful portrait or merely as a snapshot of the subject.

Some of the basic lighting styles and configurations allow a photographer to control shadows, highlights, and contrast.

Beginner portrait photography tips show you common lighting configurations, or how to place the lights. They include Rembrandt lighting, butterfly lighting, short lighting, and broad lighting, among others.

Lighting styles can use all of the different configurations or setups, and are generally separated into high-key, mid-key, and low-key.

Portrait Photography: Low-Key vs High-Key
How to Create a Low-Key Portrait
Other Portrait Photography Tips
Low-Key for High Quality

Portrait Photography: Low-Key vs High-Key

Most snapshots will fall into the range of mid-key. Averaging and evaluative metering modes in modern digital cameras tend to expose for a natural look.

High-key and low-key go beyond the average look. They are also sometimes referred to as mood lighting. A high-key image evokes a light and airy mood. Low-key feels subdued or dark, edgy even.

low key vs high key 1

^{High-key image by Stephen Harker}

low key vs high key 2

^{Low-key image by Stephen Harker}

As an example of what I mean, take a look at two photos above of the same exact thing, one exposed for high-key and one for low-key. Both of them are properly exposed, but they have two distinctly different moods to them.

It’s All About Contrast

In order to achieve these moods, contrast is what needs to be controlled. Lighting ratio adjustment is one of the primary ways to control contrast.

Portrait photography tips sometimes skip over talking about high-key and low-key, even though they are teaching lighting ratios by showing the different lighting configurations.

portrait photography

^{photo byJenae Spriensma via iStock}

To create a high-key effect, the contrast ratio needs to be lowered. This usually means that a low ratio of fill light to key light will be used. Ratios of 1:1, 1.5:1, or 2:1 make it easy to get the high-key look.

Generally, at least two lights will be used for high-key. A single soft light can also give you a high-key effect. Lighting the background also helps with creating a high-key effect.

portrait photography tips

^{photo byOtmarW via iStock}

Low-key lighting is higher contrast. Ratios of 3:1, 5:1, or higher are useful for creating a low-key look. Just one light is needed, but multiple lights allow for more control of the ratios.

Exposure settings will need to be correct for the best results. One thought to get out of one’s head is that low-key is underexposed and high-key is overexposed. Both require proper exposure, just change the contrast ratios.

How To Create a Low-Key Portrait

low key portrait

^{photo byKangah via iStock}

The secret to a great low-key portrait is using the right lights. You could use sunlight, provided you place the subject carefully.

A consistent way to get proper lighting for a low-key portrait is to use artificial lights. The two basic genres of artificial lights are strobes and continuous lights.

Strobes can be studio strobes, camera flash units, or portable strobes. Several current DSLR and mirrorless camera systems have remote flash metering and triggering, allowing for off-camera flash placement while maintaining exposure automation.

Continuous lights emit a steady light, so you can readily discern what your lighting ratios are while setting up the light or lights. I like the new breed of battery powered LED photo/video lights, such as the Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB+AW LED Light.

Learn More:

Rembrandt Lighting for Low-Key Portraits

how to create a low key portrait

^{photo byredhumv via iStock}

One of the better lighting configurations for low-key portraits is the technique called Rembrandt lighting. Rembrandt lighting can be set up with one or two lights, even with window light. It creates the perfect ratios for low-key portraits.

This lighting technique is named after the Renaissance era painter Rembrandt Harmenszoon van Rijn. His portraits often had a low-key lighting effect with a specific pattern of light and shadow.

beginner portrait photography tips

^{photo bymbbirdy via iStock}

The key light is set about 45 degrees to the side of the subject and a few degrees above the subject’s eye level. Have the person face the light and then turn their head toward the camera until you see that triangle of light under the eye in the shadow.

Besides Rembrandt lighting, there are other lighting setups that work well for low-key portraits, such as loop lighting, a less specific style similar to Rembrandt, and split lighting, with about an even split between light and shadow.

Broad lighting and butterfly lighting can be used well for low-key portraits. Any of these can be done with multiple light sources if you want to play around with them.

Learn More:

The Advantage of a Small LED Light

hakutatz 1

Looking for lights that are bright, portable, and easy to use led me to try these out. The battery life is pretty good, the LED bulbs are cool operating, and the color temperature of the light can be adjusted, all of which are plusses for a portable light for portrait photography.

hakutatz 2

Continuous lights like this one have an additional advantage. They can be used with smartphone cameras. Modern smartphones such as the iPhone 11 Pro, Google Pixel 4, and Samsung Galaxy Note 10 Plus have amazing capabilities for portrait photography.

The Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB+AW LED Light has an app that lets your smartphone control the light’s color and intensity. Multiple lights can be used, too. But this is just one of many high quality, small LED lights for photo and video.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open soon.

Other Portrait Photography Tips

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo bygorodenkoff via iStock}

Some other ways to increase contrast are with a post-processing programs or use snoots or spotlights instead of a softbox of other light diffuser.

You can also increase contrast by raising the ISO on the camera, which also can have the effect of increasing digital noise, resulting in a hard, grainy look to the finished portrait. Experiment to see how much each adjustment changes the final image.

Low-Key for High Quality

how to create a low key portrait 2

^{Photo by Dan Freeman on Unsplash}

Despite the hard edge that low-key portrait lighting can lend to an image, one of the other effects is that it can generate an attitude of high-class luxury. This will also work with product photography and certain types of fine art photography.

Whether you’re using one of the new smartphones or a sophisticated DSLR or mirrorless camera system, give some of these ideas a try for low-key portrait photography.

We Recommend

Portrait Posing Tips for Beginners

Written by PT Editor on 26 October 2021.

Portrait Posing Tips for Beginners

^{photo byLeoPatrizi via iStock}

When you first start working with models or clients directly, it can be a little overwhelming. Not only are you worried about your composition and your lighting and all of the other technical aspects of your photographs, but you’re also worried about trying to pose people.

Unfortunately, so many people feel uncomfortable behind a camera, so it’s really going to be up to you to have a list of portrait posing tips ready to go for them.

Thankfully, there are plenty of options online. Jessica Kobeissi recently released a portrait photography tutorial that included a bunch of portrait photography tips that are easy to implement and fun to use.

I highly recommend you watch her entire video to really help you learn how to pose models for portraits, but if you don’t have time to do so, I’ll compile all of her portrait posing tips in a condensed form here.

Get Your Model Comfortable

portrait posing tips

^{photo byGalina Zhigalova via iStock}

If you completely ignore all of the other portrait posing tips on this list, don’t ignore this one. Make sure that your model is comfortable.

I do this in a few ways. For starters, I make some small talk with my models when we first meet. I ask how their day is going. I make sure that they had the chance to eat before they came and that they have some water ready to go.

After this, I quickly walk them through our goals for the day. I explain where I’m planning on shooting them and why. I explain what sorts of shots I want to get. Basically, I’m proving to them that I’m a professional that’s going to get an incredible shot of them, regardless of how they “perform.”

Finally, I give them positive feedback throughout the shoot. Nobody wants to work with a photographer who is doing nothing but staring at their camera and mumbling to themselves.

Be Specific

posing tips for portraits

^{photo byphotographer via iStock}

Portrait photography won’t work if your model looks terrified and they will look terrified if you don’t give them specific portrait posing tips.

So, instead of telling them to “fix their hair,” tell them to pull one specific strand of their hair out of their ponytail. Instead of telling them to “smile,” tell them to think about their most embarrassing story from childhood. Instead of telling them to lengthen their body, suggest that they reach up and try to touch the ceiling.

Then, while they’re moving to pose as you suggested, you can likely grab some good shots along the way.

Learn More:

Get Them to Play

how to pose models for portraits

^{photo by eclipse_images via iStock}

I don’t know when we all decided to stop playing as adults, but I’m not a fan. One of the best portrait posing tips you can use is to stop worrying about exact poses and instead worry about making sure that your model is having fun.

Some of my favorite fashion photographers regularly take photos of their models playing on swingsets, rollerblading, or messing around with one another. If you can find some sort of a game for your model to play, their true emotions are going to come out and your photos will end up being way better.

Don’t Micromanage

portrait photography

^{photo bydikushin via iStock}

If you’ve noticed one theme throughout all of these portrait posing tips it’s that you’re giving your model a lot of autocracy with each of them. This is because every model is going to have a different personality and if you throw too many portrait posing tips at them, then their personality isn’t going to be able to shine.

So, as much as you may want to, don’t micromanage them. Don’t give them too many poses or too much direction. If you’re doing this right, then you’ll likely notice you will need to give them more direction towards the beginning of the shoot, but as they get more comfortable, you may not need to give them any direction towards the end.

Use Reference Photos

portrait photography tips

^{photo byErdark via iStock}

If you’re trying to get a really specific shot, or if your model is trying to get a really specific shot, it’s a whole lot easier to use reference photos to show one another instead of trying to explain what the shot should look like.

For this reason, I like to keep a Pinterest board of different types of poses for different shoots that I go out on. If my models are ever truly lost, I can show them my reference photos and have them mimic these.

Use Props

portrait photography tutorial

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

If you haven’t noticed, a lot of these posing tips for portraits play into one another. I already mentioned that you should find things for your models to play around with. If you’re having a tough time finding that out in your shooting environment, then bring props.

Your models will be able to play around with them, which will give them something else to worry about than their posing and the camera. Plus, props can genuinely bring another element to your composition that makes your photos otherworldly.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait Print Sizing Guide: Guidelines for a Perfect Print

Written by PT Editor on 21 September 2022.

Portrait Print Sizing Guide

As a professional portrait photographer, you have made many portrait prints for your clients. If you are newly breaking into the fun field of portrait photography for profit, you will soon be providing your subjects with a variety of portrait prints.

I find that part of the fun of creating portraits is the many choices we have for the end product, the portrait prints. There are sizes from small enough to fit in a wallet to lifesize (or larger) enlargements, different types of papers to use for portrait prints, and at least three separate photo orientations available.

Here are some ideas concerning all of the options in front of us as we fulfill our client orders with portrait prints.

The Photo Shoot - Give Yourself Options for Portrait Prints

print sizing guide

^{photo byYakobchukOlena via iStock}

The variables surrounding the end product of portrait prints start during the photo shoot itself. Shooting in either portrait orientation or landscape orientation can either provide you with options down the road for portrait prints or limit your choices.

The vertical orientation, also called portrait orientation, is a natural method for portrait photography and transfers seamlessly most of the time to creating portrait prints. There are posing considerations to factor in, too, such as how close to frame the subject in the frame.

Sometimes it’s a good idea to shoot in the horizontal or landscape orientation while framing with lots of extra space or negative space included. The background and the lighting style also come into play when looking at the end product of portrait prints.

If you need a little more inspiration for your portraits, check out the video above.

In it, Bach Photography offers up more than a dozen highly effective, yet easy portrait photography tips to help you get started.

What Orientation to Use for Portrait Prints

portrait photography tips

^{photo bystevecoleimages via iStock}

Sometimes, the best orientation for portrait prints isn’t portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal) but square. A very powerful statement can be made by framing with a square portrait print as the intended final result.

Of course, the portrait orientation is a common framing method for taking portrait photographs. Excellent results in portrait orientation can be had when including lighting styles, composition tools, and posing positions.

For environmental portraits, sometimes the horizontal or landscape orientation is the framing method of choice. A horizontal image with lots of extra space filled with other identifying objects or as negative space makes wonderful portrait images, which in turn makes fantastic portrait prints.

Learn More:

Sizing Guide for Portrait Prints

portrait photography

^{photo byAltinosmanaj via iStock}

Artbeat Studios is one of the best printers for making physical prints of our portrait images. They make so many sizes of portrait prints, from heavily cropped images to making use of the entirety of the image file.

A Full Frame format image, printed from the entire image file, will have a different size than some of the more common print sizes we’re used to. For instance, an 8x10” portrait print looks great, and it involves cropping the image area from a Full Frame format image file. In order to use the entire area, that same enlargement magnification would result in an 8x12” portrait print.

At Artbeat Studios, you can order portrait prints in sizes ranging from 4x6” all the way up to the huge 48x96” enlargement. That’s 4x8 feet! You can actually make your portrait subject as a larger-than-life portrait print.

In your own image post-processing work, you can also make any number of smaller frames and then print them as an enlargement. For example, you can print 8 to 10 wallet-sized images on a single 8x10” sheet of printing paper. There are presets for most programs concerning these types of options.

Paper Types for Portrait Prints

The types of paper for portrait prints also affect the final outcome of the paper products. Artbeat Studios has four styles of papers you can use for your own portrait prints. Their luster papers are some of my favorites for making portrait prints. Luster also works well for framed images, having a lower sheen than gloss, making them easier to view comfortably.

Sometimes, glossy papers work best for portrait prints, especially when you have lots of color or lighting contrasts in the image file. Not to be overlooked are the metallic papers and fine art papers Artbeat Studios has as options.

Other Variables of Portrait Prints

portrait photography 2

In addition to the posing, post-processing, lighting style, and paper types and sizes, a good frame can add to the impact of the final portrait print. Artbeat Studios makes frames in flat white or flat black in two depths, 0.75" x 1.375" and also 1.125" x .75".

Finally, fulfilling your client’s portrait prints orders can be accomplished simply by using Artbeat Studios white label shipping. Take advantage of their loyalty pricing as well, that way you can benefit from favorable pricing for using Artbeat Studios as your portrait print maker of choice.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Portrait Tips for Women

Written by PT Editor on 15 May 2020.

Portrait Tips for Women

^{photo bySolStock via iStock}

Portrait photographers love to make their subjects look good. Portrait lighting, exposure, and focus techniques are complemented by portrait posing tips for women. All of these work together to let us portray our subject in the most flattering way.

Making portraits of women is available for any photographer, male or female, young or old, professional or serious amature. Knowing how to pose female subjects gives us the power to control most of the variables that could affect the finished image for good or bad.

Look in some of our articles for advanced and basic tips and techniques concerning portrait lighting, selective focus, and composition. For this discussion, we’ll concentrate on posing tips for portraits of women.

Some of these portrait posing tips are focused on what you can do before the photo shoot begins and others will highlight how to pose female subjects while you’re in the photo shoot.

Find Their Good Side

portrait posing tips for women 1

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

Almost everyone knows which side is their good side. In portraits of women, this works in regards to their face and also their figure. Just ask your subject . And then play to that perceived strength of theirs, providing good direction of course.

This will have an added benefit of giving the portrait subject a good reason to trust you. Trust that you will be delivering a portrait that they will enjoy and feel comfortable sharing.

Look At a Portrait Posing Guide

how to photograph female subjects 2

^{photo by Iam Anupong via iStock}

To find out how to pose female subjects, I like to look at the work of other artists. Usually I find some inspiration for posing, composition, and for lighting. I also use preprinted posing guides.

Posing guides can be found in electronic form, too. An advantage of using posing guides for portrait posing tips is that a picture speaks a thousand words. Instead of attempting to describe how you want the subject to pose, show them.

Consult or Use Hair and Makeup Pros

how to photograph female subjects 3

^{photo by Drazen Lovric via iStock}

A lot of photographers have arrangements with other artists to perform work for each other. Or, you might offer discounts to each other for the services needed. The portrait subject might have friends or a regular beautician they go to.

Any way it works, making use of a hair and makeup professional before a photoshoot is a good idea. Many women do a great job on their own, but professionals have tips and tricks of their own that will give better results.

Choose the Right Lens

portraits of women 4

^{photo by PeopleImages via iStock}

As with any portrait subject, the right lens will give you the best options for your intended results. You will have a pretty good idea of what results are desired by you and the portrait subject. For portraits of women, the lens choice will also depend on what type or style of composition you want.

Portrait posing tips for women or men show us that the focal length of the lens can make a huge difference in the type or style of image you end up with. If you want a head and shoulders portrait, you would likely use a short telephoto lens. For full length portraits of women, a normal lens or a slight wide angle may be a better choice.

Another option for portraits of women is the environmental portrait. A slightly different set of portrait posing tips or posing guides are helpful for this style of portrait. Environmental portraits are a wonderful way to have a subject tell a story about themselves.

Learn More:

Light It Properly

portraits of women 5

^{photo by shapecharge via iStock}

Some of the most valuable portrait posing tips take into account how you relate the lighting configuration to the composition and how to pose female subjects.

When taking environmental portraits of women in their own homes or offices or anywhere outside of your own studio, controlling the light can be a major concern. SMall, battery powered, portable LED lights are extremely useful tools for our on location portrait sessions.

hakutatz 4

A versatile and high quality version of this type of light is the Hakutatz LED light. One of the biggest advantages this light has, besides its small size and correct color temperature adjustment, is the ability to control its functions from your smartphone.

You will need to relate the lighting configuration to your posing thoughts ahead of time and then adjust during shooting as need be.

Warm Up and Relax

tips for portraits 6

^{Photo by Daria Shevtsova from Pexels}

Ambient temperature notwithstanding, an important portrait tip is we want to have our subject warm up to us so they are relaxed during our photo session. As the photographer, you need to relax, too.

Since you will be verbally directing the subject into various positions and poses, having a rapport with the subject will allow you to get the subject to follow your direction and your own portrait posing tips.

Don’t Get Too Close

tips for portraits 7

^{photo by demaerre via iStock}

A common failure of snapshots as opposed to good portraits is being physically too close to the subject. We can generally obtain a better apparent perspective by using a longer lens and having some distance between us and the subject.

Keeping a little distance can add an air of professionalism to our session as well. An important portrait posing tip is that people are generally somewhat protective of their personal space. Intruding on the space can reduce all the relaxation we worked so hard to create.

You don’t want any lights you’re using to be too close either. Even with tiny portable lights, if you have a lamp with enough power, like the Hakutatz LED light, you can simply dial up the power level to adjust for movement of the subject. Which relates to the next of our portrait posing tips for women.

Keep Them Moving

portrait photography tips 8

^{photo by Prostock-Studio via iStock}

As you’re triggering the shutter, keep talking to your portrait subject, and keep them moving in and out of different poses and compositions. A good rule of thumb is to have them change something after every time they hear the shutter.

Tilt and Pivot

portrait photography tips 9

^{Photo by Ali Pazani from Pexels}

What movements do you want from the subject? I like to tell them to tilt and pivot. If you have already discussed some portrait posing tips for women with them, you can give them some guidance for what poses to move into.

Tilt the head and pivot the torso. Tilt the torso and pivot the head. Tilt and pivot legs, feet, wands, arms. If you have the subject relaxed, they will fall into poses that feel natural to them. The biggest responsibility for the photographer at this point is to make sure their poses stay flattering and to also ensure your camera and light placement stays in positions that will enhance the portraits.

Review the Images Before Ending Session

how to photograph women

^{photo by fizkes via iStock}

One last thing that often helps, especially in environmental portraits of women, is to review a few of the images with your client. Some photographers don’t like to do this step, and that’s fine. What I like about this step is that I can give the portrait subject assurance that all went well. I also get to reassure myself that I captured images that really favors the subject.

Using these portrait posing tips for women will result in your images being flattering to the subject as beautiful portraits.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Practical Portrait Photography Tips for Photographing Your Teenager

Written by PT Editor on 28 February 2020.

Practical Portrait Photography Tips for Photographing Your Teenager

^{Photo by Joy Deb from Pexels}

Your child has probably been a portrait subject of yours since birth, maybe even before.

Now that they are teenagers, the opportunities for making portraits continue. In fact, the opportunities increase!

The portrait photography tips provided below for making images of your teenagers are simple to implement. Use these tips to improve your photos and make images that you and your child can appreciate.

How to Photograph Teens

portrait photography tips 1

^{Photo by AndriyKo Podilnyk on Unsplash}

Creating a pleasant portrait of a teenager is easier than you might think.

Part of the beauty of youth is just that, the beauty of youth. Using high-quality equipment, implementing the rules of composition and good posing, and making good use of portrait lighting techniques will give you great portraits of the young men or women in your family.

Photographing teens could also be a decent source of income by means of senior portrait sessions.

Senior portraits are one of the most desirable pictures teens and their parents are wanting at that momentous time of their life where they are transitioning from the life of high school to the adult world.

Let’s have a look at some top tips on how to photograph teens.

Poses For Teenagers

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

One of the more difficult aspects of how to photograph teens is finding poses for them that don’t make them feel self-conscious.

A couple of general or all-purpose portrait photography tips that I am fond of are to give subjects something to do with their hands or to turn your session into a lifestyle portrait.

portrait photography tips 3

^{photo by Sergii Gnatiuk via iStock}

Both of these options help cross that huge gap that sometimes exists between the subject and the lens. Putting the subject at ease is another method that results in pleasant, natural-feeling poses.

Sometimes all that’s needed is to hand your portrait subject one familiar item. When I try out this method, I like to stay away from any gender stereotyping. If a young woman enjoys auto mechanics or drafting, or if a young man is an amazing artist or dancer, play to their strengths

Above all, whatever method or technique used, poses for teenagers should feel comfortable for the young subject. A self-conscious person or a person forcing a pose will both appear uncomfortable and unnatural. In my experience, this applies especially to teenagers and younger people.

how to photograph teens 5

^{photo by AndreyPopov via iStock}

Find out what works for you. Work with teenagers you know, perhaps relatives or your own children, or the kids of your close friends.

Once you figure out what is beneficial for your style or brand of photography, branch out to others if you want to start making great senior portraits.

Included in my personal tips for photographing teens is this safety message: Please stay off of train tracks. Several reasons…They are dangerous. It’s illegal trespassing in many jurisdictions. The pose on a train track image is passe and cliche anyways. Stay safe!

Learn More:

Portrait Lighting Tips for Teenagers

tips for photographing teens 7

^{Photo by Tavqeer Athar from Pexels}

Most of the standard lighting techniques for any style of portrait will suffice. A lot of times, instead of attempting to employ a specific technique or configuration such as Rembrandt lighting or broad lighting, I will go with the feel or atmosphere desired by subject and photographer.

Primarily, I will attempt to create either high-key or low-key images. The main difference between the two is contrast. High-key lighting will have small ratios of key to fill light. Common ratios are 2:1 or 1:1. The colors don't have to be bright or the image overexposed, just a low lighting ratio.

how to photograph teens 6

^{Photo by NEOSiAM 2020 from Pexels}

In contrast, a low-key effect will have higher ratios, such as 3:1, 5:1, or higher. To keep it simple, high-key has low lighting ratios, low-key has high lighting ratios.

These two styles create a mood more than they do anything else. Regardless of colors or scene brightness, high-key tends to come across as light and airy, while low-key is somber and serious.

hakutatz 1

Artificial lighting is often the real key to achieving either of these lighting and exposure styles. An easy to use, portable, high quality I’ve been enjoying lately is the Hakutatz Pocket Size LED Light. It has excellent color and brightness, is completely variable in power and color output, and can be controlled by a smartphone.

One or two continuous lights, strategically placed, can give you complete control over style, mood, and exposure. If you’ve been searching for a portable light with excellent color and brightness, consider the Hakutatz LED Light.

Photographing Teens Can Be Fun

poses for teenagers 8

^{photo by AntonioGuillem via iStock}

It can also be a profitable endeavor, if that’s what your intent is. Senior photography is one of the fastest growing and changing genres of portrait photography. Present some examples of your own quality imagery and you could be very busy during graduation season.

Making fun or moody portraits of your own teenage children can provide years of family interest and happy memories. It’s surprisingly easy.

poses for teenagers 9

^{Photo by JT Kim from Pexels}

To sum it all up: give them comfortable posing direction, light it properly for whatever style of image you’re trying to make, make use of the tips and techniques of exposure, lens selection, and composition you already know, and put your subject at ease. Also be sure to check out the “Learn More” links in this article for even more guidance.

Following and expanding from these portrait photography tips will result in portraits you will treasure for years to come.

Learn More:

Start your canvas print today!

We Recommend

Quick and Simple Portrait Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 23 October 2019.

^{photo by Ranta Images via iStock}

Out of all photography niches, portrait photography is one of my favorites because you can immediately see the impact of your work on the model.

It’s also a chance to break out of the boring routine of editing and shooting inanimate objects. Models each have their own unique personalities and it’s a challenge to figure out how to display them through your work.

So, let’s dive in and go over some easy portrait photography tips that will help you improve the quality of the portraits you create.

Work With Your Subject Before the Shoot
Don’t Ignore the Background
Find the Most Flattering Focal Length
Try One-Light Portraits
Make the Portrait Shine With a Beautiful Canvas Print

Work With Your Subject Before the Shoot

portrait photography

^{photo bymonkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Sometimes, I get too in my head and forget to walk models through what a photoshoot is like. For many of them, this may be the only time they ever do this, so make it a good experience.

I like to sit my subject down and talk to them about what the photoshoot is going to be like and ask for any specific requests from them. What are they comfortable with? What are they uncomfortable with?

I also like to have some funny quips at the ready for use during the shoot. A good one for couples is always: “whisper your favorite Taco Bell order to them, as sexy as you can.” But, feel free to play around and find quips that are just ridiculous enough to get your subjects to laugh. If they’re laughing, you’ll get a much more relaxed, natural, and comfortable look in your portraits.

Tommy Reynolds is one of my favorite photographers because he gives genuinely down-to-earth advice to those just starting in the portrait photography world.

Watch his video for 6 helpful portrait photography tips on how to make sure your subject is on the same page as you.

Don’t Ignore the Background

portrait photography tips 1

^{photo by Marko Rupena via iStock}

A good background can a make or break a portrait. It should be clean (and not distracting like the one in the image above).

Depending on what you want to showcase about your subject, the background should add to the story you're telling, not take away from it. If you are shooting on location, learn about the places your clients feel strong ties to, as this will help them feel comfortable in front of the camera and help you create a meaningful photograph too.

portrait photography tips 2

^{photo by dml5050 via iStock}

You can use the background in portrait photography to highlight anything you want to about your subject, be it their clothes, the color of their hair or eyes, or their makeup.

Just make sure you know what your model will be wearing before the shoot so you can plan accordingly to find just the right background.

Use the Most Flattering Focal Length

simple portrait photography tips 1

^{photo by FangXiaNuo via iStock}

Many portrait photographers like to shoot with an 85mm. This is a small telephoto lens that doesn't distort your subject's face.

At 85mm, you can put some distance between you and the subject, which can help them relax because there’s not a lens shoved in their face, as is the case when you use a shorter focal length lens.

The problem with 85mm lenses is they can be pretty expensive.

A good alterinative to an 85mm lens is a 50mm lens. These lenses don't show much distorion and you can pick up a 50mm f/1.8 lens without breaking the bank. The large aperature will give you a nice bokeh effect in the background too.

simple portrait photography tips 2

^{photo byundefined undefined via iStock}

If you go with a focal length shorter than 50mm, say a 35mm, your subject’s face will start to become distorted.

Basically, the parts of their face that are closest to the camera will become enlarged while the parts that are furthest away from the camera, like their ears, will become appear smaller.

This isn’t necessarily a bad thing, it’s just something to think about when choosing the focal length with which you are shooting.

All focal lengths can be flattering, depending upon what the subject wants and what you want the photo to say. You just need to become familiar with how different focal lengths behave so you can tailor your lens selection to your goals and the goals of the model.

Editors Note: Cameras with cropped sensors (APS-C) give lenses a longer effective focal length than they actually have. Essentially,that inexpensive 50mm lens you have will give you a look that is closer to an 85mm. Cameras have different crop factors (i.e., Nikon is 1.5x and Canon is 1.6x). Just bear this in mind as you shop for the perfect portrait lens!

Learn More:

Try One-Light Portraits

Sean Tucker shoots incredible in-studio portraits with a single light, and he walks you through how to do it in the video above.

I’m of the personal opinion that in-studio portrait photography is much more difficult than shooting portraits out in the field. Firstly, because it’s harder for your subject to be themselves in such a professional setting with lots of equipment pointed at them. Secondly, I just don’t feel that I can be as free with the background when I’m in the studio.

easy portrait photography tips

^{Photo by Drew Hays on Unsplash}

But, I also think it’s important to learn to use one light with your portraits because once you have that skill down you will always be prepared to take a portrait.

As shown in the portrait above, having one, bright light helps illuminate the model’s face and clearly defines his profile against the dark background.

And there are many other single-light portrait techniques you can use to create dramatic photos. Check out this tutorial for a quick overview of some of the most common ways to use a single light for portraiture.

Make the Portrait Shine With a Beautiful Canvas Print

No portrait photography tips are going to make your subject happier than this one: get it professionally crafted into a canvas print.

CanvasHQ, my go-to canvas printing company, puts so much individual effort into each one of your prints.

They hand build the frame, stretch each one individually, and only use the best inks (the kind that won’t fade after years of being displayed on the wall).

They have a 100% satisfaction guarantee, too. If there’s a problem with your print, just send it back within 30 days to get your money back or a new print delivered.

They also have a timer on their website that tells you how long you would need to wait to get your print produced if you sent it in that day. Nice!

They also almost always have a sale going on, for up to 35% off canvas prints, so you can get breathtaking canvas prints without breaking the bank.

They also won PhotographyTalk’s Best Canvas Print Company of 2019 for their use of high-quality materials, so there’s that too!

When you go through all the effort to create a beautiful portrait, why waste is all by having a tiny paper print made? Instead, showcase your portraits by turning them into a large canvas print that can be enjoyed for generations.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Quick Tips for Better Portraits of Kids

Written by PT Editor on 26 May 2020.

Quick Tips for Better Portraits of Kids

^{photo byDanielBendjy via iStock}

Everyone loves taking pictures of their kids or having pictures done of their kids. If you are taking portraits of kids for yourself or for others, there are some tips and ideas we have found helpful concerning how to photograph kids.

Child photography tips and ideas will help us get better images of kids. Posing tips for kids, portrait lighting ideas, techniques for action photography, equipment choices, and other child photography ideas give us the tools to capture excellent images.

Start With Familiarity

portraits of kids 1

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

As with most attempts at portraiture, making really good portraits of kids requires a little bit of knowledge, or familiarity, of our photographic equipment, the basic rules and methods of good photography, and of our subject.

General child photography ideas and tips are similar to our other photographic endeavors. Being very familiar with the controls and features of our camera and other gear is vital. How can we expect to fully know how to photograph kids well if we’re still unsure of what exposure or focus mode to use to achieve particular results?

posing tips for kids 2

^{photo byanandabgd via istock}

Thankfully, it’s not hard to learn how to use the modes and features of our gear. All it really takes is a little time and practice. If the kids are your own kids, use them as willing and fun subjects while getting familiar with your camera, lens, flash, portable lighting, filters, and other neat stuff.

Taking portraits of kids for other people is going to feel a little bit different than with your own children. Taking a little time to get familiar with your young subjects will pay off big time with great results. If you don’t already know them, chat with them and their parents. Be friendly and warm, holding the camera up for them to see.

If the kid is comfortable with you, the poses and expressions are going to be more natural and relaxed. They will also be more open to taking direction from you about changing position and expressions. All of this will result in better portraits of kids.

Portrait Lighting for Kids

how to photograph kids 3

^{Photo by Victoria Borodinova from Pexels}

Once again, the same portrait lighting tips for adults will mostly cross over to taking portraits of kids. The one thing I like to do is to keep it as natural appearing as possible. So, this pretty much eliminates the dramatic lighting configurations such as Rembrandt lighting and other techniques such low key effects.

That’s not to say that you shouldn’t ever take portraits of kids with these techniques and configurations. You may have a certain look or style that will mesh well with the intended subject. Personally, I love Rembrandt lighting and other similar styles on a wide variety of subjects, even pets, but speaking for general kids pics, natural seems to work best most of the time.

hakutatz 1

In the studio or in the field, I have come to value lightweight, cordless, simple lighting gear for portraits of kids. Portraits of children often involve a lot more movement than portrait sessions with adults. So, lightweight and portable are key factors for portrait lighting gear.

hakutatz 2

A light I have been extremely pleased with since it was first introduced on Kickstarter is the Hakutatz LED light that is battery powered and can be controlled by my smartphone. The Hakutatz LED light is very lightweight, has excellent control functions, and emits clean, high-quality light.

Learn More:

Environmental Portraits of Kids

child photography ideas 4

^{photo bysam74100 via iStock}

An excellent way to get a natural look for portraits is to shoot in an environment that is not your studio. Especially with kids, there’s just something about a studio set up that stiffens them up.

A local park or playground, a baseball or football field, a flower garden, or their own backyard are fantastic spots to take environmental portraits of kids. Inside their own home is another option, valuable to consider during bad weather.

The spot you’re using for the pics should be either the kid is very familiar with or that makes them feel comfortable and relaxed. Some of my favorite spots are neighborhood parks that tend to have multiple features, such as flowers, trees, grassy areas, and playground equipment.

Posing Tips for Kids

child photography tips 5

^{photo byronniechua via iStock}

Speak to the child using their first name, or whatever name is the one their parents and friends call them by. For younger children, this allows you to capture their attention, even if only fleetingly, so you get them to interact with you and the camera. With older children, it can make them feel more comfortable with you pointing a camera at them.

Concentrate on simple poses, allowing them to move in and of different positions, poses, and facial expressions. Tone of voice is important when directing them - a kind, upbeat manner goes a long way towards ensuring good results.

Especially with younger kids, props can be a great help. This gives them something to do so they won’t feel or act too self-conscious about being photographed.

Camera Position is Key

portrait lighting for kids 6

^{Photo by Thgusstavo Santana from Pexels}

You may have seen this or heard it many times, but you really do need to be on the same level as the kid for good portraits of kids. Otherwise, even if you light it perfectly, it will still remind people of the snapshots they already have on their smartphones. The kid looking up may be a familiar view, but that same kid looking straight at the camera without craning their neck is a very nice view.

How old the kid is, their personality, and even the parent’s demeanor can all affect the final results of your child portrait session. Using these tips and ideas should get you more usable images for portraits with your own kids or for portraits of other people’s children.

Have fun with it, relax, be familiar with the young subject, and you will get good portraits of kids.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Quick Tips for Great Self-Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 28 May 2020.

Quick Tips for Great Self Portraits

^{photo byPeopleImages via iStock}

There’s never been a better time to practice self-portraits, considering many parts of the world are still at least partially shut down.

Self-portraits allow you to understand photography better. It helps you to see things from a new point of view: the model’s or client’s.

But, self-portraits are also difficult for the same reason. You’re not going to be accustomed to it and it may feel weird for a while.

Here are some quick tips to get you started on practicing your self-portraits.

Self-Portrait Gear Essentials

self portraits 1

^{photo byYana Tikhonova via iStock}

You can’t take self-portraits if you don’t have self-portrait gear. Luckily, a lot of self-portrait gear is gear you can use in many other photography niches.

The first self-portrait gear essential is obviously a good camera. Look for a camera that features a self-timer and a screen that faces forward and add to that a versatile lens like a 35mm or a nifty fifty lens.

You’ll also need some other self-portrait gear, including a tripod (or tripod alternative), a remote control for your camera, and a reflector.

self portrait gear 2

I personally use a tripod alternative for my self-portraits because the OctoPad does what a tripod does but better.

The OctoPad features a weighted bottom so you can put it absolutely anywhere without fear that it will slide around. This is just not a feature you’ll find with other mini-tripods.

self portrait gear 3

I’ve been using mine for at least a year and it’s allowed me to be more creative than ever before because it never slips or tips over so I’m better able to play with angles in my self-portraits.

Plus, for under $30, the Octopad is priced similarly to other mini-tripods.

Of all this self-portrait gear, if you have to leave something out you can leave the reflector out, because you can always DIY your own.

Take a look at this video by Jessica Whitaker for more information on DIY reflectors.

Suggested Camera Settings

suggested camera settings for self portraits 4

^{Photo by ShareGrid on Unsplash}

Now that you have your self-portrait gear, you’ll need to understand the suggested camera settings for self-portraits.

Let’s start with aperture. You’ll probably want to shoot your self-portraits between f/2.8 and f/4. This will allow you to blur your background while keeping your face sharply in focus.

You’ll also want to keep your ISO as low as possible. Somewhere between 100-400 should do the trick.

Finally, if you’re working with a tripod or the Octopad, you can set your shutter speed to 1/15th of a second.

Keep in mind that these are general guidelines for portrait camera settings. If you want more direction, check out our detailed tutorial on the best camera settings for portraits.

Learn More:

Find Your Focus With a Stand-In

how to focus for self portraits 5

^{Photo by Daniel Wirtz on Unsplash}

I understand that you’re reading this article about self-portraits to, you know, take a self-portrait. But, allow me to cheat for one second.

If you do have a stand-in that you can work with, be it a family friend or even an older child, use them.

Using stand-ins while taking self-portraits will allow you to adjust your camera settings to your exact liking and will prevent you from running back and forth dozens of times.

Learning how to focus for self-portraits without a stand-in will simply take up more of your time and will be a pain, so even if you need to place a random object where you’ll be standing or sitting, it’ll do!

Use Your Camera’s Timer

portrait photography tips 6

^{Photo by Michael Soledad on Unsplash}

I recommended a remote as part of your essential self-portrait gear so that you aren’t always relying on your camera’s self timer, however, if you don’t have a remote you can still take self-portraits the old fashioned way.

portrait photography tips 7

^{Photo by Jose Pablo Garcia on Unsplash}

Your camera’s instruction manual will give you info about how to set an interval timer. When I’m taking self-portraits, I try to set my interval timer to take the first photo 10 seconds after I press the shutter. From there, I’ll have my camera take another photo a few times with a 2 second delay.

This is a simple, easy way to get multiple shots, and with the other tips and tricks outlined above, you should be better-equipped to take improved self-portraits!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Quick Tips for Shooting Cloudy Day Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 11 March 2020.

Quick Tips for Shooting Cloudy Day Portraits

^{photo byAJ_Watt via iStock}

We all know what those snapshots we took of our friend under the noonday sun look like…

Squinty eyes, deep shadows under the nose and chin, bright shiny forehead. That’s a reality of many outdoor portraits. If only we could put that sun in a soft box! Well, cloudy day portraits allow us to do just that.

An overcast day puts a cloud of diffusion between the light source, the sun, and our subject. The direction of the light has not changed, but it has been softened, diffused. The effect is similar to studio lighting with umbrellas, diffusion screens, or a soft box.

Shadow Control for Cloudy Day Portraits

cloudy day portraits 1

^{photo byAndrii Zastrozhnov via iStock}

As you’ve seen in many portrait lighting tips, softening the light quality does not eliminate shadows, but it will tend to lessen the contrast between highlight and shadow.

Shadow control is important for outdoor portraits in any quality of light. One method that works very well is to add another light source. Reflectors are one way to go, a light is another.

By adding a light to the already diffused sunlight, you can make use of the portrait lighting tips you have already learned. With an extra light, you can try out broad lighting, short lighting, rim lighting, and even perhaps Rembrandt lighting.

Three Options of Adding Extra Light

cloudy day portraits 2

^{photo by AZImages via iStock}

We have three options for adding an extra light to our cloudy day portraits. An external flash, a battery powered continuous light, or a reflector.

External flash, used off camera, will require some method of triggering the flash. Various wireless transmitters exist that can be used for this and some cameras have an optical control compatible with certain flash units for triggering from the camera.

Many of these flash units can be controlled by the camera for automatic exposure control, too, but you may want to experiment with fractional manual settings in order to get the lighting configurations you need for certain portrait lighting methods.

Get a quick tutorial on using an off-camera flash in the video above by Ed Verosky.

outdoor portraits 3

^{Photo by Talen de St. Croix on Unsplash}

A battery-powered continuous light is another good option.

Being continuous light, you could use it in any camera mode, even the automatic modes, for adjusting exposure and contrast levels. A light like the Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB+AW LED Light I’ve reviewed before is an excellent choice.

hakutatz 3

The Hakutatz light is very compact, has LED bulbs for color correct cool operation, and is battery powered for true portability. A feature I really like is being able to control it from my smartphone with its app.

Speaking of control, you can adjust the brightness from 10-100 percent, the saturation from 1-100 percent, and select from dozens of RGB colors and lighting effects to get the precise look you need for your creative vision.

outdoor portraits 4

^{photo bybrittak via iStock}

The third method requires no batteries or plugs, but it can be a little bit difficult to get exactly what you want out of it. Because the reflector’s light direction, intensity, and color depends on the primary light source. Since the clouds are diffusing the sunlight, using a reflector may not add the necessary amount of extra light.

Of the three options, I like the small continuous LED light best. It gives the most control over intensity, color, and direction. When considering how to take outdoor portraits, control and portability take center stage in importance.

Learn More:

Shoot in RAW, not JPEG

outdoor portrait tips 5

^{Photo by Pedram Normohamadian on Unsplash}

I keep saying this, don’t I?

JPEGs are fine for many photographic situations, but a RAW file has so much more exposure information embedded in it. Working with a RAW file, we can adjust or tweak exposure levels and color profile to accomplish the final image we desire.

With a RAW file, we can assign a color balance as we see fit after the exposure. We can also pull out a whole lot of shadow detail in the image, adjusting for contrast and tweaking the exposure value.

RAW is where digital photography really comes into its own. The image manipulation possible with a simple post processing program allows for creating superb final images when used for cloudy day portraits. A full program such as Photoshop, Photoshop Lightroom, or ACDSee lets us do almost anything with the image.

Bokeh is Boss

outdoor portrait tips 6

^{Photo by Tadeusz Lakota on Unsplash}

The exposure values involved in cloudy day portraits allows for control over another aspect of outdoor portraits: bokeh. Bokeh is the aesthetic quality of out of focus parts of our images.

Since the light intensity is generally lower on an overcast day, this lets us employ wider or faster lens apertures or f-stops. A faster f-stop gives less depth of field and the possibility for creating amazing bokeh. It also lets us take advantage of selective focusing, which can be helpful when taking portraits.

Try Out Monochrome

how to take outdoor portraits 7

^{Photo by Anita Jankovic on Unsplash}

The light quality of cloudy days gives us an opportunity to make images with a limited color palette. Monochrome images are often black and white, but they don’t have to be.

Some cameras have the ability to take monochrome images in camera, with others you will have to use a post-processing program to get the images turned into black and white. A black and white cloudy day portrait, when done well, can be a very pleasing image.

Other colors can be used for monochrome, too. Certain times of day, Golden Hour for instance, add a color tone to the image. Lens filters are another way to add a single color to the image. I like to use a good post-processing program to enhance one or two complementary colors in the final image.

Take Advantage of Cloudy Days

how to take outdoor portraits 8

^{photo by South_agency via iStock}

Instead of putting up our camera when it clouds up on our outdoor portrait session, learn to use the overcast sky to your advantage. The clouds can be heavy or very light or anywhere in between.

Cloudy day portraits let us make use of bokeh, selective focus, monochrome processing, and various portrait lighting methods. Soon, you’ll be looking for cloudy days to take pictures of your friends, family, or clients.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Rim Lighting - Simple Technique for Dramatic Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 31 January 2020.

Rim lights for Dramatic and Powerful Portrait Photography

^{Photo by Christian Holzinger on Unsplash}

Rim lighting is one of the techniques used to create amazing and dramatic portraits. The same technique can also be employed for small product photography and fine art photography.

In this tutorial, we will show what to use as rim lighting equipment, rim light placement, and how to use rim lighting.

What Is Rim Lighting?

rim lighting setup

^{Photo by Luke Besley on Unsplash}

Rim lighting typically comes from behind the subject and is a type of split lighting. Split lighting ‘splits’ your subject into two halves, one highlighted, the other in deep shadow. Rim lighting can be used by itself or in conjunction with other lighting configurations.

rim light placement for dramatic portraits

^{Photo by Caique Silva on Unsplash}

In many instances, rim lighting is used to more or less silhouette your subject. I say more or less because rim lighting adds in the element of highlights around or along the edge of the subject. So it is not merely a dark figure with light behind it, part of the subject is in the light.

Portrait Lighting:

Recommended Portrait Lighting Books:

Simple Rim Lighting Setup

Let’s use a clock face to visualize where to place your rim lighting equipment to get a dramatic portrait.

If we place the portrait subject in the middle of the clock face, position your camera at six o’clock. Pose your subject so they are facing about five o’clock. Now, put your light at two o’clock or three o’clock. Expose for good detail in the highlight areas while letting the rest fall into deep shadow.

Rim light setup with hakutatz

That’s a rim light placement! In this rim lighting example, you can make it happen with a single light. One of the lights I like to use for this rim lighting setup is the Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB+AW LED Light.

This light is a small, battery powered, continuous light. One of the things I really find useful with this compact LED light is that it can be controlled by a smartphone app. So, even if the only camera on you is your iPhone or Galaxy, you can still make use of advanced lighting techniques for portraits.

Learn More:

Add To Other Techniques

Placement of Rim Lighting for Dramatic Portraits

^{Photo by Alex Sheldon on Unsplash}

Rim lighting works great as a single light portrait setup, but you can also add the effect to other portrait lighting configurations. Rim light placement would remain about the same as the example I laid out above, but the effect will be minimized compared to using a single light.

When added to other portrait light setups, it becomes a form of hair light or halo lighting. For this purpose, your rim lighting equipment should probably include a snoot.

hakutatz- Multiple colored rim light setting

Alternatively, you could use a light like the Hakutatz Pocket Size RGB+AW LED Light which has variable power and multiple colors available.

A well-lit portrait with a color rim added makes a very dramatic portrait when shot in low-key. Expose for high key and that color rim lighting exudes an air of playfulness. Play around with your options.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open and ready for orders soon.

Rim Lighting Examples

For some nice rim lighting examples, take a look at this video from Adrew Boey at the Beyond Photography YouTube channel.

Here is an informative article from one of the foremost online photography schools, New York Institute of Photography, that also has some interesting examples.

Rim Lighting With Natural Light

rim lighting with Natural Lights

^{Photo by Jed Owen on Unsplash}

Can you make use of rim lighting without using artificial lighting? Yes, you can. All you need is for the light to come from the proper direction for your needs.

The amazing light quality we get during Golden Hour photography is perfect for rim lighting. Golden Hour lighting is already beautiful by its very nature.

Moving around to capture the right direction for rim lighting is essential to natural lighting anyways. So, move around and expose for rim lighting with the setting or rising sun as your light source.

Rim Light is Beautiful Light

create beautiful portraits with rim lighting

^{photo by primipil via iStock}

When everything comes together for that perfect, dramatic portrait, it makes you feel great. Whether using a single artificial light, multiple lights with rim lighting added, or making use of Golden Hour sunlight, you will capture dramatic portraits with rim lighting.

Many of the lighting techniques used by professional portrait artists are available for anyone to use with minimal lighting equipment and any type of camera. Regardless of what level of photographer you consider yourself to be, try out rim lighting for dramatic portraits.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Self-Portrait Tips

Written by PT Editor on 06 January 2020.

Self Portrait Tips

^{photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Self-portraits are one of the most intimate types of photography. Good self-portraits can be an accurate reflection of yourself, but self-portraits can also be dreamy, raw, and whimsical.

In order to create these types of self-portraits, you need self-portrait tips from the greats.

Learning how to take beautiful self-portraits is an adventure not only in mastery of your equipment, but mastery of the art as a whole.

Don’t Fear the Opinions of Others

how to take self portraits 1

^{photo byS_Chum via iStock}

One of the most obvious self-portrait tips are also one of the most incredibly difficult tips to follow.

You can’t be afraid. You can’t fear what others think. This means that you need to throw out all of your insecurities about your body, your face, and your smile, and throw out your creative insecurities as well.

Who cares if your self-portraits aren’t for everyone? They should be for yourself!

how to take self portraits 2

^{photo by Ralf Geithe via iStock}

This also means that you should be okay crossing boundaries. Try nude self-portraits if you never have before. Then try creating a self-portrait that features your hands or lips or one that otherwise obscures your face.

Try something that makes you uncomfortable. No self-portrait tips can teach you the art of being outside of your realm of comfort, so it’s important to stretch your boundaries to come up with a portrait that is beautiful and creative at the same time.

Vary Your Expressions

how to take self portraits 3

^{photo byOzge Emir via iStock}

When I was learning how to take self-portraits I didn’t even realize I was using the same two or three expressions in every single shot.

To be fair, I had more important things to worry about, like ensuring I had my lighting correct because I was a brand new photographer. But I definitely wouldn’t put any of these self-portraits anywhere where someone could see them now.

how to take self portraits 4

^{photo by SIphotography via iStock}

In order to vary your expressions during a self-portrait shoot, you need to be cognizant of your facial expressions. Check your shots every few minutes with the goal of ensuring you are giving the camera a few different looks.

Whenever your expressions are beginning to look too similar, this may be a good time to take a break from the shoot and come back to it at a later date.

Capture Your Imperfections

self portrait photography tips 1

^{photo by selimaksan via iStock}

This is one of those self-portrait tips not many people follow: find your imperfections and exploit them.

Hate the way your teeth look? Great; capture them.

Beginning to show signs of aging, because you’ve lived a lot of very happy life? Fine; take a picture of those wrinkles.

There is beauty in everything - our foibles and imperfections and wrinkles and so forth.

self portrait photography tips 2

^{photo bySensorSpot via iStock}

If your goal is to create a self-portrait that highlights who you are, embrace those imperfections!

Imperfections showcase our insecurities, but they also connect us to our audience. If everyone has something they hate about themselves, which they do, and no photographers are highlighting this, then a whole subsection of viewers are being left out of the art.

self portrait photography tips 5

^{photo byDelmaine Donson via iStock}

Capture your imperfections to capture this marginalized audience.

No self-portrait tips can give you the confidence you need to showcase whatever it is you hate about yourself, though, so start by focusing on your imperfections in work you never plan to show to anyone else.

Eventually you are going to realize this could be your best work!

Learn More:

Ask For Assisstance

self portrait photography tips 4

^{photo by Peter_Virag via iStock}

Despite popular opinions, self-portraits don't need to be done completely by yourself.

In fact, I get my best self-portraits when I put a friend or loved one in the room with me. They help me to bring out realistic expressions.

Plus, if you’re doing a themed photo shoot, you may need help with the props, hair or makeup. If you accept this help, it doesn’t mean it wasn’t a self-portrait.

You should also never be afraid to seek out help for your self-portraits from the experts.

Mango Streethas this video on self-portrait tips that is extremely helpful.

Put Your Self Portraits on the Wall

how to take self portraits 6

^{Photo by Wei Ding on Unsplash}

Want to know who else hung his self-portraits on his wall? Van Gogh.

It isn’t a sign of vanity, but rather a sign that you are brave enough to showcase something you put a lot of effort into.

An ideal substrate to showcase your self-portraits is canvas.

I purchase all of my canvases through CanvasHQ.

Not only does CanvasHQ frequently have specials on their canvases, but they put as much effort into their canvases as you do with your photography. See just how their canvases stand up to the competition in my video review of the best canvas printing company of 2020:

There’s no reason to put hours of work into your self-portraits, just to turn around and slap it on a bad canvas from Walmart that will undoubtedly fall apart and fade in a year’s time.

CanvasHQ doesn’t use glue, which can warp canvases over the decades, and they use the highest quality ink to ensure your self-portrait stays as beautiful as the day you took it.

Plus, they feature free shipping and an accurate estimated wait time for your canvas on their website.

What’s not to love?

Learn More:

We Recommend

Self-Portrait Tips For Beginners

Written by PT Editor on 27 August 2021.

Self Portrait Tips

^{photo byDGKN GRKN via iStock}

I know that I’m still trying to spend as much time in my house as I possibly can right now and this has forced me to get a little creative with my photography skills.

After all, it is a skill you can lose if you aren’t constantly using it.

So, recently, after years of hating being in front of the camera, I started working on some self-portrait ideas.

I was naturally absolutely awful at it. The moment I got in front of the camera, I recognized that all of my photographic knowledge about how to take a self-portrait went out the window because I was so self-conscious as a model.

To help, I went in search of some self-portrait tips and found a good video by Skillshare. Skillshare worked with Hannah Argyle to create a list of three self-portrait tips that work for even the shyest of photographers.

I’m recapping them here.

Use a Self-Timer

self portrait tips 2

^{photo byGaretsworkshop via iStock}

A lot of self-portrait tips focus on the kind of gear you’re going to need. But, a lot of us are really only taking self portraits to pass the time and may not want to spend any money on something we could absolutely hate.

So, instead of going out and purchasing a remote shutter that you may not use in your photography hobby right now, you can use the self-timer on your camera.

how to take a self portrait

^{photo byMStudioImages via iStock}

Another benefit of using a self-timer that Hannah pointed out, other than saving money, is that it gives you freedom. You don’t need to be worried about establishing a certain pose because you don’t actually know when the photo will be taken. So, you can move about as you normally would, which will actually bring some interesting movement into the photo.

Some cameras will also allow you to take multiple shots at a time at different intervals. Hannah recommends that you use this feature if your camera will let you. This way you can try all sorts of different poses before going back and deciding that you absolutely hate them.

Learn More:

Editor's Tip: Have old printed photos that are damaged beyond repair? Think again! Photo restoration services like PhotoRepairPro can bring your beloved images back to life. Faded images, water-damaged images, prints that are folded or creased...all can be beautifully restored to their original glory. Better still, they can be restored quickly and without a huge output of money. For about $35, you can get an image restored and get a JPEG file plus two 5x7 prints. Free shipping on the prints is included too! We all have old photos that we love and that remind us of people, places, and events from long ago. Don't let those photos continue to waste away in a box somewhere! Let PhotoRepairPro work their magic and restore your photos today.

Choose Your Focus Point First

how to take a self portrait 2

^{photo byArtsiom Petrushenka via iStock}

If you’ve been messing around with self-portraits already, you may notice one problem theme. Sometimes, when you’re participating in self-portraiture, you may have issues with the focus.

This makes sense. When you aren’t behind the camera, it can be really difficult to tell if you’re at a good point for the focus.

So, Hannah’s second tip in her self-portrait tips video is to figure out where you want to physically be positioned before you take any photos so that you can manually set your focus point.

In the video, Hannah is shooting in front of an abandoned house. She established that she was going to be located on the porch before she started shooting so that she could manually focus the camera there beforehand.

self portrait ideas

^{photo byGrigorev_Vladimir via iStock}

You can do the same thing no matter where you’re shooting. If you’re shooting in the desert, then you can use a saguaro cactus as your manual focus point. If you’re shooting in your yard, you can use a shed or shrubbery as your manual focus point.

If you really don’t have anything else around you to use to focus your camera, then you can place your camera bag where you want to be located in order to focus on it.

Another way to make sure that your self-portraits are always in focus is to choose a higher f-stop (i.e., f/5.6 rather than f/2.8) so that your depth of field is larger. When a large percentage of your frame is in focus, you as the subject will likely be in focus if you choose to stand or sit in the midground of the shot.

Experiment

self portrait ideas 2

^{photo bydinachi via iStock}

Out of all these self-portrait tips, the most important one is to experiment.

Going into the shoot, know that you are going to feel self-conscious. It is going to be awkward. You aren’t going to be comfortable. However, you aren’t doing this for comfort. You are trying self-portraiture to help you expand your creative eye. Nothing worth doing is easy.

So, once you kind of get over yourself and your unease, it is important to try as many poses as possible. In fact, it may be a good idea to read the other self-portrait tips that I’ve included in the learn more links in this article.

However, no matter how many self-portrait tips you read, you will need to experiment during your shoot, since each pose may look different depending upon the angle you choose for your photo.

Finally, if you have the time to do so, take as many shots as possible.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Short vs Broad Lighting for Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 13 January 2020.

Short vs Broad Lighting for Portraits

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

Portrait lighting can turn a basic photo into a work of art. Understanding how lighting configurations and lighting ratios affect your final images will allow you to control the creative processes used to make outstanding portraits.

Among the lighting setups for portraits are short lighting and broad lighting. What are short and broad lighting? What portrait lighting tips apply to short vs broad lighting? Which one is better for portraits?

Using Artificial Lights for Portraits

hakutatz 2

In order to control photographic lighting for studio use, many portrait photographers turn to artificial lights, both strobes and continuous lighting. Current lights such as the Hakutatz RGB+ AW LED Light give you options for using continuous light on location, even usable in iPhonography.

Battery powered or A/C powered, flash or continuous lights, the important thing for portraits is to take control of the light. You can modify and attenuate sunlight with reflectors and diffusers, but it’s a simple task to adjust artificial lighting to suit your needs.

Personally, I love sunlight for portraits, but much of my portrait work has been made under artificial light sources. In fact, understanding how to use artificial lighting for portraits is a must-have skill that allows you to create more impactful and dramatic portraits.

Editor's Note: The Hakutatz Kickstarter campaign was a huge success! Their Amazon store will be open and ready for orders soon.

Types of Portrait Lighting

There are several different configurations and techniques used by photographers for portrait lighting. You can use them in their basic forms or modify them to suit your needs.

Rembrandt Lighting

short vs broad lighting 1

^{Photo by Albert Dera on Unsplash}

Rembrandt lighting is a high contrast style exemplified by the subject’s face being half in light and half in shadow with some light spilling over to the shadow side in a specific way.

Short Lighting for Portraits

short vs broad lighting 2

^{photo by Juanmonino via iStock}

A short lighting configuration has the light illuminating the side of the face furthest from the camera position. This makes the lit side appear shorter than the shadow side. This is often used to visually narrow facial proportions which can be flattering for some subjects.

Broad Lighting for Portraits

short vs broad lighting 3

^{photo by alvarez via iStock}

In broad lighting, the side of the subject closest to the camera is the side in light, with the shorter side of their face or torso in shadow. This lighting pattern visually widens faces, which may end up being useful for certain subjects, but can accentuate what other subjects perceive as unflattering.

Loop or Butterfly Lighting for Portraits

short lighting for portraits 4

photo by alvarez via iStock

This is a flatter light set up but it offers some facial modeling that can be pleasant for portraits. It is called loop or butterfly because of the shadow pattern it causes under the nose of the portrait subject.

Learn More:

Short Vs Broad Lighting, Which Is Better for Portraits?

short lighting for portraits

^{photo by Mr_Khan via iStock}

Speaking in generalities, most portrait subjects will benefit more from short lighting than broad lighting. As mentioned above, short lighting narrows features which is flattering for many people.

However, broad lighting is quite useful for portraits that need to show a lot of detail. Environmental portraiture often takes advantage of broad lighting. Broad lighting does employ modeling to bring out dimensionality in the image.

You can see the difference for yourself by seating your subject and moving a portable light such as the Hakutatz RGB+ AW LED Light from one side of your subject to the other. Observe how the change in light and dark side of the face changes how the subject looks in the final image.

How To Set Up Broad and Short Lighting

Each of these lighting configurations can be set up with a single light, one light and reflectors, or multiple lights.

While both of these techniques are examples of split lighting, neither one is purely side light. For broad lighting, the light source will be placed closer to the camera position than 90 degree sidelight. Short lighting will place the light source further than the 90 degree side light.

Once you start playing around with light position, you will see the effects clearly on your viewscreen or other monitor.

Few of our portrait clients are likely to be as wooden as the subject in the video tutorial above, but Learning With Mark Warren highlights the differences rather well.

Other Portrait Lighting Tips

portrait lighting tips

^{photo byKangah via iStock}

There are so many ways to adjust lighting for portraiture. You can change the light quality from hard to soft by using photo umbrellas or soft boxes. Umbrellas and soft boxes soften the light diffusing it.

You may want to increase contrast contrast in your lighting by employing large lighting ratios of key to fill light. You don’t need a fill light at all in order to create a huge lighting ratio.

Reflectors are a valuable tool that can be used in many of the basic portrait lighting configurations. Judicious use of a reflector can emphasize the eyes in a strongly side lit portrait, for instance.

Control Is the Key

The most important aspect of portrait lighting is that you, the photographer, can be in complete control. It’s more than exposure or lens choice. You can control how modeled any light makes your subject appear in order to create the portrait you and your subject will enjoy.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Simple Advice to Give Your Clients Before a Family Portrait Session

Written by PT Editor on 30 October 2020.

Simple Advice to Give Your Clients Before a Family Portrait Session

^{photo bydigitalskillet via iStock}

If you’ve ever done a family portrait session for your own family then you know exactly how stressful they can be. There will be a family emergency a few hours before the shoot. You won’t have as much time as you thought you did to get ready. Your children will insist on throwing a tantrum right as you’re walking out the door.

So, if you do family portrait photography, then you should be doing everything you can to ensure your clients don’t have a stressful time.

While the parents will probably always be stressed because they know how much they spent on this family portrait session and they want it to go perfectly, helping them to prepare their children for a comfortable session will eventually ensure they relax as well.

Here are some easy pieces of family portrait advice you can give to your clients before your next family portrait session.

Wear Comfortable Clothing

family portrait photography 1

^{photo byfizkes via iStock}

I’ve talked about how much I hate color coordination in family portraits before. This advice still stands. I think that if you want a cohesive photo, then you can choose a similar range of colors to dress each member of the family in. Think pastels for Easter portraits, clothing with pops of red for Christmas, or beiges, off-whites, and navies for a more serious family portrait session.

But, the more important tip is to make sure everyone in the family wears something comfortable. This is especially true for small children. If they think their sweater is itchy, their discomfort will show in the portraits.

Use a Professional

family portrait advice 2

^{photo byHirurg via iStock}

One of the things I’ve always told any mom I’ve ever worked with is that they should hire a professional makeup and hair artist before their family portrait session.

The first reason why I suggest this is that I’ve found moms usually set the tone for the session. If mom is unhappy, then everyone is unhappy. But, on the other side of the coin, if mom is feeling pretty and confident, everyone picks up on this confidence and feels more ready for the family portrait session.

The other reason why I suggest this is more practical, though. When mom doesn’t have to worry about getting herself ready, it’s much, much easier to get all of the kids ready. I suggest hiring a makeup artist to come to their home around 4 hours from the family portrait session, so that both parents can tackle handling the kids in the hours leading up to the shoot.

Learn More:

Recommend Getting High-Quality Prints

A lot of families will want to know exactly what their family portrait session is going to cost them up front. This is understandable as it can be a really large investment.

But, my problem is that I frequently want to upsell my clients after the shoot is over and if I’ve already told them an exact price for the photoshoot, then I notice my families are much less likely to purchase any add-ons at the end of the shoot.

One way around this problem is to give your families a price range. So, instead of saying your photoshoot will cost them $500, you can say it will cost them between $450-$550 depending upon some of the options you will have for them towards the end of the shoot.

This way, it is much easier to upsell your families, which is obviously great for you but it can also be great for your family.

I almost always use canvas prints to upsell my family portrait sessions. I use CanvasHQ to do so.

CanvasHQ prints last for up to a century because they are printed on museum-grade canvas with long-lasting, fade-resistant ink. So, I can promise my families that this print will be in their family until their children grow up and pass it onto their grandkids.

CanvasHQ also provides canvases in a really wide range of sizes, so that your families can choose the ones that best fit with their living situation. If they’re living in a nice-sized home in the suburbs, they can purchase a large print to hang over their mantle. If they’re living in a smaller apartment in the city, they can purchase a smaller print to put in their master bedroom.

This wide range of sizes also translates to a wide range of prices, which means every family you work with can get a high-quality print, no matter their budget. CanvasHQ prints start at just $20.

Encourage Children to Be Themselves

family portraits 3

^{photo byKhosrork via iStock}

I’ve already made my point about how stressful this type of thing is for a family. But, a lot of times I notice parents taking this stress out on their children, by standing over my shoulder and yelling at the kids to look at the camera or say “cheese.”

This unequivocally means the photos will come out truly terribly. Kids are bad at forcing smiles. You can see if a child is genuinely happy or not and loudly screaming at them to act happy is not the best way to make them genuinely happy.

I encourage parents to have children just act like themselves so that I can get more genuine reactions out of them. Sometimes this does mean that I intervene in the middle of a shoot (kindly, of course) to remind the parents that it’s okay for the children to be messing around with each other, etc.

The more comfortable children feel to be themselves during a family portrait session, the more comfortable they will look on film.

Forget About the Camera

family portrait session 4

^{photo byskynesher via iStock}

This family portrait session tip runs along the same line. I encourage my families to interact with one another. Nobody can ever truly forget that a photographer is taking their photos, but I make sure everyone knows that they don’t always need to be looking at me in order for me to take great photos.

In fact, all of my favorite photos from my sessions happened organically. For example, I was doing a family portrait session earlier this year with a set of siblings, aged 2-14. The moment I stopped trying to “pose” them, the 2 year old threw her arms around the 14 year old’s neck in the biggest, most genuine hug I’ve ever seen. The father started crying when I showed him the shot.

On the other hand, I’ve never had someone cry from a fake, forced, “cheesy” smile where everyone was looking at the camera!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Simple and Quick Portrait Photography Tips

Written by PT Editor on 28 September 2021.

Quick and Simple Portrait Photography Tips

^{photo bykatiafonti via iStock}

If you’re learning how to take better portraits, then you’re in the right place. Portrait photography can be a lot more difficult than beginning photographers expect and the best way to learn is to do so from others who have done it before you.

Manny Ortiz, one of my favorite YouTube photographers, released a video earlier this year that follows him on a portrait shoot with his wife. It’s jam packed with portrait photography tips that are easy enough for anyone to follow.

While I highly recommend that you watch the entire video, I’m going to take his portrait tips and condense it below so that you can start to implement some of them into your own photography right away.

Play with Symmetry

Quick Portrait Photography Tips

^{photo bylambada via iStock}

You don’t necessarily need to find twins to try out this tip (though it may help).

By making your images symmetrical, you are forcing your audience’s eye to be automatically drawn to your subject.

You can make your images symmetrical by placing your subject in the middle of any type of background, be it a couple of windows, a series of paintings, or a row of trees.

Like most of the portrait photography tips on this list, you’ll need to pay close attention to your background in order to complete this successfully.

But, this is a good lesson to learn early. Most portrait photography tips play into one another.

Pay Attention to Your Background

portrait photography tips

^{photo byGaudiLab via iStock}

Considering the fact I just talked about this, I may as well make it its own tip too.

You need to be incredibly cognizant of the background of your images, for a few reasons.

For starters, really distracting things can be in the background of your images. For instance, if you put your model in front of a telephone pole and it looks like the pole is growing straight out of their head, this is going to be really distracting.

But, you also want to pay attention to your background because there can be important information that you want to include in your shots.

In the video, Manny notices that there is a lot of greenery behind his wife at one point and so he decides to change his angle in order to include it in his shot.

But, there could be more information you would like to include in a shot in order to either make the shot prettier or to tell your audience more information about where your model physically is.

Most portrait photography tips for beginners are exactly like this one. You just need to learn to keep your eyes open.

Learn More:

Move More

portrait tips

^{photo byCecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

This is one of my favorite portrait photography tips for a number of reasons. First, I hate standing still and I think a lot of other photographers are the same way.

But it’s also one of my favorite portrait photography tips because it keeps you from getting too comfortable during a shoot. If all of your images are similar, but just barely different, you could get into a rhythm and you’ll definitely lose out on good shots because of this.

Though, this is one of those portrait photography tips that is easier to do if you’re on location somewhere. It obviously won’t work if you’re in a studio.

Don’t Be Afraid to Try New Angles

portrait photography tips for beginners

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

A lot of easy portrait photography tips are just about getting outside of your comfort zone. This one included.

If you’ve never played around with angles before, it is high time you do. Shoot up at your model. Shoot down at your model. Shoot your model from the side. Don’t be afraid to try as many angles as possible because you never know when you’re going to find something that you love.

Keep the Model Comfortable

easy portrait photography tips

^{photo byxavierarnau via iStock}

Most portrait photography tips are tips that apply to the photographer. I don’t think enough portrait photography tips are about the other side of the equation: your model.

If your model isn’t comfortable during your shoot, then none of the photos you get are going to be good.

So, always be thinking about your model. Are they cold? Are they hungry? Are they squinting into the sun?

Fix as many problems for you as you can and they will be far happier and they will trust you more.

Add Movement Into Shots

how to take better portraits

^{photo byCarlos Barquero Perez via iStock}

Some of these portrait photography tips sound really similar. But, they are very different. When I talked about moving more earlier, I meant that you needed to move around a city or park more often. Change up the scenery. Change up your background.

This tip, though, means that you should actually include that movement in your shots.

If you’re shooting with a model in New York and you need to ride the subway to get to your next location, take photos of your model as you’re moving through the subway terminal. Take photos of them next to the moving train. By actually including movement in your shots, you’ll make them far more interesting.

Use Shadows to Your Advantage

portrait photography

^{photo byGang Zhou via iStock}

I swear this is one of the last portrait photography tips I’ll give you that deals with your background (but it’s really that important).

You should always be focusing on where shadows exist at your shooting location. If you’re shooting in a city, you can include shadows from skyscrapers into your shots. If you’re shooting in a more natural environment, you can play around with the shadows on your model's face.

In just the same way that you should always be using natural light, you should always be using shadows as well.

Take More Photos Than You Think You Need

photography tips for beginners

^{photo byozgurdonmaz via iStock}

The beauty of modern photography is that you don’t need to be worried about running out of film.

Obviously, taking as many photos as possible isn’t the way to go, because you’re a hobbyist photographer and you should be using all of the tips and tricks you’ve picked up along the way. But, when you’re still learning, there is absolutely no harm in taking more photos than you think you need.

This is especially true if you are working with a paid client, since you need to ensure they get at least a couple of shots that they love.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Simple Outdoor Portrait Photography Tips for Improved Results

Written by PT Editor on 07 December 2022.

Simple Outdoor Portrait Photography Tips for Improved Results

^{Photo by Hailey Seelig via iStock}

Seasonal changes always make me think of going outside for some photography ideas. Every season has its own beauty and special appeal for various types of photography. I have some outdoor portrait photography tips for you to add to our other articles discussing outdoor imaging.

Winter, Spring, Summer, or Fall, grab your camera and some choice lenses and other accessories and take people outdoors for some great portraits. Here are seven outdoor portrait photography tips that cover outdoor portraits ideas, techniques, and equipment.

Outdoor Portrait Photography Tips for Gear

outdoor portrait photography tips

^{Photo by scyther5 via iStock}

Outdoor portrait photography in each season has its own appeal and considerations. Weather and lighting conditions change, requiring us to adapt our gear care and our exposure, posing, and lighting ideas.

To start, we want to be prepared with basic portrait photography gear options. I like to have a variety of focal lengths to take advantage of the multiple viewpoints we can seek out in most outdoor portrait photography locations.

A high-quality normal-range zoom lens with a fast f/2.8 aperture is invaluable. With a Full Frame, a 24-70mm or 28-100mm f/2.8 is great. On APS-C cameras, I would use an 18-50mm or similar zoom, but not necessarily the kit lenses since they have very slow maximum apertures at the telephoto end, right where I need a fast aperture for certain techniques.

With a high-quality fast zoom lens in the wide-to-normal-to-short telephoto range, I can quickly change from a wider view for environmental portraiture and immediately switch into a head and shoulder portrait pose.

For some outdoor portrait photography tips and ideas, I like to have at least one very fast lens with a longer focal length. In Full Frame format, an 85mm or 100mm lens with an aperture of f/2.0 or faster works, while an APS-C format user might opt for a 50mm lens with a fast maximum aperture.

A good flash and some other lighting accessories come in handy, too. Outdoor portraits with lighting gear? Absolutely! I’ll explain why later in this list of outdoor portrait photography tips. A tripod and a remote trigger round out my basic gear needs.

Use All of the Seasons

Use All of the Seasons in outdoor portaits

^{Photo by LightFieldStudies via iStock}

Summer portraits may revolve around recreation. Spring images can incorporate feelings of new growth. Fall portraits can take advantage of all the warm colors. Winter outdoor portraits can benefit from the austere, monochromatic scenes common in many areas.

Here’s a great tutorial with several outdoor portrait photography tips by PPA PhotographerJessica Kobeissi on YouTube

In all seasons, be alert for how you can fully use the seasonal changes in light quality. It also helps to be prepared for varying weather conditions. A lens hood, fully charged batteries, and maybe a protective shooting bag are all valuable accessories to have on hand.

Selective Focus Technique

Selective Focus Technique in outdoor portaits

^{Photo by kupicoo via iStock}

One of the most basic of my outdoor portrait photography tips is to use selective focus to isolate a subject from the background and foreground and to eliminate distractions from busy elements surrounding the portrait subject.

Since depth of field is a function of focal length, subject distance, and lens aperture, certain types of lenses or focal lengths lend themselves better to shallow depth of field also known as selective focus.

A short telephoto lens, a medium distance pose, and a wide aperture usually give me the image I want with only the portrait subject in focus. My fast normal range zoom lens works well for this also. I zoom out to the 70mm or 100mm end of the lens range and open up the aperture as wide as the exposure triangle allows.

Environmental Portrait Photography

^{Photo by NKS_Imagery via iStock}

At the other end of the focusing and depth of field ideas is using deeper depth of field for environmental portrait photography. In my environmental portraits, I lean towards wider focal lengths in order to capture part of the environment, whatever it may be.

A wider focal length, a small lens aperture, and a moderate subject distance provide significant depth of field, which translate into more things in the image area being in focus. Though not absolutely necessary for an environmental portrait, deeper depth of field is what I usually try for with this style of portrait photography.

My Top Two Outdoor Portrait Photography Tips

Outdoor Portrait Photography Tips 1

^{Photo by ABRAHAM GONZALEZ FERNANDEZ via iStock}

My top two outdoor portrait photography tips could be put together as one, but I like to separate them since the second part has a couple of ways to make it work.

When capturing portraits outdoors, my absolute top tips are to turn away from the sun and use a reflector or fill flash to brighten up the resulting facial shadows. This also puts a wonderful catchlight in the eyes of the subject.

A snapshot portrait is often ruined for serious consideration because of that grimace squinting that always happens when the sun shines straight into someone’s eyes. So we turn the person away from the sun, which ends the grimace.

That creates an unlit looking face, though. One solution is to unfurl my collapsible 5-in-1 reflector and move it around until I see the shadows lift and that twinkle of a catchlight in their eyes. Another method is to set up my flash unit to use for fill-in flash. Many newer cameras actually do this completely automatically, balancing ambient light, focus distance, and flash power.

Alternate Nature and Architecture Settings

Outdoor Portrait Photography Tips 2

^{Photo by CasarsaGuru via iStock}

Another of my favorite outdoor portrait photography tips when shooting outside is to look for architecture in nature and look for nature in an urban or suburban setting. I’ll often take my portrait subject to a local park with flower gardens, trees, and several manmade structures like a gazebo or a bridge.

Almost any city scene has little snippets of nature if we look closely enough. A flowering bush against a brick wall may create interest for an outstanding outdoor portrait. Some of my favorite photo spots in nature have older abandoned shacks that add great interest to any outdoor portrait. And a bridge works anywhere, anytime.

Create a Portrait Photobook

Portrait Photobook

After using all of my favorite outdoor portrait photography tips, I want to display them somehow and show them off. If I’m creating portrait images for a paying client, I will provide them with options for showing the images to others. Wall art and photo books are perfect for this.

Photobook Press has both of these products, plus others, that will allow you to fulfill your own wants or what you need for supplying to your portrait photography clients. I like the lay-flat photo books because of the special binding that eliminates the tendency of photobook pages to bend up from the spine.

lay flat photo books

There are more ways to display our fine portrait photography work, from acrylic prints to softcover photo books to gift items such as photo calendars. Photobook Press also has a professional services department with discounts for products and expedited shipping arrangements. Check them out.

I hope you get a lot out of my outdoor portrait photography tips. Try them out the next time you capture portraits of your friends, family, and clients.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Single Light Portrait Lighting: Butterfly Light

Written by PT Editor on 31 December 2019.

Single Light Portrait Lighting Butterfly Light

^{photo by dcdr via iStock}

I know how expensive gear can be, but it is important to have at least one good off camera studio light, some kind of diffuser and a reflector when you are starting out as a portrait photographer. I am going to take you through one of the easiest and best single portrait light setups for your clients.

Portrait Lighting: Butterfly Lighting

portrait lighting

photo by Xebeche via iStock

Picture a butterfly facing you with its wings stretched. That is the shape of the shadow that forms under the nose of your subject when you use butterfly lighting. (If you are the super hero type, it also sort of resembles the symbol for Batman.)

Butterfly Lighting is quite glamorous. It is a favorite technique of Hollywood. It accents cheek bones and because there is lots of light hitting the face it can help play down double chins and full in wrinkles. Your older clients are going to love that! It is also perfect for any subject, from kids to adults, any gender this simple and beautiful portrait lighting is incredibly flattering, creates a wonderful aesthetic, and it is very easy to master!

butterfly lighting setup

Step one:

Have your subject sit or stand, however you are both comfortable. Your subject should face the camera.

Set up your light with your diffuser directly behind the camera,about a foot above your subjects head. Your camera should be placed close to your subject, a good distance is about 4 to 5 feet depending on your lens.

(You can also use an off camera strobe if you don’t have a studio light and a stand. You simply hold the light in the proper position.)

Step two: (optional)

Ask your subject to hold the reflector in their lap just out of the camera frame. (This will give them something to do with their hands.) The reflector will diminish the shadows and dispel any harsh contrast. The closer the reflector is to the chin the more evenly the light will spread.

Step three:

Snap that shutter! (I told you this was easy.)

inexpensive portrait lights

photo by PeopleImages via iStock

Because the light is above and in front of your subject you should get fantastic catchlights in their eyes. If you are using a reflector then you should see a double catchlight.

Watch the above video by CreativeLive for a fast demonstraion of this portrait light set up.

Learn More:

Portrait Lighting Tools

Lights

There are lots of choices when it comes to Portrait lights but I have found that Litra has great options without draining your bank account.

The LitraTorch 2.0 uses 16 LEDs (up from 8 in the 1.0 version) and offers three separate lumen settings of 800, 450, and 100. The color temperature is 5700K with a CRI of 90+ and TLCI of 92.

The improved optics of the LitraTorch 2.0 means clean, crisp, flicker-free light with a 70-degree beam angle for ultra-wide coverage. I’ve found that the new optics system projects more light more efficiently, too, and that’s led to a 10-percent increase in battery life (over 35 minutes of run time at maximum output and over four hours of run time on low output).

Other specs include waterproofness up to 60 feet (double that of the original LitraTorch), a built-in magnet for attaching the unit to metallic surfaces, and two ¼-20 mounts that give you flexibility in how you use the light.

At just 1.5” x 1.5” x 1.65” and 3.17 ounces, this little guy certainly packs a punch!

You’ll be amazed at the sheer output of light this little thing can achieve. Not only that, but the light is crisp and clean and truly gives you studio-quality lighting in a unit that you can literally put in your pocket.

Reflectors

There are tons of reflectors on the market. If you are in need of reflector right now and can't wait or you just don’t have the money to invest right now, you can DIY a reflector with a white piece of foam core. If you need more light reflected you can cover one side with aluminum foil.

But if you can afford it pick up a set high quality reflectors. Like the ones from Glow pictured above. A good set of reflectors will last for quite some time and improve the aesthetic of your portraits.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Street Photography Hacks

Written by PT Editor on 26 August 2021.

Street Photography Hacks

^{photo bysatamedia via iStock}

Street photography is one of my favorite photography niches because it proves just how interesting humans and our little routines are. The best street photography captures those interesting, weird, or mundane little moments that prove just how similar we all are.

However, if you’re going to get really good at street photography, you’ll need some street photography hacks to get you started.

Thankfully, Evan Ranft’s street photography hacks video will help you out. Obviously, I recommend you watch the whole thing, but I’ll boil down some of his more important street photography tips here.

Chase the Light

street photography hacks 2

^{photo byAlexLinch via iStock}

One of the most important street photography hacks is to only go out when the light is good. So, you should be shooting early in the morning when the sun is first rising and later in the evening when the sun is setting.

Thankfully, these also happen to be the times when the most people are out because office workers are going to and from work during these times.

When the sun is low in the sky, you’ll have a much easier time finding long shadows that will help make your photos far more interesting to look at. This is especially true if you’re shooting in a city with a lot of skyscrapers.

Use a Zoom Lens

street photography tips

^{photo byMStudioImages via iStock}

If you’re looking for street photography made easy then you need to be prepared with the correct equipment. One of the most important pieces of equipment for street photography is a zoom lens.

Right now, a ton of people are hyper concerned about privacy issues. This means that if you’re shooting street photography with anything other than a zoom lens, you’ll need to get physically close to your subject. If you find a subject that doesn’t want to be photographed (regardless of the fact that you can legally photograph them on the street), you could get a really angry person yelling at you and that could quickly devolve into a dangerous situation.

Zoom lenses help you be able to take photos of people interacting with the city without getting in their face.

When you’re learning how to take street photos, a zoom lens is the easiest way to get started. You can get more comfortable interacting with strangers as you get more comfortable with the photography niche.

Learn More:

Find Interesting People

street photography made easy

^{photo byLightFieldStudios via iStock}

Most street photography hacks have to do with you, as the photographer. This one has to do with your subjects, the people in a specific place.

The easiest way to find interesting people is to pick one location and hole up there for a period of time, be it 20 minutes or an hour. Watch what “normal” people look like at this location. This way, when you see someone a little out of the ordinary, you’ll know they would likely make for a good photo.

Carry One Lens

how to take street photos

^{photo byMlenny via iStock}

You should only bring one lens with you on each shoot.

A lot of street photography hacks are focused on making the shooting process as easy as possible, since street photography can quickly become overwhelming with all of the moving parts of a city. This is especially true for someone who hasn’t participated in street photography before.

So, by only bringing one lens with you on each shoot, you are limiting the amount of time you need to spend messing with your photography gear, which will also increase the amount of time you’re paying attention to your environment.

Use Easy Composition Pieces

street photography hacks to up your game

^{photo byBertlmann via iStock}

What I mean by this is that each city is filled with so many leading lines. It may feel kind of like cheating to use them, but it’s why this article is called “street photography hacks.”

Things like walkways, bridges, and roads will force your viewer’s eye to flow from the beginning of the architecture all the way down to your subject. So, as a street photographer, all you need to do is perch up at the beginning of one of these areas and wait for someone to walk down it.

Don’t Expect to Do Anything in 15 Minutes

taking street photos simpler

^{photo bylechatnoir via iStock}

If you are new to street photography, you are going to think that it takes far less time than it really does to get a good shot.

However, it takes even seasoned street photographers a few minutes out and about to really get their photographic eyes going.

So, don’t expect to do much in a small period of time. I recommend that you give yourself at least an hour to shoot with.

That’s all for our street photography hacks. We hope you liked it and make sure to watch Evan Ranft’s page for more creative photography ideas.

Learn More:

We Recommend

The Best Canon EF Portrait Lenses

Written by PT Editor on 19 May 2022.

The Best Canon EF Portrait Lenses

^{photo bylucky-sky via iStock}

Portrait photography using Canon EF lenses can be done on Canon EOS DSLR cameras and on the new R Series of mirrorless cameras with an adapter.

The best Canon EF portrait lenses can be used on Full Frame format cameras as well as on APS-C format cameras. With the crop factor applied to lenses used on APS-C cameras, they represent a surprisingly lower cost option as a Canon portrait lens.

In this guide, you’ll learn about Canon portrait lenses, what to look for, and where to get them without breaking the bank!

What to Look for in Best Canon EF Portrait Lenses
Desired Characteristics of a Canon Portrait Lens
The Surprise Choice as Best Lens for Portraits - Low Cost 50mm
Fast Short Telephoto as Best Canon EF Portrait Lens - 85mm
Two Fast Zooms as Best Canon EF Portrait Lens Options - 24-70mm and 70-200mm
Best Canon EF Portrait Lens Runner Ups

What to Look for in Best Canon EF Portrait Lenses

Canon portrait lens

^{"Canon EF 85mm f/1.8" by Håkan Dahlström is licensed under CC BY 2.0. To view a copy of this license, visit https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/?ref=openverse}

As I was thinking about what might win as the best Canon EF portrait lens, I quickly realized there will be multiple choices available. Many photographers might want or need various options depending on the portrait images they’re trying to create, so you could end up with a couple of new lenses in your bag.

When I say “new lenses,” I actually mean new to you since some of the best values for the best Canon EF portrait lenses can be found when you buy used. One of my first places to shop when I need to upgrade or replace cameras and lenses is the online platform MPB.

MPB specializes in used photography gear of all types, and on any given day, you may find a huge array of fine cameras and lenses from which to choose. Every item on MPB is hand inspected, and the item condition is clearly explained. MPB offers warranties for almost everything they sell for six months, and most of these items also qualify for a generous seven-day return or exchange window.

On top of that, you can trade-in gear you no longer need or want and put the value of that gear towards offsetting the cost of something you actually need. You can also sell your old gear on MPB and choose to get money in return or apply a credit towards a purchase. It’s a win-win!

Whatever Canon portrait lens you choose as your next piece of gear, you can save a lot of money by opting for a fine quality used lens over a comparable brand new item.

Desired Characteristics of a Canon Portrait Lens

best lens for portraits

^{photo bynazileom via iStock}

That takes care of our budget issues. What else should we consider when deciding on our own best Canon EF portrait lens? I mostly look at two characteristics: focal length and lens aperture.

A short telephoto lens is often touted as the best lens for portraits for a few good reasons. The short telephoto focal length gives a pleasing apparent perspective, there is virtually no facial feature distortion even when focusing up close, and their usually fast maximum aperture supplies opportunities for selective focus techniques.

A normal focal length lens can also qualify as the best lens for portraits for the same reasons: natural perspective, fast apertures, and very little distortion when used carefully. Zoom lenses that incorporate these focal lengths within their ranges can also be very useful, although most won’t have quite as fast a maximum aperture.

The Surprise Choice as Best Lens for Portraits - Low Cost 50mm

Canon EF 50mm 1

Well, here I am again, touting the awesomeness of the Nifty Fifty, the standard or normal focal length 50mm lens for Full Frame 35mm format. There are lots of good reasons for me doing this.

The actual focal length for a normal lens in Full Frame format would be closer to 43.5mm, but the advantages of the 50mm focal length (which includes 55mm, 58mm, and even a 60mm macro lens) are that the optical formula is simple to design and produce as a superbly sharp, speedy, high-performance lens. And it provides a 1:1 ratio for the naked eye viewing the scene or subject versus what’s seen in the camera viewfinder.

Canon EF 50mm 2

That’s for cameras in the Full Frame format, of course. A surprising advantage for many users of Canon EOS APS-C format cameras is that the crop factor of 1.6X (or 1.5X on many other camera brands) results in an equivalent field of view of a short telephone lens. Be sure to learn exactly what crop factor means, as it can be a little confusing at times.

The Canon EF 50mm f/1.8 STM II is the champion all-around best lens for portraits with its fine optical performance, fast aperture, and small size. As a bonus, at MPB, it costs less than some high-capacity memory cards!

This lens is super sharp, has excellent correction of optical aberrations, and it can be focused as close as 1.15 feet or 1/3rd of a meter. The focus motor is virtually silent and very swift as well.

Learn More:

Fast Short Telephoto as Best Canon EF Portrait Lens - 85mm

Canon EF 85mm 1

Now let’s go to an all-time favorite focal length range that many photographers enjoy as the best lens for portraits: the 85mm, 90mm, 100mm, and 105mm short telephoto lenses.

My vote for best Canon EF portrait lens in a short telephoto lens is the Canon EF 85mm f/1.8mm USM lens.

It is one of three Canon EF lenses in this focal length. The others have maximum apertures of f/1.4 and f/1.2, but these lenses are almost double the price of the f/1.8 version without a huge gain in light-gathering ability. If you really want or need the extra speed, though, go for it, those are excellent lenses as well.

Canon EF 85mm 2

The f/1.8 lens aperture, combined with the short telephoto apparent perspective and a close focusing distance, can give you head and shoulder portraits with a completely blurred background.

Meanwhile, the bokeh (out of focus quality) of this small, lightweight lens is gorgeous. You won’t make a mistake opting for this lens as your personal best Canon EF portrait lens.

Two Fast Zooms as Best Canon EF Portrait Lens Options - 24-70mm and 70-200mm

Canon EF 24 70mm 1

Zoom lenses are great choices for many photographers as the all-around best Canon EF portrait lenses because they provide a range of focal length options from which to choose without carrying a huge pack of multiple lenses.

There are two main issues keeping many zoom lenses out of the running as the best Canon EF portrait lenses. First, some have a slow maximum aperture, and second, some have less-than-perfect correction of lens aberrations. Both of these issues are taken care of by Canon EF L-Series zoom lenses.

Canon L-Series lenses are professional-caliber lenses with rugged build quality and excellent optical corrections. These two lenses have a constant maximum aperture of f/2.8, which is fast enough for low-light shooting or selective focus.

Canon EF 24 70mm 2

The Canon EF 24-70mm f/2.8 L USM zoom lens in Full Frame format is wide-angle to medium telephoto, which also incorporates normal focal length and close focusing. On an APS-C format camera, this focal length range is normal to medium telephoto.

Canon EF 70 200mm

The Canon EF 70-200mm f/2.8 IS USM telephoto zoom lens varies from short telephoto to longish in Full Frame format, and medium to very long on an APS-C camera.

Both lenses use virtually silent operation USM motors, and either one (or both) could be labeled as your personal best Canon EF portrait lens.

Best Canon EF Portrait Lens Runner Ups

Canon EF 100mm Macro

Or should that be Runners up? Hey, photography is my first job, grammar rules don’t follow logarithms! Anyways, here are a few alternatives for the title of Best Canon EF Portrait Lens.

The Canon EF 50mm f/2.5 Macro enables ultra-close focusing up to ½ lifesize (1:2) for added versatility. Or opt for the faster Canon EF 50mm f/1.4 USM normal lens.

Short telephoto fans may want a dual-use lens in the Canon EF 100mm f/2.8 L IS USM Macro lens. It focuses all the way down to full 1:1 lifesize and has image stabilization. It has a minimum aperture of f/32, which could provide some interesting depth of field tricks at medium distances.

Canon EF S 18 135mm

Portrait shooters using any of Canon’s fine APS-C format DSLRs should examine the advantages of the Canon EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 zoom lens. It’s a good all-in-one type of lens for portraits and general photography.

While the maximum aperture is somewhat slow at the telephoto end of the zoom range, this lens could be used as an alternative to the kit lens originally purchased with your camera. If you’re buying your next DSLR on MPB, simply forego the 18-55mm altogether and get this instead, perhaps also adding the 50mm f/1.8 STM lens.

There is a good sampling of any of these ideas for the best Canon EF portrait lens on MPB on a fairly continuous basis, so check back regularly if you’re searching for a specific lens choice.

Learn More:

We Recommend

These Easy Portrait Tips Will Make a Huge Difference in Your Photos

Written by PT Editor on 28 January 2021.

These Easy Portrait Tips Will Make a Huge Difference in Your Photos

^{photo byDawidMarkiewicz via iStock}

I don’t know that there is a more intimate type of photography than portrait photography. When I’m taking photos of inanimate objects, or even when I’m taking photos of people from a distance, I can make it so that I blend into the background. The point of these other types of photography is that I make myself as small as possible.

This is why I think a lot of photographers struggle when they try to take portraits for the first time. There is really only so much information you can glean from reading beginner portrait photography tips when the issue is that you are completely changing your role as photographer.

Photography Prorealized the same thing. They released an easy portrait tips video early last year that addresses some of your main concerns abouts portrait photography for beginners.

I’m going to highlight some of the best ones here.

Shoot from a Lower Angle

easy portrait tips 1

^{photo byCoffeeAndMilk via iStock}

Shooting from a lower angle is, quite possibly, the best tip of all of these easy portrait tips. So often photographers will shoot portraits where they are looking down on the model (likely because of a height difference). This makes your model look small and it can make them look less powerful.

It’s one of the biggest reasons why filmmakers will shoot down on a film subject, in order to make them seem unthreatening to the audience.

So, feel free to get down low to shoot your portraits. You’ll also want to zoom your lens in to get nice and close and choose a low f-stop - say, f/2-f/4 - to get a nicely blurred background.

Frame Your Subject

easy portrait tips 2

^{photo bydemaerre via iStock}

This is one of the easy portrait tips that frequently get left out of articles like this one, but only because it requires a prop.

But, you don’t have to bring your own frame in order to frame your subject. You can use a doorway, trees, or windows to frame your subject.

Like many of these easy portrait tips, this one builds off of the last one. If you are going to be framing your subject, make sure that you are still shooting from a lower angle. Not only will this allow you to capture the whole frame in your image, but it will make your model appear as a stronger presence in the shot.

Learn More:

Don’t Forget About Negative Space

portrait photography for beginners 3

^{photo byCecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

The best easy portrait tips are the ones you don’t have to think about: like including negative space in your images.

Okay, fine, I guess you do have to think about it. But what could be easier? Simply by including space where there are little or no details in your image, you are automatically attracting the viewer’s eye to your subject.

Of course, this works best when the model is somewhere beautiful. For instance, you could take a picture of your model in the middle of the desert, with nothing but sand in the background.

Photography Pro used a blank yellow wall in his example because his model was wearing a yellow shirt. This sort of color coordination works really well with negative space.

Use Shadows

portrait photography for beginners 4

^{photo byurbazon via iStock}

You should be shooting during golden hour, because the rays of the sun are beautifully soft and the color temperature will warm up your shots.

But, if you can, you should continue shooting until the sun finally drops down under the horizon. This is because you can get wonderful shadows in the image, especially during the last few minutes of sunlight.

You can use shadows on the wall behind your subject, to sort of replicate their frame, but you can also use shadows on your subject themselves. It will add more depth to their face.

If you’re planning on implementing these easy portrait tips, you will want to use a long zoom lens. A long zoom helps compress the scene, plus you can be a little further back from the subject, that way they don’t feel like you’re shoving the camera in their face!

Focus on Your Model

beginner portrait photography tips 5

^{photo byjeffbergen via iStock}

Having been in the business for as long as I have, I’ve worked with a huge array of people and many of them were incredibly intimidated by having their photo taken.

Regardless of which easy portrait tips you follow or how much technical expertise you have, your portraits are going to come out pretty awful if your model is uncomfortable.

So, there are a few ways you can focus on your model’s comfort during shoots. For starters, always explain exactly what you plan on achieving before the shoot even starts. This is a good time for you to explain that you do shoots like this so that they understand you are a professional, and if they follow your directions, their images will be beautiful.

simple portrait tips 6

^{photo byfunky-data via iStock}

Throughout the shoot, make sure that you’re including your model in your review process. Show them what their pictures look like and show them which poses you like the best.

Even if you are trying to get a specific shot and you don’t think it’s working, don’t let them know that. Keep a smile on your face as you show them the shots so that they gain confidence. You can always circle back around to difficult shots.

I hope you’ve enjoyed these simple portrait tips!

Learn More:

We Recommend

These Portrait Photography Techniques Will Vastly Improve Your Images

Written by PT Editor on 05 January 2021.

These Portrait Photography Techniques Will Vastly Improve Your Images

^{photo byProstock-Studio via iStock}

I had the opportunity to hear Miguel Quiles speak at a photography workshop a few years ago and have followed his YouTube channel ever since, hoping that he would publish videos with information I could share with PhotographyTalk readers.

Well, he published a video about different portrait photography techniques that I thought would be great to share.

You can watch the full video above, but I’m also going to break down all of his portrait photography techniques below so you can try them for yourself at home.

Let’s get started!

Stop Leaving So Much Head Room

portrait photography techniques 1

^{photo byMStudioImages via iStock}

When I was learning how to take better portraits I made the same mistake that Miguel outlines in his video above. I left way too much head room in them.

Unless you’re taking portraits for a professional setting, like for a company who needs headshots of their employees for safety badges, you don’t have to leave that much head room in your portraits. If you like the look of a portrait with a little bit of head room, that’s okay, but your head room should not be taking up 20% of your image. That’s too much!

portrait photography techniques 2

^{photo byAaronAmat via iStock}

I’m not entirely sure where this false belief that head room is important to portraits came from. I’m assuming it was likely a classic documentary style tip, because a lot of journalists and documentarians will leave plenty of head room while shooting interviews.

However, you aren’t here to learn how to shoot documentaries. You’re here to learn portrait photography techniques. Your portraits will be much more fascinating if you learn how to fill more of the frame with your subject.

Pay Attention to Catch Lights

portrait photography tutorial 3

^{photo byskynesher via iStock}

Most portrait photography techniques suggest that you create shots where your subject’s eyes are the focus of the image. This is because, as humans, we are naturally drawn to someone’s eyes.

In order to make your subject’s eyes more interesting, you should make sure that they have catch lights. While it is pretty easy to create catch lights with natural lighting, sometimes you won’t be able to do so. In this case, you can use reflectors to bounce light from the sun onto your subject, or you can use studio lights to create noticeable catch lights that add interest to the shot.

Learn More:

Focus on Your Eye Placement

portrait photography tutorial 4

^{photo byalvarez via iStock}

Since focusing on your subject’s eyes is one of the most important portrait photography techniques, you need to always be aware of where they are and how they’re looking.

Miguel points out that one of his favorite portrait photography hacks is to watch how much white he can see in his subject’s eyes, because the most interesting part of a person’s eyes is their iris and not their sclera (the white part).

He said this is an especially important tip because if you’re going to be working with people who aren’t used to being in front of a camera, they will likely be shy and want to look away from the camera, which means you will only be capturing their sclera.

portrait photography tips 5

^{photo bybrusinski via iStock}

To combat this, he recommends a few portrait photography techniques. The first is to have them look to the side of the camera and to keep their eyes positioned straight over their noises. This prevents them from looking farther away from the camera and keeps all of their angles looking good. The second is to have them look straight at the camera.

But, neither of these portrait photography techniques are foolproof, so make sure you’re still examining the position of your subject’s eyes regularly.

Lighting is King

how to take better portraits 6

^{photo byKerkez via iStock}

A few portrait photography tips can also be used as regular photography tips and this is one of them. Do not forget that lighting is king.

I’ll regularly see people trying to take portraits in a certain location because the background of that location is really interesting. Miguel used the example of Disney World, but I’ve seen people negating all portrait photography techniques in favor of getting some specific landmark into their photos on nearly every vacation I’ve been on.

Think about it like this. Would you rather have a terrible photo of your family standing next to the Grand Canyon park entrance sign or would you rather have a wonderful, beautifully lit photo of our family standing somewhere within the park?

For me, it’s no contest. I would rather have a great portrait. Find wherever the lighting is best and put your subject there. Don’t try and make the lighting right somewhere it isn’t.

Use Expressions

portrait photography hacks 7

^{photo byGoodboy Picture Company via iStock}

I was watching another portrait photography tutorial the other day and it completely neglected to discuss the expressions on your subject’s face.

Miguel has noticed this trend too. Perhaps photographers are just getting so wrapped up in their lighting and other technical aspects of their portraits that they’re forgetting what a portrait is all about: making your subject look wonderful.

In order to get some authentic expressions out of your subjects, though, you will likely need to use some portrait photography techniques. One technique is pretty simple. You can just tell them that you’re a professional photographer and that it’s your job to get an awesome picture of them. Reminding them that you’re good at what you do may just allow them to relax enough to enjoy the experience.

If this doesn’t work, though, you can also get your subject to play a character so that they can just mess around and have fun with it.

That’s all for this article on portrait photography techniques. Let us know which one was your favorite!

Learn More:

We Recommend

These Wedding Photography Gear Tips Will Change Your Life

Written by PT Editor on 05 August 2019.

These Wedding Photography Gear Tips Will Change Your Life

^{Photo by Ramiz Dedaković on Unsplash}

Whether you’re prepping for your first wedding or your one hundredth wedding, everybody can use additional wedding photography gear tips, especially if those wedding photography gear tips include how to score wedding photography gear on a budget.

In this list we cover our favorite cheap gear, our must-haves, and more. In short, these wedding photography gear tips will probably change your life.

Invest in Good Shoes and Insoles

wedding photography gear tips

^{Photo by Radek Skrzypczak on Unsplash}

I made a mistake the first time I went to shoot a wedding; I wore a fancy new pair of shoes I just bought. I almost immediately regretted it and began limping entirely against my will by the end of the (very long) day.

It got so bad that one of the bridesmaids offered to run to the store and buy me bandages. That was one of many most-embarrassing moments running my own photography business.

I never thought about shoes as part of my wedding photography gear until it was too late.

Since then, I’ve purchased a mid-range pair of leather boots (they cost around $200). I also invested in Dr. Scholl’s insoles, although any drug-store brand of insoles should do the trick for a few months before you need to purchase new ones.

I also started breaking my wedding shoot shoes in by wearing them around my house, and then on shorter shoots.

You should plan to own your wedding shoot shoes for at least 2 weeks before you even begin to think about wearing them to a wedding you’re working. Take it from me.

Learn More:

Have a Supply of Old, White Sheets

wedding photography gear

^{Photo by Yoann Boyer on Unsplash}

And maybe blue or red sheets if you’re shooting a wedding with a less-conventional bride.

Nobody wants it to rain on their wedding day, which is precisely why it almost always rains on your wedding day. And if you’re going to want to be taking pictures of your happy couple frolicking in the woods, or sharing a secret moment outside the church in the grass, your bride’s dress will get wet and muddy.

If you have white sheets on you, you can place them underneath the bride and easily conceal them while keeping her dress clean.

I always have at least one white sheet tucked away in the back of my car in case I forget to pack one with the rest of my wedding photography equipment, and it has saved me more times than I can count!

Buy Yourself a Camera Harness

Holdfast 1

This tip echoes my earlier tip about the comfortable shoes. No wedding photography gear tips list is complete without an easy way to carry a camera, and lenses, and more lenses for 12, sometimes 14 or 16 hours straight.

A camera harness is one of the cheapest additions to your wedding photography gear and it might just save you on chiropractic visits and massage appointments down the line.

Stop googling, “wedding photography gear on a budget,” and invest in one harness that will last you a lifetime.

My favorite option is the MoneyMaker by Holdfast.

holdfast 2

It’s so popular that it is currently on backorder, which makes sense when you think about the fact that each one is hand-crafted in the U.S. with the best leather that money can buy.

I love the MoneyMaker because it fully equips me to shoot with 2 cameras, which very few camera harnesses do.

I also enjoy the feeling of knowing my wedding photography gear is absolutely unique to me. I can see part of the cow’s branding on my MoneyMaker harness because Holdfast refuses to dispose of good hide just because of perceived “imperfections.”

holdfast 3

This lets me know that I have something nobody else in the industry does.

Holdfast also has additional wedding photography equipment, like additional gear straps if you really need more room on your camera harness than the MoneyMaker already gives you.

Get Cheap (But Helpful) Lighting Gear

wedding photography equipment

photo by Mordolff via iStock

I know when I started in photography one of the most intimidating things was learning how to utilize an artificial light system for portraits.

But then I quickly realized that you don’t need a huge or expensive setup like the one shown above to vastly improve the lighting situation.

For most weddings, all you need is a couple of speedlights with diffusers for photos inside the venue (this Yongnuo speedlight is highly rated and dirt cheap) and a reflector pack for shots outside (this one is a great buy).

If you’re not sure how to use speedlights or just want to see how an expert handles flash photography at weddings, check out the video above by Adorama.

As far as using a reflector goes, it’s a simple process that just requires an extra set of hands and the right positioning to bounce light onto your subject. You can read up on that process here.

With that, you have a few practical wedding photography tips that can have a significant impact on your wedding day workflow!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Tips for Head Shot Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 17 April 2020.

Tips for Head Shot Portraits

^{Photo by Andrea Piacquadio from Pexels}

Intimate portraits, head and shoulder views or head shot portraits, are an excellent way to provide great images for our clients. Since the view is so close, our subjects may feel somewhat anxious or intimidated by the thought of having such a close up portrait of themselves.

Since the subject, who is likely our paying client, is likely to be at least a little camera shy concerning head shot portraits, it is up to the photographer, you, to take control and make the photo shoot as smooth as possible.

This is easier than some may think. Here are some head shot portraits tips that may assist you in making the best head shots possible.

Talk It Out First

head shot portraits 1

^{Photo by Canva Studio from Pexels}

Before any images get captured, you should talk to the subject about their head shot portraits, their ideas of how they want to look, your ideas of clothing colors or styles that could be most flattering, and other thoughts.

That would be well before the head shot portrait session. Perhaps as you book the photo shoot, or as the scheduled date gets closer.

When the session starts, I like to chat around a bit. It doesn’t take long, just a few minutes. You don’t need to be an orator or comedian, just be yourself. That should help the subject relax and be themselves in the photos.

Control Your Set Up

how to take head shots 2

^{photo by Juanmonino via iStock}

Whether in a studio or on location, the photographer has the ability and skill needed to control most of the variables involved in how to take head shots.

The set up can refer to your photographic lighting gear, the exposure setting you choose, and the lens used, plus how close or far you are to the subject and how close or far the subject is to the background.

All of these variables can be controlled, at least to some extent, by the photographer. Which brings us the head shot portrait lighting tips and head shot portrait composition tips.

Learn More:

Head Shot Portrait Lighting Tips

how to take head shots 3

^{Photo by malcolm garret from Pexels}

Photographic lighting for head shot portraits can be the same lights and lighting configuration you’re already using. A simple two light set up will work for flattering portraits whether in a studio or on location for environmental head shot portraits.

A configuration I like for head and shoulder views is the basic broad lighting technique. This can easily be accomplished with just one or two small lights. Indoors, you would likely use two lights, one either closer to the subject or set at higher power than the other light.

Outdoors, you can make this technique work for head shot portraits with one portable light optimally placed.

A small portable light I’ve been enjoying since their first Kickstarter campaign is the Hakutatz portable LED light. It’s very compact with a very bright power level that can be used indoors or out. Being battery powered, you can take it anywhere you need to add lighting. It’s now available in their new eBay store.

Additionally, this little light offers amber light, white light, and hundreds of RGB colors so you can truly customize the look and feel of the lighting you get for your head shots.

And since it can literally fit in your pocket, it’s easy to take with you wherever you go - and easy to set up, too.

Head Shot Portrait Composition Tips

head shot portrait lighting tips 4

^{Photo by Andrea Piacquadio from Pexels}

Good head shots portraits depend on posing and composition every bit as much as they depend on lighting and exposure.

The broad lighting technique mentioned above is half light placement, half subject placement. The lights are placed in a position that flatters the face, such as 45 degrees up and 45 degrees to one side.

The subject has their face and body mostly turned towards the light. This illuminates a large portion of the head shot, the broad part of the name for this technique. The short side is in shadow. A second light can be used to lighten the short side shadow.

head shot portrait lighting tips 5

^{Photo by nappy from Pexels}

Outdoors, or with window light indoors, you would position the subject to take advantage of natural light as the broad light, adding a reflector or small light to fill in the dark side.

Other posing and composition ideas are to make use of the the Rule of Thirds and carefully watch their head placement.

The Rule of Thirds is an important composition tool for most head shot portraits. While there is definitely room for creativity, the head shot many clients will be expecting generally is a composition following established norms.

Make Your Head Shot Portraits Stand Out

head shot portrait composition tips 6

^{photo by CasarsaGuru via iStock}

Two things that can help make your version of the regular head shot stand out from the crowd is assisting your subject with head and hand placement, and selective focus.

So many people act completely natural right up until the camera lens cap off. Then they seem paralyzed. As a photographer, this is when you take control and make suggestions for flattering head position and natural looking hand placement.

head shot portrait composition tips 7

photo by damircudic via iStock

You also set your portraits apart by setting the head shot portrait subject apart from the background by means of selective focus and proper lens choice. Short telephoto lenses and wider apertures are a method you can use to make that happen.

As the photographer, you can take control of head shot portraits with good lighting, pleasing composition, and comfortable posing suggestions.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Tips for Successful Impromptu Portraits

Written by PT Editor on 15 July 2020.

Tips for Successful Impromptu Portraits

^{Photo by Xiaoming Tian from Pexels}

Impromptu portraits opportunities such as street scenes, party pics, or just everyday pictures of people and friends that are a step or two above snapshot level can come up at any time, which is why they’re called impromptu portraits.

These impromptu portraits don’t have to be entirely unplanned, though, you can prepare ahead of time to maximize any outing you’re on with your camera in hand, even if that camera is your high quality smartphone.

Portrait Photography Tips

impromptu portraits 1

^{Photo by Deden Dicky Ramdhani from Pexels}

When giving portrait photography tips for beginners, I like to show how you can make use of simple portrait photography gear, including items you probably already have. Other items, like portable portrait lighting, can be simple, easy to use, and relatively inexpensive.

We’ll cover some basic principles for impromptu portraits and impromptu shooting in general, portable portrait lighting ideas, and some useful portrait photography gear choices.

Take Your Camera!

portrait photography tips 2

Photo by Katie E from Pexels

If your standard walk about camera is a smartphone, that’s fine. I really like the newest Galaxy phones and iPhones with their camera upgrades. I like to keep an upgrade camera with me most of the time instead of relying on my smartphone.

A great option for many photographers are the point and shoot (P&S) style cameras and bridge cameras. The newest versions of these have large sensors and lots of features to work with.

Personally, I tend to bring along my mirrorless camera and a versatile lens whenever I’m going anywhere that might have photo opportunities. Sure, it’s a little more trouble, but being ready for high quality photography requires a tiny bit of sacrifice.

If nothing else, at least I have my smartphone with me 98% of the time. I downloaded a better camera app for mine, check what is available for yours.

Learn More:

Standard Lenses Work Best

portrait photography tips for beginners 3

^{Photo by Desmond Gatimu from Pexels}

A standard lens is a good choice for impromptu portraits or any type of impromptu photography. So, what am I defining as a standard lens for portrait tips? When I go out with a camera but with no real plan of what to shoot, I will put one of two lenses on my camera.

One option is the trusty Nifty Fifty fast 50mm normal lens (full frame format, adjust for crop factor with other formats). The 50mm focal length normal lens, with an f-stop of f/1.8 to f/2.0 is a fantastic choice for impromptu portraits. They are extremely sharp, have a wide maximum aperture for selective focus, and are compact for easy transport.

A second option, which is actually what I usually use for photo walkabouts, is a fast normal range zoom such as a 24-70mm f/2.8 zoom lens. Without losing too much in maximum aperture, I gain the versatility of having wide angle and short telephoto focal lengths. These are large, heavy, and somewhat pricey, but the worth of their capabilities can’t really be measured in dollars.

The kit lens for many DSPRs and mirrorless cameras also make good choices for impromptu portraits. These are very sharp, but usually have very slow maximum apertures, especially at the telephoto end of the lens. If you haven’t added any other lenses to your impromptu portrait photography gear yet, your kit lens will work just fine.

Portable Portrait Lighting

Since you’re out with your camera and not in a studio, maybe even not inside a building, any portrait lighting you choose to use will have to be portable. Battery power is preferred, as is small size so you can easily carry it.

The smartphone sized Hakutatz LED Lightis a good choice for impromptu portrait lighting due to its small size, bright light output, and long battery life. The continuous light output of the Hakutatz makes it simple to see what your light arrangement will produce, speeding up your light placement chores for those quick impromptu portraits.

Since these lights are hardly larger than a smartphone, you can keep on you while you go out to your event or place that just might have some unplanned photographic opportunities for you and your camera.

Be Prepared

portable portrait lighting 4

^{Photo by Ekaterina Belinskaya from Pexels}

We’re not all boy scouts, but being prepared for impromptu portraits is a good idea for us as photographers. Impromptu may be unplanned, but we can always be ready for whatever picture taking opportunities come up.

Learn More:

Learn more about the Creative Photo Academy Kenya Safari

We Recommend

Top Photography Workshops to Attend in 2023

Written by PT Editor on 02 July 2020.

top photography workshops 2020 2021

^{Photo by pixdeluxe via iStock}

Each year, we do a "top photography workshops" list...

Now that there are far fewer restrictions on travel due to the pandemic, the top photography workshops will continue to fill up fast.

With that in mind, I thought I would help you plan your photography outings with a quick look at some of the top workshop options available today.

What's so great about the photography workshops that I list below is that they offer an enormous variety of options. You can travel at home or abroad. Visit iconic locations or off-the-beaten-path locales. In each case, though, you'll benefit from small-group instruction from incredibly talented photographers.

So, without further ado, let's get to my picks for the top photography workshops!

Table of Contents: Top Photography Workshops to Attend in 2023

Creative Photo Academy
Great Basin School of Photography
ColorTexturePhotoTours
Tuttle Cameras Photography Workshops
Aperture Academy
David W. Shaw Photography Workshops and Tours
Jennifer King Photo Workshops
Arctic Exposure Iceland Workshops
Photo Workshop Adventures

Creative Photo Academy Kenya Safari

Creative photo academy 1

When: August 1-7, 2023

Base Fee: $7,900

Workshop Leader: Mark Comon

For more than 30 years, Creative Photo Academy has been at the forefront of photography education, offering everything from photography classes and photo walks to full-on photography workshops and multi-day adventures all over the world.

And unlike some photography companies, Creative Photo Academy doesn’t just focus on one kind of instruction. Instead, they offer workshops and tours in all manner of photography genres, from landscape to portrait photography and just about everything in between.

They can offer such a wide range of learning opportunities because they have award-winning, internationally recognized famous photographers leading each course. That means that you not only get the chance to learn more about photography and improve your skills, but you also get to learn from professionals that are at the top of their game.

creative photo academy 2

One of Creative Photo Academy’s most popular workshops is the Kenya Safari, which they lead in conjunction with Simba Marara Expeditions.

Led by Mark Comon and Oscar Mwangi, this premier safari will take you into the heart of Kenya where you’ll be able to photograph the incredible diversity of wildlife and see spectacular landscapes in a National Geographic-style outing.

creative photo academy 3

As any top-flight tour should, the Kenya Safari includes deluxe accommodations, incredible meals, and local transportation.

With abundant wildlife in the area, there will be no lack of jaw-dropping wildlife sightings while on the trip. Combined with the opportunity to meet locals and learn about their customs, this is truly a can’t-miss chance to travel to one of the world’s most incredible places!

There's even an optional gorilla trek that precedes the Kenya Safari where you can witness (and photograph!) gorillas and chimpanzees.

Great Basin School of Photography

best photography workshops 2022 mono lake

When: Varies

Base Fee: Varies by location

Workshop Leaders: Jeff Sullivan & Lori Hibbett

When you go on a photography workshop, you want to explore beautiful locations, but you also want to learn. That's precisely what you do on a workshop with Great Basin School of Photography!

I've had the chance to get to know Jeff and Lori and see that at work in the field. I can tell you first-hand that they are incredibly knowledgable photographers, gifted teachers, and excellent tour guides.

best photography workshops 2022 yosemite

What I appreciate most about the tours from Jeff and Lori is that they do all the work. They do the research. They scout locations. They have an intimate knowledge of each location. What does that mean for you?

It's simple - you get to experience a photo workshop that's run like a well-oiled machine!

best photo workshops 2022 nevada

With the knowledge that Jeff and Lori have amassed over the years, they know the best times of day and the best times of year to visit each location.

What's more, they know where to take you that other tour operators don't. That means you can explore the iconic spots, but you also get to the off-the-beaten-path locations, too.

best photography workshops of 2022 great basin

There are tours in a variety of locations throughout the year as well. You can explore Death Valley and Yosemite, Nevada and the Eastern Sierras, and experience the ghost town of Bodie, California at night.

Whichever location is your pleasure, you'll find that you're put in a position to find success and that you'll learn things that help you take your best shot.

Whether you want to photograph deserts or wildflowers, ghost towns or soaring mountain peaks, Jeff and Lori have you covered!

Learn more about Great Basin School of Photography

ColorTexturePhotoTours

AbiquaFalls

When: Varies

Base Fee: Varies by location

Workshop Leader: Scott Setterberg

I don’t know about you, but when I head out for a photography adventure, I don’t want to worry about anything other than getting my best shots.

With the all-inclusive photography tours from ColorTexturePhotoTours, everything is handled for you so you can concentrate on capturing the beauty around you. Whether you join workshop leader Scott Setterberg in Costa Rica, Oregon, or Washington, you’ll find that you’re pampered with stays in luxurious hotels, fine food, and, of course, gorgeous scenery!

BoardmanTreeFarm

Regardless of the workshop you choose, you’ll be part of a private tour that’s limited to a handful of participants. In fact, ColorTexturePhotoTours limits availability to just four people!

In this small group setting, you can maximize your time with Scott to learn photography tips and tricks for improving your photography. Likewise, with such a small group, it’s easier to get to know your tourmates and develop friendships that last far beyond the last day of the tour.

CannonBeach HaystackRock 2 1080x720x150

When you’re not out in the field shooting, you’ll be transported from one location to the next with comfortable travel in a private transport.

You’ll also get to enjoy workshops at the hotel where you can learn how to improve your digital workflow with Lightroom tips from Scott. Of course, sharing photos and getting feedback on your work is part of the experience as well.

RioToro Rocks 1080x720x150

I’ve had the opportunity to get to know Scott over the last year or so, and he constantly impresses me with his drive to provide the best experience for his clients.

Though some tour companies take liberty with what “private” and “small group” and “luxurious” actually mean, ColorTexturePhotoTours offers the real deal.

It’s just you, three new photography friends, and an expert photographer leading you from one spectacular location to the next!

Tours are ongoing throughout the year, so be sure to check with ColorTexturePhotoTours for details on upcoming workshops.

Learn more about ColorTexturePhotoTours

Tuttle Cameras Photography Workshops

Landscape Photography ND

When: Monthly

Base Fee: Most classes are free

Workshop Leaders: Varies by class

One of the most significant barriers for people to participate in a photography workshop is the expense - many workshops cost thousands of dollars. Not all of us have that kind of disposable income.

Additionally, not all of us can take a week off work to fly to some far-flung location for a workshop.

Is it worth the time and expense? You bet! I’ve been to several workshops over the years, and the time away from work and being deeply engaged in improving my craft has been awesome.

But if you want to improve your craft and learn from experts in the field, you don’t have to fly anywhere. Heck, you don’t have to drive anywhere! With Tuttle Cameras’ photography workshops, you can hop on Zoom, learn all about photography, and improve your skills from the comfort of your own home.

Best of all, many of the classes offered by Tuttle Cameras are free! It truly is the best of both worlds - no monetary output and no travel required.

Tuttle Cameras got its start in 1946, and since its inception, it’s been a leader in the camera industry. This shows in their Zoom classes.

An expert photographer leads each course and takes you on a deep dive into the selected topic. And speaking of topics, you get a wide range of courses to choose from. For example, past courses have explored:

Lenses to Enhance Creativity
Advanced Exposure
Architecture Photography
Street Photography
How Lenses Work

And that just scratches the surface…

Other courses examine landscape, botanical, night sky, and macro photography.

Tuttle Cameras offers a different lineup of classes each month, so there truly is something for everyone. Plus, many classes are an hour long and occur in the evenings to not interfere with the workday.

Tuttle Cameras has removed all barriers for expanding your knowledge and skills in photography with these free Zoom classes. And if you’re local in the Los Angeles area, some classes also have in-person components. If you want to attend the in-person class, note that they often have a limit on students.

Learning about photography has never been easier. Tuttle Cameras' photography workshops are a great alternative if you want to take a class but don’t have the time or money to go on a week-long photo tour. Heck, since many classes are free, you can take as many as you want!

Learn more about Tuttle Cameras Photography Workshops

Aperture Academy

aperture academ yosemite

When: Throughout the year

Base Fee: Varies by class

Workshop Leaders: Varies by class

When you’re looking for the best photography workshops to attend, one thing you probably look for is variety. Well, variety is precisely what you get with Aperture Academy!

If you’re a beginner photographer and need direction to take your images to the next level, Aperture Academy’s intro workshops are just what you need. Study landscapes, portraits, or general basics. There’s even a teen summer camp!

aperture academy san fran

Are you on a tight schedule and don’t have time for an extended workshop? Try Aperture Academy’s one-day workshops.

Varying from three to six hours, these workshops offer you the chance to develop new skills or hone existing ones in a condensed time frame. You can explore San Francisco at night, learn macro photography skills, and visit Big Sur, among several other fine options.

aperture academy grand teton

What about longer workshops? Aperture Academy has you covered there, too!

Join a two to four-day workshop and explore epic locations across the U.S. With workshops from Texas to Wyoming, California to South Carolina, there’s no lack of choice of where you can go to learn from expert photographers in the field.

Additionally, these workshops are offered at points throughout the year. You can learn how to photograph Yosemite in the winter, Colorado in the fall, or the Valley of Fire in the spring. These are but three examples to whet your appetite.

If you want an even longer adventure, Aperture Academy’s Sojourn Series workshops put you in the field for multiple days. There’s a four-day Grizzly Bears of Alaska trip, an 11-day Iceland workshop, and a 10-day Africa workshop in Kenya, to name but a few options.

aperture academy eastern sierra

No matter which workshop you attend with Aperture Academy, you’ll get expert instruction from award-winning teachers. Learning takes place in a fun, relaxed, and supportive small-group environment. You’ll get plenty of individual instruction while also having the opportunity to support and be supported by others in the group.

The hands-on education you get on an Aperture Academy workshop will fuel your creativity and spark your passion for photography. The skills you learn will last a lifetime, and enable you to take photos that are much improved from a creative and technical standpoint.

All you have to do is pick a workshop to attend!

Learn more about Aperture Academy Photography Workshops

David W. Shaw Photography Workshops & Tours

david w shaw workshops and tours

When: Varies

Base Fee: Based on Workshop Location

Workshop Leader: David W. Shaw

What makes David W. Shaw Photography Workshops and Tours unique is that Dave is not just a seasoned professional photographer, but he is also a biologist with undergraduate and master’s degrees in wildlife biology.

His knowledge and understanding of wildlife and ecosystems put you closer to the action, and his passion for protecting animals and wild places will inspire you to use the power of photography to help lead conservation efforts in your backyard and the world over.

david shaw 2

But it’s not just his background in biology that makes Dave’s workshops and tours a worthwhile endeavor.

Dave strives to create experiences that challenge you as a photographer, facilitate your growth behind the lens, and educate you on natural history elements of the areas you explore.

In the context of a small group workshop, Dave will take you to unique and extraordinary destinations from an autumn trip to the Kenai in Alaska to the plains of Botswana, Fat Bears of Katmai to Argentina's Secret Tropics. While on your journey, you’ll get plenty of one-on-one attention from Dave while also having time to get to know your workshop-mates.

david shaw 3

What’s perhaps even more impressive is that Dave selects off-the-beaten-path locations for his workshops and tours.

So, not only do you benefit from traveling with a small group, but the destinations to which you travel won’t be overrun with crowds of tourists and other photographers.

In that regard, these nature photography workshops and tours are as much about connecting with nature and learning more about the world around us as they are about becoming a more skilled photographer.

It’s for this reason that we’ve selected Dave’s outfit as one of the top workshops to attend in 2023!

Get more details about David W. Shaw Photography Workshops and Tours

Jennifer King Photo Workshops

When: Dates vary

Base Fee: Varies depending upon location

Workshop Leader: Varies

It's a long list when you consider all the great things about Jennifer King Photo Workshops...

For starters, there are workshops for every kind of photographer in every kind of location you can imagine. From the badlands of South Dakota to the Great Smoky Mountains, Yellowstone National Park to Death Valley, you can develop your photography skills and learn from some of the best photographers in the world, all the while exploring some of the most breathtaking landscapes you can find.

If it sounds awesome, it is! Jennifer and her team spend countless hours planning each trip, scouting locations, and making arrangements so you can have a stress-free trip and spend your time becoming a better photographer. There's a reason why 94% of Jennifer's clients come back for more!

These workshops aren't just fun trips, either. Instead, they're designed with skill-building in mind for photographers of all ability levels.

Each day, workshop leaders work one-on-one with each workshop participant in the field and during class sessions.

That includes constructive critiques of each attendee's images, that way you know exactly what's working and what needs to be addressed in your shots.

And since these workshops are limited to small groups, it's not like you'll be fighting for time with the instructors.

If you're looking for an adventure and a chance to take your photography to the next level, Jennifer King Photo Workshops is the place to do it!

Learn more about Jennifer King Photo Workshops

Arctic Exposure Iceland Workshops

skarpi C13A3184 72dpi

When: Workshops are held year round

Base Fee: Varies based on tour

Workshop Leader: Varies based on tour

Being from Southern California, I don’t get many opportunities to explore glacier fields, walk along black sand beaches, take in awe-inspiring waterfalls, and enjoy the Northern Lights. And while I see snow on the distant mountain peaks during the winter, I never actually get to play around in it.

That’s why if there’s one place I’d love to see and document with my camera, it’s the Arctic...

More specifically, Iceland is on the top of my list of places to explore with my camera. By the way, Canon 5D Mark IV is my most favorite camera, check it out.

If a trip to Iceland is on your bucket list, Arctic Exposure has the workshops for you!

Though Arctic Exposure has workshops all over the Arctic region, their Iceland tours - which occur year-round - are their most popular.

skarpi C13A0751 72dpi

With professional photography guides to lead you on your tour, Arctic Exposure gets you to the most gorgeous places in Iceland where you can take in the breathtaking scenery, learn how to more skillfully use your camera, and discover ways to process your images to create the best possible photos.

And by gorgeous locations, I mean these workshops take you to iconic spots in Iceland like Reykjavík, Thingvellir National Park, Vik, Snæfellsnes, the Golden Circle, Glacier Lagoon, and the South Coast, just to name a few.

But what sets these workshops apart is that Arctic Exposure gets you off the beaten path as well. That means that you can explore lesser-known areas with your camera (and get away from tourists while you’re at it!).

Additionally, Arctic Exposure focuses on the culture and history of this tiny island nation. In that regard, a tour with Arctic Exposure isn’t just about seeing beautiful things and learning more about photography; instead, it’s an experience of a lifetime in which you come away with a greater appreciation for the people and the landscapes of Iceland.

These tours are all-inclusive, with lodging, meals and local transportation included. And by transportation, I mean that you get to ride around in this thing:

skarpi C13A0216 72dpi

That, my friends, is the baddest Mercedes Sprinter Van you’ll ever see!

With a lift kit, 46-inch wheels, beefy tires, and differential locks, these vans can handle just about anything that Iceland throws at them. That means that you can still get to remote locations like waterfalls, ice caves, and glaciers, even in the dead of winter. There’s even Wi-Fi and USB chargers for each seat!

Gorgeous scenery, lessons on photography, opportunities to learn about local history, tours available winter, spring, summer, and fall, and amazing transportation...what more could you ask for in a photography tour?

Learn more about Arctic Exposure Workshops

Photo Workshop Adventures

best photography workshops 2022

^{Photo by izhairguns via iStock}

When: Year-round

Base Fee: Varies based on tour location

Workshop Leader: Varies based on tour location

If a photography workshop in Europe has been on your to-do list, it's hard to beat the variety of European-based tours offered by Photo Workshop Adventures.

You can explore all corners of the continent with your camera - the UK, Greece, Norway, Italy, and all points in between.

What's more, photography workshops are offered year-round, so you can tailor your experience to the time of year. Catch Cinque-Terre, Italy in the spring, visit Switzerland in the late summer, and experience Norway in the fall.

photo workshop adventures

^{Photo by Brzozowska via iStock}

No matter the location, you'll enjoy a small-group experience - or you can choose a private tour, if you like.

All tours are guided by experienced photographers that know the best locations for capturing the breathtaking and varied beauty of Europe.

Additionally, these tours include incredible cultural experiences, wonderful food, and world-class accommodations.

With options to travel in more than 50 different countries, Photo Workshop adventures certainly gives you the variety you want when planning your photography adventure.

Photographers of all skill levels from beginner to semi-pro are welcome to join these casual, photo-centric tours. You'll learn while you explore Europe - not in a classroom!

Learn more about Photo Workshop Adventures

We Recommend

Try These Fun Wedding Photo Ideas With Your Next Clients

Written by PT Editor on 25 October 2022.

Try These Fun Wedding Photo Ideas With Your Next Clients

^{Photo by Jovana Stojanovic via iStock}

The work of a wedding photographer is full of opportunities for stress. After all, this is a high-pressure job that requires you to perform, and perform well!

That being the case, having some fun wedding photo ideas in our back pocket is one way we can keep our wedding photography fresh while helping keep ourselves from succumbing to the pressure of the gig.

Each client deserves the best we can provide for their special day, too, so we’ll also discuss some helpful wedding photography tips, including a few suggestions for displaying the photos you take. Let’s get to it!

Causes of Wedding Photography Stress

^{Photo by Marco VDM via iStock}

Fun wedding photo ideas help lessen the stresses involved in wedding photography, both for the client and for you as a photographer. Some of the main causes of stress revolve around the nature of the special event photography.

The timing of the event is a large part of most of the stresses. This event only happens once, it has things happening in a certain order, and there aren’t many opportunities for reshooting anything.

Other opportunities for stress may come from people being on edge about how special the event should be. Sometimes there may be some personality differences going on that cause friction. That’s simply the nature of documenting once-in-a-lifetime happening!

Fun Wedding Photo Ideas for Any Client

^{Photo by digitalskillet via iStock}

Sometimes we get into a mindset about how serious everything should be. It’s true that we need to do our utmost to ensure delivering great images in a timely manner, but that doesn’t mean we have to be so somber about things.

Our client may be a friend or family member that we’re providing the wedding photography service for, or they may be paying us top dollar for a specific wedding package. Any of our clients might be open to some of these fun wedding photo ideas. All we can do is ask.

When speaking to our wedding photography clients, it can be a good idea to ask them if they have any lighthearted or fun wedding photo ideas of their own. They may be hesitant to bring it up themselves, so being open and willing might help make their special day just what they really want.

Check out the video above entitled, “10 tips to get great wedding photos - ideas, poses, techniques” by Christian Tudor - Academy of Photography, for some helpful advice on this subject.

Pre-Wedding Portraits

Pre Wedding Portraits

^{Photo by Ekkasit Jokthong via iStock}

Few wedding photography clients want anything silly happening during the actual ceremony (though some will, and I guarantee they’ll tell you their ideas), so the pictures taken before and after the formal ceremony itself will be the most likely opportunities for fun wedding photo ideas.

Some lighthearted pre-wedding portraits ideas will probably go over well for most couples. Pre-wedding portraits can happen a week or more before the wedding or closer to the wedding date, so you can capitalize on less stressful times to enjoy a fun photoshoot. These types of images help tell the story of the wedding day in a photo album or other image presentation, while also providing a little levity.

On the wedding day, there are multiple ways to include fun wedding photo ideas with the bride and her attendants as they get ready. The same goes for the groom and his group. Informal, candid shots at this point of the day are wonderful ways to include fun photos. We can also take advantage of this time to grab nice images of those attending who aren’t part of the wedding party.

Jump! For Your Love

fun wedding photos

^{Photo by Hiraman via iStock}

Jump for joy is a common thought on such a loving day, so we can use our imagination and the party’s willingness to simply have fun by asking for some jump up and down shots.

We can vary these poses quite a bit, like having the groom and everyone else but the bride jump while she stays on the ground and vice versa. Not everyone will jump at the opportunity for airborne imagery, but when you can get them to join in, those pics are always cute.

Fun Wedding Photo Ideas - Posing and Groups

Fun Wedding Photo Ideas Posing and Groups

^{Photo by teksomolika via iStock}

Even while we’re in the middle of capturing all of the traditional poses and groupings that our clients may be expecting, we can stay alert for those candid spur-of-the-moment shots that come up.

An unexpected conversation might result in either a touching expression or a goofy one. We don’t even need to step out of the configuration we have set up, just click that shutter when we see it happening.

The groups that we document on the wedding day can become fun wedding photo ideas by means of varying who gets paired with who. Stay open to suggestions from people attending and from the wedding party themselves.

Make sure that the client is open to these ideas ahead of time, though. Some people stay much more serious than others, but you will pretty much know all of this well ahead of time by paying attention to your client and their mindset about the event, the types of photos they want, and the types of prints and photo books they want.

Fun Wedding Photo Ideas - Lighting and Effects

Fun Wedding Photo Ideas Lighting and Effects

^{Photo by olegbreslavtsev via iStock}

There are so many ways to incorporate fun wedding photo ideas by means of lighting and other effects. Smoke bomb phtography may fit in with some clients, low-key and high-key photography will for others. Soft focus, backlight, low angle, and other ideas are all available as fun wedding photo ideas, too.

To get some ideas, take a look at some of the other articles we’ve published about portraits, group portraits, family photo ideas, and lighting configuration for a special look, and even our articles on filters, depth of field, and shutter speeds for motion or blur. All are on the table for some fun wedding photo ideas!

Display Options for Wedding Photos

^{Photo by ASphotowed via iStock}

Once the wedding day is past, display and sharing options can satisfy a desire for fun wedding photo ideas. Sharing the photos of the special day is often a highlight of visits with others after the event.

Photobook Press, one of my favorite photo book printers, has a new photobook idea that fits into this, the Signature Sewn Photo Book. It’s one of the most beautiful photo books you can have made, and is perfect for showcasing all of the images of the special day, including the fun wedding photo ideas we discussed earlier.

With the Signature Sewn Photo Book, Photobook Press has married the finest design and digital print technology with old-world book style to create wedding photo books that are as elegant as the events they commemorate. It’s an heirloom wedding book built to last - just what you want to provide to your clients!

Wedding Photography Tips

^{Photo by neicebird via iStock}

Learning about a few fun wedding photo ideas is just the tip of the iceberg. Getting your clients on board for some candid images might take a little convincing, but once you have them on board, it can make your clients’ special day that much more special.

That’s particularly true if you provide them with a gorgeous vessel for displaying their photos, as we just discussed. There’s no point in taking beautiful images if you don’t have a means of presenting them in a beautiful manner!

So, use these tips to get some inspiration, partner with a quality photo printing company to get the best products for your clients, and have FUN the next time you have a wedding to photograph!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Types of Photography: 19 Popular Photography Genres You Can Try

Written by PT Editor on 17 April 2019.

^{Photo by Christian Holzinger on Unsplash}

When you're just starting out in photography, there can be many things that might overwhelm you.

Learning to use your camera is certainly one of them. Developing your creative eye is another. But with practice, these things become second-nature.

A different type of struggle that some photographers experience is simply trying to figure out what kind of photographer they want to be.

Is landscape photography the best type of photography? Or is it portraits? What about macro or street photography?

The answer is that there is no "best" genre of photography. Instead, you have to figure out which popular photography genre is the best fit for you.

Below, I've outlined 19 different types of photography to help you quickly explore which of these genres might be most appealing.

Landscape Photography
Weather Photography
Astrophotography
Underwater Photography
Wildlife Photography
Aerial Photography
Travel Photography
Architecture Photography
Real Estate Photography
Street Photography
Portrait Photography
Wedding Photography
Event Photography
Fashion Photography
Newborn Photography
Documentary Photography
Still Life Photography
Macro Photography
Pet Photography

TYPES OF PHOTOGRAPHY

Landscape Photography

Types of Photography - Landscape Photography

One of the most popular types of photography styles, landscape photography is all about capturing the beauty of nature.

Though many landscape photos are wide-angle, sweeping shots of a landscape, there are plenty of opportunities for vertical landscape photography and even photos of very small vignettes in a larger landscape that highlight the details of the natural environment.

Landscape photography is also perhaps the most accessible as well. All you have to do to find a subject is head outside!

Explore our collection of landscape photography tips.

Recommended Landscape Photography Books:

Weather Photography

I like to think of weather photography as landscape photography on steroids.

Instead of focusing on the serenity of nature, weather photography puts extreme weather events front and center.

Though most people think of tornadoes and thunderstorms when they think of this type of photography, it also includes blizzards, sandstorms, rainbows, and hurricanes, just to name a few.

Needless to say, photographing weather can be very dangerous, but if you play your cards right, you can get spectacular photos and keep yourself safe at the same time.

Astrophotography

The misconception about astrophotography is that you have to have a mountain of expensive gear to get high-quality shots. That's just not the case!

Instead, you can take epic photos of the night sky with essential astrophotography gear, like a DSLR or mirrorless camera, a fast lens, a tripod, and a remote shutter release.

Common problems with this type of photography include getting stars nice and sharp and understanding how to compose astro photos in a way that's compelling. It helps to have mad post-processing skills too.

But, as you can see above, when it all comes together, there are opportunities to create truly incredible photos.

Use these astrophotography tutorials to get started!

Underwater Photography

Of course, not all landscapes involve mountains, rivers, foul weather, or stars - there's a whole other world to explore with your camera underwater.

Granted, you'll need some additional gear to make underwater photography a possibility, but the reward waiting for you beneath the surface of the water can be epic.

So, grab a GoPro and a snorkel and see what you can find just under the water's surface!

Wildlife Photography

If you ask me, wildlife photography is one of the most difficult photography types to master.

That's because more than just about any other kind of photography, photographing wildlife requires an abundance of patience, and that is not something I have.

Though you might have to wait for hours and hours in a blind for that perfect moment, the payoff can be truly magical and breathtaking photos of animals.

Fortunately, to get started in wildlife photography, you don't have to trek to some distant mountaintop. Start practicing in your backyard with your dog or the local park with birds to develop your skills.

Recommended Wildlife Photography Books:

Aerial Photography

Aerial Photography - Photography Genre

It seems like not that long ago, the types of photography shots that were available to most of us were those found while standing on the ground (unless you had a plane or helicopter handy).

But, with the development of drones in recent years, now any of us can take to the skies and get started in aerial photography.

For me, this type of photography involves photographing landscapes from a much different perspective than I normally do.

But aerial photography isn't limited to landscapes. Instead, you can use drones to take killer photos of anything from wildlife to weddings, real estate to sports.

Travel Photography

Types of Photography - Travel Photography

One look at Instagram and you'll quickly realize that one of the most popular photography types is travel photography.

Travel photography encompasses all sorts of other types of photography - landscapes, portraits, wildlife, and street photography among them - and as such, it has broad appeal.

The beauty of this kind of photography is that it helps showcase different places and peoples and helps us all feel a little more connected to one another in this big, beautiful world. It's not all that difficult to get started in travel photography, either.

Besides, who wouldn't like to travel the world taking photos? Talk about one of the most ideal photography careers!

Architecture Photography

types of photography architecture

I like to think of architecture photography as urban landscape photography. By that, I mean that instead of photographing natural elements, you're capturing the beauty of manmade structures and exploring how they've changed the urban landscape.

Though I enjoy a good shot of a city's skyline, there's something even more compelling about the detail-oriented shots of buildings.

Whether it's a beautiful arch or a gargoyle perched on high, there are plenty of opportunities to accentuate the beauty of humankind's architectural wonders.

Real Estate Photography

There are many types of photography jobs that one can pursue, including real estate photography.

Obviously, the purpose of real estate photography is to make residential and commercial properties as appealing as possible.

This involves everything from perfecting the staging of the property to finding the right angles to highlight interesting features or architecture.

Fortunately, there isn't an excessive amount of gear required for photographing real estate - in some instances, you might just need your smartphone!

Get all the real estate photography tips you need to kickstart your career photographing properties!

Recommended Real Estate Photography Books:

Street Photography

Much like I think of architecture photography as urban landscape photography, I think of street photography as being urban portrait photography.

The whole point of street photography is to portray what life is like in the city. Often, it's done with quick snapshots without the subject knowing that they've been photographed.

The challenge with street photography is to turn simple, everyday scenes into something meaningful and beautiful. That is, you have to concentrate on how the composition, framing, lighting and so forth help you tell a compelling story about the people in your photos.

Portrait Photography

Even taking selfies out of the equation, portraiture is likely the most popular photography niche in the world.

But portrait photography is much more than simply pointing your camera at someone and taking a photo.

Instead, portraiture is all about telling the story of the person being photographed and highlighting what makes them unique.

But there are many more types of portrait photography than solo portraits, including family portraiture, fashion photography, professional headshots, graduation photos, and even sports photography as well.

Regardless of the type, for the best portraits, you have to master the camera settings for portrait photography in addition to learning the types of lighting in portrait photography.

Discover more ways to improve your portraits with our collection of portrait photography tips.

Recommended Portrait Lighting Books:

Wedding Photography

Getting married is a big deal, and so is being hired to photograph that event. Needless to say, no matter the type of wedding photography, wedding photographers have an immense responsibility, and that makes this kind of photography among the most stressful.

But being a wedding photographer isn't just about having the right skill set behind the camera. Instead, wedding photographers must be storytellers, problem solvers, and have tremendous people skills.

Perhaps the most difficult aspect of wedding photography is finding ways to get practice so you can minimize your wedding photography mistakes. Working as a second shooter is a prime option for learning the ropes as it takes some of the pressure off of you while giving you an opportunity to learn from a more seasoned wedding photographer.

Event Photography

types of photography event photography

From concerts to birthday parties, corporate events to the county fair, event photography encompasses a huge range of subjects.

This might include portraits of the people at the event, the food they're eating, the event space in which they're gathered, and so on.

In other words, event photography is a fast-paced and challenging genre of photography that is not for the faint of heart. You have to be ready for anything and have an array of gear (especially a range of lenses with different focal lengths) if you're to be a successful event photographer.

Ultimately, though, event photography is all about helping the people in attendance relive the event years and years down the road through the photos you create.

Fashion Photography

types of photography fashion photography

Fashion photography primarily exists for branding and advertisements, though as photography has become more accessible and social media has risen to prominence, fashion photography is becoming more broad-based.

Whether the purpose of the photo shoot is to create photos for a magazine or to post on Instagram, the point of fashion photography is to highlight clothing, makeup, and other fashion accessories in a way that makes them highly desirable for consumers.

Because of the need to showcase these items, a lot of fashion photos are full-body shots. What's more, fashion photographers must be experts in types of lighting in photography and have excellent portrait posing skills too.

Newborn Photography

Whether you know it as newborn, infant, or baby photography, this genre is perhaps the most rewarding.

Capturing what a newborn is like in the first days after their birth is a huge honor - and a big challenge.

Babies are unpredictable, so photographing them while they sleep is one of the top newborn photography tips to follow.

You'll find that they are sensitive to temperature fluctuations, sensitive to light, and might have accidents that require a diaper and a wardrobe change.

Being prepared for these eventualities is a must, and despite those challenges, the reward at the end of the shoot is well worth the time and effort!

Get easy-to-understand instruction on maternity and newborn photography tips.

Documentary Photography

types of photography documentary photography

Along with photojournalists, documentary photographers strive to depict newsworthy events in a way that helps people better understand or connect to the event that's occurring.

The focus of documentary photography is on emotionality - evoking a feeling in the viewer that makes the event more real.

Though war type photography is likely the best-known subgenre of documentary photography, many other events - presidential activities, state gatherings, and national celebrations - might fall under the purview of a documentary photographer. Additionally, many documentary photographers simply seek to capture daily life, history, culture, and so forth.

Still Life Photography

types of photography still life

Still life photography is all about creating images of objects.

In many instances, just a single object or a few objects - a bowl of fruit, for example - might serve as the subject of a still life photo.

The key to a successful still life image is having excellent lighting that casts an even light on the subject while also minimizing shadows.

Even though it might not be the most popular type of photography, by focusing on the lighting, you can create an interesting scene out of even the most mundane of subjects - silverware, items on a desk, kids' toys, and so on.

Macro Photography

If you've got a keen eye for detail, macro photography might be for you.

Photographing small objects - flowers and insects, for example - is actually a lot easier than it looks, provided you have the right gear and the right approach.

In fact, you can use your smartphone for macro photography and get pretty awesome results!

Like any type of photography, becoming a pro at macro takes time, but if you commit yourself to practicing and learning, you can create some truly breathtaking photos.

Pet Photography

types of photography pet photography

When you're just starting out in photography, your pets are one of the best subjects with which to work.

After all, they're easy to access, they'll listen to your direction (hopefully!), and you can photograph them in the comfort of your own home.

Better still, because many of the same principles of portrait photography apply to pet photography, it's a great primer for flexing your portraiture muscles down the road.

So, put your dog in his favorite costume, grab your camera, and start working on your composition skills, mastering camera settings, and storytelling abilities!

For a humorous look at these and other types of photography, be sure to check out the video above by Antti Karppinen.

In the meantime, use the information I've provided above to think about the type of photography that best suits your interests and skills.

Don't be afraid to test out multiple genres or different types of photography as well!

We Recommend

Types of Portrait Lights

Written by PT Editor on 18 March 2021.

Types of Portrait Lights

^{photo byRawpixel via iStock}

The types of portrait lights you will use for your own portrait photography lighting configurations will vary depending on several factors.

Whether you’re shooting in a studio or on location, whether you want dual usage capability for video lighting, your budget for lights for portrait photography, and how sophisticated or simple you want your setup to be will all influence the types of portrait lights you use.

Portrait Lights Guide

types of portrait lights 1

^{photo byphotographer via iStock}

You can use this list of types of portrait lights as a portrait lights buyer’s guide or as a guide for how to adapt what you already own as lights for portraits or a mix of new and old.

The types of portrait lights we’ll highlight are:

Panel Lights
Fresnel Lights
On Camera Lights
Soft Boxes
Ring Lights

Panel Lights

portrait lights 2

Panel lights are among my favorite lights for portraits and for doubling up as the perfect videography lights. Current panel lights are almost always LED bulbs, which is great for all sorts of photography.

LED panel lights may be A/C powered or a mix of battery and plug in. The battery power option for many panel lights makes them suitable for use in your studio or for on location. Since they’re LED bulbs, battery life is fantastic, though I always carry extra batteries for all of my equipment.

LED panel lights are also usually variable in power and color temperature. This allows you to blend them with any ambient light for on location portrait photography lighting. You can add different light modifiers to many panel lights such as barn doors, grids, and colored gels.

These types of portrait lights are super versatile, about the only downsides to using LED panel lights are that they tend to cost a little more than simple lights and they get a little hot, even the LED bulb versions, since they have a lot of bulbs.

As an example of these types of portrait lights, look at Ikan for the Onyx OYB5 Half X 1 LED light. It has battery or plug in power options, adjustable color temps and power levels, and a CRI rating of 96. CRI is a rating of the quality of the light emitted, 90 to 100 is very well suited for all types of photography.

Panel Light Pros: versatile, high CRI, good for general photo and video use.
Panel Light Cons: large size, can get warm, a little higher priced.

Fresnel Lights

portrait lights guide 3

Fresnel lights (pronounced fruh- nell or fray-nell, it’s a French word) are focusable lights for adjusting the width of the cone of light emitted. A fresnel light is often part of a system of lights though you could use one all by itself for some shots.

A fresnel light uses a lens in front of the bulb that is moved back and forth to focus the shape of the cone of light it emits. The LED versions of these types of portrait lights are easier to work with, I think, than the traditional HMI lights found in many movie or TV studios. LED fresnel lights are less expensive, cooler operating, and smaller and lighter than HMI fresnel lights.

The Stryder SFB150 LED fresnel light from Ikan is one example of these types of portrait lights that is within the price range and operational abilities of many portrait photographers. It has a light cone ranging from 30 to 65 degrees so it can be used in many situations.

Fresnel Light Pros: controllable light cone shape, high intensity.
Fresnel Light Cons: high heat output, relatively expensive.

Learn More:

On Camera Lights

portrait photography lighting 4

I guess we could include flash units in this category, but I’m sure a lot of you are very much like me in regards to lighting choices in that we like lights with dual use capability, for photos and videos, so I tend to concentrate on continuous lights for portraits and other types of photography.

Battery power and LED bulbs are king here, since this style of light needs to be highly portable, lightweight, and have accurate color. An on camera light is very usable in environmental or outdoor portraits with high ambient levels in that it gives definition and consistency in facial detail.

From Ikan, you can find several models similar to the ILED144 on camera LED light. Not as powerful as larger, off camera lights, but very portable.

It is easy, though, to get unflattering results when relying on one as your sole or dominant light source because of the straight on view of the lamp. Also, you need to be careful not to put too much on your camera’s accessory shoe because of increased risk of damage.

On Camera Light Pros: extremely versatile, low price, portable.
On Camera Light Cons: lower power, strain on camera, possibly unflattering.

Soft Boxes

lights for portraits 5

A soft box is a housing that diffuses the light from whatever bulb it’s mounted to, from a strobe, a CFL bulb, or LED bulbs. The soft box is a much larger area of light emitting to the subject, which softens the light compared to a point source. Additionally, the softbox material is often diffusing as well.

You can add a specially made softbox for a specific light, such as the Chimera for the ILED144 posted earlier, or find a generic one for almost any style of light you already have. Since the large area is part of what makes a softbox a softer light, you do have to deal with a bit of unwieldiness at times, especially when setting up outdoors.

Soft Box Pros: soft light quality, usable with a variety of light types.
Soft Box Cons: large, lowers light output.

Ring Lights

lights for portrait photography 6

A ring light is one of the most specialty use of all of the types of portrait lights, but they are beneficial for a lot of subjects, including portraits. Besides offering shadowless lighting when used close up, they can be added to a portrait lighting configuration for a nice catch light for the eyes of your subject.

A ring light kit with everything you need to use one in a studio or on location is the Oryon 18” RLB48-M2 Kitwith the ring light, batteries, remote control, light stand, and carrying case. After using it for portraits, try it out for your small product photography.

Ring Lights Pros: shadowless light for close ups, catch light for 3/4s or full length.
Ring Lights Cons: low power, specialty use mostly.

A Full Kit

portrait light buyers guide 7

^{photo bygorodenkoff via iStock}

Personally, when it comes to lights for portrait photography, I like to have all five of these available to me. Sometimes I will use each of these types of portrait lights for one lighting configuration, though I’m usually using just two or three.

Choose and use what makes sense for your photography needs. As you use them for creating outstanding portraits, also try them out for your video productions to get the most out of your lights and cameras.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Use a Variable ND Filter for Portraits for Better Results

Written by PT Editor on 11 February 2020.

Use a Variable ND Filter for Portraits for Better Results

^{Photo by Anastasiya Gepp from Pexels}

For as long as photography has been in existence, photographers have sought better ways to make great images. Some of the earliest photographs were portraits and portrait photography continues to be one of the most popular forms of photography, both casual and serious.

Among the better ways found to achieve better results in photography is the creative use of filters. When I was first getting serious about my own photography, one of the first things I learned was how to use filters for portraits. Recently, I’ve been using an ND filter for portraits.

Lens Filters for Portrait Photography
Change Dynamic Range
Block Those Highlights
Change Exposure Value
Variable ND vs Fixed Value
Better Portrait Results

Editor's Tip: Get Kenko’s latest updates and access to promos for discounted gear. Click here to sign up.

Lens Filters for Portrait Photography

nd filter for portraits 1

^{Photo by Roman Koval from Pexels}

Adding a neutral density or ND filter for portraits may seem like an odd choice at first glance.

The standard group of filters for B&W film photography all changed contrast up or down. Filters for color film photography mostly had to deal with correcting the color temperature of the lights for what the film balance was.

With digital cameras, we tend to either let the camera change white balance automatically or adjust it later in post processing. Same with contrast levels. If you started out in digital photography, none of this talk of filters for film photography will make much sense.

nd filter for portraits 2

^{Image by Matteo Venturella from Pixabay}

Suffice to say, we can easily do so much in digital photography that requires lots of effort to accomplish with celluloid film. Even filter effects such as soft focus can be done with great control digitally.

So, why look at variable ND filters for portraits with digital cameras? You’ll find a lot of reasons to use variable ND filters and graduated ND filters for many aspects of your own photography. Let’s look at two of the biggest reasons to use an ND filter for portraits.

One, to change the dynamic range of the scene in front of your camera. Two, to change the exposure value (EV) of the scene.

Learn More:

Change Dynamic Range

nd filter tips 3

^{Photo by Chloe Kala from Pexels}

The dynamic range of a scene refers to the range of the deepest shadow to the brightest highlight. The dynamic range of a camera sensor refers to how much of those lows and highs the sensor is capable of rendering at once.

For light and dark values of a scene that are outside of the range of the sensor, the deepest of the shadows and the brightest of the highlights will have very little to no detail recorded.

nd filter tips 4

^{Photo by nappy from Pexels}

By the way, when recording completely outside of what the sensor is capable of, you won’t be able to ‘pull out’ any detail with post processing. If you recorded no detail, it just isn’t there.

Recommended Portrait Lighting Books:

Block Those Highlights

^{Photo by Renato Abati from Pexels}

A great way to fix this problem is to block out the brightest highlights thus effectively lowering the range of the entire scene. The reason this would work at all is because you’re shooting in RAW.

Have you started shooting in RAW yet? There is nothing wrong with shooting in camera with JPEG, but recording in RAW allows for your camera to record all the detail it’s capable of resolving with any loss from compression.

In RAW, you have a better ability to enhance shadow detail than to do anything with blown out highlights. A variable ND filter, such as the Kenko PL Fader Filter, will allow you to selectively change the dynamic range of a scene to more closely conform to the range your sensor can handle.

How does this help with portrait photography? You have lots of control over lighting and exposure when shooting in studio. When you’re outside or taking environmental portraits, you won’t have complete control over the light, so you need to control it in order to get good results.

variable nd filter tips 6

^{Image by Vic Padilla from Pixabay}

As an example, suppose you are taking engagement or anniversary pics outside at a beautiful lakeside resort or pristine beach. The sun reflecting off of the water or the bright sand could be beyond the range of your camera’s sensor, making the overall image exposure difficult.

variable nd filter tips 7

With a variable ND filter like the Kenko PL Fader Filter, you can dial down the brightness of the entire scene, thus lowering the highlights. If your actual portrait subject requires a little extra exposure, balance it out with fill flash or a well placed reflector.

Change Exposure Value

how to use filters for portraits 8

^{Photo by Jeff Denlea from Pexels}

Why would a photographer want to change the EV of a scene? The biggest reason that relates to portrait photography is to be able to use different f-stops or shutter speeds than the exposure triangle has calculated for your scene.

The exposure triangle is a handy tip for portrait photography since it shows you what aperture and shutter speed combinations are available for any given scene EV.

The brightness level of some scenes restricts you from employing selective focus techniques because you don’t have a wide enough f-stop available. Adding a variable ND filter like the Kenko PL Fader Filter to your lens lets you dial in density so you can you can open up that aperture wide, thus limiting depth of field.

how to use filters for portraits 9

You could also go for shutter speed changes. Back to that lake or beach scene we imagined earlier, if we want the waves or a waterfall in the background of our portrait to be blurred by water motion, we need a longer shutter speed. Dialing in the right amount of density will lower the overall EV of a scene, letting us use slower speeds.

Variable ND vs Fixed Value

how to use filters for portraits 10

^{Photo by Daria Obymaha from Pexels}

For the purposes of making environment portraits, a variable ND might work out better for you than any of the fixed value ND filters. Since you are not in absolute control of the lighting when outdoors, having that added versatility gives you more options for creativity.

Similar to how a zoom lens gives you a wide range of focal lengths over a fixed focal length prime lens. A high-quality variable ND filter won’t give you fits about sharpness either. Obviously not a perfect comparison, but a variable filter is much more simple than a variable focal length lens.

Here’s one of my favorite variable ND filter tips for new users. Buy the filter in the size to fit your largest diameter lens and then use filter step down rings to adapt it to your other lenses. High-quality variable ND filters aren’t budget breakers, but they are more expensive than other filters you may already have.

Better Portrait Results

how to use filters for portraits 11

^{Image by Bessi from Pixabay}

Once you start using your variable ND filter for portraits, you will certainly enjoy the extra freedom of choice it gives you. Freedom to balance the dynamic range of a scene to what your sensor can record. Freedom to employ different shutter speeds and f-stops so you can make use of special techniques.

You can use these filters in your studio, too, but you will really enjoy them as you get outdoors and capture beautiful environmental portraits.

Learn More:

We Recommend

Use These Family Portrait Tips for Better Thanksgiving Photos

Written by PT Editor on 24 November 2020.

Use These Family Portrait Tips for Better Thanksgiving Photos

^{photo bybernardbodo via iStock}

For many people, Thanksgiving is a time to get together with your family and friends to have a big ol’ feast. But this year, many of us will not be having gatherings due to the pandemic.

It’ll just be myself, my wife, and our son this year. And even though we won’t have family over, that doesn’t mean that I can’t plan on capturing some great Thanksgiving family portraits of the three of us. You can do the same with your immediate family, friends, or roommates.

With that in mind, check out the tutorial below by Adorama:

This video offers five simple, straightforward tips for beautiful family portraits.

Better still, these tips are for natural light photography, so you don’t have to worry about setting up lightboxes or speedlights to capture your shots.

I’ve summarized each of the five tips below for quick reference.

Tip 1: It’s All About the Light

its all about the light

^{Youtube Screenshot / Adorama}

Obviously photography is all about light. But what this tip involves is ensuring that you seek out the best light when taking the shot.

In many cases, this means heading outdoors and finding the ideal spot to pose your family or friends.

As Pye discusses in the video, this might require that you move the subjects left, right, forward or back by just a few feet, yet that small movement can make a huge difference in how the images turn out.

Just be wary of putting your subjects in direct light as it can result in “raccoon eyes” and harsh shadows under their noses and chins. Instead try to find a nice boundary between light and shade so the light is a little more diffused.

Tip 2: Use the Background

use the background

^{Youtube Screenshot / Adorama}

While the background shouldn’t compete with your subjects for attention, it also shouldn’t be disregarded either. Instead, you can use the background to help you frame an interesting composition.

In the example above, you can see how the opening in the trees behind the subjects helps frame them in the shot. This helps draw our attention to the subjects even more.

Find elements in the background of your shoot location to help do the same, and you’ll end up with a much more powerful composition.

Learn More:

Tip 3: Direct the Action

direct the action

^{Youtube Screenshot / Adorama}

Portraits that involve action are often viewed as being more authentic than those that are strictly posed. You can see this idea play out in the example above.

By directing the subjects to pretend they’re having a sword fight, the photographer was able to capture a candid moment that makes for quite the compelling photo.

There’s movement in both subjects, the little girl has a big (unforced) smile on her face, and the lines created by their outstretched arms helps connect the subjects together visually.

You can use this trick to create more authentic and action-packed portraits too!

Tip 4: Shoot From Various Angles

shoot from various angles

^{Youtube Screenshot / Adorama}

This one is quite simple...move your feet!

Try not to get caught up in what’s going on and get stuck in one spot. As your subjects interact with one another, take photos from the front, back, and side, that way you can tell a more complete story about what is going on in the moment.

As you can see above, moving around the subjects as they play together allowed Pye to get some interesting images from vastly different angles. This results in a better ability to tell the subjects’ story.

Tip 5: Think Wide, Medium, and Tight

think wide medium and tight

^{Youtube Screenshot / Adorama}

This tip goes hand-in-hand with the previous tip in that it serves as a reminder to vary the types of shots you get.

Again, this is all about storytelling. There’s a reason why videographers utilize wide, medium, and tight shots - it enables them to set the scene, provide context, and give close-up details. You can do the same by varying the shots you take of your subjects.

I hope these tips inspire you to get some fun portraits this holiday season!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Use These Newborn Photography Tricks to Get Better Results

Written by PT Editor on 23 June 2023.

Use These Newborn Photography Tricks to Get Better Results

^{Photo by Vad-Len via iStock}

Newborn photography is a unique and heartwarming style of photography that requires proper preparation, a delicate touch, and a keen eye for capturing the beauty and innocence of a newborn baby. At the same time, photographing newborns is challenging because they are unpredictable and require special care and attention.

In this article, we'll share seven tips and techniques to help you achieve better results in newborn photography. From creating a comfortable and friendly environment to sharing those precious moments with others, these tips will empower you to shoot stunning images that parents will cherish forever.

Whether you're a professional photographer specializing in newborns or a parent looking to capture beautiful memories of your little one, we’re here to help you take your newborn photo skills to the next level. Now, it’s time to dive into newborn photography and unlock the secrets to achieving better results with the help of our tried-and-true tricks!

Check out the video above by Kelly Brown to see how a professional newborn photographer typically conducts a session and to learn her insider tips.

Newborn Photography Tricks: Invest in the Right Gear and Props
Newborn Photography Tricks: Have a Good Relationship With the Parents
Newborn Photography Tricks: Take Posed & Lifestyle Shots
Newborn Photography Tricks: Family Love
Newborn Photography Tricks: Lighting & Angles are Key
Newborn Photography Tricks: Think Creatively & Be Flexible
Newborn Photography Tricks: Bring All Your Hard Work Together in a Beautiful Album
Recommended Photography Gear

Newborn Photography Tricks: Invest in the Right Gear and Props

Newborn Photography Tricks Invest in the Right Gear and Props

^{Photo by tatyana_tomsickova via iStock}

Just like every other genre of photography, having the right equipment is essential for newborn photography. Besides a camera and lens (We recommend having a good prime and macro lens), you will also want to invest in a stable tripod, a lighting kit, and backdrops.

Props and accessories are equally important. Our favorite props are toys, baby blankets, pillows, clothes, and hats/headbands. On the other hand, useful accessories include baby wipes, hand sanitizer, heating pads, and other baby-related items.

Newborn Photography Tricks: Have a Good Relationship With the Parents

Newborn Photography Tricks Have a Good Relationship With the Parents

^{Photo by StefaNikolic via iStock}

Before you shoot a newborn photography session, you always want to establish a good relationship with the parents. If everyone is on the same page before the start of the photo shoot, your life will be infinitely easier, and the parents will ultimately be happier with your work.

Additionally, they will trust you more with their child and hopefully won’t be continuously looking over your shoulder or trying to micromanage you while shooting. This gives you a lot of confidence, makes you more relaxed, and will improve the quality of your photos.

Newborn Photography Tricks: Take Posed & Lifestyle Shots

Newborn Photography Tricks Take Posed Lifestyle Shots

^{Photo by katrinaelena via iStock}

There are two common types of newborn photography, posed and lifestyle. Mixing in both during a newborn shoot is good practice because it will give your images more variety. Moreover, while playing around with posed shots is incredibly fun, natural lifestyle shots often create some of the best memories.

Posed shots are easier to do in the first two weeks after the baby is born because this is their “sleepy” and easygoing phase. After that, they usually become slightly more difficult to capture. Alternatively, you can do lifestyle shots anytime during the first two months. Then they graduate and lose the “newborn” title.

Learn More:

Newborn Photography Tricks: Family Love

Newborn Photography Tricks Family Love

^{Photo by eclipse_images via iStock}

Even though the clear star of any newborn photography shoot is the baby, we love taking a few group portraits, too. This includes mother/baby photos, father/baby photos, parent/baby photos, sibling/baby photos, and family portraits.

As the newborn ages, these images are often some of the most treasured pictures by the parents and the ones that stay hung up around the house the longest. At the same time, they make ideal gifts for grandparents, other family members, and friends.

Newborn Photography Tricks: Lighting & Angles are Key

Newborn Photography Tricks Lighting Angles are Key

^{Photo by Slava_Vladzimirskaya via iStock}

As cute as babies naturally are, they can be incredibly challenging to photograph because of their small and uneven sizes. Due to this, it’s critical to shoot in a well-lit space and to choose your angles wisely. If you don’t, you will be shocked (and sometimes downright frightened, ha!) when you review your images.

We prefer working with natural lighting, but you always want to carry a lighting kit just in case. Some of the most popular angles to shoot from are birds-eye-view (overhead), getting level with them, and over the shoulder.

Newborn Photography Tricks: Think Creatively & Be Flexible

Newborn Photography Tricks Think Creatively Be Flexible

^{Photo by tatyana_tomsickova via iStock}

Creativity and flexibility are two of the most important skills to be aware of when capturing newborn photography. For starters, the more creative you are, the happier the parents will be, and the more your work will stand out from the crowd and catch the attention of potential clients.

And flexibility is crucial because newborns are extremely unpredictable. You never know what will happen, and everything is out of your control. So, remember, as long as you stay flexible and go with the flow, you will walk away with a handful of good shots, even if nothing goes as planned.

Newborn Photography Tricks: Bring All Your Hard Work Together in a Beautiful Album

Newborn Photography Tricks Bring All Your Hard Work Together in a Beautiful Album

^{Photo by Kohei_hara via iStock}

Last but not least, you want to display your newborn photos like a pro. Our favorite way to do this is by compiling them into a beautiful photobook. Photobooks are durable, make great gifts, and are inexpensive compared to other prints.

Our go-to platform for customizing and creating personalized photobooks is Photo Book Press. They are an innovative online printing company offering high-quality hardcover and softcover books. On top of that, they sell flat photobooks, bound photobooks, calendars, cards, and acrylic wall art.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Use These Pet Photography Tips to Get the Best Results

Written by PT Editor on 09 November 2022.

Use These Pet Photography Tips to Get the Best Results

^{Photo by fotografixx via iStock}

At the moment, one of the most popular trends in the world of photos is pet photography. That’s because if there’s one thing everyone can agree upon, it’s that pets are absolutely adorable! And whether you are scrolling through Instagram or strolling to the supermarket, photos of pets are everywhere.

With that said, if you want to learn how to capture stunning photos of your furry friends, this article is for you! We share critical tips to keep in mind before, during, and after shooting. All three of these stages of photography are critical, and ignoring even one could ultimately ruin your photos.

Keep reading below to discover our top five tips guaranteed to improve the results of your pet photography!

Check out the video above by B&H Photo Video to learn additional tips and tricks about animal or pet photography.

Pet Photography Tips: Plan Ahead
Pet Photography Tips: Patience is a Virtue
Pet Photography Tips: Be Creative
Pet Photography Tips: Use the Right Camera Settings
Pet Photography Tips: Partner With a Quality Printing Company
Final Thoughts on Pet Photography
Recommended Photography Gear

Pet Photography Tips: Plan Ahead

Pet Photography Tips Plan Ahead

^{Photo by damedeeso via iStock}

Planning is one of the most important steps in photography, especially when shooting animal or pet photography. Yet, it’s also one of the most commonly overlooked steps. Only a little planning goes a long way and could make the difference between mind-blowing photos and total duds.

Take the photo above, for example. The photographer clearly planned this shot ahead of time, and the result is amazing! Getting in the habit of creating a simple shot list of the images you hope to capture is best practice.

Other things to consider in advance are the location of your photo shoot, what gear you need, and where you intend to publish the images. The more detailed you are when planning, the more likely you will be happy with the results.

Pet Photography Tips: Patience is a Virtue

Pet Photography Tips Patience is a Virtue

^{Photo by NiseriN via iStock}

Another crucial thing to remember when photographing pets is that they have minds of their own. Just because you have a detailed shot list and a nice camera doesn’t mean everything will go according to plan. Pet photography can move excruciatingly slow at times, and you will rarely walk away with the images you want unless you are willing to be patient.

Additionally, natural-looking shots often end up being some of the best. So, don’t feel the need to constantly micromanage and direct your pet. Sit back, relax, and let your pet’s true personality come out on camera every once in a while.

Pet Photography Tips: Be Creative

Pet Photography Tips Be Creative

^{Photo by RichVintage via iStock}

Due to the popularity of pet photography, the image pool has started to become somewhat saturated. People are copycatting what they see online, and everyone is taking the same pictures. Don’t fall into this trap! Be creative, think outside the box, and come up with your own original ideas. That’s the easiest way to make your pet photography stand out today!

Using props is one great way to be creative. The more unique the prop, the less likely someone has used it before. Another fun idea is to combine family and pet photography. Having photos of your kids and pets together is something I promise you will cherish forever.

Learn More:

Pet Photography Tips: Use the Right Camera Settings

Pet Photography Tips Use the Right Camera Settings

^{Photo by MriyaWildlife via iStock}

Next, let’s talk a little about how to set up your camera for pet photography. Typically, whenever working with animals, you want to use a wide aperture, a low ISO, and a fast shutter speed. A wide aperture (low f-stop) creates a shallow depth of field and a beautiful bokeh effect that will make your pet photos pop.

Moreover, shooting with a fast shutter speed helps “freeze” time and will eliminate unwanted motion blur. This results in clearer, sharper images. I also recommend using your camera's continuous shooting drive. Burst shooting captures more pictures and is a fantastic way to ensure you don’t miss that perfect moment.

Pet Photography Tips: Partner With a Quality Printing Company

Pet Photography Tips Partner With a Quality Printing Company

^{Photo by knape via iStock}

Last but not least, make sure you partner with a high-quality printing company. As a photographer, nothing is worse than taking spectacular photos only to have them ruined by the local printer. And while printing them at home is certainly an option, the quality will always be higher when done professionally.

One well-respected and reliable enterprise is CanvasPrints.com. They are one of the world's most popular online printing platforms, and it’s easy to see why. No other company can match their combination of outstanding quality, knowledgeable customer service staff, and unbeatable prices!

Additionally, they offer a wide range of printing services, including custom canvas prints. Today, canvas prints are unbelievably trendy and look great in both homes and offices. We have partnered with countless printing companies throughout the years and are proud to say that CanvasPrints.com is among the very best! Who doesn’t want the very best for their beloved pet?!

Final Thoughts on Pet Photography

Thoughts on Pet Photography

^{Photo by evgenyatamanenko via iStock}

Now that you know how to get the best pet photography results, what are you waiting for? It’s time to create your shot list, set up your camera, and get shooting! And don’t forget to use a reputable, high-quality printing company like CanvasPrints.com. Your friends and family will be blown away by the quality of your photos and won’t believe you took them yourself!

Here are a few more pet photography tips for even better results:

Some newer cameras feature “Animal Eye Autofocus.” Use it if you have it!
Try out different lenses to see how focal length changes the look of your pet photos
Make sure the animal feels comfortable - it shows on camera
Use treats and toys to capture their attention
Don’t stress and have fun!

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

Use These Portrait Photography Tips to Wow Your Clients

Written by PT Editor on 08 July 2021.

Use These Portrait Photography Tips to Wow Your Clients

^{photo by123ducu via iStock}

Given the fact that so many people are looking for photographers right now, I’ve been hearing a lot of stories of photographers who are attempting to branch out into different photography niches in order to fulfill the need.

This means that a lot of photographers who haven’t really worked with people before are trying to. And, subsequently, they’re learning just how hard it is to work in portrait photography.

Still, portrait photography is one of my favorite photography niches because you can help people to feel so much more confident in themselves, so long as you’re doing it right. So, in order to help you do this, I’ve compiled this list of basic portrait photography tips.

If you’ve been in the portrait photography game for a while, then these portrait photography tips aren’t for you (though, they are if you need a refresher). These are beginner portrait photography tips designed with novices in mind.

Choose Your Location Wisely

portrait photography tips

^{photo byMStudioImages via iStock}

There are about a thousand things that go into choosing a location for portrait photography. So, one of the most important portrait photography tips I can give you is to do enough research about your location before your shoot.

The first thing you need to determine is whether you are going to be shooting inside or outside. Outdoor shoots are typically preferred, since natural lighting can lend a warm glow to portraits. But, if you live in a particularly volatile part of the world, where the weather is always changing, then it may be a far wiser decision to shoot indoors.

The absolute worst thing you can do for your client is to plan for an outdoor shoot and have no backup if it’s pouring outside the day of.

None of the portrait photography tips on this list are that simple, though, because you also need to be thinking about what sort of location will best exemplify your client’s personality. If they love art, then maybe you should be doing their portraits in a downtown setting where you can easily find murals. If they love nature, then maybe somewhere green is the best way to go.

Focus Less on Posing Your Clients

beginner portrait photography tips

^{photo byAtstock Productions via iStock}

I see a ton of portrait photography tips that are all about posing. If you’ve seen these portrait photography tips before as well, then I basically want you to throw out everything you think you know.

The best portraits are ones that aren’t posed at all and when you give your client poses that feel unnatural, you are not only going to miss every opportunity to get spur of the moment shots, but you are going to make them feel uncomfortable in the meanwhile.

I typically come to every photoshoot prepared with under 10 poses. I usually only need a few of them. I’ll help my client pose when we get to the location and then I basically let them do whatever feels comfortable from that point on.

Learn More:

Find Your Clients’ Emotions

photography business tips

^{photo byLumiNola via iStock}

A lot of these portrait photography tips work in tandem. Like this one and the one about using posing less. When you pose your clients either more naturally or not at all, they are going to be more comfortable and more willing to express themselves in front of you.

Since all of the best portraits are those that capture true emotion, your best bet of getting the best shot of your client is to focus less on the technical aspects of your shoot and more on the way your client is feeling.

Let me give you an example. I was working with a professor the other day. She needed a headshot for a book that she was publishing. So, we met up on campus to get it.

I could tell she was very nervous to be having her photo taken, but I could also tell that she had a really big personality. She was almost 60 years old, and she was in great shape so I started just asking her about what she does to look so good.

She was telling me about her yoga classes and her climbing classes and, in the long run, I had her climbing a tree on campus. She absolutely lit up with this childlike wonder and the shot that she ended up choosing was a photo where she was hanging off of a tree.

Of course, it was a headshot, so the tree didn’t make the final shot. But, that raw emotion, that amazement at life, did. She looked great.

Pick a Color Palette

portrait photography

^{photo byTassii via iStock}

Some of the portrait photography tips on this list are more traditional. This one is not. But, I love choosing a color palette that I’m going to work with, especially if I’m shooting with kids.

For instance, if a kid has bright blue eyes, then it makes a lot of sense to find backgrounds that will help bring out that feature. Or, if a kid absolutely loves the color yellow, I’ll encourage their parents to dress them in a bright yellow outfit and shoot during golden hour when I can catch the sun in their shots.

You likely won’t see this recommendation on a lot of other portrait photography tips lists, because if you do it wrong it can look really cheesy, but parents love it.

Give Them Great Prints

To round out these portrait photography tips, I thought it prudent to include at least a few photography business tips.

No matter how good your shots are, that doesn’t mean much if you aren’t able to wow your clients with a physical memento that will allow them to remember their shoot (and you).

It’s why I recommend that you upsell your clients with canvas prints from CanvasHQ.

CanvasHQ is a small, family-run business that actually cares about the products they create. This means that every canvas print they make will last your client over a century. So, they will not only remember you and this photoshoot for decades to come, but they will have an antique to pass onto their children and grandchildren.

It also means that they understand budgeting, which is why their prints start at just $20.

Beautiful prints on a budget are a dime a dozen...and CanvasHQ is certainly at the top of the heap!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Wedding Photography Tips for Amateurs

Written by PT Editor on 16 October 2019.

Wedding Photography Tips for Amateurs

^{Photo by Sweet Ice Cream Photography on Unsplash}

Getting into the wedding photography business is stressful, especially because of imposter syndrome. You’re trying to exude confidence in the middle of one of your scariest moments - being responsible for recording the biggest day of someone’s life without yet being a professional.

If you, like I once did, need some wedding photography tips because you’re trying to learn how to photograph a wedding alone for the first time, don’t worry. Here’s a short list of wedding photography tips for beginners, so all you need to worry about is wowing the happy couple.

Don’t Forget Your Shot List
Visit the Locations Before the Shoot
Bring Two Cameras
Don’t Be Shy
Practice Using Different Kinds of Light
Get Out of Your Comfort Zone
Give the Couple High-Quality Prints

Don’t Forget Your Shot List

wedding photography tips 1

^{photo by GaudiLab via iStock}

After you’ve booked your first client and after you’ve rewatched your favorite wedding photography tutorial for the fifth time, you’re going to need to devise a shot list (and then remember to pack it, because we’ve all made that mistake...).

You can make your own, but I wouldn’t because there are so many free wedding shot lists online. The only reason you should make your own is if, as an example, you’re photographing a couple getting married in a hot air balloon or movie theatre or something equally as extravagant and unexpected.

Because, as it turns out, you can just modify wedding shot lists that someone else put the work into.

My favorite wedding photography shot listactually comes from The Knot, because it’s a website geared towards the bride and not photographers.

This may be a good time to include this tidbit: definitely get input from the couple about what shots are essential for their big day. It is about them, after all!

Visit the Locations Before the Shoot

wedding photography tips for beginners 1

^{photo byHreni via iStock}

You do not want to get to the location and realize you thought you had power outlets for your lights when you don’t.

You also don’t want to get to the location and realize you’re not going to have much natural light when you thought you were, or that you should probably be wearing hiking boots instead of the ballet flats you thought looked cuter before the 14-hour day.

You’re going to have enough to worry about as it is, so you want to minimize the possibility of surprises when it comes to the venue.

Map out where you can sit, stand, and kneel to get shots during the ceremony such that you aren’t too much of a nuisance to the members of the audience. Determine where you can position yourself to get those all-important shots of the couple exiting the venue for the first time as a married couple. Think about ideal spots to take photos of the wedding party, where you have good light, a nice background, and so forth.

The more you plan, the better off you’ll be, so take the time to explore the different shoot locations and you’ll be much more prepared come the big day.

Bring Two Cameras

wedding photography tips for beginners 2

^{photo by Volodymyr Shtun via iStock}

Back in the day, I read plenty of wedding photography tutorials, and many of them omitted this little nugget: bring two cameras.

For starters, the last thing you want is to be snapping away and have your camera malfunction. Having a second camera protects against that horror.

Additionally, having a second camera means you can have a different lens on it which enables you to get varied shots without having to constantly swap out lenses.

Many wedding photographers will have one camera body with a zoom lens, like a 24-70mm, that they use for rapid-fire shots during the ceremony and reception and another camera with a prime lens, like an 85mm, for posed portraits.

Then, invest in a camera harness so you can have both cameras on your person at all times to get the shots you need.

If you don’t own multiple cameras or multiple lenses, beg, borrow, or rent the gear you need. Whatever the case, don’t go into a wedding with just one camera and lens!

Learn More:

Don’t Be Shy

how to photograph a wedding alone 1

^{photo by pixdeluxe via iStock}

You can’t be shy. People will get in your way, and unless you’re in the mood to write an expose on why everyone should stop using iPhones at weddings like this photographer did, you’re going to need to learn how to politely move them.

Since boldness isn’t exactly a trait you can learn overnight, this tip isn’t included in a lot of wedding photography tips for beginners listicles.

But, I think it’s important because there are helpful, and ridiculous, tip lists for how to overcome shyness.

Remember that you’ve been asked to record lasting memories for someone, and you can’t do that if you’re hiding in the back of the room!

Practice Using Different Kinds of Light

wedding photography tutorial 1

^{photo by pastorscott via iStock}

Churches have the worst light of any edifice in the world and it’s truly a shame we decided that’s where almost all weddings should take place.

But, since I’m probably not going to reverse thousands of years of tradition with this blog post, I can at least teach you how to overcome this awful predicament.

The first option is to bounce your flash. You’ll need to scout the church beforehand to ensure there is a light-colored wall for you to bounce your flash off of, because if you bounce your flash off a colored surface it will tint all your photos with that color. Learn more about how to bounce light in the video below by Adorama:

If there isn’t a white wall anywhere, consider purchasing a diffuser to soften the light. Doing minimizes the harsh look that flashes create for a much more pleasing look.

This, however, doesn’t work for all churches because some of them don’t allow camera flashes at all.

If they don’t allow flash, you’ll need to work in manual mode and adjust the camera settings to brighten your images. Boosting the ISO makes the camera’s sensor more sensitive to light, and brightens the photos, though it also introduces digital noise.

You can also open the aperture of the lens to let in more light, but doing so also reduces the depth of field in the photo.

Slowing down the shutter speed is another option, though if you do, be sure you use a tripod and that you don’t slow it down too much, otherwise movement in the shot might be blurred.

Get Out of Your Comfort Zone

wedding photography tips 2

^{Photo by Mr.Autthaporn Pradidpong on Unsplash}

Yes, most of the photos that will end up on your couple’s wall will be more traditional wedding poses.

But that doesn’t mean you shouldn’t try and get some photos from different angles. Get above the couple; get below the couple. Capture candid moments. The collection of images you create will weave a story of the day, and having different types of images will make that story more special.

The chances are they will love at least one non-traditional print, and that’s worth all the effort!

Give the Couple High-Quality Prints

how to photograph a wedding alone 2

^{photo by Kostyazar via iStock}

Once the big day is over, and once you’ll never need to Google “wedding photography tips for beginners” ever again, you still need to deliver quality photos for your couple.

And, no matter how incredible your editing capabilities are, it’s always more impressive to show up with a high-quality gorgeous print of their favorite photos.

This type of wow factor photo delivery method is the type of thing that will get you recommended by that couple in the future.

I always use CanvasHQfor my wedding photography canvas prints because their customer service representatives actually care about the quality of their work (and your work too).

They stopped one of my photos before it went to print because it was slightly off-center, which I’ve never had happen with any other canvas printing company.

They hand build each canvas. They also only use high-quality ink that won’t run or fade in inclement storage conditions. Plus, they nearly always have a deal on their website for up to 30% off their original prices.

And, canvas prints are one of those wedding photography package add-ons that you can charge more for to increase your own profit.

It’s just a smart idea to work with vendors like CanvasHQ that allow you to offer professional products without actually being a professional.

When it’s all said and done, you want your images to last, and canvas will do that for generations! See what your photos look like as a large format canvas print.

Learn More:

We Recommend

What is a Flashgun? (And Other Important Questions)

Written by PT Editor on 01 August 2023.

What is a Flashgun And Other Important Questions

^{Photo by squidmediaro via istock}

There’s an internet meme I saw some time ago: “Show me a photographer who says they always shoot natural light, and I’ll show you someone who doesn’t know how to use a flashgun.”

It’s somewhat funny and a little bit condescending, but it hits on a real-life situation. The situation is that there are a lot of photographers, even advanced, experienced ones, who are a little bit nervous about flashgun photography.

I’m going to list five reasons why no photographer needs to be worried about flashgun photography. I’ll also be listing some flash units you can get from the online platform MPB, my favorite camera store. You can buy, sell, and trade all manner of used photography gear at MPB.

What is a Flashgun?

What is a Flashgun

^{Photo by jgroup via iStock}

A flashgun (AKA: strobe unit, electronic flash, speedlight) is a basic item of photography gear. Many cameras, including your smartphone camera, have a flashgun built-in. It is an accessory that adds a quick burst of color-corrected light to an exposure.

A flashgun puts out a lot of light in that brief moment, which makes them different from a continuous photoflood that stays on all the time. While you may see large studio strobes in a photographer’s workspace, the term flashgun also implies portability.

Flashgun Adds Quality Light

^{Photo by Viniciao Ferreira via iStock}

In my description of what a flashgun is, you’ll notice I said it adds “color-corrected” light. That’s an important bit of information to know. Because a photographer usually doesn’t want just any light, we seek out the right kind of light.

Besides whether light is hard or soft, the color temperature of the light is a major concern. Most electronic flash units use a xenon tube that emits the light with an instantaneously high peak output. In other words, it comes on full blast. That is how photographers are able to use a flashgun at fast enough shutter speeds to avoid ghostly streaks of subject or camera motion.

A xenon tube emits a full spectrum of light in this all-at-once output. So it’s much like natural sunlight. Plus, the flashgun has a specifically formulated tinted lens or cover that helps balance the color temperature of the torrent to a natural-looking light source. Almost any flashgun will have a color temp of 4800K to 5600K.

A Flashgun Can Stop Time

^{Photo by Marc Dufresne via iStock}

One of the photographic side effects of using a flashgun is that the instantaneous outpouring of light is so brief it can be used as a stop motion control. The flash of light can be relatively long, such as about 1/5,000th of a second, and can be as brief as 1/100,000th of a second.

Using that as a basis of exposure means you can capture some interesting stop-motion photos. Some cool experiments can be seen all over the internet, with images of an arrow busting a water balloon or a bullet shattering a light bulb. Your flash is fully capable of stopping some pretty rapid movement, even if you’re not imaging a bumblebee in flight.

Flashgun Exposure is so Easy

^{Photo by SensorSpot via iStock}

Here’s why that meme I referenced earlier has a kernel of truth, flashgun exposure used to be a pain in the butt. Guide numbers based on the flashgun power, ambient lighting, shutter speed to sync with the flash, a lens aperture based on the focusing distance, and the flashgun guide number… yeah, it was a mess.

Here’s a brief view from Joseph J McAllister of how complicated it was for early photographers:

Thanks to some camera makers in the 1970s, though, through the lens (TTL) off the film plane (OTF), light measurement began to be implemented into more and more modern cameras. Minolta created it, Olympus first used it, Canon added focus information to the calculations, and Nikon created a matrix that balanced everything.

What the results are now is that TTL-OTF flash metering coupled with focus info in an overall matrix is standard equipment for digital cameras. Let me tell you, despite all the posturing you may see in some online forums, pros LOVE autofocus and accurate flash metering. I know I do!

It’s all so simple and yet completely sophisticated. A flashgun like the Nikon SB-910 Speedlight can be used as an on-camera flash or be combined with multiple flash units through a controller like the Nikon SU-800 for seamless integration and make up any number of lighting configurations. Similar equipment exists in all the major camera brands and with 3rd party manufacturers as well.

You Can Modify Flashgun Light

^{Photo by gorodenkoff via iStock}

You aren’t limited to only the small window emitting light from the flashgun; there are many ways to modify the light, such as softboxes, umbrellas, and diffusers. Another way to modify light is to bounce the flash off of a wall or ceiling.

For example, a flashgun such as the Canon Speedlite 580EX-II has a flash head that tilts up and also swivels. You can aim the flashgun at a nearby wall or ceiling while keeping the flash on the camera, all the while relying on automation to keep flashgun photography exposures balanced out.

Flashgun Photography Puts You in Control

^{Photo by caiaimage via iStock}

Since flashgun photography is both simple and sophisticated, you can be in complete control of your exposures and thus be free to adjust compositions and other creative ideas. Since you arene[t limited to only using the light that’s available in the scene, you can pretty much do almost anything you want.

Flashgun photography is one of the major tools that any photographer can take advantage of. Don’t buy into that meme; take control and create the images that you desire.

Where to Find the Best Flashgun

^{Photo by Deagreez via iStock}

As with anything photographic, cameras, lenses, and other accessories, buying a flashgun is somewhat of an investment. This is why I love shopping for recent models of flashguns at the online platform MPB, specialists in used photography gear.

I like MPB because I can also sell or trade in equipment I no longer need for even more savings than the used equipment savings I enjoy. MPB makes it all so easy to do, as easy as using a high-quality camera flashgun!

Learn More:

We Recommend

What is Documentary Photography?

Written by PT Editor on 24 September 2021.

What is Documentary Photography

^{photo byCecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

What is documentary photography? How is documentary photography defined? What makes it different from street photography? What is the purpose of documentary photography? Is it photojournalism?

These are just a few questions that people often ask about documentary photography.

In this guide, we’ll discuss precisely what documentary photography is.

Photojournalism and Street Photography

documentary photography vs photojournalism

^{photo byViewApart via iStock}

Documentary photography can be photojournalism, such as coverage of significant events, but it can also be a chronicle of places or situations.

It can be loosely defined as photography that records events or environments (places and situations) that have social or historical relevance. What can sometimes make it different from photojournalism is that a documentary photographer can introduce ideas by means of the art and crafting of the images while pure photojournalism should not introduce any bias.

Examples of documentary photography can include taking photos at a political rally, capturing street scenes during the holidays, and cataloging a cache of Civil War memorabilia in a collector’s attic. The features of documentary photography can be quite varied.

The key thought is that a document, in this case photos, is being made of a person, place, thing, event, or continuing situation. Therefore, it can include pure photojournalism but can also be artistic street photography. Really, even some styles of architectural photography can fit within these loose definitions.

The Real World (...As I See It)

documentary photography explained

^{photo byparesh3d via iStock}

In the real world, we try to define photojournalism as being pure news without any bias, but the mere act of documenting an event can be considered an introduction of some sort of bias when looked at objectively.

That’s part of the reason why you will usually need a degree in order to be employed as a photojournalist. You could freelance as a photojournalist, but then you run into the thought of perhaps being seen as an activist with a camera.

Labeling it as documentary photography side steps that set of issues altogether. If you’re interested in hard core photojournalism, you might test the waters by signing up for some free online courses such as what can be found on Udemy, SkillShare, or LinkedIn Learning.

So, moving on from photojournalism, we can engage in documentary photography as a form of storytelling with pictures. While based on the real world, we can try to interpret it as we wish by how we involve the art and craft of photography in our images.

Learn More:

Create a Project

documentary photography

^{photo byWarchi via iStock}

Here is a self assignment that can help us define for ourselves what is documentary photography and should also be enjoyable. Find a subject that interests you, then document it and show it to others.

There is so much room for variation of ideas and methods in this type of self assignment. To begin, what interests you? Next, how will you document it? Finally, what method of displaying to others will you use?

All kinds of examples of documentary photography may come to mind, which is good, it’s part of the exercise. One that can be done with little involvement from other people is documenting the styles of architecture in your city or town.

In a big city, a small town, or any size in between, there will be public buildings that have some sort of official use and they just look like an important place. Other buildings might be meant to be relatively nondescript or give a hint as to their purpose.

City Hall, a school, an old gas station, an ethnic cuisine restaurant, an old storefront, an abandoned Photo Hut kiosk if any still exist around you, can be photographed. Be careful and respectful of properties and their owners, plus follow any local regulations and never trespass.

You could document the differences among all the types of architecture, the ages of the buildings in relation to each other, or how they fit within the neighborhoods.

guide on documentary photography

^{photo byalptraum via iStock}

To show to others, a series of matted Black and Prints could be displayed in your office or at your home. Crafts fairs and flea markets are great venues, too. You could have a coffee table photo book made. You could also display them on a website such as Flickr or Behance, build your own domain, or create a social media page on Instagram or Tumblr.

Any way you decide to tackle those three ideas of what subject, how to take the images, and how to show them, you will learn a lot about the question of what is documentary photography. You will also have a lot of fun doing it.

Learn More:

We Recommend

What is Lifestyle Newborn Photography? 4 Tips for Getting Started

Written by PT Editor on 20 September 2023.

What is Lifestyle Newborn Photography 4 Tips for Getting Started

^{Photo by waraphorn-aphai via iStock}

Newborn photography is a popular form of portraiture that focuses on capturing an infant in their first few weeks of life. It's a beautiful art form, and sessions result in treasured heirloom photographs.

Lifestyle newborn photography moves beyond the delivery room documentation or posing table portraits and shows the infant moving out into the big wide world. Similar to lifestyle portraits for older kids or adults, newborn lifestyle photography incorporates elements around the home or outside.

Let’s explore a few tips to help you capture the beauty of this stage of life!

Lifestyle Newborn Photography in Natural Light
Go Outside for Lifestyle Newborn Photography
Include Family in Lifestyle Newborn Photography
Handheld Camera Frees Up Framing and Posing
Lifestyle Newborn Photography - Embrace the Fidgeting
Provide High-Quality Prints of the Images
Recommended Photography Gear

Lifestyle Newborn Photography in Natural Light

^{Photo by monkeybusinessimages via iStock}

Newborn lifestyle photography is a little different from the more traditional or formal portraits we may be used to. One of the things that makes lifestyle newborn photography special is that it puts the viewer into the image, making them feel a part of it.

Natural lighting for lifestyle newborn photography is a good way to make the viewer feel as though they are right there with the image. Within the parameters of natural lighting, we can still adjust or control certain aspects of lighting.

For instance, a collapsible 5-in-1 or 6-in-1 reflector can be used to great advantage. Not only can we redirect some of the light to create a lighting ratio or a fill light, but we can also change the color balance of that light by using either the warmer or cooler panels of the reflector kit. A gold panel warms things up, while a silver panel cools it down, white being mostly neutral.

Go Outside for Lifestyle Newborn Photography

^{Photo by PavelPV via iStock}

Outdoor newborn lifestyle photography is the epitome of a natural look for this style of photography. The natural element is conducive to imparting feelings of unity, growth, togetherness, and the wonders of life.

We do need to exhibit care for outdoor newborn lifestyle photography. Extremes of heat or cold would not be a good idea, nor would windy weather or any precipitation. So, we can look for some alternatives to suggest the outdoors in our newborn lifestyle photography, such as an enclosed porch or perhaps a sunroom. An indoor botanical garden might work as well.

Include Family in Lifestyle Newborn Photography

Indoors or outdoors, including family in the lifestyle newborn photography adds to the overall feel of togetherness we’re trying to capture and convey with our portrait sessions.

The newborn child exists within an established framework of family and friends. Remember, too, some friends are actually closer to some people than relatives may be, so it might be worthwhile to check that out during the pre-session discussions.

Mom and Dad are obvious choices of who to include in the photos, but older siblings can be included if there are any. Some of the best moments come from that sibling reaction to their new baby brother or sister. Grandparents, aunts and uncles, cousins, best friends, and any of these relationships are proper subjects to include.

Handheld Camera Frees Up Framing and Posing

^{Photo by Fly View Productions via iStock}

In many portrait photography, lighting configurations and camera placement are static. They stay in one place with light stands, tripods, camera mounts, etc. For lifestyle newborn photography, freeing up the photographer’s movement by using the camera handheld is often better.

Handheld is a valid method for a lot of lifestyle portraiture. It especially comes in handy for any time we’re dealing with children as our subject matter. Of course, we will want a high enough ISO or fast enough lens aperture to provide usable shutter speeds.

Check out some of our low light tutorials for photographers' techniques and methods for hand-holding the camera without camera shake. Newer cameras, especially mirrorless models, have amazing image stabilization, so take advantage of that as well.

Lifestyle Newborn Photography - Embrace the Fidgeting

Lifestyle Newborn Photography Embrace the Fidgeting

^{Photo by ilona titova via iStock}

Since we’re keyed in on being able to use natural or portable lighting and using our camera handheld, we’re set up better to be able to capture those fleeting moments that come and go so rapidly with lifestyle newborn photography.

You might as well embrace the fidgeting, which can be any movement, not only an uncomfortable or crying child. Being adjustable ourselves is vital for any style of child portrait photography. Just be kind, be reasonable, and acquiesce to the parent’s or guardian’s wishes.

Provide High-Quality Prints of the Images

Provide High Quality Prints of the Images

Once we’ve captured all those wonderful images in our lifestyle newborn photography session, we want to provide our clients with the best possible display methods.

Artbeat Studios has everything you would want in this regard. That perfect picture from the session can be made into an extraordinary, large wall art photo. Canvas prints work exceptionally well for newborn pictures. It has a charm that ties together all those aspects of family togetherness.

Here’s an example of the wonderful reaction you can cause by providing a family with ultra-high-quality photo prints of loved ones. It’s from the Artbeat Studios YouTube channel:

Alternatively, a modern or contemporary look and feel can be provided with high-quality metaland acrylic prints. All three of these printing options will give the family an heirloom piece of photo art commemorating the arrival of that precious newborn child.

The entire process of lifestyle newborn photography, from the pre-birth meeting with the client to the final delivery of a high-quality heirloom photo print, is a joy. Use these tips to make your lifestyle newborn photography images part of that family’s joy.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

What is Lifestyle Portrait Photography?

Written by PT Editor on 10 January 2023.

What is Lifestyle Portrait Photography

^{Photo by puhhha via iStock}

Lifestyle portrait photography is a wonderful way to provide interesting and very personalized images for ourselves, our friends and family, and our clients. Lifestyle portrait photography can be done with simple techniques and basic equipment.

The methods and techniques used for lifestyle portrait photography include lighting configurations, lens choices, exposure and focus techniques, and both advanced and basic post-processing workflows. Let’s dive in!

What Is Lifestyle Portrait Photography?

Lifestyle Portrait Photography

^{Photo by Cecilie_Arcurs via iStock}

When we say lifestyle portrait photography, what does that mean? In most classic portrait photography, we primarily focus on posing and composition for a head and shoulders image, maybe a little closer or a little wider than that, and isolating the subject from the background.

In lifestyle portrait photography, we are concerned with telling a story or providing a visual description of the subject. This could include background and foreground elements, using deeper depth of field focus techniques, and perhaps lighting for mood. Post-processing ideas may consist of bracket and merge exposure and decreasing or increasing contrast levels.

The general idea behind lifestyle portrait photography is proving clues about who the person is, not merely what they look like. Is the person a dog lover? What could show that? Are they an artist? Do they come from a large family? What are their passions? A lifestyle portrait, also sometimes called an environmental portrait, can give a viewer a clear picture of the answers to these questions and many more.

Lifestyle Portrait Photography Gear Choices

OctoPad Camera Mount

Since lifestyle portrait photography often shows more of a view than a fairly tightly cropped pose, lenses of wider focal lengths than the standard portrait lens short telephoto are an obvious choice, from normal for the format to wide angle.

Ultra-fast lens apertures aren’t as important for lifestyle portraits because of usually stopping down the lens a bit for deeper depth of focus. A high-quality zoom lens is helpful for an active shooting style, something in the normal range for kit lenses, but perhaps a replacement for the kit lens with better performance, wider apertures, and a more rugged build.

Lighting configurations and longer than handheld shutter speed times may necessitate camera and light supports such as tripods, stands, or alternative mounts. Among the most useful tripod alternatives that can hold either a light or a camera is the OctoPad Camera Mount.

OctoPad Camera Mount 2

OctoPad may be the best item in our gear kit for lifestyle portrait photography outside our favorite camera and the right lens. It’s a weighted disk made of heavy-duty material with a ball head on top and a non-slip pad on the bottom. It can hold a portable LED light, flash unit, or camera.

They can sit on virtually any type of surface, even if the surface is angled up to 45 degrees. Our lifestyle portrait photography session often happens on location instead of in a controlled studio environment, so placement versatility is a huge boon. Using three Octopads, one with our camera and two with portable LED lights, is a great traveling setup for lifestyle portrait photography.

Learn More:

Photography Settings for Lifestyle Portraits

^{Photo by JGalione via iStock}

What kind of camera, lens, and flash or lighting settings should we use for lifestyle portrait photography? Obviously, there will be a lot of variables involved here, but we can provide some basic guidance.

Lens choice will depend on the distance to the subject and how much besides the person you want in the image. Generally, we move away from the standard short telephoto “portrait lens” in favor of wider optics. A normal lens for our format or a moderate wide-angle works well in many instances.

For Full Frame format, lenses like the Nifty Fifty, a 35mm semi-wide lens, or a 24 or 28mm wide angle lens. A high-quality zoom lens that covers those focal lengths is valuable and versatile. I don’t like recommending the kit lens zooms for this, even if they cover those focal lengths, primarily because the maximum aperture is so slow, especially at the telephoto end of their range. But a normal range zoom lens such as a 24-85mm or 28-105mm works well.

Moderate lens apertures produce a fair amount of depth of field at medium distances. Even though we’re stopping down the lens a bit, having a decently wide aperture assists us in focus determination and gives us more options, such as getting a selective focus head and shoulders portrait along with the lifestyle portrait we’re working on.

So, a medium distance also fits in because we are attempting to capture more in the image than just the person. Without lights, a moderate aperture in a setting for a lifestyle portrait will likely result in a slower shutter speed, so that camera mount comes in handy.

If we try any bracket and merge HDR photography, we also need a solid spot for our camera to eliminate movement. If we opt for HDR imaging or longer exposures, we need to communicate to our lifestyle portrait photography subjects the need to stay still during the exposures.

Lighting Configurations for Lifestyle Portrait Photography

^{Photo by katleho Seisa via iStock}

We may be on site for our lifestyle portrait photography sessions, so it may seem that setting up a lighting configuration might be difficult. Still, with portable LED lights, battery-powered camera flash units, portable camera mounts, and light stands, we can light up things as easily as we can in a controlled environment like our own studio.

Many of the same lighting configurations and lighting ratios used in regular portrait photography will work just as well in many lifestyle portrait photography situations. Using two lights in a 3:1 lighting ratio works the same as in a standard portrait. Experiment with various power settings and how many lights or flash units to use. What out for reflections from items in the image view, unless you want them, of course.

Lifestyle Portrait Post-Processing

Lifestyle Portrait Post Processing

^{Photo by bernardbodo via iStock}

Post-processing for lifestyle portrait photography is how you can correct for different light color temperatures, opening up or blocking up shadows and highlights, perspective correction, and any bracket and merge HDR photography.

As with all serious photography, post-processing is best used when “tweaking” a great image into a superb one as opposed to attempting to “save” a substandard image file. Enhancement and slight corrections lead to a very natural final image.

That’s most likely what we expect when engaging in lifestyle portrait photography, a natural image, comfortable people, and a little story being told about the subject by what we have captured.

Recommended Photography Gear

Learn More:

We Recommend

What is the Best Nikon Portrait Lens?

Written by PT Editor on 11 March 2022.

What is the Best Nikon Portrait Lens

^{photo byLyndon Stratford via iStock}

Portrait photography is one of the most popular types of photography in the world today. Unfortunately, not all lenses deliver the same results when shooting portraits.

That’s why I created this guide covering the best Nikon portrait lenses. To help you learn what options are out there, what to look for in a portrait lens, and what option is ultimately best for you!

The three most important factors to consider in a Nikon portrait lens are focal length, maximum aperture, and image quality. Outside of that, you will also want to look at the build quality, autofocus capabilities, and lens mount.

In this article, I focus primarily on Z-mount lenses for Nikon’s lineup of mirrorless cameras, but the list of additional lenses at the end also includes some DSLR lenses. With all that said, let’s check out the top Nikon portrait lenses!

Good Nikon Portrait Lens - Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm f/2.8 S
Better Nikon Portrait Lens - Nikon Nikkor Z 50mm f/1.8 S
Best Nikon Portrait Lens - Nikon Nikkor Z 85mm f/1.8 S
More Amazing Nikon Portrait Lenses

Good Nikon Portrait Lens

Nikon Nikkor Z 24 70mm f2.8

If you want the versatility provided by a standard zoom lens, the Nikon Nikkor Z 24-70mm f/2.8 S is the best Nikon portrait lens. It gives you the ability to shoot a wide variety of portraits without ever needing to switch the lens.

At the wide end of 24mm, it’s ideal for family portraits, group shots, or portraits in nature where you want to include the background. On the other end of the spectrum, you have 70mm, which will allow you to crop in tight on your subjects and show off specific details.

Another standout feature of this Nikon portrait lens is the constant f/2.8 maximum aperture. It creates an astounding bokeh effect, especially when zoomed in and using longer focal lengths. The only downside of the constant aperture is that it contributes towards making this lens far and away the most expensive one we’ll talk about today.

Nikon Nikkor Z 24 70mm f2.8 2

Other key specs of this lens include fast and quiet autofocus courtesy of Nikon’s Stepping Motor System (STM), a recent firmware update to Nikon’s mirrorless cameras that makes autofocus run more smoothly, and a weather-sealed build.

For those who don’t want to worry about carrying multiple prime lenses, this is without a doubt my number one recommended Nikon portrait lens. If you want even more versatility, consider pairing it with its brother and sister lenses, the Nikon NIKKOR Z 14-24mm f/2.8 S and the Nikon NIKKOR Z 70-200mm f/2.8 S.

Better Nikon Portrait Lens

Nikon Nikkor Z 50mm f1.8 S

If you are new to the world of prime lenses, the Nikon Nikkor Z 50mm f/1.8 S is a fantastic choice. Thanks to the lightweight, compact design and a relatively inexpensive price tag, it’s the go-to Nikon portrait lens for many photographers.

The first thing that stands out about this lens is its impeccable sharpness. The Z-mount system does a terrific job of evenly distributing the light, and when paired with this lens, you can create images that are stunningly sharp from edge to edge.

Nikon Nikkor Z 50mm f1.8 S 2

Furthermore, thanks to two extra-low dispersion elements (ED), two aspherical lens elements (AS), and a nano crystal coating, virtually all ghosting, chromatic aberrations, and flares are eliminated. Personally, I have never run into any of these issues when shooting with this lens.

With nine aperture blades and a maximum aperture of f/1.8, the 50mm lens works great in low light, even when shooting handheld shots. When paired with one of Nikon’s powerful Z-mount cameras that has 5-axis vibration reduction, you will see even better results. Additionally, the f/1.8 aperture creates dreamy bokeh when shooting portraits.

If all that wasn’t enough, this lens has lightning-fast autofocus, a customizable control ring, a minimum focus distance of 1.32 feet, and is perfect for video. Video shooters who work with a gimbal will especially enjoy this Nikon portrait lens. Other people who will benefit from it are travel photographers, street photographers, and food photographers.

Learn More:

Best Nikon Portrait Lens

Nikon Nikkor Z 85mm f1.8 S

Without further ado, the best portrait lens for Nikon is the Nikon Nikkor Z 85mm f/1.8 S. It is in the same lineup of lenses as the 50mm, but instead offers portrait photographers their favorite 85mm focal length. If you are a serious photographer or professional, you will fall in love with this state-of-the-art lens the moment you get your hands on it.

At 85mm, this Nikon portrait lens is ideal for tight shots like close-ups and headshots. When working with those shots, your number one priority should be sharpness, and fortunately, that is the biggest strength of this lens. It constantly delivers incredibly sharp photos corner-to-corner and never adds unnecessary distortion.

Nikon Nikkor Z 85mm f1.8 S 2

Moreover, the autofocus is excellent. It uses two synchronized motors that work together to ensure crystal clear results. If you prefer to focus manually, you will be blown away by the customizable focus ring. It’s easy to use, easy to grip, and makes pinpoint adjustments. Yet, the coolest thing about it is that it can be changed to control other settings, like aperture and exposure.

A few other key features of this mind-blowing Nikon portrait lens are a well-placed focus mode switch, an f/1.8 maximum aperture, edge-to-edge brightness that limits vignetting, solid video specs, a weather-sealed body, and a minimum focus distance of 2.62 feet. Besides portraits, this lens also excels in fashion, product, and macro-photography.

>More Amazing Nikon Portrait Lenses

best portrait lens for Nikon

^{photo byjacoblund via iStock}

Those are hands down my favorite Nikon portrait lenses on the market today. However, if none of them fit your needs, there are plenty of other capable lenses, including some terrific third-party options. Check out below my list of the best of the rest!

Learn More:

We Recommend

Why Do People Do Nude Photography?

Written by PT Editor on 13 May 2020.

Why Do People Do Nude Photography

^{Photo by Alexander Krivitskiy on Unsplash}

Nude photography is controversial. After all, there are powerful photographers who abuse models under the guise of “nude photography.” Why would anyone want to put themselves through that?

Plus, is there really a difference between nude photography and porn?

Despite the fact that nude photography is a hot-button topic, I would argue it is a true art form and very different from the stuff you see in “adult films.”

Here are the top three reasons why people do nude photography, and if you think you may be interested in trying this photography niche, make sure to check out our complete nude photography guide for in-depth tips.

To Convey Deep Human Emotions

nude photography 2

^{photo bysimonapilolla via iStock}

Nude photography is about more than the nude human form. It’s about intimacy. It’s about emotion.

When you take a model’s clothing away, you take away any pretensions about who that person is or who that person wants to be. The only thing that is left is their body. You can also view another post about nude male photography.

Nude photography is especially challenging because of this. If your model isn’t practiced, it can be hard to draw these deeper emotions out of them, which is great practice for other forms of photography.

If your model is practiced, though, you can do just one shoot that covers a range of feelings that deeply resonate with your audience.

To Rebel Against Society’s Standards

Nude photography began as a way for photographers to rebel against the society they were living in. It began in the 1800s, but really took off in the early 1900s when photographers (who often posed for their own photographs) were sick of living in a society where they were given strict instructions about how they should live.

By throwing all ideas of modesty away, these photographers were obviously rebelling against explicit societal norms, but they were also able to comment on implicit norms, or standards nobody really talked about.

Sure, they were posing naked which was seen as immoral, but they were also making statements about religion and questioning what morality really meant if the basis of morality is hiding your true self.

Since this time, nude photography has obviously evolved, as has society. But, the root of this type of photography remains quite the same.

I wrote about a “Bonnie and Clyde” photographer and model duo who were arrested outside of the Vatican last year for posing nude. The two were trying to make a statement about the abuse that has been uncovered inside of the Catholic Church.

For me, this is one of the truest forms of rebellion.

To Reclaim the Female Body

pose nude 4

photo by Staras via iStock

Another reason why people participate in nude photography is that they are trying to reclaim the female body. The “male gaze” has long afflicted women in many industries, including photography. When men are the only ones taking photographs, women are portrayed as men want them to be.

By getting rid of specific clothing, hair and makeup to pose nude, women are exploring how they want to be seen. Fine art nude photography is more about expressing emotions.

Instead of covering up stretch marks or shaving their body hair, women are using nude photography to argue that they, too, are imperfect, and that it’s okay.